GSK928TD Lathe CNC System User Manual

Safety and Precautions
Declaration!
z We try to describe all the various matters as much as possible in this
manual. However, it is impossible to give detailed descriptions to all
the unnecessary or unallowable operations because there are too
many possibilities. Therefore, the matters not specially described
herein should be considered as impossible or unallowable.
Warning
z Before installing, connecting, programming and operating the product,
please read this manual and the manual provided by the machine tool
builder carefully, and operate the product according to these manuals.
Otherwise, the operation may cause damage to the product and
machine tool, or even cause personal injury.
Caution
z The functions and specifications (e.g., precision and speed) described
in this manual are only for this product itself. For those CNC machine
tools with this product installed, the actual function configuration and
specifications depend on the designs of the machine tool builders.
Moreover, the function configuration and specifications of the CNC
machine tool are subject to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder.
z Please refer to the user manual issued by the machine tool builder for
the function and meaning of each key on the panel.
All specifications and designs in this manual are subject to change without notice.
III
1)
Inspection and acceptance
Caution
2)
Precautions
It is not allowed to use damaged or defective products.
Transport and storage
Note
Guard the products against moisture during transit and storage;

do not climb up or stand on the packages of the products, or
place heavy objects on the packages; do not pile up the
packages more than 5 layers; avoid impact and scratch to the
front panel and LCD screen.
3Installation
Caution
Protect the system from sunlight and raindrops
because the
shell of the system is not waterproof.

Note
z
Prevent dust, corrosive air, liquid, conductors and inflammable

substances from entering the system.
Keep the system away from inflammable and explosive

substances.
Avoid
places
where
there
is
powerful
electromagnetic interference.
z
Install the system firmly in case of vibration.
4Connection
Warning
Only qualified persons can connect the system or check the

connection. No damage should be caused to the connecting
wires. Do not press or open the cover of the system with power
on.
V
GSK928TD Turning CNC System User Manual
Caution
The voltage and the polarity of connecting plugs must

accord with the manual.
Wet hands are dangerous to grasp the plug or the switch.
Note
The connection must be proper and firm.

The system must be earthed.
5Debugging
Warning
Make sure that the parameters of the system are correct

before running.
No parameter should be beyond the setting limit in the
manual.
6Operation
Warning
Only qualified operators can operate the system.

Ensure the switch is OFF before connecting the power supply.
Warning
The operator can not leave the system to work alone.

Make sure the connection is correct before Power On.
The emergency stop button should be able to cut off all power
supplies when the system breaks down. Do not switch on/off
the system frequently.
Warning
Prevent the system from environmental interference.
7Troubleshooting
Caution
Unqualified persons cannot repair the system.
Warning
After an alarm occurs, do not restart the system until the

breakdown is fixed.
VI
1)
Safety and precautions for programming
Coordinate system
Incorrect coordinate system may cause the machine not to work as expected
even if the instruction is correct, which may injure the operator, and damage the
machine as well as its tool and workpiece.
2)
G00 rapid traverse

G00 rapid traverse performs nonlinear motion between its starting point and
end point. Make sure that the path for the tool is safe before G00 rapid traverse
starts, otherwise the tool, the machine and the workpiece may be damaged, and
even the operator injured.
3)
Use of this manual

This manual introduces in details all functions of the system, including optional
functions and max. controllable ranges, which are subject to change with the
machine. Therefore, some functions described in this manual may not be
applicable to a specific machine tool. If there is any doubt, please read the
instruction for the machine.
4) Functions of the CNC and machine tool
The functions of CNC machines not only depend on CNC systems, but also
power voltage cabinets, servo systems, CNC and the operator panels. It is hard to
explain all the integrated functions, programming and operation. Do not use
integrated instructions not included in the manual until they have been tested
successfully.
VII
Precautions and warnings for operation
1 Before machining a part

First check whether the machine tool works normally. Make sure that the
machine tool works normally by means of trial run before machining, with no
workpiece and tool mounted on the machine tool.
2 Before operating the machine tool
Check the input data of the system carefully before operating the machine.
Incorrect input data may cause the machine to work improperly, and thus damage
the workpiece and the tool, as well injure the operator.
3)
Make sure the system input feedrate is suitable for the expected operation.
In general, there is a maximum feedrate for each machine tool. The proper
feedrate varies with different operations. Please refer to the user manual to
determine the maximum feedrate. If the user doest not operate the machine tool at
a proper speed, the machine tool may work incorrectly, thus causing damage to
the workpiece or the machine tool itself, or even cause personal injury.
4 Compensation function
When tool compensation is needed, check the direction and the amount of the
compensation. Improper compensation causes the machine to work wrongly, so
as to damage the workpiece and the tool, as well injure the operator.
5 Manual operation
If the machine is to run in Manual Mode, check the current position of the tool
and the workpiece, and correctly specify the moving axis, moving direction and the
feedrate. During MPG feed, rotating the MPG (previously called electronic
handwheel) with a large override, such as 100%, causes the tool and worktable to
move rapidly. In such a case, the tool and worktable will not stop immediately even
when the MPG is not rotated. Therefore, MPG movement with a large override may
cause damage to the tool or machine, or even injury to the operator.
6 Manual reference point return

VIII

If manual reference point return is required, make sure that the machine has
been equipped with the detecting element for the reference point. If the manual
reference point return is performed without installing the detecting element, the tool
keeps moving until it hits the stroke limit, which may cause damage to the machine,
workpiece and tool, or even injury to the operator.
IX
Safety responsibility
Manufacturer Responsibility
Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated on the design
and configuration of the provided CNC systems
Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC and its accessories
Be responsible for the provided information and advice
User Responsibility
Be trained with the safety operation of CNC system operation
procedures and familiar with the safety operation.
Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding, changing or
modifying the original CNC systems and accessories.
Be responsible for the danger caused by failing to observe the
operation, maintenance, installation and storage in the manual.
This user manual shall be kept by the end user.
Thank you for your support when you are using the products
of Guangzhou CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
Contents
OPERATION
introduces the operation methods, technical specifications and

parameter setting for GSK928TD turning machine CNC system.
PROGRAMMING
introduces the instruction codes and program formats of the CNC

system.
Connection
introduces the installation and connection of the CNC system.
Appendix
introduces the supplementary explanations for the installation and

connection of the CNC system.
XI
Contents
CONTENTS
OPERATION 3
CHAPTER ONE
OVERVIEW3
CHAPTER TWO
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 5
2.1 928TD Technical Specifications 5
CHAPTER THREE
OPERATION PANEL 7
3.1 LCD 7
3.2 LED Status Indicator 7
3.3 Keyboard 7
3.3.1 Character Key 7
3.3.2 Operation Mode Select Key 8
3.3.3 Function Key 8
3.3.4 Cycle Start Key and Cycle Pause Key (Feed Hold key) 9
3.3.5 Manual Axis Control Key 9
3.3.6 Manual Auxiliary Function Key 10
3.3.7 Edit Key 11
3.3.8 Reset Key 12
CHAPTER FOUR
SYSTEM OPERATION 13
4.1 System Power-on, Power-off, Initial State, Modal State, and Safety Protection 13
4.1.1 Power On 13
4.1.2 Power Off 14
4.1.3 Initial State and Modal State of System and Program 14
4.1.3.1 Initial State and Modal State of System 14
4.1.3.2 Initial State and Modal State of Program 15
4.1.4 Safety Protection 15
4.1.4.1 Hard Limit Protection 15
4.1.4.2 Soft Limit Protection 16
4.1.4.3 Emergency Stop Alarm (Stopping System Emergently) 17
4.1.4.4 Drive Unit Alarm 19
4.1.4.5 Other Alarms 19
4.1.4.6 Power Off 20
4.1.4.7 Reset Operation 20
4.2 Operation Mode Selection for CNC System 21
4.3 Edit Operation Mode 21
4.3.1 Part Program Directory Search 22
4.3.2 Selecting, Creating, Deleting, Renaming and Copying a Part Program 23
4.3.2.1 Selecting and Creating a Part Program 23
4.3.2.2 Deleting a Part Program 24
4.3.2.3 Deleting All Part Programs 24
4.3.2.4 Renaming a Part Program 24
4.3.2.5 Copying a Part Program 25
4.3.3 Part Program Communication 25
4.3.3.1 Sending Part Program (CNCPC, CNCUSB, CNCCNC) 25
4.3.3.2 Receiving Part Programs (PCCNC, USBCNC, CNCCNC) 26
4.3.3.3 Standard Format of TXT Part Program on PC 27
4.3.4 Inputting and Editing the Contents of Part Program 28
4.3.4.1 Inputting Program Contents 31
4.3.4.2 Inserting a Block 32
4.3.4.3 Deleting a Block 32
4.3.4.4 Inserting a Character in a Block 33
4.3.4.5 Deleting a Character in a Block 33
4.3.4.6 Altering Contents of a Block 33
4.3.4.7 Inserting a Macro String 34
4.3.4.8 Storage Capacity for Programs 34
4.3.4.9 Operating No. 253 Program 34
4.3.4.10 Operating No. 254 program 35
XIII

4.3.5 Function of hp5 Key35
4.3.5.1 Help for Part Program Command35
4.3.5.2 Help for Obtaining Relative Parameters of Arc 36
4.3.5.3 Rearrangement of Program Line Numbers 37
4.3.5.4 Replacement of Strings 37
4.3.5.5 Cursor Position 37
4.3.5.6 Cursor Movement by MPG37
4.3.6 Compiling a Part Program 38
4.3.6.1 hp3 Compiling Command38
4.3.6.2 Result Analysis of Program Compilation 38
4.3.6.3 Prompts of Program Compound Check39
4.4 JOG Operation Mode 40
4.4.1 Coordinate Axis Movement42
4.4.1.1 JOG movement 42
4.4.1.2 Step Movement42
4.4.1.3 MPG Control Movement 43
4.4.1.4 Selecting Rapid Traverse Rate 44
4.4.1.5 Selecting Speed for Low-speed Feed45
4.4.1.6 Inputting a Word to Move, Setting Feedrate 45
4.4.1.7 Drive Unit Enabling Control47
4.4.1.8 Alarm Prompts for Coordinate Axis Movement 47
4.4.2 Establishing a Coordinate System48
4.4.2.1 Establishing Machine Coordinate SystemMachine Zero Return (Machine Reference
Point Return) 48
4.4.2.2 Establishing Machine Coordinate System without Machine Zero (No Machine
Reference Point) 50
4.4.2.3 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System 50
4.4.2.4 Setting Program Reference Point52
4.4.2.5 Program Reference Point Return 52
4.4.2.6 Recovering Workpiece Coordinate System and Program Reference Point 53
4.4.3 Spindle Control Function53
4.4.3.1 Spindle Start/Stop Control 53
4.4.3.2 Spindle S Command Gear Shift Control55
4.4.3.3 Spindle S Command Rotating Speed Control 56
4.4.4 Coolant Control59
4.4.5 Manual Tool Change Control59
4.4.6 Manual Tool Change 61
4.4.7 Hydraulic Chuck Control Function 65
4.4.8 Hydraulic Tailstock Control Function 67
4.4.9 Other Option Functions69
4.4.9.1 Triple-color Indicator Control69
4.4.9.2 Lubricant Control 70
4.4.9.3 Machine Electricity Delay Power-on Control 70
4.4.9.4 Safety Door Detection Function 70
4.4.9.5 Low-pressure Detection Function71
4.4.10 Viewing Operation Information in Manual Mode 71
4.4.11 Appendix Table71
4.4.11.1 List of M function Commands Controlled by MDI Input71
4.5 Auto Operation Mode 73
4.5.1 System Working States in Auto Operation Mode 74
4.5.2 Explanations for Function Key Operation in Auto Operation Mode 74
4.5.2.1 Switching between Single and Continuous Operation 74
4.5.2.2 Switching bewteen Dry Run and Machining Run 75
4.5.2.3 Switching between Coordinate Display and Graph Display 76
4.5.2.4 Starting Execution from First Block of Program 76
4.5.2.5 Starting Execution from a Specified Block76
4.5.3 Display during Program Execution 77
4.5.3.1 Definition of Graph Display Data 77
4.5.3.2 Inputting Graph Display Data78
4.5.3.3 Part Count and Timing 79
4.5.4 Manual Operation for Machine Auxiliary Functions 80
4.5.5 Speed Override Adjustment in Auto Operation Mode80
4.5.5.1 Speed Override Adjustment 80
XIV
Contents
4.5.5.2 MPG Speed Control 81
4.5.6 Interruption Operation during Program Execution 82
4.5.6.1 Interruption with Keys during Program Execution 82
4.5.6.2 External feed/Spindle hold Knob 83
4.5.6.3 External Start and Pause Signals 84
4.5.6.4 Feeding Device Alarm Function 84
4.5.7 Modifying Tool Offset during Program Execution 84
4.5.7.1 Methods of Modifying Tool Offsets during Program Execution 84
4.5.7.2 Modifying Validity of Tool Offsets during Program Execution 85
4.5.8 Viewing Running Information in AUTO Operation Mode 85
4.5.9 Return to Program Reference Point in AUTO Operation Mode 87
4.5.10 System Reset Key and Emergency Stop Signal Processing in Auto Mode 87
4.5.11 Adjusting Brightness of LCD screen in AUTO, MANUAL Operation Mode 87
4.5.12 Displaying Executing States of M Commands in Auto, Manual Operation Mode 88
4.5.13 Additional Operation in Auto Operation Mode 88
4.6 Parameter Operation Mode 89
4.6.1 Parameter Overview 90
4.6.1.1 Parameter Authority 90
4.6.1.2 Entering an Operation Level 90
4.6.1.3 Parameter Management 90
4.6.2 Modifying Parameters 92
4.6.2.1 Searching Parameters 92
4.6.2.2 Modifying Parameters 92
4.6.3 Parameter hp6 Function 93
4.6.3.1 Parameter Communication and Standard Format 93
4.6.3.2 Parameter Extraction and Solidification 96
4.6.3.3 System Software Upgrade and Internal Memory Update 97
4.6.3.4 Function Command Authority 98
4.6.4 Description of Parameters 98
4.6.4.1 Parameters of Reference Point, Soft Limit __ P000P020 98
4.6.4.2 Parameters of Zero Return Function__ P021P026, P109P111, P406P407 99
4.6.4.3 Parameters of Movement Speed and Acceleration Time __P100P108, P112P119
101
4.6.4.4 Parameters of Drive and Compensation P200P209, P411, P1000P1905 103
4.6.4.5 Parameters of Spindle and Coolant __ P300P317, P326, P329, P341, P410 106
4.6.4.6 Parameters of Tool Post __ P318P325, P408 109
4.6.4.7 Parameters of Chuck and Tailstock __ P327P328, P409 112
4.6.4.8 Bit Parameters of Running and Efficiency__ P400P401 113
4.6.4.9 Relationship between Path and Parameters of Running and Efficiency 115
4.6.4.10 Bit Parameters of Safety and Debugging__ P402P404, P419 116
4.6.4.11 Bit Parameter of Motor Driver__ P405 121
4.6.4.12 Parameters of Other Interfaces__ P412, P330P332 121
4.6.4.13 Other Parameters__ P413P416, P333 123
4.6.4.14 Parameters of Interface __P500P556 126
4.6.4.15 Initial Values of Variables __P600P639 127
4.6.4.16 Parameters of G76 __P336P339 127
4.6.5 Appendix Parameter List 128
4.6.5.1 Reference Parameter List 128
4.6.5.2 Motion Parameter List 129
4.6.5.3 Drive Parameter List 130
4.6.5.4 Auxiliary Parameter List 130
4.6.5.5 Bit Parameter List 131
4.6.5.6 Interface Parameter List 132
4.6.5.7 Variable Initial Value List 133
4.6.5.8 Pitch Error Compensation Parameter List 134
4.6.5.9 List of Parameters Relative to Command Disabling 134
4.6.5.10 List of Parameters Relative to Output Interface Releasing 135
4.6.5.11 List of Parameters Related to Input Interface Releasing 135
4.7 Tool Offset Operation Mode 137
4.7.1 Searching Tool Offset Value 138
4.7.2 Inputting Tool Offset Data from Keyboard 138
XV

4.7.3 Clearing Offset Values of Each Group 139
4.7.4 Tool Compensation hp6 Function 139
4.7.4.1 Communication and Standard Format of Tool Offset Data 140
4.7.4.2 Tool Compensation Data Clearing141
4.8 Diagnosis Operation Mode 142
4.8.1 Searching Interface Signal 142
4.8.2 Explanations for Display of Interface Signals Names143
4.8.3 Explanation of Input Interface Diagnosis 143
4.8.4 Explanation of Output Interface Diagnosis 143
4.8.5 Output Interface Operation Function 144
4.8.6 Spindle Encoder and Spindle Speed Detection144
4.8.7 Diagnosis hp6 Function 144
4.8.7.1 Display of Alarm Record 145
4.8.7.2 Searching Alarm Record146
4.8.7.3 Alarm Record hp6 Function 147
4.8.8 Machine Auxiliary Function Control 148
CHAPTER FIVE
RS232 AND USB SYSTEM COMMUNICATION 149
5.1 RS232 Communication 149

5.1.1 Communication between CNC and PC149
5.1.2 Communication between CNC and CNC150
5.2 USB Communication 150
5.2.1 USB Operation151
5.2.2 USB File Directory Requirements151
PROGRAMMING 155
CHAPTER ONE
PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL 155
1.1 Coordinate Axis and Its Direction 155

1.2 Machine Coordinate System, Machine Zero156
1.3 Program Reference Point 156
1.4 Machine 2nd, 3rd Program Reference Point 156
1.5 Workpiece Coordinate System156
1.6 Programming Coordinate157
1.6.1 Absolute Coordinate Values 157
1.6.2 Relative Coordinate Values 157
1.6.3 Compound Coordinate Values 158
1.7 Diameter Programming and Radius Programming 158
1.8 Interpolation Function158
CHAPTER 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 160
Character 160
Word 160
Block Number161
Block161
Block Skip Symbol and Comment162
Program Structure163
CHAPTER 3
MSTF COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS 164
3.1 M Auxiliary Function (Command List)164

3.1.1 M00 Pause 165
3.1.2 M02 End of Program 165
3.1.3 M20 Program End Cycle Machining165
3.1.4 M30 End of Program, Spindle OFF, Cooling OFF166
3.1.5 M03, M04, M05 Spindle Control166
3.1.6 M08, M09 Coolant Control166
3.1.7 M10M11, M12 Clamping/Releasing Chuck, Cancelling Chuck Output Signal167
3.1.8 M32, M33 Lubricating ON/OFF167
3.1.9 M41, M42, M44, M43 Spindle Automatic Gear Shift Control 167
3.1.10 M78, M79, M80 Tailstock Advancing and Retracting, Tailstock Output Signal Cancelling
168
3.1.11 M96 Calling Cycle Execution168
3.1.12 M97 Program Transfer 169
3.1.13 M98, M99 Subprogram Call and Subprogram Return169
XVI
Contents
3.1.14 M21, M22, M23, M24 User Output Control 171
3.1.15 M91, M92, M93, M94 User Input Control 171
3.1.16 M60~M74 Custom Command 172
3.2 M81, M82, M83User Input/Output Condition Control 172
3.2.1 M82 Output Control and Detection 173
3.2.2 M81Control According to Input Signal State 173
3.2.3 M83Control According to Output Signal State 174
3.3 S function Spindle Function 174
3.3.1 Spindle Motor Controlled by Gear Shift 174
3.3.2 Variable-frequency Motor Controlled by Speed 175
3.4 T Function Tool Function 176
3.4.1 Tool Offset Execution Mode-Moving Slide Carriage 176
3.4.2 Tool Offset Execution Mode- Modifying Coordinates 177
3.5 F Function Feedrate Function 177
CHAPTER FOUR
G COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS 180
4.1 G00 Rapid Positioning G00 180

4.2 G01 Linear Interpolation 182
4.3 G02, G03, G05 Circular Interpolation 183
4.4 Thread Cutting Command 188
4.4.1 G33 Thread Cutting 188
4.5 G32 Tapping Cycle 196
4.6 G50 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System 197
4.7 G51 Recovering Workpiece Coordinate System Setting 198
4.8 G26 X, Z Reference Point Return 199
4.9 G28 Return to Machine Zero (Machine Reference Point) 200
4.10 G30 2nd, 3rd Program Reference Point Return 201
4.11 G04 Timing Delay 201
4.12 G96 Constant Surface Speed Control, G97 Constant Surface Speed Cancel 202
4.13 Single Canned Cycle 205
4.13.1 G90 Outer Cylinder Face Turning Cycle (Axial Cutting Cycle) 205
4.13.2 G92 Thread Cutting Cycle 208
4.13.3 G94 Inner/outer End (Taper) Face Turning Cycle 216
4.13.4 G74 End Face Deep Hole Machining Cycle 219
4.13.5 G75 Grooving Cycle 221
4.14 Compound Cycle 223
4.14.1 G71 Axial Plane Rough and Finish Command Group 223
4.14.2 G72 End Face Roughing/Finishing Command Group 228
4.14.3 G73 Closed-loop Cutting Cycle Command Group 232
4.14.4 G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle 236
4.15 G22, G80 Program Local Cycle 241
4.16 G98 Feed per Minute, G99 Feed per Revolution 243
4.17 G31 Skip Function 244
4.18 G66 -Memorizing Current Coordinates, G67-Return to Memorized Coordinates 246
4.19 Appendix: G function and Its Explanation Table (Table 4-3) 246
4.20 AppendixG and Its Relative Parameter Explanation (Table 4-4) 248
CHAPTER FIVE
GENERAL PROGRAMMING RULES AND EXAMPLES 249
5.1 General Programming Rules 249

5.2 Programming Rules for Commands in One Block 250
5.3 Command Execution Sequence 251
5.4 Programming Example 253
5.4.1 Outer Machining Example 253
5.4.2 Thread Machining Example 254
5.4.3 Compound Machining Example 257
CHAPTER SIX
ALARM MESSAGE261
6.1 Emergency Stop Alarm 261

6.2 Alarm Table in PARAMETER, OFFSET Operation Mode (i.e. E001~E009) 261
6.3 Table of Alarm in Edit Operation Mode(i.e. E100~ E199) 263
6.4 Table of Alarms Relative to Program (i.e.E200~ E299, E600~ E699) 265
6.4.1 Alarm in Program Command (i.e. E200~299) 265
6.4.2 Alarm in Program Comprehensive Check Alarm (E600~E699) 268
6.5 Table of Alarm in JOG or AUTO Operation Mode (i.e. E300~ E499) 270
XVII

6.5.1 Alarm in Executing Relative Operations (i.e. E300~E399) 270
6.5.2 Relative Alarm in Executing Statement (E400~ E499) 274
CHAPTER SEVEN
STATEMENT PROGRAMMING (not for GSK928TD) 276
7.1 Variable 276

7.1.1 Variable Expression Method276
7.1.2 Classification of Variable276
7.1.2.1 Command Variable277
7.1.2.2 Pointer Variable 279
7.1.2.3 Interface Variable 280
7.1.2.4 Keyboard Scan Register r5001281
7.1.2.5 Display Window Register r5002 282
7.1.2.6 Display Value Register r5003285
7.1.2.7 Graph Refresh Register r5004285
7.1.2.8 Program Control Register r5008286
7.1.2.9 System Special Variable Group 1 287
7.1.2.10 System Special Variable Group 2288
7.2 Statement289
7.2.1 Assignment Statement 289
7.2.2 Conditional Statement290
7.2.3 Statement Program Example 290
7.3 Process Monitoring and Execution 292
7.3.1 Process Monitor Description (r7000)292
7.3.2 Process Monitor ON/OFF 293
7.3.3 Monitor Program Example295
7.3.4 Pulse Monitoring (r7100) 297
7.3.5 Pulse Monitoring Programming Example 298
7.3.6 Variable Transfer Register (r7900) 299
7.4 Attached List300
7.4.1 ASCII List300
7.4.2 Corresponding List between Common Colors and Code Values300
CHAPTER EIGHT
CUSTOMIZED COMMAND PROGRAMMING 301
8.1 Customized Command301

8.1.1 Programming Format of Customized Command 301
8.2 Customized Command Library (P254) 301
8.2.1 Programming Format and Debugging of Customized Command Library 302
8.2.2 Use of Customized Command Library 302
8.3. Foot Switch of M61 command303
CONNECTION 307
CHAPTER ONE
1.1
1.2
INTERFACE OVERVIEW 307
Rear Cover Interface Layout 307

Overall Frame308
CHAPTER TWO
INTERFACE TABLE 309
CHAPTER THREE
CNC DEVICE CONNECTION 311
3.1 Communication Interface 311

3.1.1 USB Interface 311
3.2 X1, X2 Interface 311
3.2.1 X1, X2 Interface Signal Definition 311
3.2.2 Connection Method of Input Signal 314
3.2.3 Connection Method of Output Signal 316
3.2.4 Input/Output Signal Specification318
3.3 Machine Zero Return Function and Connection318
3.4 Tool Change Control Function and Connection321
3.4.1 Definition of Tool Change Control Signal 321
3.4.2 Signal Connection 321
3.4.3 Function Description 321
3.4.3.1 Tool Change Mode 0322
XVIII
Contents
3.4.3.5 Tool Change Mode 4 325
3.4.4 Tool Signal Check and Parameter Setting 326
3.4.4.1 Default mode (P408_d7=0) 326
3.4.4.2 Table Checking Mode 327
3.5 X3 Motor Interface 328
3.5.1 Signal Definition 328
3.5.2 Technical Specifications 329
3.5.3 Equivalent Circuit 329
3.5.3.1 Drive Unit Alarm Signal Xalm, Zalm 329
3.5.3.2 Enable Signal Xen, Zen 330
3.5.3.3 Pulse Signal and Direction Signal 330
3.5.4 Connection between CNC System and Drive Unit of Compound Stepper Motor 330
3.5.5 Connection between CNC and Drive Unit of Reaction Stepper Motor 333
3.5.6 Connection between CNC and AC Servo Drive Unit 335
3.5.7 Connection Diagram between CNC and Panasonic Drive Unit 337
3.5.8 Connection Diagram between CNC and Yaskawa Drive Unit 338
3.6 X4 Spindle Interface 339
3.6.1 Signal Definitions 339
3.6.2 Converter Technical Specification 339
3.6.3 Encoder Technical Specifications 340
3.6.4 Connection Diagram of Converter Analog Voltage Interface 340
3.6.5 Encoder Interface Principle 340
3.6.6 Encode Interface Connection Diagram 340
3.7 X5 MPG Interface 341
3.7.1 Signal Definition 341
3.7.2 MPG Interface Principle 341
3.7.3
MPG Interface Connection Diagram 341
CHAPTER FOUR
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
USE AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION 342
Ambient Condition 342

Earthing 342
Power Supply Requirements 342
Protection 342
Use after Long-time Unuse 342
Appendix 1
CNC System Electrical Symbol Explanations 345
Appendix 2
CNC System Tool Post Controller Circuit Method Layout346
Appendix 3
Interface Schematic Circuit347
Appendix 4
External Control Connection Diagram350
Appendix 5
GSK928TD CNC System Appearance Installation Dimension351
Appendix 6
GSK928TD-L CNC System Appearance Installation Dimension 352
Supplementary Explanation353
1.
Modified Functions and Commands353

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.
Newly-added Interface Parameter P538, P539, P540Z/X/Y Move Limit 353

Newly-added Interface Parameter P351 Alarm of Lubrication Check before Machining 353
G76 Command Modification 353
Diagnosis Operation Mode 354
AUTO Operation Mode 354
Newly-added M Command: M50M59, M84354

2.1 Customized Commands Expanded to M50-M74 from M60-M74. 354
2.2 Newly-added Function of Calling M50-M72 before Machining 354
2.3 M84 Input Signal Check within a Specified Time 355
3.
Newly-added G Commands and Functions 355

3.1 G38 Rigid Taping, Threading 355
3.2 G21, G20 Metric, Inch Input 357
3.3 Detailed Explanation of Metric/Inch Switch 358
3.3.1 Metric/Inch Switch Parameter 358
XIX
Chapter One
Overview
OPERATION
OPERATION
GSK928TD Turning CNC System
OPERATION
2
User Manual
Chapter One
Overview
OPERATION
CHAPTER ONE
OVERVIEW
The GSK928TD system employs a 32-bit high performance CPU and a complex
The product, equipped with a true color LCD with resolution of 480234, uses the
international standard NC language, also known as ISO codes, to write part programs.
It is characterized by the full-screen program editing, Chinese/English operation
interface, real-time track and display of the part graph and simple operation as well as
the high cost performance. It can be matched with stepper motors or AC servo drive
units, and by means of programming, it is capable of machining outer cylinders, end
faces, grooves, tapers, circular arcs, threads, etc.
Technical specifications
9 Link axes: 2 (X, Z axes), short linear smooth interpolation at a high speed realizable;
Interpolation precision: 0.001mm, max. rapid traverse: 15m/min
9 Flexible and convenient programming
9 USB interface communication, fast and easy to operate
9 Least command increment: 0.001mm, electronic gear ratio:199999/199999
9 Realizing controls like automatic tool post, spindle automatic gear shift.
9 Backlash compensation, tool length compensation
9 Exponential acceleration/deceleration control, applicable to high-speed and high-precision
machining
9 Tapping function
9 Available to cut inch/metric thread, end face thread, continuous thread; with thread high-speed
run-out
9 Full-screen part program editing, capable of storing 255 programs; a capacity of 4 MB for No.
253 program
9 True color LCD with a large screen, color profiles selected by parameters
9 Real-time tracking and display of MSTF status during processing
9 Multi-level passwords, convenient for equipment management
9 Parameter backup function
9 Communication of parameters and tool compensation data
9 Support for two-way communication between CNC and CNC, and between CNC and PC; CNC
software upgraded through a serial port
9 Support for two-way communication between CNC and USB; CNC software upgraded through
USB
3
OPERATION
as its control center, thus realizing the movement control with a m-level precision.
programmable logic device of very-large-scale programmable array integrated circuits
User Manual
9 Installation dimension, electrical characteristics and part of interfaces compatible with

GSK928TC turning machine NC system
Note
1. Neither the parameters nor the functions of Y axis described in this manual are valid.
2. The interface RS232 of the system has not been led out; to lead it out from the inside of the
system, special tools and professional technician are required.
OPERATION
4
Chapter Two Technical Specification
CHAPTER TWO
2.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
928TD Technical Specifications

Simultaneously controlled axes (interpolation axes): 2 (X, Y axes)
Interpolation function: linear, circular, and thread interpolation of X and Z axes
Position command range: -9999.999 mm9999.999mm; least command increment: 0.001mm
Electronic gear: Command multiplier coefficient 199999, command division coefficient 199999
adjustment
Motion control
Cutting feedrate: Max. 4000mm/min; feedrate override: 16-level real time adjustment from 0150%
(increment 10%)
Manual feedrate: 0mm/min1260mm/min 16-level real time adjustment, or user-defined speed in
real time
MPG feed: Three gears, 0.001mm, 0.01mm, 0.1mm
Acceleration/deceleration: Either exponential or linear acceleration/deceleration can be selected for
cutting feed.
G codes
G codes: G00, G01, G02, G03, G04, G05, (G22/G80), G26, G28, G30, G31, G32, G33, G50, G51,
G66, G67, G71, G72, G73, G74, G75, G76, G90, G92, G94, G96, G97, G98, G99
Capable of machining single /multiple metric/inch straight thread, taper thread and end face thread;
Thread
machining
Thread run-out length, angle and speed characteristics settable, with high-speed run-out processing;
thread pitch: 0.001mm500mm or 0.06 teeth/inch ~ 25400 teeth/inch; taping function available
Spindle encoder: Setting range of encoder lines: 100 p/r5000p/r; drive ratio between encoder and
spindle: 11
Backlash compensation: 0 mm10.000mm
Precision
compensation
Tool compensation: 16 tool numbers, 64 groups of tool length compensations

Tool setting mode: Trial tool setting, fixed point tool setting; Tool compensation execution mode: tool
compensation executed by modifying coordinates, tool compensation executed by moving tool post
M00, M02, M20, M30, M03, M04, M05, M08, M09, M10, M11, M12, M32, M33, M41, M42, M43, M44,
M codes
M78, M79, M80, M81, M82, M83, M96, M97, M98, M99, M91, M92, M93, M94, M21, M22, M23,
M24user defined M codesM60M74
T codes
Up to 16 tool numbers (T01T16), control process of tool change is selected by setting tool
post type parameters; tool post type is set to 0 when using a line-up tool.
Speed switch value control mode: The output range of S command 4-gear direct control is S01
S04; or the output range of the 16-gear BCD code is S00S15.
Spindle speed
Speed analog voltage control mode: S commands specify the spindle speed per minute or cutting
control
linear speed (constant surface speed control); the CNC outputs 0V10V voltage to the spindle
frequency converter; spindle stepless speed variation; support for 4 spindle mechanical gears M41
M44
I/O function
Display
interface
I/O function diagnosis display

I/O interface: 23 points input/18 points output
Display: 480234 lattice true color LCD, with LED or CCFL backlight
Display mode: Chinese or English display interface set by parameters; real-time display of machining
path
Program number: up to 255 programs, program storage capacity: 4400KB
Program edit
Edit mode: Full-screen editing, support for incremental/absolute coordinate mixed programming,
program calling, and subprogram multi-level nesting
5
OPERATION
Rapid traverse rate: Max. 15000mm/min; rapid override: F25%, 50%, 75%, 100% four-level real time
Communication
Adaptive driver
OPERATION
6
With USB interface; bidirectional transmission of programs, parameters and tool compensations
between CNC and USB; support for system software upgrade by USB download
GSK DA98 series digital AC servo or DY3 series step drive device, with pulse + direction signal input
Chapter Three
CHAPTER THREE
Operation Panel
OPERATION PANEL
This turning machine CNC system (abbreviated to system or CNC) employs an operation
panel made from aluminum alloy.
3.1
LCD
OPERATION
LCD: Human-machine interface, with resolution of 480234, lattice true color LCD
3.2
LED Status Indicator

LED indicators are used to indicate the current working states of the system. There are 15 function
keys with a LED indicator. When the indicator lights up, the corresponding function of the key is enabled;
when it goes out, the function is disabled.
3.3
Keyboard
According to the standard of GSK, the function keys with the visible signs below are designed for
the system. The corresponding function of a function key is enabled when it is pressed. The meaning of
each key is as follows:
3.3.1
Character Key
Character keys consist of numbers, letters and some signs.

In the Edit mode, each letter key can switches between two or three keycodes; in other modes, each
letter key only indicates one keycode. (E.g. Though I and P are on the same key, the system will
automatically identify the keycode (I or P) to be used after pressing this key.)
Numeric key: Inputs data (0 ~9)
Letter key: Inputs letters
Sign key: Inputs signs such as + (plus sign), - (minus sign), * (multiplication sign), / (division sign) , +
(positive sign), - (negative sign), . (decimal point), (is greater than), = (is equal to),
(is less than), and, or, as well as ( ).

3.3.2
Operation Mode Select Key
The keys are identified by a sign and letters. The user can finish the corresponding function by
pressing an operation mode select key. The meaning of each key is as follows:
selects Edit operation mode
selects Manual operation mode
OPERATION
selects AUTO operation mode

selects Parameter operation mode
selects Tool Offset operation mode
selects Diagnosis operation mode
3.3.3 Function Key

The keys are indicated by a sign and letters. With a function key pressed, its function is enabled. The
meaning of each key is as follows:
Rapid override increase
increases the rapid traverse override in MANUAL operation
mode, and increases the speed override of G00 command in AUTO operation mode.
Rapid override decrease
decreases the rapid traverse override in MANUAL operation
mode, and decreases the speed override of G00 command in AUTO operation mode.
Feedrate override increase
increases the feedrate override in MANUAL operation mode,
and increases the speed override of G01 command in AUTO operation mode.
Feedrate override decrease
decreases the feedrate override in MANUL operation mode,
and decreases the speed override of G01 command in AUTO operation mode.
X axis reference point return
is only valid in MANUAL/AUTO operation mode. (In this
manual, the program reference point is also called the program zero point)
Chapter Three
Z axis program reference point return
X axis machine reference point return
Operation Panel
is only valid in MANUAL/AUTO operation mode.
only valid in MANUAL operation mode (In this
manual, the machine reference point is also called the machine zero point).
only valid in MANUL operation mode.
Dry run key When Dry Run is selected in AUTO operation mode to execute commands,
whether M, S, T commands are valid is determined by bit parameter P401_d7. After the Dry
Run state is exited, the coordinate of each axis of the system automatically resumes to the
one before Dry Run.
Single/Continuous key
selects Single/Continuous mode in AUTO operation mode; in
other operations, it is for the hp function.
3.3.4 Cycle Start Key and Cycle Pause Key (Feed Hold key)
In AUTO operation mode, they are respectively used to start and suspend the program execution. The
meaning of each key is as follows:
Cycle Start key starts the program in AUTO operation mode, and then the program is
executed automatically; moves the coordinate axis in MANUAL operation mode.
Cycle Pause key (Feed Hold key)
suspends the execution in MANUAL or AUTO
operation mode; in other operation modes, it means the hp function.

Note
There are two letters hp (help) on the upper right corners of some keys. In total, there
are 7 Help keys, which are hp0hp6; in different operation modes, when the main key is
invalid, the hp is valid.
3.3.5
Manual Axis Control Key
In MANUAL operation mode, the meanings of manual axis control keys are as follows:
OPERATION
Z axis machine reference point return
In MANUAL operation mode, X axis is moved in negative direction.

In MANUAL operation mode, X axis is moved in positive direction.
In MANUAL operation mode, Z axis is moved in negative direction.
In MANUAL operation mode, Z axis is moved in positive direction.
OPERATION
RAPID/FEED key In MANUAL operation mode, it switches between rapid traverse rate and
feedrate.
In MANUAL operation mode, it is Single Step/MPG Step Width Selection; in other

operation modes, it is the hp function.
In MANUAL operation mode, it is MPG control selection and axis selection; in other
In MANUAL operation mode, it is Z/Y axis selection, which is invalid for 928TD; in other
Step/JOG key It selects Step/JOG operation in MANUAL operation mode.
3.3.6
Manual Auxiliary Function Key
The keys below are used for controlling and completing a variety of auxiliary functions of the machine
tool. The meaning of each key is as follows:
Spindle CW rotation
The spindle rotates in CW direction (viewed from the tailstock to the

chuck)
Spindle stop
10
The spindle stops rotating.
Chapter Three
Operation Panel
Spindle CCW rotation The spindle rotates in CCW direction (viewed from the tailstock to
the chuck)
Coolant control
switches between coolant ON/OFF.
selects the speed of each spindle gear for the machine tools equipped
with multi-speed spindle motors and control circuits.
Tool change key selects the next tool whose tool number is adjacent to the current one.
3.3.7
Edit Key
Key
Designation
ENTER key
INPUT key
Function
Press this key for confirmation after input.
Input the desired contents

In Edit operation, press it to switch between word
ALTER key
insertion/alternation;
In other operations, it has specific meanings.
In Edit operation mode, press it to delete words, blocks or a
DELETE key
whole program.
In other operations, it has specific meanings.
ESCAPE
key
Press it to cancel the current input data, or exit the operation

state;
Press it to quit the current operation or setting.
In AUTO operation mode, it indicates Dry Run;
HOME key
In EDIT operation mode, it moves the cursor to the beginning

of the current line.
In MANUAL operation, it indicates STEP;
END key
In EDIT operation, it moves the cursor to the end of the current

line.
11
OPERATION
Spindle gear shift

Key
Designation
Function
In AUTO operation mode, it means Single/Continuous
SINGLE
BLOCK key
program execution.
In EDIT operation mode, it means Single/Continuous analog
program execution.
In other operations, it means the hp function.

In Edit/Parameter/Tool Offset operation mode, they control the
OPERATION
Cursor move
h p0
hp 1
keys
movement of the cursor;

In other operation modes, they are hp functions or have other
specific meanings.
Page
change keys
3.3.8
to turn pages up and down.

In Manual/Auto operation, they have specific meanings.
Reset Key
Reset
12
In Edit/Parameter/Tool Offset operation mode, they are used
causes the system to enter RESET state.
Chapter Four
System Operation Safety Protection
CHAPTER FOUR
SYSTEM OPERATION
This chapter describes in detail the operation and precautions of each functional module of the CNC
system. Before operating the machine, please thoroughly read this chapter.
4.1
System Power-on, Power-off, Initial State, Modal State, and Safety Protection
There is no power switch on the operation panel of this CNC system. The user may install a power
switch if necessary, so as to prevent the system from electric impact.
Before turning on the system, please confirm that:
1)
The machine is in normal status;
2)
The voltage of the power supply is in accordance with the requirements;
3)
The connection is correct and firm.
The operation procedures for System Power On are as follows:

1)
First turn on the power main switch;
Turn on the system power switch, then the system displays the initial screen as shown in fig. 4-1. In
this state, press any key other than
key to enable the system to enter EDIT operation mode.
Fig. 4-1 System initial screen

2)
The following steps are completed in order after system power on.
z
System control program loading
System self-check and initialization
System parameter loading and check
I/O interface initialization
User program loading and check
Note
1) Do not press any key on the operation panel during system power on. If the system enters
the key test interface, please press RESET key to exit.
13
OPERATION
4.1.1 Power On

4.1.2
Power Off
OPERATION
The operation procedures for system power off are as follows:

1) Press the system power switch to cut off the power.
2) Turn off the main power switch of the machine.
Before turning off the system, please confirm that:
1) The X and Z axes of the system are at the halted state;
2) The auxiliary functions (e.g. spindle, cooling) are OFF;
3) The power is cut off.
Note
1)
In general, if it is the first time that the system is powered on, self-check and
initialization should be performed first.( This procedure is done by the machine tool
builder rather than by the user. Otherwise, the parameters set by the machine tool
builder may be lost. )
For the procedures of turning off the power of the machine, please see the user manual
provided by the machine tool builder.
2)
4.1.3
Initial State and Modal State of System and Program
4.1.3.1
Initial State and Modal State of System
The initial state of the system is the specific state to which a function is automatically set upon
system power on; therein, none of the auxiliary functions has actual output.
The modal state of the system is the state that a function remains in after the system executes this
function.
Initial state and modal state of the system:
System state
System machine coordinate system
System tool nose coordinate system
Cutting feedrate: F
Frequency-conversion spindle speed: S
Spindle gear
Manual slow feed/rapid feed state
Feedrate override
Rapid override
Spindle state
Coolant state
Chuck state
Lubricant state
T tool number state
Tailstock state
14
Initial state of the system

Remains in the state of last
Power-On.
Power-On.
In Auto operation: 30mm/min
In Manual operation: Remains in
the state of last Power-On
S200
Gear-shift spindle gear: S0
Frequency-conversion
spindle
gear: M41
Slow feed
Power-On.
Power-On.
M05 Spindle stop
M06 coolant OFF
M11 Chuck release
M33 Coolant OFF
Power-On.
M79 Tailstock run-out state
Modal state
Keeps until being changed.
Keeps
until being changed
Keeps
until being changed
Keeps
Keeps
until being changed

until being changed.
Keeps until being changed

Keeps
until being changed
Chapter Four
4.1.3.2
Initial State and Modal State of Program
The initial state of the program is the state automatically set by the system by means of initialization
before a machining program is executed; i.e., the initial default state for the default programming word
and speed word when the system executes the first command of the machining program.
Program initial states of the system are as follows:
G function: G00, G97, G98;

Cutting speed: 30mm/min;
System coordinates: Current coordinates, which are the ones after the last automatic
program execution or after the last manual operation.
G function modal state means that once a word is set, it keeps unchanged until it is changed by
other G modal commands belonging to the same group. The meaning of the modal state: after a G
command is executed, it is unnecessary to input it again if it needs to be used in the following blocks.
The modal G commands are classified into the following three groups, and in each group, only one
command is in the modal state.
Group 1: G00, G01, G02, G03, G05
(Initial state: G00)
Group 2: G96, G97
(Initial state: G97)
Group 3: G98, G99;
(Initial state: G98 F30)
The non-modal commands are only effective in the current block. They must be specified each time
they are used.
Note
In AUTO operation mode, when the system executes the first command, or executes the first
command after executing M20, or selects a block between the first lock and the last block as its first
command, it will automatically resumes to the program initial state.
4.1.4
Safety Protection
A series of safety protection is set for the CNC system, so as to protect the operator as well as the
machine tool. (Y axis function is invalid)
4.1.4.1
Hard Limit Protection
For the machine tools mounted with limit switches, the system can detect the switches. When the
slide carriage of the machine tool moves and presses down a limit switch, the system will stop feeding
without turning off the other auxiliary functions, and then the program execution is stopped, with the hard
limit alarm being displayed on the screen.
After the stroke limit alarm is issued, the user can select MANUAL operation mode and then press
the axis move key that moves the carriage in the reverse direction to exit the stroke limit, then the alarm
displayed on the screen will disappear.
Explanation
15
OPERATION
Auxiliary function: Current state

1)
The positive stroke limit detection of X, Y and Z axes shares the same pin +TL, and the negative
limit detection shares the same pin TL; If a positive hard limit alarm occurs, all the axes cannot
be moved in positive direction other than in negative direction; and vice versa.
2)
When the limit switch hits the limit stopper, the limit signal is generated; The length of the
effective part of the hardware stopper signal should be greater than 300 mm, to prevent the
signal effective area being exceeded.
3)
If the limit emergency stop mode is set by bit parameter P402_d7=1, there may be a large
OPERATION
error between the coordinates displayed on the system and the actual ones after the limit
stopper is hit. In such a case, the machine coordinates must be readjusted.
Related parameters
Bit parameter: P402_d7, P404_d6, P404_d1.
Therein: Bit parameter P402_d7 sets the modes of the hard limit alarm;
Bit parameter P404_d6 sets whether the hard limit alarm is detected;
Bit parameter P404_d1 sets the level of the hard limit alarm for each axis.
When bit parameter P404_d1=1, the alarm is set to high level. The positive limit switch +X, +Y or +Z
of each axis should be a normal closed contact, and connected to X/Z/Y positive limit input interface +LT
in series (an alarm occurs if open ); the negative limit switch -X, -Y, -Z of each axis should also be a
normal closed contact, and connected to X/Z/Y negative limit input interface -LT in series; it is
recommended that the user select a normal closed contact for the hard limit of each axis. The
connection is shown as the figure below:
When bit parameter P404_d1=0, the alarm is set to low level. The positive limit switch +X, +Y or +Z
of each axis should be a normal open contact, and connected to X/Z/Y positive limit input interface +LT in
parallel (an alarm occurs if closed ); the negative limit switch -X, -Y, -Z of each axis should also be a
normal open contact, and connected to X/Z/Y negative limit input interface -LT in parallel; The
connection is shown as the figure below:
4.1.4.2
Soft Limit Protection
1 Mechanical soft limit protection

16
Chapter Four
Mechanical soft limit protection is used to limit the movement range of the machine coordinates, in
order to prevent the slide carriage from moving beyond the range. If the machine position (machine
coordinates) exceeds the range, the mechanical soft limit alarm is issued.
Method of releasing the overtravel alarm: In MANUAL operation mode, move the carriage in the
opposite direction (e.g. if the positive overtravel occurs, move the carriage in the negative direction; and
vice versa).
2 Tool nose soft limit protection

to prevent the range from being exceeded by the tool nose. If the tool nose position (tool nose
coordinates) exceeds the range, the tool nose soft limit alarm is issued.
Method of releasing the overtravel alarm: In MANUAL operation mode, move the carriage in the
opposite direction (e.g. if the positive overtravel occurs, move the carriage in the negative direction; and
vice versa).
Explanation
During the movement, if the coordinates exceed the software limit range, the axes will decelerate to
stop.
Relative parameters
P009, P010: The max. stroke of tool nose software limit in the positive/negative direction of Z axis;
P011, P012: The max. stroke of tool nose software limit in the positive/negative direction of X axis;
P013, P014: The max. stroke of tool nose software limit in the positive/negative direction of Y axis;
P015, P016: The max. stroke of mechanical software limit in the positive/negative direction of Z axis;
P017, P018: The max. stroke of mechanical software limit in the positive/negative direction of X axis;
P019, P020: The max. stroke of mechanical software limit in the positive/negative direction of Y axis;
Bit parameter P404_d4 and P404_d3 respectively set whether the mechanical and tool nose software
limit alarms are valid.
4.1.4.3
Emergency Stop Alarm (Stopping System Emergently)
There is an external emergency stop input terminal ESP among the system interfaces. The user
should connect the normal closed contact of the red mushroom emergency button on the panel to the
terminal. In case of emergency, press the Emergency Stop button to cause the system to enter
emergency stop state, then the system will stop all the feed and turn off the spindle and cooling, issuing
the alarm Emergency Stop (If there are other popups displaying on the screen, the emergency stop
function is executed firstly, then the alarm Emergency Stop is displayed later).
After the cause of emergency stop is removed, press the Emergency Stop button in the direction of
arrow, then the button will lift automatically, cancelling the emergency stop signal.
When the system is in the emergency stop state, if the external emergency stop signal has been
cancelled, press RESET key to exit the state and return to the operation mode before emergency stop.
When the system is in the emergency stop state, if the external emergency stop signal is not
cancelled, it is forbidden to operate the system in Manual, Auto and Diagnosis operations; but the user
17
OPERATION
Tool nose software limit protection is used to limit the movement range of the tool nose coordinates,

can press RESET key to remove the alarm window, and switch the control to Edit, Parameter or Tool
Offset operation mode; if the emergency signal is not cancelled in Edit, Parameter or Tool Offset
operation, press RESET key to remove the alarm window, then it is available to operate system.
If Emergency Stop occurs during movement, there may be a large error between the system
displayed coordinates and the actual ones. Thus the user must readjust the machine coordinates. When
the Emergency Stop button is pressed, the system will execute a series of emergency treatment, which
is shown as follows:
OPERATION
1) During emergency stop, the system stops all the feed; program execution stops; the spindle
stops and the cooling and lubricating are turned off.
2) During emergency stop, the system automatically sets the states of chuck and tailstock saved in
the memory to M11 and M79 respectively. After the emergency stop is released, the states of
the system chuck and tailstock are M10 and M78 respectively when their foot switches are
pedaled for the first time.
3) During emergency stop, if the system is executing commands such as tool change, chuck,
tailstock or gear shift, the execution will be stopped immediately (tool post positive/negative
rotation signal is cancelled, and whether chuck and tailstock are cancelled depends on the
parameter setting); here, the system assumes that the tool post, chuck, tailstock and gear are in
uncertain positions, and issues red flashing. Only after the emergency stop alarm is released,
can the system recover to the normal state by re-performing the operation successfully, or by
turning off the system and then on.
4) During emergency stop, the interface output signal of MDLY keeps unchanged. How to process
the interface control signals other than those of MDLY, spindle, coolant and lubricant is
determined by parameters. If P403_d3 is set to 0, only the output signals of the spindle, coolant
and lubricant are turned off; if P403_d3 is set to 1, all the interface control signals including the
chuck and tailstock are turned off.
5) After the emergency stop alarm is released, if the system is in the Dry Run state in Auto
operation mode, it will exit the Dry Run state; if the system is in Rapid Traverse state in
MANUAL operation mode, it will automatically enter Feed state; the set F value keeps
unchanged; and the spindle analog voltage keeps unchanged; the states of other functions
except the above are in program initial states.
6) After the emergency stop alarm is released, the time counting of low-pressure detection function
and automatic lubricating control function will be restarted.
Special attentions
1 The standard Emergency Stop function executed by the system is the function of turning on or
turning off the system output signals uniformly. The user can set it as follows: In Manual/Auto
operation mode, after Emergency Stop button is pressed, and the system executes the standard
Emergency Stop function, the system executes an additional M74 custom command once (only
when in MANUAL/AUTO operation mode and when there is a solidified M74 command in
the system, the execution is available). This function is applicable to some special machine
components and is used only when some of the output signals are required to turn off and some
18
Chapter Four
maintained. If there is an alarm occurs during the execution of the M74 custom command, the
execution is stopped. After the emergency stop button is pressed, if the solidified M74 custom
command is being executed, the system will automatically terminate the command when it
proceeds to an axis move command or tool change command,
2 In Manual/Auto operation mode, when the M74 custom command can be executed in Emergency
Stop state by setting a parameter (P412_d1=1), there is a prompt +M74 ( indicating the M74 is
3 For the programming, debugging and solidification of M74 custom command, please see Chapter
Eight Custom Command Programming in this manual.
4 Be careful to use M74 function during Emergency Stop. The function is only applicable to some
special machine tools.
Relative parameters
When bit parameter P404_d7 is set to 0, the external emergency stop signal is valid; when it is set
to 1, the signal is invalid.
When bit parameter P403_d3=0: If the emergency stop alarm is valid, the system only turns off the
output signals of the spindle, cooling and lubricating.
When bit parameter P403_d3=1: If the emergency stop alarm is valid, the system turns off the
output signals of all auxiliary functions.
Parameter P404_d7 is set for the convenience of system debugging. In the on-line state, it must be
set to the valid state. Otherwise, it cannot provide protection.
Parameter P412_d1 sets whether M74 custom command is executed in the emergency stop state.
4.1.4.4
Drive Unit Alarm
When the CNC system is connected to the alarm output signal of a drive unit, and the drive unit
alarm is issued, the system will automatically stop all the feed, and prompt Z/X axis drive unit alarm on
the screen. All the axes, as well as the program execution, are stopped immediately. Here, check the
drive unit and relative components to remove the fault and then power on the system after power-off.
If the alarm occurs during movement, there may be a large error between the system displayed
coordinates and the actual ones. Therefore, the user must readjust the machine coordinates.
In MANUL operation mode, if the alarm occurs, all the axes movement is stopped.
In AUTO operation mode, if the alarm occurs, it is forbidden to execute the program.
Relative parameters
When bit parameter P404_d5 is set to 0, the drive unit alarm is detected.
Bit parameter P405_d4, P405_d3 and P405_d2 set the alarm level of the drive unit respectively for
Z, X and Y axes.
4.1.4.5
Other Alarms
When other alarms are issued in the system, they are displayed on the screen. Here, the user can
handle them according to prompts and the countermeasures described in Chapter Six Alarm Message.
19
OPERATION
command in the system).
being executed) added on the emergency stop window (if there is a solidified M74 custom

4.1.4.6
Power Off
In case of emergency during machine running, the user can turn off the machine power immediately,
so as to prevent accidents.
However, if the power is turned off during coordinate axes movement, please note that there may be
a large error between the system-displayed coordinates and the actual ones after power-on. The user
must readjust the coordinate coordinates by performing machine zero point return or other means, in
OPERATION
order to make the system displayed coordinates coincide with the actual ones.
4.1.4.7
Reset Operation
When abnormal system output or coordinate axis move occurs, press RESET key to cause the
system to enter Reset state as follows:
1) All axes decelerate to stop.
2) Bit parameter P403_d2 sets whether M function (spindle, coolant) output is valid.
3) Automatic operation ends, and modal functions and states are kept.
4) The system is in G00, G97, G98 state; F value, as well as the spindle analog voltage output,
keeps unchanged.
5) The system terminates the operation in progress, and returns to the initial interface of the current
operation mode.
Special attentions
1) The standard Reset function executed by the system is the function of turning on or turning off the
system output signals uniformly. The following function can be set: In Manual/Auto operation,
after Reset button is pressed, and the system executes the standard Reset function, the system
executes an additional M73 custom command (only when in Manual/Auto operation mode and
when there is a solidified M73 command in the system, the execution is available). This
function is applicable to some special machine components and is used when only some of the
output signals are required to turn off and some maintained. If there is an alarm occurs during the
execution of the M73 custom command, the execution is stopped.
2) In Manual/Auto operation mode, when the M73 custom command can be executed in Emergency
Stop state by setting a parameter (P412_d2=1), there is a prompt +M73 ( indicating the M73 is
being executed) added on the reset window (if there is a solidified M73 custom command in the
system).
3) For the programming, debugging and fixing of M73 custom command, please see Chapter Eight
Custom Command Programming in this manual.
4) Be careful to use M73 custom function during Reset. The function is only applicable to some
special machine tools.
Relative parameters
20
Chapter Four
When bit parameter P403_d2=0:
System Operation Edit
After pressing Reset key, the system will turn off the output
signals of the spindle and cooling.
When bit parameter P403_d2=1:
After pressing Reset key, the system will keep the output states
of the spindle and cooling before Reset.
Parameter P412_d2 sets whether M73 custom command is executed during Reset.
4.2 Operation Mode Selection for CNC System
to switch different modes directly, thus realizing simple, convenient and visible operation.
The screen shown in Fig. 4-1 is displayed after system power-on. If no key is pressed, the screen
keeps unchanged. When a key on the panel is pressed, the system enters Edit operation mode.
4.3
Edit Operation Mode
Edit operation mode is to operate the workpiece programs by using the system operation
panel. For each step, the system provides corresponding intelligent prompt messages. Also, the user
can press the hp2 key on the upper right corner of the system to view the list of the system operation
keys in Edit operation mode.
The explanations for the input format and examples about related setting and operation in the
manual are as follows: The meanings and use of the function keys to be pressed are described at the
beginning of the manual; the letter keys, numeric keys to be input are indicated by an underline; the
prompt messages of the system are indicated by a rectangle.
When setting or inputting an item, or during the man-machine dialogue, if ESC key is pressed
before confirmation, the current operation is quit.
The major functions of the Edit operation mode are

To select, add, rename, copy and delete the workpiece programs;
To input, insert, modify and delete the contents of the workpiece programs selected;
To transfer workpiece programs between U disk and system through the USB interface.
To transfer workpiece programs between external computer and system through the RS232
communication interface;
To transfer workpiece programs between two CNC systems through the RS232 communication
interface;
To compile and save programs
To input variables and macro character strings
Press the operation mode select key
to enter EDIT operation mode. The EDIT operation
mode consists of two main pages, which are the program directory search page and program editing
page. The program directory search page is shown as Fig. 4-2.
21
OPERATION
The operation modes are directly selected by the operation mode keys in this system. It is available

Curre Prog No.020
[EDIT] DDIRECTORY
Middle
Pro.Size 1KB
Name
Size
Remark
% 000
1KB
G00
% 001
1KB
G0
% 002
1KB
G50
% 020
1KB
[U] Enter USB communication

G00 X300 Z10
[R] Enter RS232 communication
% 032
1KB
G50
X0
X115
Latest
Name
Size
Top
Remark
Latest
Upper middle
Z0
Z155
Popup window
[Key
prompt]
X150 Z25
Z35
Free memory
X250
OPERATION
Lower
middle
Program count
EDIT
JOG
394KB
AUTO
Bottom
PARA
DIAG
OFFT
Fig. 4-2 Program directory search

Explanations for the contents displaying on each area of the page
Top: Current program number and occupied storage capacity (program size), prompt key hp2 for
system function operation method;
Upper middle: The system arranges the programs in terms of the name, size, remark or latest.
Middle: Displaying the program names, sizes and remarks saved in the system
Lower middle: Operation prompt messages
Bottom: Displaying the number of programs stored in the system (up to 255) and the remaining
storage capacity for programs.
Popup window: Displaying the operation prompt messages.
Note
When pressing hp2 key, the system prompts Program directory interface message prompt, which
introduces the functions of the keys to be used.
4.3.1
Part Program Directory Search
The part program directory search page displays the number of programs stored in the system. All
the programs can be arranged in the following four orders:
1) Sort by name: Sorting by the program numbers from the top to bottom, and from the left to right;
2) Sort by size: Sorting by the size of the programs, from top to bottom, and from left to right;
3) Sort by remarks: Sorting by the size of the first 12 strings in the first line of the programs, from
top to bottom, and from left to right;
4) Sort by latest: Sorting by the time that the programs are input, from top to bottom, and from left to
right.
The user can retrieve all the programs by pressing

and
22
and
cursor keys and
page keys. 12 programs can be displayed on one screen; pressing
key turns the
Chapter Four
screen to the previous page, and pressing

or
turns the screen to the next page; Pressing
key sorts the programs by name, size, remark or latest.
4.3.2
Selecting, Creating, Deleting, Renaming and Copying a Part Program
It means the operation of selecting, creating, deleting, renaming or copying a part program.
1. Up to 255 programs can be operated, from number %000%254. When operating a program
number bigger than 254, the system prompts E160 Input program number error.
2. If there are no part programs in the system, or it is the first time that the system is used, the
system automatically creates and selects No. %000 program as the current program. If there are
part programs in the system, the system arranges the programs which existed before last
power-off according to their numbers.
3. The system supports multiple inputs, with the leading zero omissible. E.g. inputs the program
with name %003. Press INPUT key, and then input 0 0 3; or 0 3; or 3 .
4.3.2.1
Selecting and Creating a Part Program
The steps of selecting a part program or creating a new part program are as follows:
Press INPUT key in EDIT operation mode;
Input the program number to be selected using the keyboard, or input a program number not
included in the program directory as a new program number;
Press ENTER key;
Then the part program selection or creation is completed. The screen displays the contents of
the program, and the system enters the program edit page.
Note
1) After selecting a program, the user can change the desired program only through the above
steps; once a program is selected, it keeps unchanged even if the power is turned off.
2) If the input part program does not exist in the program directory, a new program with the input
program number is created and taken as the current program.
Example
Example 1: The procedures of creating a part program with number %20 when it is not included in
the program directory:
Press keys: INPUT 2 0 ENTER. The new program with name %020 is created,
and the system enters program edit page.
Example 2: Procedures of selecting the part program with number %001 when it is included in the
program directory:
Press keys: INPUT 1 ENTER. The program with number %001 is selected, and the
system enters program edit page.
23
OPERATION
Note

4.3.2.2
Deleting a Part Program
The procedures of deleting a part program are as follows:

Press INPUT key in Edit operation mode;
Input the program name to be deleted using the keyboard;
Press DELETE key, then the system prompts: ENTER-Confirm Deletion
ESC-Exit Deletion;
Press ENTER key to delete the part program whose number is input; or press ESC key to cancel
the deletion, and returns the control to the Edit operation mode.
OPERATION
Note
1) If the program to be deleted does not exist, the system prompts E100 The program to be
deleted does not exist
2) If the program to be deleted already exists: when it is not the current program, it is deleted from
the program list; when it is the current program, it is deleted from the program list, and the
system takes the program with the smallest number on the list as the current program; when
there are no programs existing after deletion, the system automatically creates an empty
program with name 000 as the current program.
Example
Example: The procedures of deleting the program with number %003 are as follows:
Press keys: ENTER
3 DELETE ENTER. The program with number %003 is deleted
from the part program storage area.
4.3.2.3 Deleting All Part Programs

It is the operation of deleting the program area in the program directory search page, i.e. deleting all
the programs once; the procedures are as follows:
Press INPUT key in the state of part program directory search;
Input
from the keyboard;
Press DELETE key, then the system prompts: ENTER-Confirm to delete all programs
ESC-Escape deletion;
Press ENTER key to delete all the programs; press ESC key to cancel the deletion, and return
the control to the Edit operation mode.
Note
After all the programs are deleted, the system will create an empty program with a name 0000 as
the current program.
4.3.2.4
Renaming a Part Program
The part program renaming is to replace the name of the current program by a new one. The new
program is taken as the current program. The procedures are as follows:
24
Press INPUT key;
Chapter Four
Input a program number which does not exist in the program directory, and press ALTER key to
change the current program name to the one input.

Note
If the input program number already exists, the system prompts E166 The program to be
renamed already exists. Input another name after the prompt disappears.
Example
Example: The procedures of renaming the current program 000 as 005 are as follows:
5 ALTER. Then the renaming is completed.
4.3.2.5 Copying a Part Program

It is to copy the contents of the current program to a new program. The newly created program is
taken as the current program. The procedures are as follows:
Press Input key;
Input a nonexistent program name as a new program, then press INPUT key to copy the
contents of the current program to the new program. The new program is taken as the current
program.
Note
If the input program name already exists, the system prompts E161 The program to be copied
already exists. It is available to input another program name again after the prompt disappears.
Example
Example: Procedures of copying the current program 000 to program 005 are as follows:
Press keys: INPUT
4.3.3
5 INPUT. Then the copy is completed.
Part Program Communication

The communication of part programs consists of part program sending and part program
receiving. The part programs can be sent from system to computer (CNCPC), from system to U disc
(CNCUSB), or between two CNC systems (CNCCNC); in addition, the system can receive the part
programs from a computer (PCCNC), from another system(CNCCNC), or from a U disc
(USBCNC).
When pressing hp6 key on the program directory search page, the system prompts the part
program communication interface.
4.3.3.1
Sending Part Program (CNCPC, CNCUSB, CNCCNC)
Mode 1: RS232 serial communication

1)
Before transferring the files, set the communication baudrates of parameter P414_d7 and
P414_d6. The communication baudrate is decided by the setting of the sender. Setting range:
25
OPERATION
Press keys: INPUT

9600, 19200, 38400unitbps. Factory standard setting: 9600 bps. For how to set the baudrate,
see Section 4.6 Parameter Operation Mode in Part Programming.
2)
Output the part programs stored in the system to an external computer or CNC system:
Connect the communication cable with the system power OFF, then turn on the system.
On program directory search page, press keys: hp6 R hp2 in order;
Select the programs to be sent according to the help information of hp2.

Press ENTER key to send the programs;
OPERATION
Enable the external computer or CNC system to remain in receiving state; (For details, see
Chapter Five RS232 and USB System Communication)
The system sends the selected programs, and displays the progress bar at the same time till
the sending is completed; if multiple programs are selected, the system sends the programs
one by one in the ascending order according to their program numbers.
It is possible to interrupt the sending by pressing ESC key.
Mode 2: USB communication;
1 After entering USB communication mode, the system first checks whether a U disc has been
inserted. If no U disc is inserted, the system displays a prompt message box, prompting No USB
device inserted . If a USB disc containing a folder named C001PRO has been inserted, and
there are CNCxxx.TXT files in the folder, the files will be listed on the USB file directory box. If
there are no CNCxxx.TXT files in the C001PRO folder, the system prompts: USB device
specified directory: C001 PRO has no programs. If the folder namedC001PROdoes not exist in
the U disc, the system prompts: No specified directory in USB device: C001 PRO.
2 Output the part programs stored in the system to the U disc:
Insert an UBS disc into the USB interface of the system;
The system automatically opens the file directory of the U disc (when the U disc contains a
folder C001PRO, and the folder contains files CNCxxx.TXT). If the folder named
C001PRO does not exist in the USB root directory, the system will create one.
On program directory search page, press keys: hp6 U EDIT in order;
Select the programs to be sent according to the help information of hp2;
Press ENTER key to send the programs, and select the send mode according to the system
prompts.
The system sends the programs according to the selected mode, and displays the progress
bar till the sending is completed;
4.3.3.2
Press ESC key to exit the U disc.
Receiving Part Programs (PCCNC, USBCNC, CNCCNC)
Mode 1: RS232 serial communication;

1)
Set the baudrate and communication port of the communication software; (for details, see
Chapter Five RS232 and USB System Communication in Part Programming)
26
Chapter Four
2)
Input the part programs stored in the external computer to the system; or transfer programs
between CNC systems; the procedures are as follows:
Connect the communication cable with the system power OFF, then turn on the system;
On the program directory search page, press keys: hp6 R EDIT in order;
Select the receive mode according to the system prompts;
After confirming the system is in receive state, input the programs stored in the external
computer or CNC system to the CNC system.

The system inputs the programs according to the selected receive mode, and displays the
progress bar until the receiving is completed;
It is possible to stop receiving programs pressing ESC key in the progress of receiving.
Mode 2: USB communication;

1 After entering USB communication mode, the system first checks the U disc, and then opens the
folder C001PRO to list the CNCxxx.TXT files in the folder.
2 Output the part programs stored in the U disc to the CNC system:
Insert the U disc into the USB interface of the system;
On the program directory search page, press keys: hp6 U in order;
The system automatically opens the file directory of the U disc;
Select the programs to be received according the help information of hp2;
Press ENTER key to receive programs, and select the send mode according to the system
prompts;
The system receives part programs according to the selected receive mode, and displays the
progress bar until the receiving is completed;
Press ESC key to exit the U disc.
Note
If the name of a program to be sent to the system already exists in the system, the system prompts
whether to replace the original one. Once replaced, the original program will be replaced by the
sent program.
4.3.3.3
Standard Format of TXT Part Program on PC
On a personal computer, the part program can be edited using TXT or LST text. However, the file
name and its contents must be edited in the standard format required in the system, so that the program
can be correctly sent to the system. The specifications are as follows:
1)
On a personal computer, the user should name the part program file with suffix TXT or LST, e.g.
CNC008.TXT; It is recommended that the user use suffix TXT for the convenience of the part
program operation on the PC.
2)
The first line of the TXT file must indicate the program number, in the format of % XXX , i.e. an
one-digit, two-digit or three digit number behind the percent, within a range of 0~254. No other
contents can be contained in the first line. The range of the program number must be within
0~254. Otherwise, the system fails to receive the programs and prompts corresponding error
27
OPERATION

messages. The program numbers are determined by the following two modes (USB and RS232)
after the CNC receives the programs:
In system RS232 communication, the program name to be stored is subject to the

program number of the first line; i.e. the Arabic numerals XXX of the string %XXX in
the first line of the program sent by the PC.
The number of the program transferred by the USB is the Arabic numerals xxx of
CNCxxx.TXT in the folder C001PRO in the U disc root directory.

Note: In system USB communication, The Arabic numerals XXX in string %XXX of the first line in
OPERATION
the program should be the same as the Arabic numerals XXX in CNCxxx.TXT in the folder
C001PRO of the U disc root directory.
3)
The second line and the following are blocks. The format of a block must accord with the
requirement, and each block, ended with ENTER key, cannot contain more than 250 characters.
Otherwise, the system reports an error message Block overlong in received program
4 The comment area of the block can contain comments in Chinese.

5)
The size of the TXT file cannot exceed the limit of the program storage capacity of the system.
Standard format of part program communication on PC:
TXT file format
%099
N0000
G50 X100
Z100
N0010 G00 X20 Z90

G01 X10 Z80
/N0250 G02 X30 Z20

N0260 T22
N0262 M05
N0270 G04 D8
M20
R5
Setting coordinate
system
Rapid positioning
Linear cutting
Circular cutting
Tool change
Explanation
1. When the system is receiving a program,
the program name %099 cannot be
omitted; the first line must be a
three-digit number between 0~254.
2. N**** is the line number of a block.
Blocks without N**** have no line
numbers.
3. The beginning of each line is a space.
4. For the block with a line number, there
is a space between the line number and
the command.
5.
/ indicates the block is skipped;
6. ; The contents behind it are comments.
4.3.4 Inputting and Editing the Contents of Part Program

The input part program consists of a number of blocks, and each block includes a block number,
commands, data, etc. The format of the program should be consistent with the general programming
rules described in Part Programming, and no alarm should occur during program compiling. For the
alarm prompts, see Chapter Six Alarm Message in Part Programming. Only after the correct program
contents are input according to order of the technological requirements, can the machine tool produce
qualified parts.
The system employs the full-screen edit mode, and the program edit page is shown in Fig. 4-3:
28
Chapter Four
EDIT
%001 Column 8 Line 3
F80
Lines 11
Size 1KB
Currrent editting program

compiling succeeds
hp2
Top
Popup
window
Fig. 4-3
OPERATION
N0000 G0 X100
N0010 X0
N0020 X100
N0030 X0
N0040 G1 X100
N0050 X0
N0060 X100
N0070 X0
N0080 X100
N0090 X0
N0100 G1 Z100
N0120 M20
Middle
Program editing
Explanations for each area of the interface

Top: Program number and program size of the current program, number of lines, line and column at
which the edit cursor (prompt symbol of editable character on current position ) is located,
prompt key hp2 for system function operation;
Middle: Program edit window;
Popup window: Displaying prompt information for operation.
Note
1.
After pressing hp2 key, the system prompts Program editing Help message prompts,
introducing the functions of the help keys to be used.
2.
When bit parameter P416_d0 is set to 1, it is forbidden to edit or alter a program, and the
system displays alarm message E174 Part programs are locked, and forbidden to
modify; when it is required to edit and alter a program, set the bit parameter P416_d0 to
0.
Meanings and use of edit keys on program edit page

1)
cursor up and down keys
By pressing a cursor key once, the cursor moves up (or down) vertically till it reaches the
uppermost (or lowest) line, taking the current cursor column value as the reference movement
value. By holding the cursor key, the cursor moves up (or down) continuously till the first (or last)
block is reached, or till the key is released. When using the string search function (hp5), the two
keys are used for retrieving the desired string up and down.
2)
Cursor left and right move keys
By pressing a cursor key once, the cursor moves one character towards left (or right). By
holding the cursor key, the cursor continuously moves to the left (or right) till the first (or last)
character of the block is reached, or till the key is released.
29
Line Home key: The cursor rapidly moves to the beginning of a line or the beginning of
the first word of the line. When repeating pressing the Line Home key, the cursor
location is switched between the beginning of a line and the first word of the line. By
pressing the Line Home key and Delete key together, the current line is deleted.
Line End key: The cursor rapidly moves to the end of a line.
OPERATION
Insert/Alter key:
Changing the edit input mode: By pressing the ALTER key once, the input mode
toggles between Insert and Alter, with the cursor displaying in different shapes. In
Insert mode, the cursor is a flicking underscore, while in Alter mode, the cursor
becomes a flicking and highlighted block cursor.
Input key: It switches the program edit state to the program directory search state,
displaying Please input program number;.
Page up and Page down keys

They are used for turning pages to display programs. When used in the function of
hp5 key, they move the cursor to Home/End page; when used in the function of hp3
key, they are used for other purposes.
Enter key:
It inserts a new line when the cursor is located at the beginning or the end of a line,
with the cursor moving to the new line; when the cursor is located in other position, it
moves to the beginning of the next block by pressing Enter key.
Delete key: It is for deleting a whole program or the characters in a block.
hp2 key: Help information for program editing.
hp3 key: Current program compiling.
30
Chapter Four
hp4 key: On program edit page, the user can control the movement of the cursor using
10
a MPG, browsing the programs rapidly.

hp5 key: Help for system commands, part program string search, etc. If the program
number of the current program is 253 or 254, the operation of the program with
OPERATION
number 253 or 254 is added.

hp6 key: It prompts to display macro string list.
Rules for multi-function definition key

1) If the first letter in a line is a capital, the first key has the priority; if the first letter is lowercase
letter, the third or second key has the priority.
2) If a letter or string is input behind a number (0~9), a space between them will be created
automatically.
3) After a string is input, the cursor stays in the position that is the most convenient for inputting.
Table of values for multi-function definition keys
Panel display
>
First key
value
Second
key value
X
Z
Third key
value
First key
value
Second
key value
Third key
value
()
>
Space
<
and
or
Panel display
( )
and
<
then
else
4.3.4.1
Note:
if
then
else
or
Inputting Program Contents

Set the value of parameter P333 to 10 (program number automatic creation, similarly
hereinafter)
31

On program edit page, input the contents of a part program by the following steps:
Create a new program by means of creating a new part program;
After the block number N0000 is displayed, input a line of program contents from the keyboard;
After the input, press ENTER key to end the input of this line;
The system automatically creates the number of the next block for user to continue inputting;
After the last line of the program is input, press ESC key to end the input of the program.
Note
OPERATION
1 The first column of each line must be the space;

2 Up to 60 characters can be displayed for one block. If there are more than 60 characters, the
remaining ones are not displayable. If the cursor is at the end of a line, the cursor moves a
character towards left by pressing
key.
3 The first column of each line is a space, which is created automatically by the system; the
number of the first column is 1, and that of the last column is 252; Only the cursor rather than the
character can be displayed at the first and last column; up to 250 characters can be edited in one
block.
4.3.4.2 Inserting a Block

Insert a block or multiple blocks between two blocks; or insert a block or multiple blocks before the
current block. The procedures are as follows:
For two adjacent blocks, move the cursor to the end of the first block or to the beginning of the
second block;
By pressing Enter key, the system automatically creates a new block number between the
current block and the next block (the increment of the sequence number is the integer which is
1/4 of the value set in parameter P333. If the numbers are not enough, modify the number of the
next block.) and leaves one blank line.
Input the desired contents to the block;
After the input, if it is necessary to insert multiple blocks, press ENTER key; if only one block is
required to insert, this operation is unnecessary.
Example
Example: The operation procedures of inserting a new block M3 between block N0020 and block
N0030 are as follows:
Move the cursor to the end of block N0020 or to the beginning of block N0030; Press Enter
key, then input M3 for the new block.
4.3.4.3
Deleting a Block
The procedures of deleting all contents (including the block name) in one line are as follows:
32
Move the cursor to the beginning of the block to be deleted;
Press DELETE key;
Delete all the contents of the selected block.
Chapter Four
4.3.4.4 Inserting a Character in a Block

The procedures of inserting a character in a block are as follows:
Pressing ALTER key to switch the input mode to Insert mode, i.e. the cursor is displayed as an
underscore;
Input the desired contents
Insert the desired contents before the character where the cursor is located.
Note
According to the requirement of the system, a space must be left between two words (a word means
a letter followed by digits) to separate them. The space can be created automatically during program
editing. However, it may not be created during insertion operation. In this case, the operator is required
to input the space, in order to keep the program complete.
Example
Example: The procedures of inserting
X0.0
between
and
in the block N0020
G0
Z0.0 are as follows:
Move the cursor to the bottom of

displays N0020
G0
X10.0
behind
X , then input
1 . Then the screen
Z0.0
4.3.4.5 Deleting a Character in a Block

The procedures of deleting characters in a block are as follows:
Move the cursor to the character to be deleted;
Press DELETE key to delete the character where the cursor is located.
4.3.4.6 Altering Contents of a Block

Change the contents of a block. There are two methods depending on the input mode (Insert/Alter)
In Insert mode: Procedures of altering a block using the combination of insertion and deletion:
Move the cursor to the character to be altered;
Input the new contents;
Press DELETE key to delete the unnecessary contents;
In Alter mode: Procedures of directly altering the contents where the cursor is located:
Press ALTER key to switch the cursor to Alter mode (the character where the cursor is located is
highlighted by a rectangle);
Move the cursor to the character to be altered;
Input the new contents, then the cursor moves to the next character.
Example
33
OPERATION
Move the cursor to the character behind the position where the contents are to be inserted;

Example: The procedures to alter
in block N0020
G0
X0.0
Z0.0 to
are as follows:
Switch the input mode to ALTER mode, move the cursor to the bottom of X , and then input
After alteration, the block becomes N0020
G0
U 0.0
U.
Z0.0.
4.3.4.7 Inserting a Macro String

On program edit page, the procedures of inserting a macro string are as follows:
Press hp6 key to display on the screen the macro string list;
OPERATION
Select the contents to be input by pressing keys according to prompts.

Example
Example: Press hp6 key, then G key, and then input program contents: r = r * r / r. Here, the cursor
stays behind r.
Note
For details about the variables and statement programming, please see Chapter Seven Statement
Programming in Part Programming.
4.3.4.8
Storage Capacity for Programs
The system provides 400k storage capacity for storing programs from No.0~ No.252, and No.254.
Therefore, the size of a single program can reach 400K theoretically. For No.253, the system provides
another 4 M storage space.
Explanation
1) The screen displays the remaining program storage capacity, as well as the remaining storage
size of the system program area.
2) If the size of the program (No. 0252, 254) being edited currently is greater than the max.
storage capacity (400k), the program cannot be saved. and the system prompts that the program
storage space is full: Edit area overflow. If the remaining storage space is insufficient, delete
some old programs.
3) The edit storage space for No. 253 program is 4 M, but the program cannot be saved.
4) If the size of a program is large, it takes longer time to save the program.
4.3.4.9
Operating No. 253 Program
As the size of No. 253 program can be up to 4M, the operation of this program is special. The
procedures are as follows:
1 The No. 253 program cannot be saved into the system. It is lost after power-off.
2 When No. 253 program is changed to other programs, the No. 253 program cannot be saved
neither, i.e. it will be lost;
3 The communication of No. 253 program is unavailable by using USB or RS232 mode.
Note
1)
34
No.253 program cannot be saved.
Chapter Four
2)
No.253 program cannot by copied or renamed.
4.3.4.10
Operating No. 254 Program
After selecting No. 254 program on program edit page, press hp5 key, then the help information
about how to edit, solidify and read No. 254 program appears. The operation procedures are as follows:
Key 5, for editing and solidifying No. 254 program:
1)
When compiling No. 254 program, if the compiling fails, the system issues an alarm; if the
compiling succeeds, the program is saved to the solidification area (FLASH)
OPERATION
Key 4, for extracting No. 254 program:
2)
It reads No. 254 program saved in the solidification area (FLASH) to the edit buffer area, to
update the program.
Key 6, for deleting the custom command of No. 254 program
3)
If there is a custom command in the solidification area, the command will be displayed on the
screen. After the custom command in No. 254 program is deleted, there is no custom command
in the system solidification area; the help information dialog box for No. 254 program prompts
No custom command in solidification area
Press ESC key to exit the current state.
4)
4.3.5 Function of hp5 Key

hp5 help key includes help for system commands, help for obtaining relative parameters of an arc,
rearrangement of line numbers, replacement of strings, cursor location, MPG cursor movement, etc.
If the program number of the current program is 253 or 254, hp5 help key adds the prompts for the
operation of No. 253 program or No. 254 program.
4.3.5.1
Help for Part Program Command
When hp5
are input on program edit page, the system prompts Command help introduction
interface; this function is capable of retrieving all the commands of the system, including G, M, S, T, F
commands. The operation procedures are as follows:
1) Press G, M, S, T, or F key to respectively view the corresponding explanation for the G, M, S, T or
F command.
2) Press INPUT key, then input the command number to be searched; the system displays the
meaning, function, format as well as explanation for the command number.
Example
Example: Searching the command help for G05

Press keys: hp5
INPUT
G 05
ENTER, then the system prompts the meaning, function,
format and explanation for G05.
35

4.3.5.2
Help for Obtaining Relative Parameters of Arc
Input hp5
2 on program edit page, then the system prompts Please input relative arc parameters
interface; this function is for obtaining the parameters of an arc.

Input [start point coordinates] , [end point coordinates] , [circle radius ], then the system will
automatically calculate the relative parameters of the arc.
Example
OPERATION
As shown in the figure below: Coordinates of start point A (Z60X10), coordinates of start pinot B
(Z40X30).
[Please input relative arc parameters] (Explanation: X direction is the radial programming,
P413_d6=1 )
[Start point coordinates] Z 60
[End point coordinates] Z 40
10
30
[Circle radius] R 20
After inputting the data above, the system will automatically calculate the following data:
CW circle center 1:
Z 40 X
10
(The values of Z and X arethe coordinate values

of CW circle center 1.)
CCW circle center 2:
Z 60
30
(The values of Z and X arethe coordinate values

of CW circle center 2.)
Start point -> Circle center 1:
Z -20 X
(The values of Z and X arethe Z and X vectors

of start point A pointing to circle center 1.)
End point -> Circle center 1:
Z 0
-20

of end point B pointing to circle center 1.)
Start point -> Circle center 2 Z 0 X
20

of start point A pointing to circle center 2)
End point-> Circle center 2: Z 20
0 (The values of Z and X arethe Z and X vectors

of end point B pointing to circle center 2)
36
Chapter Four
4.3.5.3
Rearrangement of Program Line Numbers
Input hp5 3 on program edit page, then the system rearranges the programs, with the rearranged
program numbers increased based on the multiple of 10. (Parameter P333 is set to 10)
Note
4.3.5.4
Replacement of Strings
Input hp5 R on program edit page, then the system prompts String replacement page; perform
the operation according to the system prompts. After the replacement of the string, all the characters to
be replaced are replaced from the current character where the cursor is located to the last character.
4.3.5.5
Cursor Position
The string search function provided by the system is used for locating the contents to be searched,
which is convenient for the user to search the desired contents. Press hp5 key on program edit page,
then the system prompts the functions of
and F key as follows:
1)
Press
key to move the cursor to the first page of the current program.
2)
Press
key to move the cursor to the last page of the current program.
3)
After pressing F key, input the string to be searched in the current program, then press ENTER
key. After that, the cursor is located at the searched string, highlighted in red. In inputting the
string to be searched, the system automatically records the latest 10 times of string search. If
there is no record, nothing is displayed.
4) According to the system prompts, press
or
to move the cursor up or down to
search the desired string in the current program. If the desired string does not exist in the current
program, the system prompts: Search completed, string not found
4.3.5.6
Cursor Movement by MPG
After the MPG is connected to the system, press MPG key on the program edit page. You can
quickly browse the programs by rotating the MPG to control the movement of the cursor when the MPG
LED indicator on the operation panel lights up. By pressing MPG key again, the LED indicator goes out.
In this case, it is unavailable to perform MPG operation. For the connection of MPG, see Part
Connection.
37
OPERATION
2)
After the block numbers are rearranged, if the skip command is used in programming, the
program skip error may occur.
When the value of parameter P333 is 0, the program number rearrangement function is invalid.
1)

4.3.6 Compiling a Part Program
The compiling command key hp3 in the system is used for compiling a part program, and checking
the grammar error, logic error, and whether the coordinate data causes overtravel according to the
execution path of the part program, in a bid to reduce the alarm errors when the program is executed in
AUTO operation mode, and improve the safety of executing the part program.
OPERATION
By pressing the compiling command key, the system checks and compiles the part program from the
first block according to the execution path, and generates an object code which is convenient for
execution. If an error in the program is detected, the system stops the compiling, displaying the word
position and error number in the block where the source program error occurs, and prompting the user to
modify the error.
4.3.6.1
hp3 Compiling Command
On program edit page, press hp3 key, the system compiles the current program line by line. If an
error message is detected, a windowProgram Alarm pops up. If no error exists in all commands, the
system displays: Current program compiling succeeded
The information of Program Alarmconsists of:
Error: indicates error codes (View Chapter Six Alarm Message in PART Programming
according to the codes);
Program: indicates contents in the error block;
Position: indicates error letter or word in the error block.
Explanation
1)
Only those programs successfully compiled by hp3 can be executed in Auto operation mode.
2)
The system automatically completes the compiling when the control is switched from edit
operation mode to other operation modes.
3)
AfterProgram Alarmappears during the compiling by hp3 key, the cursor automatically moves
to the error block by pressing any key.
4)
During the execution of hp3 compiling command, the system starts execution from the first
block of the current program, assuming that the axes of the machine take the position of the
current workpiece coordinates as the start point. Therefore, for some special programs, the
stop position of each axis may affect the compiling; it is suggested that each axis stop in
advance at the machining start point.
4.3.6.2 Result Analysis of Program Compilation

On program edit page, there are two types of alarm due to program compiling error: [Program Alarm]
and [Program Compound Check Alarm]. Only when the above types of alarm are not issued, can the
compiling succeed.
Therein:
38
Chapter Four
Program alarm: means the alarms caused by the command error in the programming. The alarm
can be removed by inputting a correct command. It is not closely relative to the parameter setting.
Program compound check alarm: means the alarm which occurs during the program command
check (relevance check according to the setting of auxiliary parameters and interface parameters). It is
required to analyze the program in accordance with the setting of auxiliary parameters and interface
parameters, and then modify the program and parameter setting to remove the alarm.
Example
OPERATION
[Example for program alarm]:

When pressing hp3 key to compile a program, the alarm is displayed as follows:
Program alarm
Error E206Missing message
ProgramN0100 G92 Z300 P1
Position P
[Example for program compound check alarm

After the current program is compiled successfully by pressing hp3 key, and the control is switched
from the Edit operation mode to the other modes, the alarm is displayed as follows:
Program comound check alarm
Error E610 Illegal use of M78
This function is invalid.
4.3.6.3
Prompts of Program Compound Check
After the program is compiled, if no error is detected, in general, the program can be executed in
Auto operation mode. However, under the following conditions, the system displays the prompts of the
program compound check.
1) The range of tool nose soft limit or machine soft limit is exceeded.
During the execution of the program, if the range of tool nose soft limit or machine soft limit is
exceeded, the system displays the program compound check prompts when the control is switched from
EDIT operation mode to AUTO operation mode.
2Inconsistent with the tool setting record
If tool setting inconsistence occurs during the execution of the program, the system displays the
program compound check prompts when the control is switched from the EDIT operation mode to the
AUTO operation mode.
Example
[Example for program compound check alarm]
E.g. When the tool is T0408 during tool setting, and there is T0308 in the program, it is inconsistent
with the tool setting record; When bit parameter P403_d4 is set to 1, an alarm message T0308
inconsistent with tool setting record T0408 pops up when the control is switched from the EDIT operation
mode to the AUTO operation mode.
39

4.4
JOG Operation Mode
In JOG (Manual) operation mode, the user can perform a certain operation pressing function keys
directly, or perform a certain setting or operation pressing letter keys. For each step, the system offers
corresponding intelligent prompt messages.
Descriptions for the relative setting or the input format and examples of relative operation are as
follows: The function keys required to press are indicated by a sign; the letter keys or numeric keys
OPERATION
are indicated by an underline; the prompt messages of the system are indicated by a rectangle.
If incorrect data is input during the input of letters or figures, press
key to delete it , and then
input the correct data

When setting or inputting an item, or during the man-machine dialogue, if ESC key is pressed before
confirmation, it means the current operation is quit
In Manual operation mode,
key is displayed on the upper right corner of the screen; After
pressing this key, a window pops up, displaying the directory of the operation keys in Manual mode;
by pressing this key again, the window is closed; by pressing other function keys directly, the window
is automatically closed.
Press operation mode select key
to enter Manual operation mode.
For the CNC machine tool, a large amount of work, such as the installation and debugging of a variety of
electrical components, debugging of motion performance, establishment of the coordinate system and
tool preparation, is completed in Manual operation mode.
After the Manual page is entered, the system performs necessary analysis and pre-check in accordance
with the user parameter list and tool offset values. If the precheck finds that the Manual operation may
result in serious accidents, the system locks the function of Manual operation, and pops up a window
displaying an alarm message; In this case, the user should modify relative parameters according to the
alarm message, and then perform Manual operation.
This system provides multiple modes for the execution of part programs. Before the execution, the user
can perform necessary setting in Manual operation mode, to ensure the safety during machining.
The main functions of Manual operation mode include:
The axes can be moved in JOG mode, STEP mode or MPG mode.
The axes can be moved by absolute or incremental programming.
Establishment of machine coordinate system, establishment of workpiece coordinate system
Auxiliary functions such as spindle, chuck, cooling, or tool post
Tool setting
Real-time display of the states of the machine tool, real-time alarm displayed in a popup window.
Note: 928TD system has no Y axis function.
40
Chapter Four
System Operation - Jog
The Manual page is displayed as fig. 4-4:
[JOG]
Popup
window
X 0289.850ESP Emergency
stop alarm
Z 0104.060
01 00
Upper
left
Top
JOG
100%
100%
S0500
Middle
right
OPERATION
S01
G97 S0200 r
Lower left
G98 F30
F 00100
EDIT
JOG
AUTO
PARA
OFFS
DIAG
Fig. 4-4, Manual operation mode

Explanation for each area of the interface:
Top: Displaying the manual feed operation mode, including JOG, STEP, X/Z MPG; prompt key
for system function operation methods;
Upper left: Displaying tool nose coordinates as well as machine coordinates;
Lower left: MDI input and alarm prompt area;
Middle right: Displaying the current states of the machine, including messages about the spindle,
cooling, lubricating, chuck, tailstock, rotating speed and cutting speed;
Popup window: Displaying the system alarm messages.
Explanations for the display of auxiliary function states:
1) The states of auxiliary functions are indicated by an icon or corresponding instruction code sign;
2) A black sign indicates the current state; e.g. spindle, cooling, etc;
3) A red sign indicates the function is being executed;
4) A blinking red sign indicates that the function was unsuccessfully executed or interrupted (e.g.
reset, emergency stop) last time, and the system assumes that the corresponding function is in
an uncertain state. When the tool or chuck is in an uncertain state, it is unavailable to start the
machining program; Only by performing a successful operation or turning the power OFF then
back ON, can the system recover to the normal state.
5) When there is constant response detection for the chuck/tailstock, the green signal indicates a
normal state, while the yellow sign indicates an abnormal state;
6) The S behind the spindle gear indicates the spindle speed detected in real time;
7) Pressure detection icon : It is green when it is normal. It becomes half-empty yellow as soon
as the low pressure is detected; when the time that the low pressure lasts exceeds half of the
time set in P332, it turns to entirely-empty yellow;
8) G96/G97 and S indicate whether the mode is the constant surface speed cutting mode; S
indicates the set surface speed or rotating speed, unit: m/minor r/min;
9) G98/G99 indicates whether the mode is feed per rotation or feed per minute; F is the set cutting
speed;
10) F indicates the actual movement speed of the coordinate axis.
41

4.4.1
Coordinate Axis Movement
Before moving the coordinate axis, please determine the movement speed, movement
distance first. In case of emergency, press down the Emergency Stop button immediately.
4.4.1.1
JOG movement
OPERATION
By pressing
key, the control can be switched from STEP or MPG mode to JOG mode.
JOG movementmeans holding a coordinate axis movement key to cause the machine slide
carriage to move continuously; When the key is released, the machine carriage decelerates to stop.
The meanings of axis movement keys are as follows:
X axis direction movement key;
X axis + direction movement key
Z axis/Y axis direction movement key (That the indicator of

for Y axis.)
Z axis/Y axis + direction movement key (That the indicator of

Y axis.)
Switching between Z and Y axes:
key lights up is
key lights up is for
By pressing Z/Y axis switch key, the user can switch the operation between Z axis and Y axis; that
the Z/Y axis switch indicator lights up is for Y axis operation. (when bit parameter P405_d1=1, the
machine tool has Y axis, then the switch is valid). Note: 928TD system has no Y axis function.
When the machine tool is switched to Y axis operation, it is also the Y axis that is valid for operations
such as program reference point return and machine zero point return.
Attention
1)
When the motor is running at a high speed, if the coordinate axis movement key has been
released, the machine carriage keeps moving instead of stopping immediately, because of the
automatic acceleration/deceleration of the system. The movement distance varies with the max.
motor speed, system acceleration/deceleration time and feedrate. The higher the speed is, and
the longer the acceleration/deceleration time is, the longer the distance the slide carriage moves;
and vice versa.
4.4.1.2
Step Movement
By pressing
key, the system can be switched from JOG mode or MPG mode to STEP
mode.
STEP movementindicates that the slide carriage moves a pre-set step width pressing a
coordinate axis movement key once. The movement speed is executed at the selected rapid traverse
42
Chapter Four
rate or feedrate. However, the max. movement speed of Z, X, Y axis is respectively limited by parameter
P100, P101, P102.
By holding the key, the slide carriage feeds continuously by step width. The last step width is moved
when the key is released. The step width of Step movement is displayed in the black background.
The step width of STEP movement is divided into 6 levels: 0.001
0.01
0.1
1.0
10.0
50.0.
Press STEP REGULATION key repeatedly to select a level.
Note
The movement can be stopped by pressing CYCLE PAUSE key during movement. After the key is
pressed, the slide carriage decelerates to stop, without retaining the remaining step width.
4.4.1.3
MPG Control Movement
Pressing
key, the user can switch the control from JOG or STEP mode to MPG mode.
That the indicator lights up indicates the MPG mode is selected.

MPG movementindicates that the system receives the pulse signals generated from the manual
pulse generator (MGP or handwheel) to control the movement of the axis. The user can slightly control
the movement of the coordinate axis by rotating the MPG.
Determining the movement amount per scale for the MPG before hand
When the MPG dial rotates one scale, the coordinate axis moves one step width. There are three
gears (0.001mm, 0.01mm, 0.1mm) selectable for the step width. The user can press STEP
REGULATION key to switch among the three gears.
Determining the coordinate axis controlled by the MPG before hand:
Pressing MPG key repeatedly, the user can select one coordinate axis (between X or Z/Y)
controlled by the MPG. The coordinate of the selected axis is highlighted. When the indicator of Y/Z axis
switch lights up, by repeatedly pressing MPG key, the MPG-controlled axis is switched between Y axis
and X axis.
After selecting the coordinate axis to be moved, rotate the MPG to move the selected axis.
Rotating the MPG clockwise moves the coordinate axis in the positive direction. Rotating the MPG
counterclockwise moves the coordinate axis in the negative direction.
Note
1)
The MPG rotation speed should be less than 5 r/s. If it is exceeded, the motor cannot stop
immediately even if the MPG stops rotating, resulting in the MPG rotating scale differing
from the movement amount of the slide carriage.
2)
In MPG mode, neither JOG or STEP movement function, nor the program zero point return
and machine zero point return are valid.
3)
In MPG mode, when operating the functions relative to coordinate axis movement, e.g.
when inputting word absolute/incremental movement, the functions relative to the MPG is
forbidden temporarily. In this case, the MPG operation is invalid, with its LED indicator
flicking. After the above-mentioned functions are executed, the MPG functions
43
OPERATION
1)

automatically resumes.
4)
When a large override (0.1 mm gear) is selected, if the MPG is rotated at a high speed, the
slide carriage moves at a high speed. Here, even if the MPG is not rotated, the slide
carriage still keeps moving instead of stopping immediately. The moving distance varies
with the max. motor speed, system acceleration/deceleration time, feedrate and MPG
rotation speed. The higher the max. speed is, and the longer the acceleration/deceleration
time is, and the faster the MPG is rotated, the longer the distance that the slide carriage
OPERATION
moves before it stops by deceleration, and vice versa.

5)
When parameter P400_d4 is set to 0, step width 0.1 is valid; When parameter P400_d4 is set
to 1, step width 0.1 is invalid.
6)
When p400_d1 is set to 1, neither the control knob of the external MPG, nor the Y/Z axis
select key and step regulation key are valid.
4.4.1.4
Selecting Rapid Traverse Rate
Selecting manual rapid traverse or low-speed feed state

In Manual state, the speed of each axis in the negative/positive direction can be selected as either
rapid traverse mode or cutting feed (low-speed traverse) mode. By pressing
key, the user can
switch the state between manual rapid traverse and manual low-speed feed. That the speed indicator
lights up indicates the rapid traverse state is selected.
Rapid traverse override

There are four gears for the rapid traverse override, which are 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%. Pressing
key once, the override is increased by one gear till 100%. Pressing
key once, the
rapid traverse override decreases by one gear till 25%.

In the manual rapid traverse, the actual traverse speed is determined by the rapid traverse rate and
the rapid traverse override.
Actual traverse speed of Z (X, Y) axis = P100 P101, P102 rapid traverse override
The manual movement operation affected by rapid traverse override and feedrate override is as
follows:
JOG movement operation: When the speed indicator lights up, it is affected by rapid traverse
override; when the indicator goes out, it is affected by feedrate override.
STEP movement operation: When the speed indicator lights up, it is affected by rapid traverse
Input word movement operation: When the speed indicator lights up, it is affected by rapid traverse
Program reference point return operation:
Machine zero point return operation:
44
It is affected by rapid traverse override.
It is affected by rapid traverse override.
Chapter Four
Note
1)
2)
In manual Jog movement mode, first select the rapid traverse override, and then press the axis
movement key.
In manual Step movement mode, the user can select the rapid traverse override first, or adjust
the rapid traverse override during movement, with the traverse speed changed accordingly.
4.4.1.5 Selecting Speed for Low-speed Feed
key, the low-speed feed state is
selected.
System built-in feedrate

When the F value of the input word is 0, the system uses the built-in feedrate.
The manual feedrate consists of 16 gears from 0150% (increment: 10%). The corresponding
feedrate of each gear is as follows:

Feedrate
override
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
Feedratemm/ min
0
7.5
22
38
60
82
110
180
Feedrate
override
80%
90%
100%
110%
120%
130%
140%
150%
Feedratemm/ min
240
300
420
525
675
850
1000
1260
Note
1) There is an error between the speed in the table and the system actual speed. The system
actual speed prevails.
2) When the feedrate override is 0, the system prompts Feedrate override is 0; which
indicates the command is being executed, and the slide carriage is in the standstill state.
To cause the slide carriage to move immediately, adjust the feedrate override to a value
other than 0.
Feedrate override
There are 16 gears (0%150% with an increment of 10%) selectable for the feedrate override; By
key once, the feedrate override increases by one gear till 150%; By pressing
pressing
key, the feedrate override decreases by one gear till 0%.
4.4.1.6
Inputting a Word to Move, Setting Feedrate
In Manual operation mode, it is available to move the axes according to the input length and
direction, or to directly move the axes to the input coordinate position from the current position. The
operation methods are as follows:
45
OPERATION
When the speed indicator goes out by pressing
Words relative to movement

The corresponding operation of each axis is:
X axis movement __ X word (position of X axis), or U word (relative movement amount of X axis)
Y axis movement__ Y word (position of Y axis), or V word (relative movement amount of Y axis)
Z axis movement __ Z word (position of Z axis), or W word (relative movement amount of Z axis)
Range of word X, Z, Y, U, W, V: -99999.999mm99999.999mm
Feedrate __ F word (F0000F4000, the leading zero can be omitted, unit: mm/min)
OPERATION
Format of movement word

Z(W)_
F_
Z axis moves alone. If F is omitted, the speed is determined by the state of

system rapid traverse/feedrate (the same below).
Y(V)_
F_
Y axis moves alone.
Z(W)_
X(U)_
F_
Z/X axes move simultaneously.
X(U)_
Y(V)_
F_
X/Y axes move simultaneously.
Z(W)_
Y(V)_
F_
Z/Y axes move simultaneously.
Note
1)
In Manual operation mode, up to two axes can move simultaneously, at the selected manual
traverse speed.
2)
When Y axis is enabled by setting the system parameter, Y (V) word can be input.
Example 1
Input:
Move W
-5.2
Enter
Run?
START
(or ESC cancel); this means that Z axis
moves 5.2 mm in the negative direction.

Input:
Move X
40
Enter
Run?
START (or ESC cancel); this means that X axis moves to
the position of which the coordinate is 40.

Example 2
Input: Z200 U50
; Z axis moves to 200, X moves 50 in the positive direction. F speed is not

specified, so it is determined by the state of rapid traverse/feed.
Input: U20 W-50 F80
; X axis moves 20 in the positive direction, Z axis moves 50 in the

negative direction. Feedrate is 80, affected by the feedrate override.
Input: F200
The feedrate is set to 200. The system is switched to Feed state.
Input: F0
The feedrate is set to 0. The system is switched to Feed state and the
built-in speed is used.
Explanations for the movement speed:

1)
If word F is not input, when the current speed indicator lights up, the speed is rapid traverse,
which is affected by the rapid override; when the indicator goes out, the speed is low-speed
movement, affected by the feedrate override.
2)
If word F is input, the system automatically switches to the low-speed feed state, with the speed
indicator off; Feedrate override gear is the current gear; if the input F value is greater than the
one set in P113, the latter one prevails.
46
Chapter Four
3)
If the input value of word F is 0, the system uses the built-in feedrate.
4)
Both JOG movement operation and STEP movement operation are controlled by word F even if
the speed indicator goes out.
5)
If word F is not input, when the indicator goes out, the speed of the low-speed feed is limited by
parameter P113 (max. cutting feedrate); if the speed of the low-speed feed is greater than the
one set in P113, the latter prevails.
If word F is not input, when the indicator goes out and the speed is double-axis low-speed feed,
G01 command in AUTO operation mode. The two axes rapid traverse proportionally and stop
proportionally at the same time.
7)
If word F is not input, when the indicator lights up, the speed of the single-axis rapid traverse is
determined by parameters P100P102 (rapid traverse rate) and rapid traverse override.
8)
If word F is not input, when the indicator lights up, the movement of the double-axis rapid
traverse is determined by parameter P400_d3, which is the same as that in executing G00
command in Auto operation mode. When bit parameter P400_d3=0, the movement mode is
independent movement mode that each axis rapidly and independently traverses. The resultant
speed displayed on the screen is greater than the max. traverse speed of each axis. When bit
parameter P400_d3=1, the mode is the interpolation movement mode, i.e. the double axes
rapid traverse proportionally and stop proportionally at the same time. The system takes both
movement parameters and slope of the movement line segments into consideration, ensuring
no step out occurs during movement. It is normal that the rapid traverse rate varies with the line
segments with different slopes (priority is given to the axis which moves slower)
9)
When the feedrate override is 0, and the system is in the low-speed state or there is word F in
the block, no movement is allowed. After Enter key is pressed, the system prompts Feedrate
override is 0 until the feedrate override is adjusted to another value.
10)
Word F is input using G98 command. The system cannot input G99 command.
Calling a word for execution

During the movement by inputting a word, the system automatically saves the latest 8 times of
command record that has been executed.
key, the system displays a window showing the record list; the operator can call
By pressing
a record by pressing the numeric keys, and then modify or execute it directly.
4.4.1.7
Drive Unit Enabling Control
Set bit parameter P416_d4 to 1, and press DELETE key twice successively in Manual or Auto mode,
then the servo unit is turned off, and the motor is in the free state. By pressing DELETE key once when
the drive unit is turned off, the unit is turned on, and the motor is in the working state.
4.4.1.8
Alarm Prompts for Coordinate Axis Movement
When operating the axis movement, if the currently moving axis touches the soft limit of tool nose
47
OPERATION
its movement mode is the interpolation movement mode, which is the same as that in executing
6)

coordinates (tool nose soft limit), the axis stops moving, and the screen displays a corresponding alarm.
If the axis touches the machine coordinate soft limit (mechanical soft limit), the axis can only be moved in
the opposite direction, the axis can only be moved in the opposite direction. However, Manual Zero Point
Return is not restricted by the range of the soft limit.
Note
In JOG feed or STEP feed mode, when the movement axis reaches the soft limit, the system
issues the soft limit alarm. When a command is input to move Z/X axes in input word movement
OPERATION
mode, if the specified value exceeds the range, the system prompts the soft limit alarm and does
not perform execution. Whether the alarm for the machine or tool nose soft limit is valid is set by
parameter P404_d4 or P404_d3 respectively.
4.4.2 Establishing a Coordinate System

4.4.2.1
Establishing Machine Coordinate SystemMachine Zero Return (Machine
Reference Point Return)
Machine zero
The machine coordinate system is the reference coordinate system for CNC to calculate the
coordinate position. It is the inherent coordinate system of the machine tool. After the system is installed,
you should establish the machine coordinate system first.
The reference point of the machine coordinate system is referred to as the machine zero. (or
machine reference point, or mechanical zero). For each machine, there is a fixed point taken as the
machine reference point. Each time the machine returns to the machining start point after returning to
machine zero, the error of the machine coordinate system caused by power-off and stepout can be
removed. After unexpected power-off, you can retrieve the machine coordinate system and workpiece
coordinate system by performing zero return, without setting the tool again.
In most cases, the system seeks the machine reference point using the deceleration switch and
zero switch installed on the machine; you can install the deceleration switch only, then use the
one-revolution signal of the servo motor to seek the machine reference point. The deceleration switches
are generally installed on the max. stroke of Z/X axes in the positive direction.
Operations for machine zero return

Press
key to cause X axis to perform machine zero return;
Press
key to cause Z axis to perform machine zero return.
In Manual operation mode, by pressing
key, Z axis rapidly traverses to Z axis machine
zero at the selected rapid traverse rate.
48
The process of performing zero return by the system is as follows:
Chapter Four
Zero return mode 1: When there is a deceleration signal and a zero signal, the system performs
execution by mode 1; the procedures of machine zero return are as follows:
Step 1: The axes rapidly traverse at the rapid traverse rate in the specified direction, and
decelerate to stop when the system detects the start point of the deceleration signal
after the deceleration switch is pressed down.
Step 2: The axes traverse at the specified zero return speed in the reverse direction, and
decelerate to stop when the start point of the deceleration signal is detected.
Step 4: The axes continue to move at the specified zero return speed, and then decelerate to
stop when the zero signal is detected.
Step 5: Then the zero return and detection is completed; finally, the system automatically
modifies the machine coordinates of the current point to the zero position coordinates
set by the parameter.
Zero return mode 2: When there is no zero signal but only a deceleration signal, the system
performs execution by mode 2.
Compared with mode 1, mode 2 has no zero signals, so step 3 and step 4 are unnecessary;
Only step 1, step 2 and step 5 are required to complete the zero return. However, the precision
of the zero return of this mode is poorer than that of mode 1.
Zero return mode 3: When there is no deceleration signal, but only a zero signal, the system
Compared with mode 1, mode 3 has no deceleration signal, so step 1, step 2 and step 3 are
unnecessary; Only step 4 and step 5 are required to complete the zero return. In this mode, the
operator needs to move the axes to a specified position manually, and then performs the zero
return. Otherwise, the result is incorrect.
Zero return mode 4: Where there is neither a deceleration signal nor a zero signal, the system
If there is no machine zero detection device (including zero switch and deceleration switch)
installed on the machine, set the relative parameter to 0;
If the machine zero return function is performed at this moment, the system does not detect the
zero signal and deceleration signal till the zero coordinate position of the axis is returned to.
Note
1)
All the axes return to the machine zero in the zero return direction. Therefore, if the zero
return direction is set to the positive direction before the zero return, the axes should
stay at the negative direction of the machine zero.
2)
During the machine zero return, the rapid traverse rate of the coordinate axis is
restricted by the rapid traverse override.
3) During the machine zero return, the movement of the axis is not restricted by the soft
limit parameters.
4) For the parameters relative to the machine zero return, see Parameter Setting Operation
Mode in Part Programming.
49
OPERATION
Step 3: If the specified zero offset is not 0, another zero offset will be moved.

5) For the connection and zero return modes of the machine zero return, see Machine Zero
Return and Connection in Part Connection.
6) After the execution of the machine zero return, behind the corresponding machine
coordinates on the screen is displayed the blue icon
(indicating the machine zero
return) as a prompt.
OPERATION
4.4.2.2
Establishing Machine Coordinate System without Machine Zero (No Machine
Reference Point)
(Note: This operation is invalid for those axes equipped with zero detection devices)
For those axes without zero detection devices (without a deceleration signal and zero signal), the
operations below can be used to create a machine coordinate system.
Format
Input: INPUT U New coordinate ENTER. To modify the machine coordinate of X axis to the
new coordinate.
Input: INPUT W New coordinate ENTER. To modify the machine coordinate of Z axis to the
new coordinate.
4.4.2.3
Setting Workpiece Coordinate System
This system employs the floating workpiece coordinate system. The floating workpiece coordinate
system is the reference for the tool setting and relative dimension.
After determining the machine
coordinate system, you should set the workpiece coordinate system.

Format
Input: INPUT
X New coordinate
ENTER. To modify the current tool nose coordinate of X axis
to the new coordinate.

Input: INPUT
Z New coordinate
ENTER. To modify the current tool nose coordinate of Z axis
to the new coordinate.
The procedures of setting workpiece coordinate system are as follows:

Fix the trial-cut workpiece on the machine, then select any tool (in general, the first tool used in the
machining)
1.
Set the workpiece coordinate in the X direction:

1)
Select an appropriate spindle speed to start the spindle.
2)
Move the tool to cut a small step on the trial-cut workpiece, and keep the X axis position
unchanged.
3) Move the tool to a safe position in the Z direction and then stop the spindle. Measure the
diameter of the cut step.
4) Press INPUT key, the screen displays Setting, then press X key, the screen displays Set
50
Chapter Four
workpiece coordinate system X; input the measured diameter (input radius if in radius
programming) , press ENTER key, then the system automatically sets the workpiece coordinate
of X axis.
2.
Setting the workpiece coordinate in Z axis direction

1)
Start the spindle and move the tool to cut an end face on the workpiece. Keep the position of Z
axis unchanged.
2)
Move the tool to a safe position in the X direction, then stop the spindle.
machine, such as the chuck end face or other reference faces, so that the newly established
workpiece coordinate system coincides with the original one after the latter one is broken) .
Measure the distance from the cut end face to the selected reference point in the Z axis
direction.
3)
Press ENTER key, the screen displays Setting, then press Z key, the screen displays Set
workpiece coordinate system Z; input the measured data, then press ENTER key, then the
system automatically sets the workpiece coordinate of Z axis.
Note: After the above operations, the establishment of the system workpiece coordinate system is
completed.
Explanations
1)
The operations of setting the workpiece coordinate system are to modify the tool nose
coordinates of the current point under the condition that the machine coordinates and tool
compensation are not changed. The result of the operation is equal to that after resetting the
offset amount between workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system.
2)
In general, the operations of setting the workpiece coordinate system are performed once after
the system initialization, or after the replacement of the workpiece type (when all the tool
compensation values are cleared). It is unnecessary to set the workpiece coordinate system
afterwards.
Note
When the actual position of the tool is inconsistent with the one of the workpiece coordinate
system due to the step out caused by some special causes, it is inappropriate to use the method
of resetting the workpiece coordinate system, because both workpiece coordinate system and
machine coordinate system are changed after step-out. In this case, if only the workpiece
coordinate system is corrected, without correcting the machine coordinate system, an
unexpected machine coordinate soft limit alarm may occur.
After the motor is out of step, the appropriate operations are as follows:
1) Choose a reference point for tool setting (a position easy for the tool nose to reach and
easy to observe), and measure Z and X coordinates of this point;
2) Move the tool nose to a reference point (the coordinates of the reference point are known)
3)
If the coordinates of the tool nose are inconsistent with those of the reference point,
press DELETE key twice successively to turn off the drive unit;
51
OPERATION
Select a point as the reference point (it is suggested that this point be a fixed point on the

4)
Input word movement to make the tool nose coordinates consistent with the reference
point coordinates (the coordinates are changed without changing actual tool nose);
5)
Press DELETE key again to turn on the drive unit.

After the above operations, both the machine coordinate system and the workpiece
coordinate system are corrected.
4.4.2.4
Setting Program Reference Point
OPERATION
In the machine coordinate system, the operator should determine a position. When the tool nose
stays at this position, it is safe and convenient to change the tool and clamp the workpiece. When the
tool post stays at this position to set the program reference point, this position is referred to as the
program reference point (or program zero point). The coordinates of the program reference point are
relative to the machine coordinate system.
Format
By pressing INPUT key, the screen displays Setting; then by pressing 0 key, the screen displays
Set program reference point? ; here, press ENTER key to confirm this point as the program reference
point of Z/X/Y axes.
If the workpiece coordinate system is reset after setting the program reference point, the
coordinates of the original reference point is unchanged in the new workpiece coordinate system. In this
case, reset the program reference point. The initial values of the program reference point are X=150
Z=200.
After setting the program reference point, both the operations of program reference point return
command (G26) and program zero point return using keys on the system operation panel return to this
point, regardless of where the slide carriage is.
4.4.2.5
Program Reference Point Return
Before performing program reference point return, the operator must determine the position
of the program reference point. Otherwise, unexpected accidents may occur.
In Manual operation mode, perform this operation by directly pressing function keys. After pressing
the keys, the corresponding axes rapidly return to the program reference point. When the axis change
indicator lights up, the operation is for Y axis.
By pressing
key, X axis rapidly returns to the program reference point from the current
point.
By pressing
key, Z axis rapidly returns to the program reference point from the current
point.
Note
1) When waiting for machining, each axis should stay at the program reference point generally.
52
Chapter Four
2) After performing program reference point return, the green icon
for the program reference
point return is displayed as a prompt before the corresponding machine coordinates on the
screen.
4.4.2.6
Recovering Workpiece Coordinate System and Program Reference Point
In Manual operation mode, the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point have
been set. If the blocks containing G50 command are executed in Auto operation mode, the workpiece
operator can recover the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point set in the Manual
operation mode.
Format
Key in: G
ENTER , to recover the workpiece coordinate system and program reference
point set in the Manual operation mode
4.4.3
Spindle Control Function
4.4.3.1
Spindle Start/Stop Control
Spindle Start/Stop Operation

In Manual operation mode, it is available to control spindle CW rotation, CCW rotation and spindle
stop by directly pressing the function keys on the panel or by keying in M03/M04/M05 command
(Feed/Spindle hold knob is invalid in Manual operation mode).
Press
key, or key in M
3 ENTER ; the spindle rotates in CW direction. The screen
displays the state of the spindle, and the LED indicator on the key lights up.
Press
key, or key in M
Press
key, or key in M
5 ENTER ; the spindle stops.

4
ENTER ; the spindle rotates in CCW direction. The screen
displays the state of the spindle, and the LED indicator on the key lights up.
Spindle JOG control
It is available to switch to the spindle JOG control using the spindle stop key.
When the spindle stops, by pressing
key, the system switches to the spindle JOG control
state, highlighting the spindle state icon on the screen. By pressing the
system switches to the normal state. In the spindle JOG control state, by pressing
key once again, the

or
key, the spindle rotates for a specified period of time at the specified speed and then stops. (If the
53
OPERATION
coordinate system and program reference point are changed. With the following operations, the
specified time is too long, you can also press
key to stop it). When the spindle is in the JOG
state, the spindle control commands M03, M04, M05 input by MDI are invalid. The spindle JOG speed is
set by parameter P309, and the JOG rotation time by parameter P308. After the JOG time is up, the
spindle stops automatically, with the LED indicator on the key OFF.
Interlock relationship between spindle start/stop and chuck:
When P402_d5=0, the interlock relationship between hydraulic chuck control and spindle control is
OPERATION
as follows:
1) When the chuck is not clamped, it is forbidden to start the spindle; otherwise, Chuck is not
clamped, spindle start forbidden is issued.
2)
When the spindle is rotating, it is forbidden to operate the chuck; otherwise, Spindle is not
stopped, chuck operation forbidden is issued.
Interlock relationship between spindle start/stop and tailstock:

When P402_d3=0, the interlock relationship between tailstock control and spindle control is as
follows:
When the spindle is rotating, it is forbidden to operate the tailstock; otherwise, Spindle is not
stopped, tailstock operation forbidden is issued.
Spindle start/stop execution and signal output time sequence:

Note: Select the spindle control output signal by parameter P410_d7. When P410_d7 is set to 0, it is the spindle
control level output. When P410_d7 is set to 1, it is spindle control pulse output. The time sequence
relationship between spindle brake signal MSP and spindle start/stop signal is as follows:
1 In pulse control mode, the output time sequence of M3, M4, M5, MSP:
Executing M03
M03 pin
Executing M04
ExecutingM05
t1
M04 pin
t1
t1
t1
M05 pin
t2
MSP brake pin
t3
2 In level control mode, output time sequence of M3, M4, M5, MSP (here, M5 pin does not output, which can be
used for other purpose):
Executing M03
Executing M04
Executing M05
M03 pin
t2
M04 pin
t2
MSP brake pin
54
t3
Chapter Four
t1: Hold time output by signal M3, M4, M5 in the pulse control mode, set by parameter P326;
t2: Spindle stop brake delay time, set by parameter P315;
t3: Hold time output by spindle brake signal MSP, set by parameter P316.
4.4.3.2
Spindle S Command Gear Shift Control
order to use S function to shift the spindle gear. The standard format of word S consists of an S and a
two-digit number, which indicates the spindle gear number.
Format of S code
Sx
Sxx
Example
Select the second gear speed of the spindle:
Key in: S
2 ENTER ; the system outputs S02 signal, and the screen displays gear state S02.
Explanations
1)
When parameter P410_d5 is set to 0, the gear control signal is directly output by the bit, and
the range of S code is S00S04. Each gear signal corresponds to one output point. S0 means
all the outputs are invalid.
2) When parameter P410_d5 is set to 1, the gear control signal is the coded output, and the range
of S code is S00S15. The coded output is as follows:
Code
Output
point
S01
S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 S09 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15
S02
S03
S04
Note: in the table indicates that the output of the corresponding output point is valid.
3)
The line number controlled by the actual output of the spindle gear is set by parameter P310.
P310=4, the actual output control points are S01, S02, S03, S04;
P310=3, the actual output control points are S01, S02, S03; S04 is released, which can be
used for other purpose;
P310=2, the actual output control points are S01, S02; S04, S03 are released, which can be
P310=1, the actual output control point is S01; S04, S03, S02 are released, which can be used
for other purpose;
55
OPERATION
If the machine is not equipped with a variable frequency spindle, set parameter P410_d6 to 0, in
(Note: Those users who employ a variable frequency spindle are not required to read this section.)

P310=0S code does not output; S04, S03, S02, S01 are released, which can be used for other
purpose;
4)
During the coded output of the gear control signal (parameter P410_d5 is set to 1), if the control
lines specified by parameter P310 are less than 4, only the low-gear control lines are valid, the
high-gear ones are not output. Thus the high-gear coded control lines are released, which are
not affected by the gear control.
Gear shift execution of spindle S commands and signal output time sequence:
OPERATION
At system power on, the default is S00, and S01S04 are invalid. When executing any one of S01,
S02, S03, S04, the corresponding S signal output is valid and retained, while the other three S signal
outputs are cancelled. When executing S00 command, the outputs of S01S04 are cancelled. Only one
of S01S04 is valid at a time.
Executing S01
Executing S02
Executing S00
S01 pin
t1
S02 pin
t1: Interval time for spindle gear shift (P313).
Function key operation for spindle gear shift

In addition to the above method of executing spindle gear shift, the operator can also change the
spindle gear by pressing spindle gear shift key

By pressing
key once, the spindle speed is output in the order of S01S04 or S00S15
(coded output) recurrently. If there is only the four-gear spindle speed, you need to press
three times to switch the gear to S01 from S02.
key
4.4.3.3 Spindle S Command Rotating Speed Control

(Note: Those users who do not employ a variable frequency spindle are not required to read this
section.)
If the machine is equipped with a variable frequency spindle, set parameter P410_d6 to 1. To solve
the problem that the frequency converter has insufficient torque at a low speed, the system is provided
with four levels of automatic gear shift output signal. With the converter working in a high frequency, the
machine obtains a higher cutting torque at a lower speed. The system uses M41/M42/M43/M44
command for the spindle gear control; and uses S code for the rotation speed control.
Gear Control of the Variable Frequency Spindle
Format
56
Chapter Four
M41
M42
M43
M44
Explanations
M41, M42, M43, M44 output the gear control signals. Each gear signal corresponds to one
output point of S01, S02, S03, S04 respectively.
The control lines of the actual output of the spindle gear is set by parameter P310.
P310=4, the actual output control points are S01, S02, S03, S04;
P310=3, the actual output control points are S01, S02, S03; S04 is released, which can be
P310=2, the actual output control points are S01, S02; S04, S03 are released, which can be
P310=1, the actual output control point is S01; S04, S03, S02 are released, which can be
P310=0, the actual output control points do not output; S04, S03, S02, S1 are released,
which can be used for other purpose;
3)
The initial gear at system power on is M41.
Execution process and signal output time sequence of spindle M gear shifting:
At CNC power on, whether the spindle gear is memorized is controlled by parameter P400_d6
(spindle gear memory):
1)
When the parameter is set to 0, the spindle gear is not memorized at power on after power off.
The default is the first spindle gear, and M41M44 have no output.
2)
When the parameter is set to 1, the spindle gear is memorized at power on after power off.
If the specified gear is consistent with the current one, no gear shift is performed. If the specified
gear is inconsistent with the current one, the process of gear shift is as follows:
Execute any one of M41, M42, M43 and M44 commands, and output the analog voltage to the
spindle servo or frequency converter according to the value (unit: mv) set by data parameter
P314 (the voltage output during spindle gear shift);
After delaying the time set in data parameter P311 (gear shift time 1 of the variable frequency
spindle), turn off the output signal of the original gear;
After delaying P313 (gear switch interval of the variable frequency spindle), output the new gear
shift signal;
When the system is connected to the detection of gear shift in-position signals M41I, M42I,
M43I, M44I; If the gear shift is not in-position, the CNC does not proceeds to the next step until
the gear shift in-position signal is detected; when the system is not connected to the detection
of gear shift in-position signals, it directly proceed s to the next step; M41IM44I input signals
are defined in the interface parameters.
57
OPERATION
2)
1)
After delaying data parameter P312 (gear shift time 2 of the variable frequency spindle), output
the spindle analog voltage by the value set in data parameters P300P303 (corresponding to
gears 1~4 respectively) according to the current gear, to complete the gear shift.
Rotating speed control of the variable frequency spindle

If the machine is equipped with a variable frequency spindle, control the spindle speed using S
commands. The standard format of S command consists of an S and a 4-digit number. The two-digit
number indicates the spindle gear number. There two ways to input spindle speed:
OPERATION
1) S sets the fixed speed of the spindle (r/min); the spindle speed keeps unchanged if S value is
not changed, which is referred to as constant rotation speed control.
2) S sets the surface speed (m/min) of the tool nose relative to the outer circle of the workpiece,
which is referred to as constant surface speed control. In constant surface speed control mode,
the spindle speed varies with the coordinate of X axis during cutting feed. See Constant Speed
Control G96, Constant Speed Control Cancel G97 in Part Programming.
Code format
G96
G96
S__
Setting the constant surface speed cutting state
Setting the constant surface speed cutting state and specifying the value of
the surface speed; range: 09999 m /min;
G97
G97
S__
Cancelling the constant surface speed state; G97 is a modal command;
Cancelling the constant surface speed state and specifying the value of the
rotating speedrange09999 r /min
S__
The type of speed depends on the current state; it is either rotating speed
value or constant surface value.
Example
Key in: S
0 0 ENTER ; the system converts the rotating speed to the analog voltage of 0~10
V and outputs it to the frequency converter via the output interface.

Explanations
1) When executing the S command, the system calculates the analog voltage corresponding to the
rotating speed taking the max. spindle speed of the current spindle gear as a reference, and
then outputs it to the spindle servo or frequency converter.
2) In order to keep the spindle actual speed and the speed set by the S command the same, the
actual max. spindle speed for each gear should be set by parameters P300P303 (when the
output analog voltage is 10 V);
Setting method: First input S__ according to the setting values
of parameters P300P303, then modify the setting of parameters P300P303 according to the
spindle speed displayed by the system.
3) The analog voltage is 0 V at system power on. After executing S command, the system outputs
a corresponding voltage; then the voltage keeps unchanged (unless it is in the cutting feed state
of constant surface speed control and the coordinate of X axis is changed). After executing S0,
58
Chapter Four
the analog voltage output is 0V. The analog voltage output remains unchanged at CNC reset
and emergency stop.
4.4.4
Coolant Control
In Manual operation mode, the coolant ON/OFF operations can be controlled by directly pressing
the function keys on the panel or inputting M08/M09 command.

key, the coolant operation is switched between ON and OFF; The state icon
on the screen, and the LED indicator on the key indicate corresponding states. When the coolant is ON,
the LED indicator lights up; when the coolant is OFF, the indicator goes out.
Key in: M
ENTER; the coolant is ON.
Key in: M
ENTER ; the coolant is OFF.
1)
Output time sequence of M8, M9 in level control mode: (M9 pin does not output, which can be
used for other purpose)
Executing M08
Executing M09
M08 pin
2)
Output time sequence of M8, M9 in pulse control mode:

Executing M08
M08 pin
Executing M09
t1
M09 pin
t1
t1: Hold time of M08, M09 signal output in pulse control mode, set by parameter P326.
Relative parameters
P410_d7: When it is set to 1, the coolant is controlled by the system pulse output; when it is set to
0, the coolant is controlled by the system level output. This parameter is shared by the spindle control
output parameter.
4.4.5
Manual Tool Change Control
In Manual operation mode, the tool change control can be performed by directly pressing the tool
change function key on the panel or inputting T function commands.
Operation of tool change function key

By pressing
key once, the tool post rotates to the next tool number, which will be displayed
on the screen (if parameter P403_d5 is set to confirmation required, press ENTER key afterwards.)
59
OPERATION
By pressing
Input format of T function command

The standard format of the tool function word in this system includes a T and a 4-digit number. The
first two digits indicates the tool number, and the last two digits indicates the tool offset number. It is not
required that all the four digits be input. The operator can use 2~4 digits depending on the conditions.
Format
Txx
____ The first digit means the tool number, and the second number means the tool offset
number
OPERATION
Txxx
____ The first digit means the tool number, and the second two digits means the tool
offset number;
Txxxx
____
The first two digits means the tool number, the last two digits means the tool offset
number.
Explanations
The range of the tool number is determined by parameter P319 (Max. tool number: 1~16); if P319
is 4, the tool number can be 0~4. If the tool number input is 0, the current tool number is maintained.);
Range of tool offset number: 0~64; if the input tool offset number is 0, the tool offset is cancelled.
Example
Key in T
Enter Changing to tool number 4, and executing tool offset number 6
Key in T
Enter Changing to tool number 3, and cancelling tool offset
Key in T
Enter Maintaining the current tool number, and executing tool offset
number 6
Key in T
1 2
Key in T
0 5
Key in T
6 0 8 Enter Changing to tool number 6, and executing tool offset number 8
Key in T
Enter No tool changing, and canceling tool offset
Key in T
4 0
Enter Maintaining the current tool number, and executing tool offset
number 40
Note
1)
Example: Inputting T400 means changing to tool number 4 and cancelling the tool offset. (Note:
T400 cannot be input as T040 here.)
2)
If the electric tool post malfunctions, the system displays the alarm message Tool number
signal detection overtime on the screen, which indicates that the corresponding tool number
cannot be found within a specified period of time.
3) The CNC system employs the absolute tool change mode, so the position of each tool number is
fixed on the tool post when an electric tool post is used. Make sure the tool number where the
tool post is located is the same as that displayed on the screen during installation and
debugging.
60
Chapter Four
4)
When parameter P318 is set to 0, the selected tool post is the line-up tool post, which does not
output the tool change signal during tool change.
5)
The tool offset can be executed by moving the slide carriage or modifying the coordinate system.
It is set by parameter P403_d6.
When P403_d6 is set to 1, the slide carriage is moved without changing the coordinates during
tool offset execution.
6)
If the tool change fails or it is interrupted (by reset, emergency stop), the system assumes that
the tool is in an uncertain position, and keeps the tool number flicking read as an prompt. In this
case, the machining program cannot be started; Only by performing a successfully tool change
or powering on the system after power off, can the system recover to the normal state.
7)
During tool change, if the target tool number is the current one, only the tool offset is changed
without performing tool change output action, with the exception of the following two cases:
After tool change fails, the tool number is flicking red on the screen, which means the tool
number displayed is not necessarily the same as the actual tool number. If the target tool
number in the tool change command to be executed next time is the current tool number, the
system executes one tool change action.
During the first tool change after system power on, if the target tool number is the current tool
number displayed on the screen, the system executes one tool change action.
Execution process and signal output sequence time of T function command:
The system is provided with multiple tool change modes. For details, please refer to Section 3.4
Tool Change Control Function and Connection in Part Connection in this manual.
4.4.6 Manual Tool Change

In general, it is necessary to use different tools to machine a workpiece. Since the tool installation
and tool dimension are different, the position where the tool nose of a tool is located does not coincide
with others when the tool is rotated to the cutting position. In such a case, there exists an offset.
Tool setting is used for the system to automatically store the offset to the specified tool offset
number.
After tool setting, the user can edit the part program according to the workpiece drawing and
machining technique by specifying the corresponding tool offset number in the tool change command of
the program, regardless of the difference between the tools.
The tool offset list of the system is capable of storing 64 groups of tool offset from number 1~64,
with each offset number corresponding to one group. For each group, five items, i.e. Z offset, X offset,
tool radius, imaginary tool nose number, tool setting record are recorded (see Tool Offset Operation
Mode).
Through tool setting, the system modifies Z offset, X offset and tool setting record in the tool offset
number specified by the user. However, the other two items, the tool radius and imaginary tool number,
61
OPERATION
carriage during tool offset execution.
When P403_d6 is set to 0, the coordinates displayed are modified without moving the slide

should be input in advance, because the system needs to reference to these two items during tool
setting. Otherwise, unexpected results may occur (if the tool is not ball-shape, both the two items should
be set to 0 in advance. For details, see Tool Offset Operation Mode).
Tool setting record item means the system automatically records the tool number when the number
is set to the tool offset number. For safety reasons, the system will scan the machining program using
tool setting record. E.g. the T command is T0409 during tool setting, but the machining program includes
T0309, so it is inconsistent with the tool setting record. It is highly dangerous in this case, and the system
OPERATION
prompts an alarm message.

Precautions before tool setting
1) According to the above description, determine the offset number where the system stores the
offset value in advance , and determine the contents of the imaginary tool nose item of the offset
number in advance.
2) For the same tool nose, only Z offset and X offset can be stored to the same offset number.
Otherwise, unexpected accidents may occur.
3) In general, it is recommended that tool number 1 use offset number 1, and tool number 2 use
tool offset number 2 for convenience.
4)
It is suggested that the operator execute the offset number first, and then perform tool setting,
making the operation visible. E.g. if the offset value in tool number 4 needs to be stored to offset
number 9, first execute T49 command.
5) The tool setting must be performed on the condition that the workpiece coordinate system is
normal. Otherwise, unexpected accidents may occur.
The system is provided with trial-cut tool setting and fixed-point tool setting, which can be chosen by the
user. The explanations for them are as follows:
Trial-cut tool setting (method 1):
Format
Key in: I
Measured value
ENTER
[Tool offset number]
Enter. To modify the current tool
nose coordinate of X axis to the new coordinate.

Key in: K
Measured value
ENTER
[Tool offset number]
Enter. To modify the current tool
nose coordinate of Z axis to the new coordinate.

The procedures for trial-cut tool setting are as follows:
After fixing the workpiece on the machine, the user can perform tool setting to any tool with the
above method till all the tools are set. This operation is convenient and quick when a tool is abraded or
needs to be adjusted.
(1) Tool setting in X direction:
1) Fix the trial-cut workpiece on the machine, and select any tool (select the first tool used in the
machining generally).
2) Select an appropriate spindle speed, and start the spindle. Move the tool to cut a step along
the workpiece surface in Manual operation mode.
62
Chapter Four
3) Without moving X axis, move the tool to a safe position in Z direction and stop the spindle.
Measure the diameter of the cut step.
4) By pressing I key, the screen displays Tool setting X; Input the diameter measured, then
press ENTER key.
5) The system prompts Confirm tool offset No.: XX; and automatically presets an offset
number. If this offset number is the same as the one to be input, press ENTER key directly.
number.
(2)
Tool setting in Z direction:

1) Start the spindle again, move the tool to cut an end face along the workpiece surface.
2)
Without moving Z axis, move the tool to a safe position in X direction and stop the spindle.
3)
Select a point as the reference point, measure the distance from the cut end face to the
selected reference point in Z direction.
4) By pressing K key, the screen displays Tool setting Z; input the measured data, then press
ENTER key.
5) The system prompts Confirm tool offset No.: XX; and automatically presets an offset
Otherwise, press ENTER key after inputting the offset number. The system then
automatically calculates the tool offset value of Z axis and stores it to the specified offset
number.
Trial-cut tool setting (method 2):
The procedures are as follows:

(1)
Tool setting in X direction:

1)
Fix the trial-cut workpiece on the machine, and then select any tool (select the first tool used
in the machining generally).
2)
Select an appropriate spindle speed, and start the spindle. Move the tool to cut a step along
the workpiece surface in Manual operation mode.
3)
Without moving X axis, by pressing

tool nose position, with tool setting icon
key, the system automatically memorizes the

flickering on the screen; then move the tool out
of X axis to a safe position and stop the spindle. Measure the diameter of the step measured.
4)
By pressing I key, the screen displays Tool setting X; input the measured diameter, then
press ENTER key.
5)
The system prompts Confirm tool offset No.: XX; and automatically presets an offset
automatically calculates the tool offset value of X axis and stores it to the specified offset
number; the system automatically cancels the tool setting icon as well.
63
OPERATION
automatically calculates the tool offset value of X axis and stores it to the specified offset

(2) Tool setting in Z direction:
1) Start the spindle again, move the tool to cut an end face along the workpiece surface.
2) Without moving Z axis, by pressing
key, the system automatically memorizes the tool
nose position, with tool setting icon
flickering on the screen; then move the tool out of Z
axis to a safe position and stop the spindle.

3) Select a point as the reference point, measure the distance from the cut end face to the selected
OPERATION
reference point in Z direction.

4) By pressing K key, the screen displays Tool setting Z; input the measured data, then press
ENTER key. The system then prompts Confirm tool offset No.: XX; and automatically presets
an offset number. If this offset number is the same as the one to be input, press ENTER key
directly. Otherwise, press ENTER key after inputting the offset number. The system then
automatically calculates the tool offset value of Z axis and stores it to the specified offset
number; the system automatically cancels the tool setting icon as well.
Explanations
1) When the tool setting icon is flickering, it is available to perform operations such as spindle
start/stop, coordinate axis movement; if tool setting is performed, the system automatically
cancels the tool setting icon, and does not memorize the original tool setting point.
2) If K or I is directly pressed without the tool setting icon appearing, the system assumes the
current point as the tool setting point.
Fixed-point tool setting:
After determining a reference point on the machine (or on the workpiece), first set a group of
coordinates (Z, X) for the point by means of actual measurement or using other methods. Then move all
the tool noses to this reference point to obtain this group of coordinates, with the system memorizing the
tool offsets automatically. This type of tool setting is called the fix-point tool setting. I.e. first execute
Input reference point coordinates or Modify reference point coordinates to determine the reference
point coordinates; then move the tool nose to the reference point and execute Fixed-point tool setting
to complete the tool setting.
Fix-point tool setting by pressing hp1 key
1)
Inputting the reference point coordinates:

It means inputting the current tool nose coordinates as the coordinates of the reference point; in
general, this method is applied when the coordinates of the reference point is unknown, but the tool nose
coordinates of the current tool is considered as correct. Move the tool nose to the reference point, and
then execute Input reference point coordinates to complete the input operation. After that, the system
automatically stores the current tool nose coordinates as the coordinates of the reference point. If a tool
is broken or needs to be re-mounted, select any tool which has been set as the reference.
2)
Modifying the reference point coordinates:

Input the coordinates of Z/X reference point, then press ENTER key to complete the modification of
the reference point coordinates; in general, this method is applied when the coordinates of the reference
point is known.
64
Chapter Four
3)
Fixed-point tool setting:

Move the tool to be set to the reference point, and execute Fixed-point tool setting, then press
ENTER key to complete the tool setting of the current tool. The system will automatically generate the
tool offset.
Note
1)
4.4.7 Hydraulic Chuck Control Function
Chuck operation
In Manual operation mode, key in M10/M11 command to control the chuck clamping/releasing
Key in: M
0 ENTER ; the chuck is clamped. The screen displays the spindle state.
Key in: M
1 ENTER ; the chuck is released.
Key in: M 1
2 ENTER ; the chuck control signal is cancelled. (M12 is used for some special
chuck devices)
Relative parameters
When parameter P409_d7 is set to 0, the system has hydraulic chuck control function.
When P402_d5=0, there is an interlock relationship between hydraulic chuck control and spindle
control.
When P402_d4=0, the chuck response signal consecutive detection is turned off.
When P402_d4=1, the chuck response signal consecutive detection is turned on.
When P409_d6=0, the hydraulic chuck is the outer chuck mode.
When P409_d6=1, the hydraulic chuck is in the inner chuck mode.
When P409_d5=1, the hydraulic chuck requires the response detection; the response signal is
green when it is normal, and is yellow when it is abnormal.
When P409_d5=0, the hydraulic chuck does not require the response detection.
When P409_d3=0, the hydraulic chuck control signal is level control;
When P409_d3=1, the hydraulic chuck control signal is pulse control; the pulse width is set by
parameter P327.
When P409_d1=0, the footswitch input of the hydraulic chuck is valid;
When P409_d1=1, the footswitch of the hydraulic chuck is invalid
Execution of chuck commands

In the outer chuck mode, after executing M10 command, the system outputs the chuck clamping
signal from M10 pin (Whether to output a pulse signal or level signal is selected by a parameter), then
65
OPERATION
3)
2)
If using an optical tool setting gauge, the user can set the tool setting point at the
intersection of the reticle of the gauge without starting the spindle; the other operations
are the same.
The tool offset automatically generated by the system can be viewed and modified in the
tool offset operation mode. See Tool Offset Operation Mode.
When using the line-up tool, if the tool is located at the other side of the workpiece, the
measured value in the X direction input during trial-cut tool setting should be negative.

the chuck clamping action is completed when the response detection signal is not needed; If the
response detection is needed, the system waits until the chuck clamping is in-position. If the chuck
clamping signal (interface pin RM10 is low level, and RM11 is high level) is detected within the specified
period of time (set by parameter P329: M command response detection time specification), the chuck
clamping action is completed; otherwise, the alarm Chuck clamping response detection overtime is
issued.
After executing M11 command, the system outputs the chuck releasing signal from pin M11
OPERATION
(whether to output a pulse signal or level signal is selected by a parameter). If the response detection
signal is not required, the chuck releasing action is completed. If the response detection signal is
required, the system waits until the chuck clamping is in-position. After the chuck releasing in-position
signal (interface pin RM11 is low level, and RM10 is high level) is detected, the chuck releasing action is
completed. Otherwise, the alarm Chuck releasing response detection overtime is issued.
In the inner chuck modeafter executing M10 command, the system outputs the chuck clamping
signal from pin M11; after executing M11 command, the system outputs the chuck releasing signal from
pin M10. Therefore, only the output pins are opposite to those of the outer chuck mode, and the others
are the same.
In addition to controlling the hydraulic chuck with commands, the user can also control it with an
external footswitch. By pedaling the footswitch once, the system switches between clamping and
releasing once according to the control mode of the clamping/releasing command M10/M11. Before
switching to Manual or Auto operation mode from other modes, it is required that the chuck footswitch be
released (disconnected). Otherwise, the system issues an alarm of abnormality.
Output time sequence of hydraulic chuck control signal:
1)

Executing M10
Executing M11
Executing M10
Input signal
t1
t1
M10 pin
M11 pin
t1
t1: M10, M11 signal output hold time in pulse control mode, set by parameter P327;
2)
Output time sequence of M10, M11 in level control mode:

Executing M10
M10 pin
M11 pin
66
Executing M11
Executing M10
Chapter Four
Note
1) When the hydraulic chuck function is valid, the system is in the chuck releasing state by default
after power on or emergency stop; When the first hydraulic chuck footswitch input is valid, the
system outputs the chuck clamping signal.
2) When there is an interlock relationship between chuck and spindle: it is forbidden to operate the
3) The operation of the footswitch is invalid during automatic continuous execution, regardless of
whether the spindle is running or not.
4) If the operation of the chuck fails or is interrupted (by reset, emergency stop), the system
assumes that the chuck is at an uncertain position, and displays a red flicker, prompting the
chuck state (M10 or M11). In this case, it is unavailable to start the machining program; only by
performing a successful chuck operation or powering on the system after power off, can the
system recover to the normal state.
5) Chuck response signal consecutive detection (bit parameter P409_d5=1) is to continue
detecting whether there is abnormal releasing occurring in the normal state or machining state.
6) When the chuck signal is cancelled (in M12 state), there is an underscore being displayed under
the chuck state (M10 or M11), i.e. M10 or M11 are displayed.
4.4.8
Hydraulic Tailstock Control Function
Tailstock operation
In Manual operation mode, key in M78/M79 command to control tailstock advancing/retracting
Key in: M
8 Enter ; The tailstock advances.
Key in: M
9 Enter ; The tailstock retracts.
Key in: M
0 Enter ; The tailstock control signal is cancelled. (M80 is used for some special
tailstock devices)
Relative parameters
When parameter P409_d4 is set to 0, the system has the hydraulic tailstock control function.
When P402_d3=0, there is an interlock relationship between hydraulic tailstock control and spindle
control.
When P402_d2=0, the hydraulic tailstock response signal consecutive detection is off;
When P402_d2=1, the hydraulic tailstock response signal consecutive detection is on.
When P409_d2=0, the hydraulic tailstock control signal is level control.
When P409_d2=1, the hydraulic tailstock control signal is pulse control; the pulse width is
determined by the time set in parameter P328.
When P409_d0=0, the footswitch input of the hydraulic tailstock is valid;
When P409_d0=1, the footswitch input of the hydraulic tailstock is invalid;
67
OPERATION
releasing state, or an alarm occurs.
chuck during spindle running, or an alarm occurs; it is forbidden to start the spindle in the chuck
Execution process and signal output time sequence of tailstock commands:

If the detection of the tailstock in-position signal is required, define pin RM78 or RM79 in interface
parameter P519 or P520.

After executing M78 command, the system outputs the tailstock advancing signal from pin M78
(whether to output a pulse signal or level signal is set by the parameter); then the tailstock advancing
action is completed; if the response detection signal is required, the system waits for the tailstock
advancing in-position signal. After the tailstock advancing in-position signal (interface pin RM78 is low
OPERATION
level, and RM79 is high level) is detected within a specified period of time (set by parameter P329: M
command response detection time specification), the operation is completed; otherwise, the alarm
Tailstock advancing in-position response detection overtime is issued.
After executing M79 command, the system outputs the tailstock retracting signal from pin M79
(whether to output a pulse signal or level signal is set by the parameter), then the tailstock retracting
action is completed; if the response detection signal is required, the system waits for the tailstock
retracting in-position signal. After the tailstock retracting in-position signal (interface pin RM79 is low
level, and RM78 is high level) is detected within a specified period of time, the operation is completed;
otherwise, the alarm Tailstock retracting in-position detection overtime is issued.
In addition to controlling the hydraulic tailstock with commands, the user can also control the
tailstock with an external footswitch. By pedaling the footswitch once, the system switches between
tailstock advancing and retracting once according to the control mode of the tailstock
advancing/retracting command M78/M79.
Before switching to Manual or Auto operation mode from other modes, it is required that the
tailstock footswitch be released (disconnected); otherwise, the system issues an abnormality alarm.
1)

Executing M78
Executing M79
Executing M78
Input signal
t1
t1
M78 pin
M79 pin
t1
t1: Signal M78, M79 output hold time in pulse control mode, set by parameter P328;
2)
Output time sequence of M78, M79 in level control mode:

Executing M78
M78 pin
M79 pin
68
Executing M79
Executing M78
Chapter Four
Note
1) When the hydraulic tailstock function is valid, the system is in the tailstock retracting state by
default after power on or emergency stop; When the first hydraulic tailstock footswitch input is
valid, the system outputs the tailstock advancing signal.
Other Option Functions
The option function is the non-standard pin input/output control function.

If a function is required, it is necessary to define its pin in the interface parameters and correctly
connect the lines. For details on the definitions of interface parameters, refer to Section 4.6 Parameter
Operation Mode; For details on the connection, refer to Chapter Three CNC Device Connection in Part
Connection.
Warning
The definition of pins must be accomplished by the machine tool builder because incorrect
definition may cause damage to the system and the machine tool electric.
4.4.9.1
Triple-color Indicator Control
If the function is required, define its output pin in the interface parameters and correctly connect the
lines; the system will output a signal at the corresponding pin.
P502LMP3Green light (program execution signal light 3)
P503LMP2Yellow lightprogram execution signal light 2
P504LMP1Red lightalarm lightalarm light control signal 1.
Function description
1)
The triple-color indicator is valid in Manual/Auto operation mode; in other operation modes, it is
invalid.
2)
During program execution, if the green light lights up, it indicates the normal operation.
69
OPERATION
4.4.9
2) When there is an interlock relationship between tailstock and spindle: it is forbidden to operate
the tailstock during spindle running, or an alarm occurs.
3) The tailstock control input is invalid during automatic continuous execution, regardless of
whether the spindle is running or not.
4) If the operation of the tailstock fails or is interrupted (by reset, emergency stop), the system
assumes that the tailstock is at an uncertain position, and displays a red flicker, prompting the
tailstock state (M10 or M11). In this case, it is unavailable to start the machining program; only by
performing a successful tailstock operation or powering on the system after power off, can the
system recover to the normal state.
5) Tailstock response signal consecutive detection (set by parameters P519, P520) indicates the
system continues detecting whether the tailstock is released abnormally in the normal state or
machining state. If the function is set to alarm (bit parameter P402_d2=1), the program
machining is stopped and the spindle is turned off when the tailstock is released during
machining.
6) When the tailstock signal is cancelled (in M80 state), there is an underscore displayed under the
tailstock state (M78 or M79), i.e. M78 or M79.

3)
If an alarm occurs, the green light goes out, and the red light lights up.
4)
When the execution of the program is stopped, and no alarm occurs, the red and green lights
go out, while the yellow light lights up.
4.4.9.2
Lubricant Control
If the function is required, define its output pin in the interface parameters, and connect the lines
OPERATION
correctly; the system will output the signal at the corresponding pin.
P506M32O:
Lubricant control output signal
1)
Non-auto lubrication
When P330 is set to 0: the lubrication is non-automatic. The lubricant ON/OFF is controlled with
commands.
In Manual/Auto operation mode, Lubricant ON/OFF command M32/M33 is valid if input.
After executing M32, the lubricant output is ON; after executing M33, the lubricant output is
OFF.
2)
Automatic lubrication:
When P330 is set to 0: Automatic timing lubrication.
Lubrication start time and lubrication interval are settable. After the system is powered on, the
system starts the lubrication and lasts a period of time set by P330, then stops output; after delaying
the time set by P331, the system outputs lubricant again, and so on.
Note
If the system enables the automatic lubrication function, the values of parameter P330 and P331
should be greater than 1s. If the values are smaller than 1s, they are processed as 1s.
4.4.9.3 Machine Electricity Delay Power-on Control

correctly; the system outputs the signal at the corresponding pin.
P505MDLY:
Machine electricity delay power-on control signal.
If the machine electricity delay power-on control signal is defined in interface parameters, the
system outputs the signal from the self-defined pin after delaying 3s, and then retains. During the
3-second delay, it is unavailable to press keys to operate the system.
4.4.9.4 Safety Door Detection Function

correctly; the system outputs the signal at the corresponding pin.
P511SAGT
70
Safety door detection signal.
Chapter Four
1)
When SAGT signal is connected to 0V, the system confirms that the safety door is closed.
2)
In Auto operation mode, if the system detects the safety door is open, the alarm Safety door
not closed occurs.
3)
During automatic operation, if the system detects the safety door is open, all the axes feed is
4)
The safety door detection function is valid only in Auto operation mode.
OPERATION
4.4.9.5
Low-pressure Detection Function
Relative parameters
When P412_d5 is set to 1, the low-pressure detection function is valid.
P412_d4 sets the low pressure alarm level; when P412_d4=1, the low-level alarm is set, when
P412_d4=0, the high-level alarm is set.
P332 sets duration for low pressure alarm.
1) After choosing the low pressure alarm detection function, the pressure detection icon is
displayed on the right of the status bar in Manual and Auto operation modes. When the
pressure is normal, the icon is displayed as a green solid triangle . Once the system detects
the low-pressure alarm signal PRES is valid, the screen displays a half-empty yellow triangle if
the low pressure hold time is less than half of the time set in P332. If the low pressure hold time
exceeds half of the time set in P332, the screen displays a yellow full-empty triangle . If the
signal hold time exceeds the value set in P332, the icon is displayed as a red empty triangle ,
with the alarm Low pressure alarm being issued ; in this case, all axes feed is suspended, the
spindle is stopped, and the automatic cycle cannot start.
4.4.10
Viewing Operation Information in Manual Mode
See Section 4.5.8 Auto Operation Mode in PartOperation For details.
4.4.11 Appendix Table

4.4.11.1
stopped, and then the spindle is stopped, the coolant is turned off, with an alarm being issued.
List of M function Commands Controlled by MDI Input

The M commands which can be input and executed in Manual mode are as follows:
71
OPERATION
Type
Spindle control
Command
M03, M04, M05
Coolant
M08, M09
Chuck
M10, M11, M12
Lubricant
Tailstock
M32, M33
M78, M79, M80
User output 1
M21, M22
User output 2
M23, M24
Spindle gear
M41, M42, M43, M44
User-defined
command
Output control and
detection
M60 ~ M74
Note:
72
M82
Function
Spindle CW rotation, CCW rotation,
and stop
Coolant ON/OFF
Clamping, releasing, cancelling chuck
output signal
Lubricant ON/OFF
Tailstock
advancing,
tailstock
retracting, tailstock cancelling output
signal
Switching spindle gear from gear 1, 2,

3, 4
E.g. M82
Q17.0
Q17.0
Remarks
Function interlock,
state retained
' Function interlock,

state retained
Function interlock,
state retained
Function interlock,
state retained
Function interlock,
state retained
D3 or M82
When inputting an M command, if its first digit is 0, the 0 can be omitted. The function of this M command is the
same as that in Auto operation mode. See the explanations for commands in Part Programming.
Chapter Four
4.5
System Operation - Auto
Auto Operation Mode
In Auto operation mode, the descriptions for the input format of relative setting and
operation as well as the examples are as follows: The function keys to be pressed are indicated
with an icon; the letter keys, numeric keys to be pressed are indicated with an underscore; the
system prompt messages are indicated with a rectangle.
OPERATION
In Auto operation mode, on the right corner of the screen is displayed the
page key;
by pressing this key, the directory window displaying the operation keys in Auto mode pops up; by
pressing the key again, the pop-up window is closed; by directly pressing other function keys, the
window is automatically closed.
to enter Auto operation mode. In Auto operation mode, the
system completes the workpiece machining specified by the machining program; the system executes
the program from the first line in accordance with the logic path until the end of the program.
After entering the Auto page, the system performs necessary analysis and pre-check to the part
program in terms of the user parameter list and tool offsets. If the system detects the execution of the
program results in serious consequences after precheck, it will lock the CYCLE START key, and prompt
a window displaying an alarm message; in this case, it is unavailable to press CYCLE START key to
execute the program; the user should modify the program or relative parameters correctly in accordance
with the alarm message, and then perform the execution.
This system provides multiple modes for executing the workpiece program. Before the execution,
the user can perform necessary setting to ensure the safety during machining.
The main functions of Auto operation mode include:
1)
Setting Single/Continuous program execution
2)
Setting Dry Run (without output) to check the execution, the program execution can be
accelerated in Dry Run state.
3)
Prechecking the soft limit alarm before program execution
4)
Setting the program block, starting the execution from any block between first block and last
block
5)
Pressing keys to control the spindle and coolant
6)
Performing Pause, Block Stop, End Stop, Cycle Stop during program execution
7)
Adjusting Cutting Speed Override proportion
8)
Modifying tool offsets during program execution
9)
Displaying the states of the machine in real time, popping up the real-time alarm
The explanations for the areas on the screen are shown in fig. 4-5:
Top:
Displaying the execution mode (Single/Continuous, Dry Run), current program number, part
count, machining time, and key
(prompting operation methods of system functions)

73

Upper left: Displaying the tool nose coordinates and machine coordinates, or tool nose path;
Lower left: Displaying machining blocks (the pointer points at the current block)
Right middle: Displaying the current states of the machine, including the spindle, coolant, lubricant,
tool post, chuck, tailstock, rotation speed and cutting speed;
Pop-up window: Displaying the alarm message of the program being executed.
OPERATION
Fig. 4-5 Auto operation mode
4.5.1
System Working States in Auto Operation Mode
In Auto operation mode, the system may be in the following states from the perspective of program
machining; the functions which can be operated by the user vary with the system state; in this manual,
several simple concepts are introduced to describe these states.
Initial state: The execution has not been started, and the pointer points at the first block of the
program; When switched to Auto operation mode from other modes, the system is in
the initial state; after completing the execution, or after an alarm, the system returns to
the initial state.
Running state: The system is executing blocks, and the axes are moving.
Pause state: The execution is suspended when the axis move commands are being executed; the
system waits for users operation by pressing keys.
Block stop state: The execution stops after the current block has been executed and before the
next block is executed; the system waits for users operation by pressing keys.
4.5.2
4.5.2.1
Explanations for Function Key Operation in Auto Operation Mode

Switching between Single and Continuous Operation
Single/Continuous operation switch:

By pressing
(valid in any state)
74
key, the system switches between Single/Continuous operation recurrently;
Chapter Four
In the Continuous execution, the user can also press this key to switch to Single mode; then after
the current block is executed, the execution is stopped; by pressing CYCLE START key, the user can
continue the execution.
In Continuous mode, by pressing CYCLE START key once, the program is executed from the
beginning to the end once.
In Single mode, by pressing CYCLE START key once, one block is executed (for the cycle
4.5.2.2 Switching bewteen Dry Run and Machining Run

Check all the contents of the machining program using Dry Run, preventing the workpiece form
being damaged due to a programming data error in the program.
Dry Run/Machining Run mode switch:
By pressing
key, the system switches between Dry Run/Machining Run recurrently.
If the system is set to Dry Run when executing commands, whether M, S, T are valid is set by
parameters. After the system exits Dry Run state, the coordinate of each axis automatically recovers to
the one before Dry Run.
Parameters which are valid in Dry Run mode:
Parameter P401_d7
0:
When executing auxiliary functions, the system outputs and detects signals as usual.
1:
When executing auxiliary functions, the system does not output and detect signals.
Parameter P401_d6:
0:
The execution speed of the feed command is set by the program as usual.
1:
The execution speed of the feed command is out of the control of the program. The system
demonstrates the program path at the max. speed of cutting feed (P113).
Note
1)
The Dry Run key is valid only when the program executes the initial state. This key is invalid
during the program execution, or before the end of the execution, or before the execution state
is exited.
2)
When P401_d7=0, all the M, S, T auxiliary function commands are executed in Dry Run state;
after the dry run state is exited, the system does not recover to the previous state.
3)
When P401_d7=1, the system does not output and detect signals when executing auxiliary
functions; however, when executing T functions, the tool offset number is executed (e.g. if the
original one is T11, it becomes T13 after executing T33); after exiting Dry Run state, the original
state recovers.
4)
In Dry Run state, all M60~M74 commands are executed normally; if the tool offset is modified,
the offset will be changed. If the tool offset is modified, the tool nose coordinates of the
corresponding offset number will be changed after exiting Dry Run state.
75
OPERATION
operation)
command, only one operation is executed; press CYCLE START key again to perform another

5)
In Dry Run state, the part counter does not increase by 1 automatically.
4.5.2.3 Switching between Coordinate Display and Graph Display

This function is valid in all operation modes
The system enters AUTO operation mode after the first power-on, and it automatically selects the
coordinate display as the display mode.
In Auto operation mode, press T key to switch between Coordinate Display and Graph Display
anytime.
OPERATION
In Graph Display mode, by pressing S key, the graph display path can be cleared.
4.5.2.4
Starting Execution from First Block of Program
After entering Auto operation mode, the system is in the initial state, and the pointer always points at
the first block of the current program. By pressing CYCLE START key, the user can start the program
automatic execution.
During the execution, the block being executed is displayed in poor color and blinks; the first line is
the block that has been executed, and the third line is the one to be executed; if the program being
executed is a conditional command, and the jump or call object is not known, the third line may not be
displayed.
4.5.2.5 Starting Execution from a Specified Block

In some special cases, if the user needs to start the execution from a block in the middle of the
program, first select the start block using this function.(Valid in the initial state)
Procedures of selecting a block:
1)
By press INPUT key, the system displays the program browser window displaying the current
program, and the pointer points at the first line.
2)
By pressing
, or
key, the system displays the last (next) block or
last (next) page of programs. By pressing ESC key, the system exits the selection and displays
the original program.
3)
When the pointer points to the block to be selected, press ENTER key, then the window
prompts Run ?, and waits for the next operation.
4)
At this time, if CYCLE START key is pressed, the system starts execution from the block which
the pointer points to; if ESC key is pressed, the system exits the selection, and the pointer
points at the first block.
Note
1)
The specified block cannot be in the canned cycle, compound cycle or subprogram;
otherwise, unexpected accidents may occur. Generally, select G00 command, or the tool
change command before G00 to start execution.
76
Chapter Four
2)
It is suggested that the selected block from which the execution is started be the linear
movement or M, S, T commands. When selecting G02/G03/G05 command for execution,
make sure the coordinates of the tool and machine stay at the start point of the arc;
otherwise, the arc machined may not meet the requirements.
3)
During the execution, by pressing ENTER key, the system also displays the browser
window, but it is forbidden to select a block.
Display during Program Execution
During the program execution, on the screen are displayed the running states, dynamic running
coordinates, as well as the real-time tool nose running path, so as to monitor the running states of the
machine and program. The contents displayable are as follows:
Dynamic coordinates or dynamic tool nose movement path during the program execution.
Contents of the block being executed.
Auxiliary function states, e.g. spindle, coolant, lubricant, tool, rotation speed, chuck, tailstock.
Feedrate override, rapid traverse override.
Machining time.
Part count
4.5.3.1 Definition of Graph Display Data

Due to the limitation of the display area, for the workpieces of different sizes, different kinds of
scaling are required to display their complete shapes. Therefore, the system defines four types of data,
which are the workblank length, tool initial offset, display scaling, graph area type (customized or
system-created). When the system is in the initial state, the user can define the above data pressing
key. The display is as fig. 4-6:
[ AUTO ]
Continuous
%001
Part Count1
Machining Time000000
Z length : 286
mm (workblank)
X length : 260
mm (workblank)
Z offset :
74
mm
X offset : 0
mm
Scaling :
30 mm/grid
T 01 00
100%
Custom
30mm/grid
Program-created
X:0~300
Z:74~494
Z
X
0273.595
0166.523
N0000 G00 Z300 X100
100%
S01
S0500
G97
S0200 r
G98
F30
N0010 G01 W-50.000 U20.000 F100
EDIT
JOG
AUTO
F 00100
PARA
OFFT
DIAG
Fig. 4-6 Definition of graph display data

In the graph display, the horizontal scale mark indicates the coordinate dimension in Z direction, the
vertical scale mark indicates the coordinate dimension in X direction; determine the area that is to
display the graph first. The custom graph display area is as follows:
77
OPERATION
4.5.3

Z: (Z offset ~ Z offset + display scaling 14 );
X: (X offset ~ X offset + display scaling 5 2);
e.g. X300 600
Z-200 220
Hereinto:
1) The coordinates of the intersection point between Z scale mark and X scale mark are
referred to as Z offset and X offset (unit: mm).
OPERATION
2) Both Z scale mark and X scale mark are divided into a fixed number of equal grids.
3) The length of each grid is referred to as the display scaling, which is the scaling of the
display graph. It has nothing to do with the actual machining scaling.
4) If the size of the workpiece is too large, select scaling down; if the size is too small, select
scaling up, in order to view the graph clearly; the actual value range of X/Z offset: -9999
9999
After entering system graph display, the total lengths of Z scale mark and X scale mark of the part
program workblank are Z length and X length respectively. (Unit: mm)
Z:
Scaling Number of grids that the tool nose path graph occupies on Z axis;
X:
Scaling Number of grids that the tool nose path graph occupies on X axis 2
The graph area is classified into the custom type and program-created type. When selecting the
custom type, the length, offset, scaling can be modified; when selecting the program-created type, the
length, offset, and scaling cannot be modified. Here, the area range values pre-set by the system is the
complete graph of the program movement path, so it is unnecessary to modify the length, offset and
scaling. The system enters the program to set the execution state.
4.5.3.2 Inputting Graph Display Data

The graph display data is shown as follows by pressing
press
key or
key in Auto operation mode. First
key to select the custom type Custom, and then press
key or
key to select the data to be modified. Then the screen displays the previously defined data as
follows. Move the cursor to the data to be modified, then press
and input the desired data.
Z length 200
mm workblank
X length 200
mm workblank
Z offset -200
mm
X offset -200
mm
Scaling
50
mm/grid
Custom
Program-created
Fig. 4-7 Graph data display

78
key to delete the original data
Chapter Four
Inputting data (without a decimal): Press

new data. When pressing
key to delete the original data, then input the
key repeatedly, the graph data display interface is displayed
recurrently.
Modifying the scaling: When the cursor points at Scaling, press
key or
key to
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600. The user can select an appropriate level to obtain
the optimal display effect depending on the actual conditions.
Two types of graph area: Press
key or
key to select custom type or
program-created type. When selecting the program-created type, the data cannot be modified;
when selecting the custom type, the data can be modified. At this moment, the user can input the
new data as required.
After completing the modification of the data, press ESC key or ENTER key to exit, and return the
system to Auto operation mode. If it is in the graph display mode, the system refreshes the graph
display range according to the set display data. When the set display data exceeds the displayable
range, the system prompts X/Z overlimit. At this moment, re-adjust the display data or reduce the
display scaling.
Note
1)
To correctly display the tool path, the start position of the tool should be beyond the display
range of the workblank, or the machining progress cannot be correctly displayed.
2)
During the program execution, if the coordinate display is switched to the graph display, the
system may not correctly display the workpiece shape until the next cycle starts.
4.5.3.3
Part Count and Timing
Part count: After the program executes the program end command M02, M20 or M30 once, the
part count increases by one. The max. count is 99999. If it is exceeded, it is
automatically cleared. When M99 command is used to end a program, the part count
also increases by 1 after the program is executed once.
Machining time: Total program execution time. When CYCLE START key is pressed to start
program execution, the system starts timing until the program ends. During the
execution, if a pause operation is performed, the timing is stopped simultaneously.
After the execution recovers, the timing is started again. In Single operation, the
system only records the execution time of each block. The max. execution time:
99 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds; if the time reaches the maximum value, it is
automatically cleared.
79
OPERATION
scale down or scale up. The built-in scaling in the system contains 16 levels: 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50,
Part count and machining time clearing: In the initial state, by pressing
the work count is automatically cleared; by pressing

cleared.
4.5.4
key twice,
key twice, the machining time is
Manual Operation for Machine Auxiliary Functions
OPERATION
In Auto operation mode, by pressing function keys, the user can operate some of the auxiliary
functions, which are the same as those in MANUAL operation mode. However, the auxiliary
functions allowed to operate by pressing keys vary with the system state; The rules are as follows:
1)
In any state, the coolant ON/OFF switch key is valid.
2)
When bit parameter P400_d5 is set to 0, the spindle CW, CCW, Stop keys are valid.
(invalid in the running state)_.
3)
In the initial state, the spindle gear shift key (speed switch key) is valid.
4)
In the initial state, when the hydraulic chuck control function is valid, the user can control
the clamping and releasing of the chuck with an external button or footswitch. The chuck
clamping/releasing action interlocks with the spindle.
5)
4.5.5
4.5.5.1
In the initial state, when the hydraulic tailstock control function is valid, the user can control
the clamping and releasing of the tailstock with an external button or footswitch. The
tailstock clamping/releasing action interlocks with the spindle ..
Speed Override Adjustment in Auto Operation Mode

Speed Override Adjustment
In Auto operatio mode, the feedrate override key and rapid override key are valid in any state.
In Auto operation mode, the program execution speed can be changed by changing the speed
override, without altering the program and the speed set in parameters.
Feedrate override
adjusting the value set in speed word F in the program:
Actual feedrate = F feedrate override

There are 16 gears from 0%150% (increment: 10%) for the feedrate override, which controls all
the commands controlled by the feedrate during the program execution. When the feedrate override is 0,
the program execution is stopped.
Rapid override
adjusting the speed of rapid traverse commands such as G00 in the program.
Z axis actual rapid traverse rate =
P100 rapid traverse override
X axis actual rapid traverse rate =
P101 rapid traverse override
The rapid traverse override contains four gears: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%. It controls all the rapid
traverse commands and operations during the program execution.
The feedrate override can be changed with the rapid traverse +/-, keys/feedrate +/-keys. During the
program execution, the actual speed of the slide carriage varies with the speed override.
80
Chapter Four
The program execution is stopped when the feedrate override is 0 during the program execution,
and the system prompts Feedrate override is 0 . By adjusting the feedrate override to a nonzero value,
the program execution is continued.
4.5.5.2 MPG Speed Control
When bit parameter P402_d1=1, the rapid traverse/feedrate override controlled by an MPG is valid. The
In Auto operation mode, the user can also use a MPG to control the rapid traverse/feedrate override.
OPERATION
actual feedrate and rapid traverse rate are as follows:

Actual feedrate = F feedrate override MPG override
Z axis actual rapid traverse rate = P100 rapid traverse override MPG override
X axis actual rapid traverse rate = P101 rapid traverse override MPG override
MPG override range: 0 ~ 100%.
Two types of MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override:
Type 1:
When bit parameter P402_d0=0, the system enters MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override
by type 1; the system sets the current position (marked as point A) of the MPG as the position where the
MPG override is 0%. Within the 100 scales counted clockwise from point A , the MPG override increases
by 1 when the MPG is rotated one scale clockwise, and decreases by 1 when the MPG is rotated one
scale counterclockwise.
Type 2:
When bit parameter P402_d0=1, the system enters MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override
by type 2; the MPG override is set to 0%, and the MPG override varies with the speed at which the MPG
is rotated clockwise. When the user rotates the MPG clockwise from slow to fast, the MPG override
changes between 0%~ 100%. To avoid impacts to the machine due to the uneven MPG speed, the
increment should not be less than 10% each time. If the MPG is stopped after CW rotation, the MPG
override becomes 0%; if the MPG is immediately rotated CCW after CW rotation (or is stopped after
CCW rotation), the MPG override keeps the CCW instantaneous override until it is rotated CW (or is
stopped after CW rotation).
The use of the MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override is as follows:
In Auto operation mode, by pressing MPG key before executing the program or in the state of
program pause, single stop, cycle stop or feed hold (including the external feedrate/spindle hold), the
MPGkey lights up, which indicates that the system is in the MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate
override mode. At this moment, on the upper right corner are displayed the MPG control mode and
current MPG override with yellow ground. After completing the execution of the program, the system
automatically cancels the MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override mode.
Note
In thread machining commands (G32, G33, G92, G76), the feedrate speed is determined by the
spindle speed instead of value F. Thus the MPG override has no effect on these commands.
81

4.5.6
Interruption Operation during Program Execution
4.5.6.1 Interruption with Keys during Program Execution

The interruption operations below can be performed during the program execution:
Emergency stop: The execution is stopped immediately, which cannot be continued.
Pause The execution can be continued by pressing CYCLE START key.

Single stop: The execution is stopped after the current block is executed, which can be continued
OPERATION
by pressing CYCLE START key.

Cycle stop: The execution is suspended after the current cycle is finished, which can be continued
by pressing CYCLE START key.
Pause
1)
By pressing CYCLE PAUSE key, the execution is stopped during program execution. After the
system responds, all the move axes are stopped, with PAUSE displayed on the lower left
corner of the screen.
2)
In the pause state, by pressing CYCLE START key, the system recovers the program and then
continues executing the remaining blocks; by pressing ESC key, the system exits the program
and then returns to the initial state automatically, with the pointer pointing at the first block of
the current program.
Caution
1) After pause, the spindle and tailstock are controllable. Before pressing CYCLE START key to
perform execution, make sure whether the spindle is started and whether the chuck and
tailstock are ready. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the machine or results in personal
injury.
2) In executing G32, G33, G92, G76 command, this key is invalid when the system is in the block
where the spindle machining thread is tracked.
Single stop
1) During Continuous program execution, by pressing SINGLE key, the system switches to single
execution mode. After the current block is executed, the screen displays Single stop.
2) After Single stop, the program execution is continued if CYCLE START key is pressed; and the
system returns to the initial state with the pointer pointing at the first block of the current program
if ESC key is pressed.
Note
1) In executing the canned cycle commands, the Single Stop is valid after each step in the cycle is
completed.
Cycle end stop
1)
During Continuous program execution, the screen displays Cycle stop: ON by pressing hp6
key. The execution is stopped after M20 is executed, and the screen displays Cycle stop
82
Chapter Four
4.5.6.2
External feed/Spindle hold Knob
The External feed/Spindle hold knob is effective only in Auto operation mode.
Parameter P412_d6 sets whether the External feed/Spindle hold knob is effective.
When P412_d6=1, the system External feed/Spindle hold knob is effective; the input signals are led
in through pin MXZ1, MXZ2.
for other purposes.
Introduction to External feed/Spindle hold knob
This CNC system contains an interface for the External feed/Spindle hold knob. When the knob is
rotated to different positions, the movement of the spindle and slide carriage can be enabled or disabled.
When debugging the program, it is very convenient to control the movement and stop of the spindle and
carriage. The External feed/Spindle hold knob has three positions, whose functions are as follows:
Feed hold knob
Note: For the sign indicating the

the External feed/Spindle
hold knob, refer to the
user manual provided by
the machine tool builder.
Position 1 enables the spindle rotation and the slide carriage movement.
Position 2 enables the spindle rotation, and disables the slide carriage movement.
Position 3 disables the spindle rotation, and enables the slide carriage movement.
Use of External feed/Spindle hold knob
Before executing the program:
When the External feed/Spindle hold knob is at position 1 and position 2, the spindle start/stop can
be controlled by pressing keys manually; however, when it is at position 3, the spindle cannot be started.
In Single operation mode:
When the External feed/Spindle hold knob is located at position 1, all the commands are executed
as usual; when it is at position 2, the spindle control commands can be executed rather than the move
commands of X, Z axes. These move commands can be executed only when the knob is rotated back to
position 1. When it is at position 3, no block can be executed. To execute the blocks, rotate the knob
back to position 2 or position 1.
In Continuous execution mode:
After starting the program, the user can rotate the External feed/Spindle hold knob anytime to
control the spindle and the movement of the slide carriage.
When the knob is located at position 1, the program is executed normally.
When the knob is rotated to position 2 from position 1, the slide carriage enters the pause state and
stops moving, but the spindle state is maintained.
When the knob is rotated to position 3 from position 2, the spindle stops rotating.
83
OPERATION
When P412_d6=0, the External feed/Spindle hold knob is ineffective; the input signal pins are used

When the knob is rotated to position 2 from position 3, the spindle recovers to the original state.
When the knob is rotated to position 1 from position 2, the carriage recovers to the movement state.
During the feed hold and spindle stop, if ESC key or RESET key is pressed, the system returns to
the automatic initial state. Then the previous spindle state and the slide carriage unfinished commands
cannot be maintained. The user can continue the machining only by restarting the program.
4.5.6.3 External Start and Pause Signals
OPERATION
The external cycle start/pause signal, which is set by parameter P412_d7, is effective only in AUTO
operation mode.
When P412_d7=1, the system external cycle start/pause signal is effective; the input signals are led
in through pin ST, SP.
When P412_d7=0, the system external cycle start/pause signal is ineffective; the input signal pins
are used for other purposes.
The function of the external pause operation key signal (SP) is the same as that of the feed hold key
(cycle pause key) on the panel; and the external cycle start key signal (ST) is the same as that of the
cycle start key on the panel. Both SP and ST are output to the system from the machine, with the low
level valid.
Before the system is switched to Auto operation mode from other modes, it is required that the
external start button and external pause button be released (disconnected). Otherwise, the system
issues an abnormality alarm.
For the connection, refer to Chapter Three CNC Device Connection in Part Connection.
4.5.6.4
Feeding Device Alarm Function
If the function is required, define its input pin in interface parameters, and perform the connection
correctly; the system detects the signal at the corresponding pin.
P512
Dalm
Detection signal of feeding device alarm.
Function descriptions
1)
When executing M20 command, the system automatically stops and issues an alarm after
detecting the signal.
2) If the program does not end with M20 command, but with M02 or M30 command, the feeding
device alarm function is invalid.
4.5.7
Modifying Tool Offset during Program Execution
In the machining, it is available to modify the tool offsets in a pop-up window. However, this
operation should be performed with caution.
4.5.7.1 Methods of Modifying Tool Offsets during Program Execution

Methods of modifying tool offsets
84
Chapter Four
1)
In the automatic operation, by pressing OFFSET key, the system displays a window, showing
the tool offset modification page; by pressing OFFSET key again, the system closes the window,
and so on.
2)
Select the tool offset number to be modified by pressing
,
or
,
key (See
3)
Press ENTER key, then input the data; if the input data is required to directly replace the
original data, press ENTER key; if it is necessary to add the input data to the original data,
press ALTER key; if it is required to cancel the data, press ESC key.
4)
After the input, press OFFSET key or ESC key to exit the tool offset display page.
Note
1)
In inputting the data, the user can switch back to display page of Auto operation mode anytime.
Then after switching to the tool offset display page again, the previously-input data which has
been confirmed by pressing ENTER key is retained, and the user can continue the data input.
2)
On the tool offset modification page, the operations in Auto operation mode, such as dwell and
feedrate override modification, are still valid. During dwell, the user can also switch to the tool
offset modification page to modify the tool offsets.
4.5.7.2
Modifying Validity of Tool Offsets during Program Execution
Warning
The tool offset data modified is valid only after the tool change is executed. If it is the tool offset data
corresponding to the current tool offset number that is modified, the modified data is valid after the next
tool change is executed. If it is the tool offset corresponding to the tool offset number which has not been
executed that is modified, the modified data is valid in this execution.
If the tool offset of the current tool offset number is modified in the program without a tool change
command, the modified tool offset becomes valid after executing M02, M30, M20, Reset or interruption.
4.5.8
Viewing Running Information in AUTO Operation Mode
This function is valid in any state in Auto and Manual operation modes.
In the process of machining a part program automatically, a window can be displayed for the user to
view three kinds of data, i.e. macro variable, I/O variable and others during the system operation. The
explanations are as follows:
Macro variable: Viewing and modifying all the common variables; (unsupported)
I/O variable: Viewing the values (i.e. system interface states) of the system interface variables;
(unsupported)
85
OPERATION
Section 4.7 Tool Offset Operation Mode in PartOperation for details).
key; then select the tool offset item to be modified by pressing
or

Others:
Viewing the blocks that have been executed, spindle fluctuation range in threading, nesting
call level in subprogram and program cycle.
Operation methods are as follows:

1) In Auto operation mode, press
key to cause the system to display a window indicating a
three-item (macro variable, I/O variable, others) page; by pressing ESC key, the system closes
the window.
OPERATION
2) Press
or
key to select the item to be viewed. The item selected is displayed in
black.
3)
When there are many macro variables to be viewed, press
key to select a variable
(pointed by the pointer). Here, the macro variable cannot be modified. Then press
key to view the last or the next macro variable, or press
or
the last page or next page of macro variables (seven lines per page); press
or
key to view
key to return,
then the macro variable is displayed in black.

4)
In automatic initial state, the common variable at which the pointer points can be modified by
pressing ENTER key.
5) After viewing the variables, press ESC key to exit the display page.
Explanations
1)
Macro variable: Displaying the common variables being executed in the program where they are
edited, including the variable sequence number, variable name, variable value and state.
Therein, the variable values varying with the program execution are dynamically displayed, and
the sequence number as well as the variable name are arranged in ascending order. Variables
r001r040 are displayed in brown, variables r041r99 are in orange, and variables r100r199
are in green.
2 I/O variable: Dynamically displaying the interface state of the current program. The two state
values of the input interface variable are: 0 (low level) or 1 (high level); The low level indicates
that the external signal is valid, and the pin is connected to 0 V; the high level indicates that the
external signal is invalid. Variable state of the input interface: When 0 is output, the external
can form a return circuit. When 1 is output, the external cannot form a return circuit. r1001
r1032 are the states of the input interfaces, and r2001r2032 are the states of the output
interfaces; These states are classified into 8 groups. The first line displays the first group: r1008,
r1007, r1006, r1005, r1004, r1003, r1002, r1001, and so on.
3) Others: Viewing the total number of blocks that have been executed, spindle fluctuation range in
threading, nesting call level of the subprogram and program cycle.
86
Chapter Four
4) Before starting the program, the macro variables r100 r199 can be modified manually.
Modification method: Select the macro variable to be modified, press ENTER key to input the
desired value, and then press ENTER key again to complete the modification.
4.5.9
Return to Program Reference Point in AUTO Operation Mode
This function is valid in the initial state in Auto operation mode.

workpiece coordinate system and program reference point. In this case, both the operations of program
zero point return by pressing keys and program reference point return by G commands return to the
position of the set program reference point.
After returning to the program reference point using a G command, if it is required to continue the
machining, use G00 command to simultaneously position the absolute coordinates of the two axes, in
order to ensure the machining is correct.
After returning to the program zero point by pressing keys manually, the system automatically points
to the first block of the program. Here, by pressing CYCEL START key, the system starts execution from
the first block of the program.
4.5.10 System Reset Key and Emergency Stop Signal Processing in Auto Mode
In Auto operation mode, the system enters the Reset state by pressing Reset key. See Section
4.1.4.7 Reset Operation in PartOperation.
For details about the emergency stop signal in Auto operation, see Section 4.1.4.3 Emergency Stop
Alarm in PartOperation.
Note
1)
Before releasing the emergency stop alarm, first confirm the fault has been removed;
2)
Pressing down the emergency stop button before Power On and Power Off can reduce
the surging to the equipment.
3)
Re-perform machine zero return after releasing the emergency stop alarm, to ensure the
coordinate position is correct (if the machine is not equipped with the machine zero, it is
forbidden to perform machine zero return);
4)
The external emergency stop is valid only when bit parameter P404_d7 is set to 0.
4.5.11 Adjusting Brightness of LCD screen in AUTO, MANUAL Operation Mode

This function is valid in the initial state in AUTO operation mode.
The operation method is as follows:
1)
Press 9 key twice rapidly to cause the system to display the brightness adjusting window; the
windows is closed by pressing any key other than the brightness adjusting key.
87
OPERATION
This system allows the program to be started wherever the slide carriage is after the user sets the

2) The brightness adjusting window contains 010 levels: level 0 is the darkest, and level 10 is the
brightest; Press brightness adjusting key
brightness adjusting key
to increase the LCD brightness, press
to reduce the LCD brightness.
Note
OPERATION
1) When the LCD has LED backlight, the brightness adjusting function is valid for the LCD screen;
when the LCD has CCFL backlight, the function is invalid for the screen.
2) The brightness adjusting window will disappear in 10 seconds if no key operation is performed.
3) It is also available to adjust the LCD screen brightness in Manual operation mode in the same
way as in Auto operation mode.
4.5.12
Displaying Executing States of M Commands in Auto, Manual Operation Mode
The displayed M commands are classified into the following 6 groups: M21/22, M23/24, M61/62,
M63/64, M65/66, other M commands: M60, M67M74, M81/82/83. In Manual/Auto operation mode, if
the M codes above are executed, the screen displays corresponding prompts. The M commands being
executed are displayed in red; the M commands which have been executed are in green; the M
commands which are terminated during operation are in yellow.
4.5.13
Additional Operation in Auto Operation Mode
When executing the program in Auto operation mode, if there is an interlock relationship between
spindle and chuck, execute M3 to start the spindle during M11; there are two choices after an alarm
occurs:
1)
Press ESC key to exit to the initial state in Auto operation mode.
2)
Pedal the footswitch to execute M10; or execute M3 to start the spindle by pressing CYCLE
START key; or exit to the initial state in Auto operation mode by pressing ESC key.
88
Chapter Four
4.6
System Operation - Parameter
Parameter Operation Mode
The functions of Parameter operation mode include: parameter input, parameter extraction,
parameter solidification and parameter transfer; for each operation, the system provides corresponding
intelligent prompt messages. Also, the user can press the hp2 key on the upper right corner of the
system to view the list of the system parameter operation keys.

The descriptions for the input formats and examples of related setting and operation in the
keys to be input are indicated by an underline; the prompt messages of the system are indicated by a
rectangle.
In inputting a letter or a numeric, if a wrong one is input, press
key to delete it, and then
input the correct one.

before confirmation, it means the current operation is quit.
Special note: Before modifying the parameters, save all the parameter setting values stored in
the system into a PC or laptop. Once the parameters are modified by mistake or system faults
occur, the user can recover the system using the stored data.
By the easy to search and remember principle, the parameters are classified into the following types:
reference coordinate parameters, motion parameters, drive parameters, auxiliary function parameters,
bit-control parameters, interface parameters, variable initial value parameters and pitch error
compensation parameters. Each parameter has a definite meaning, which determines the operation
mode of the CNC system and machine. When installing and debugging the machine, it is necessary to
modify some parameters depending on the actual conditions.
to enter Parameter operation mode page. (If the system
displays a window requiring passwords, input the user password or directly press Enter key to enter
the Parameter interface).
hp2
[ PARAMETER ]
M-REFER PARAM
P000
Z program reference point
303.698
X-MOTION PARAM
P001
X program refere nce point
203.698
Z -DRIVE PARAM
P002
Y program reference point
0.000
S-AUXLIARY PARA
P003
Z axis 2nd prog refer point
200.000
T-BIT PARAM
P004
Z axis 2nd prog refer point
200.000
U-INTRFACE
P005
Y axis 2nd prog refer point
200.000
W-VARIBLE
P006
Z axis 3rd prog refer point
200.000
P007
X axis 2nd prog refer point
200.000
F-PITCH PARAM
EDIT
JOG
AUTO
PARAM
OFFT
DNG
Fig. 4-8 Parameter operation mode

89
OPERATION
manual are as follows: the function keys to be pressed are indicated by a sign; the letter keys, numeric

4.6.1
Parameter Overview
The operation characteristics of the parameters include:

1)
According to the level of the password that the user input, the parameters corresponding to this
level can be modified.
2)
If ENTER key is pressed without inputting any password, the operation level is level 4. The user
can enter the parameter interface to view the parameters here rather than modify them.
3)
The input and display format of the parameter: a decimal should include a decimal point, and a
OPERATION
negative number should include a negative sign; for the convenient and safe operation, the
system limits the number of effective digits.
4)
The user can open the message window which prompts the input range of the parameter data.
5)
The system self-checks the parameter data at power on, and prompts automatic initialization
after detecting the data is in mess.
6)
The system provides abundant and applicable safety parameters. Therefore, the user can
reduce the misoperation by setting the parameters appropriately, so as to prevent accidents.
4.6.1.1
Parameter Authority
The parameter authority is the password level to modify parameters. For convenient management,
the system provides the parameter authority setting function. The current operation level is displayed on
the prompt column on the top of the parameter page.
Arranged from high to low, the parameter password levels are as follows:
Level 1:
****
Machine tool builder,
range of alterable parameters: Parameter level >=1;
Level 2:
****
Device administrator,
range of alterable parameters: Parameter level >=2
Level 3:
3333
Level 4:
****
Machine tool operator,

No password input,

For the parameter levels of each type of parameter, see the parameter lists in the appendix.
4.6.1.2 Entering an Operation Level

The procedures of entering different operation levels are as follows:
Enter parameter password input page;
Input the operation password (each time a number is input, a sign * is displayed.)
After the input, press ENTER key to enter the operation level corresponding to this password.
4.6.1.3
Parameter Management
The parameter management consists of the parameter display, parameter authority, and parameter
initialization, solidification, extraction, sending and receiving according to the parameter authority.
Parameter display
Meanings of the parameter colors:
In the current authority, the parameters allowed to modify are displayed in yellow, the parameters
not allowed to modify are displayed in white;
90
Chapter Four
On the parameter page, some operation function options are also relative to the authority; e.g. the
function options which are not operable after pressing hp6 key are displayed in grey-white.
Prompt message display:
When inputting a parameter, the user can open or close the prompt message about the parameter
value range by setting parameter P415_d7.
Other displays:
On the parameter page, if a parameter is modified successfully, a sign * is marked in front of its
parameter number, indicating the parameter modification succeeds.
After completing the some operations of hp6, the system displays the operation result, and marks a
sign * ahead of the parameter number which is successfully modified, indicating the parameter
modification succeeds.
Parameter authority
In different authorities, the alterable parameters are displayed in yellow, and the unalterable
parameters are displayed in white. The parameter update (e.g. parameter update through a serial port or
USB) can only modify the parameter data of the current user authority or lower.
The sign
level;
before a parameter means the parameter is alterable under the current password
means the parameter is unalterable.
Authority modification
The authority is modified using passwords, i.e. inputting the password when entering the parameter
password input page. If the password input page does not appear when entering the parameter page,
the user can set whether to memorize the password by setting bit parameter P416_d7. When
P416_d7=0, the password is not memorized. In this case, after entering the parameter page from other
operation modes, the parameter password input page will appear. The operations are as follows:
1)
Set bit parameter P416_d7 to 0;
2)
Press any operation mode key other than PARAMETER operation key;
3)
Press PARAMETER key to enter the parameter password input page;
4)
Input the operation authority password directly;
5)
After the input, press ENTER key to enter the operation level corresponding to the password.
Parameter saving
The successfully-modified parameter is automatically saved into the CNC system. In addition, when
exiting from the parameter page (i.e. pressing other operation mode keys to enter other operation mode
pages), the system saves all the parameters. The parameter data saved in the system are read each
time the system is powered on. If the system detects a parameter exceeds the range during parameter
reading, the system replaces the value by the one within the range and issues a prompt. If the
parameters read during Power On are in chaos, the system prompts whether to read the original
solidified parameters; if there is no solidified parameter, the system prompts the user to select
91
OPERATION
displays the alarm message Without modification authority! on the parameter setting area.
If the user tries to modify the parameters with a higher authority than the current one, the system

Step/Servo parameters to initialize the parameters, and save them to the system. The main difference
between step parameters and servo parameters is the motion parameter value.
4.6.2
Modifying Parameters
The system parameters have been initialized in factory. After installing the system to the machine,
please modify and debug the parameters appropriately depending on the actual conditions.
OPERATION
After a parameter number is selected, it is highlighted by the system.
4.6.2.1
Searching Parameters
The parameter search is to search the desired parameter; there are two methods:
Method 1:
On the parameter page, select: M - reference parameters, X - motion parameters, Z - drive
parameters, S - auxiliary parameters, T - bit parameters, U - interface parameters, W - variable

initial values or F pitch error compensation parameters, as required.
E.g. select M reference parameters, then press M key to enter the reference parameter page.
Press
key or
key to move the highlighted block cursor to the
parameter number to be searched; for bit parameters, press
or
key to move
the cursor leftwards or rightwards to select different bits, with the meaning of the selected bit
displayed at the same time.
Method 2:
Locate the desired parameter number directly. The procedures are as follows:
Press P key, and input the parameter number to be searched, then press ENTER key. The system
then displays the desired parameter with a highlighted block cursor. E.g., to search P208, first input P,
and input 2
0
8, then press ENTER key to seek parameter P208.
4.6.2.2
Modifying Parameters
The procedures of modifying parameters are as follows:
Seek the parameter to be modified using the method above.
Press ENTER key, then input the parameter data; or directly input the parameter data.
If wrong data are input, press
Press ENTER key.
key to delete them, then input the right ones.
Note
1)
If the data input exceeds the specified parameter range, the data is invalid, and the contents of
the parameter are not changed.
92
2)
After inputting the data, the input data is invalid if ESC key is pressed.
3)
The procedures of inputting bit parameters are as follows:
Chapter Four
After selecting the parameter to be modified, select the parameter bit to be modified using left
and right keys (the explanation for the currently selected bit is displayed on the bottom of the
screen).
Modifying a single bit: Directly input the desired data (only 0or 1).
Modifying all bits: the method is almost the same as that of manual setting of common
parameters. The only difference is that the data is input from left to right. E.g. input 11, and press
Bit parameter P411_d6: if it is changed, the pitch error compensation parameters P1000P1899
are initialized to 0, i.e. all the values of previous pitch error compensation parameters are
changed to 0.
4.6.3
Parameter hp6 Function
Press hp6 key on the parameter page to display the following:

Key U USB interface operation
Key R RS232 interface operation
Key I Parameter extraction
Key K Parameter solidification
Key F Software update
Key D Memory update
According to the password level, the user can communicate, extract and solidify the parameters as
well as update the system software and memory; I is for parameter extraction; K for parameter fixture;
F for software update (the system software is upgraded with USB or RS232); D for internal memory
update.
During data solidification and extraction, please do not turn off the power, and do not perform other
operations before the operation is completed. The data solidification and extraction have no effect on the
part programs stored in the system.
4.6.3.1
Parameter Communication and Standard Format
There are two types of communication depending on the parameter transmission direction:
Parameter sending and parameter receiving. The parameter receiving includes three modes: PCCNC,
USBCNC, CNCCNC; the parameter sending also includes three modes: CNCPC, CNCUSB,
CNCCNC.
Parameter sending: (Operation level: all levels)
The operators of all levels can send the parameters to a U disc or a PC through RS232 serial port.
Parameter receiving: (Operation level: Machine tool builder, device administrator, machine operator)
The operators of level 3 or above can receive the parameters from a U disc or PC (RS232).
However, it is only valid for those parameters which can be modified in the corresponding level.
93
OPERATION
key, then the parameter is modified to 11000000.
ENTER key, then the parameter is modified to: 00000011; input 11000000, and press ENTER

For the operation of the communication software that uses RS232 for transmission, see Chapter
Five RS232 and USB System Communication in PartOperation. GSKCOM_C001.EXE can realize the
file transmission between PC and CNC, which is easy to operate and has high communication efficiency
and reliability.
RS232 and USB interface function: for transmitting parameter data.
Press R key to transmit data by means of RS232 communication mode.
OPERATION
. RS232 parameter receiving: PCCNC, CNCCNC

1.
Set the baudrate and communication port of the communication software; see Chapter Five
RS232 and USB System Communication in PartOperation.
2.
Input the parameters saved in the external computer to the CNC system; or transmit the
parameters between CNC systems.
1) Connect the communication cable between CNC system and computer, or between CNC
systems at Power Off.
2) Turn on the CNC system and select the Parameter setting operation mode. Set a
corresponding authority in the CNC, and the received parameters can only modify the
parameters with a corresponding authority level; Before inputting a password, the CNC
disables the parameter
receiving; note: The transmission between CNC systems only
transfers the parameters with the same password level.

3)
First press hp6 key, then press R key
4)
Press 1 key to receive parameters.
5)
The operation is completed, and the system prompts the receiving succeeds
. RS232 Parameter sending: CNCPC, CNCCNC

1. RS232 baudrate setting
Before transmitting files, set the baudrates of bit parameter P414_d7 and P414_d6. The
communication baudrate is subject to the setting of the sender. Setting range: 9600, 19200, 38400
(unitbps)
2. Input the parameters stored in the external computer to the CNC system; or transmit parameters
between CNC systems.
1) Connect the communication cable between CNC system and computer, or between CNC
systems at Power Off.
2) Turn on the system and enter the parameter page.
3) First press hp6 key; then press R key.
4) Press 2 key to send the parameters.
5) The operation is completed, and the system prompts the sending succeeds.
USB operation: USBCNC, CNCUSB

First press hp6 key, then U key to transmit data using USB communication mode. The user should
select the transmission direction as required.

94
Chapter Four
When using a U disc to transmit parameters, create a folder with file name C001PAR in its root
directory, and the receiving and sending of parameters are in this folder. Format of file name: PAR + file
number (three digits) + .TXT
Standard format of TXT parameter file on PC
On a PC, the parameter files can be edited with TXT or LST text. However, to send the files correctly
system.
1)
On a PC, the suffix of the file name should be TXT or LST, e.g. PAR099.TXT; it is suggested
that the user use TXT suffix, for the convenience of the operation on PC.
2)
The first line of the contents of the TXT file must be the parameter mark: CNC_GSKC001; this
is an essential part.
3) The second line is the comment part, in front of which should be placed //; this item is omissible.
4)
The third line and the following lines are the contents of the parameter. The contents must be in
accordance with the requirements of the standard format.
E.g. P000: 00000.000
// Z program reference point
Hereinto, P000 is the parameter number; the format of the parameter number includes three
parts: P + number + :. If any part of them is missing, the parameter number is incorrect.
00000.000 is the contents of the parameter; // is placed in front of the parameter comment.
5)
The contents of the file can be part of all the parameters.
6)
The pitch error compensation parameters include equal-interval pitch compensation

parameters and unequal-interval pitch compensation parameters. Select the appropriate format
for pitch error compensation parameters according to the parameter types to be updated. The
selection of formats of the pitch error compensation parameter is relative to bit parameter
P411_d6: When P411_d6=0, the pitch error compensation has equal interval, when P411_d6
=1, the space of the pitch error compensation has unequal interval. If the selected pitch error
compensation parameter does not match corresponding bit parameter P411_d6, the pitch error
compensation parameters cannot be updated successfully. The format is as follows:
Format of equalinterval pitch error compensation parameter
// Pitch error compensation parameter; starts with P1000 in TXT file
P1000
0000000000
P1010
0000000000
P1020
0000000000
P1880
0000000000
P1890
0000000000
P1900
// Machine coordinate of Z axis start point
P1901
// Machine coordinate of X axis start point
P1902
// Machine coordinate of Y axis start point
P1903
// Pitch error compensation interval of Z axis
P1904
// Pitch error compensation interval of X axis
P1905
// Pitch error compensation interval of Y axis

95
OPERATION
the system. The requirements are as follows according to the parameter file pattern output by the
to the system, the file name and the contents of the file must be in accordance with the requirements of

Format of unequal-interval pitch compensation Parameter:
// Pitch error compensation parameter; starts with P2000 in TXT file
P2000
00000.000000000.000000000.000000000.000000000.0000
P2010
00000.000000000.000000000.000000000.000000000.0000
OPERATION
7)
P2880
00000.000000000.000000000.000000000.000000000.0000
P2890
00000.000000000.000000000.000000000.000000000.0000
P2900
00000.000
// Machine coordinate of Z axis start point
P2901
00000.000
// Machine coordinate of X axis start point
P2902
00000.000
// Machine coordinate of Y axis start point
P2903
00000.000
// Pitch error compensation interval of Z axis
P2904
00000.000
// Pitch error compensation interval of X axis
P2905
00000.000
// Pitch error compensation interval of Y axis
Standard format of parameter file communication on PC:

TXT file format
Remarks
CNC_GSKC001
//reference coordinate;
P000
00200.000 // Z program reference point
P027
0
// Y zero offset
//motion parameters;
P100
6000
// Z max. rapid traverse rate
P209
1200
// Spindle encoder lines
//Auxiliary function
P300
1000
// M41 gear max. speed
P344
0
//bit-control parameter;
P400
00000000 // Running setting
//interface parameter
P512
0
// Feed device alarm detection Dalm
//variable initial value

P600
0
// variable r01
//Pitch error compensation parameter

P1000
0000000000
P1905
0
//Y pitch compensation interval
Mark for checking parameters, which cannot be

omitted.
4.6.3.2
The contents behind // is the comment, which can be

omitted.
PXXX parameter number, P000: the first parameter
number cannot be omitted.
PXXX: the parameter numbers after the first number
can be omitted, each of which is regarded as the
parameter following the last one.
0: the parameter contents can be omitted.
PXXX: the parameter number and colon : must not be
separated.
indicates other parameters, which are not listed.
The parameters can be partly received.
Parameter Extraction and Solidification
The parameters which can be viewed on the interface are saved in the SRAM memory of the
system. The memory has the power failure protection function; if the battery of the mainboard fails , the
parameters will be lost.
The system is provided with the parameter initialization function; please perform the initialization
operation depending on the matched motor drive unit; for the system matched with a DA98 series drive
unit, perform the servo initialization, and for the system matched with a DY3 series drive unit, perform
the step initialization. The difference between servo and step initialization parameters lies primarily in the
96
Chapter Four
X- motion parameter. For the difference between servo/step values, see the motion parameter list in the
appendix.
The initialization parameters are not applicable to all the machines. The machine tool builder should
modify the parameters, such as the spindle and tool post, according to the specific machine
configuration.
To prevent the parameters from being lost, the user should perform the solidification command. That
parameters are lost, recover them by extracting the solidified parameters.

The user can perform the parameter extraction and solidification according to the prompts displayed
in a pop-up dialog box. The parameter extraction commands include the step parameter initialization,
servo parameter initialization and machine tool parameter extraction.
Explanations
1)
Before performing the parameter solidification, the system checks corresponding parameters. If
the check is not passed, the system prompts an alarm message requiring the user to modify the
corresponding parameters; if the check is passed. the user can save the parameters to the
FLASH of the system for solidification.
2)
If no parameters are solidified before, the user cannot perform solidified parameter extraction.
4.6.3.3
System Software Upgrade and Internal Memory Update
The system software upgrade is to upgrade the system software, i.e. to replace the old version of
software by the new version; so as to improve the system functions.
The system update is to update and improve the system software, so as to make the system more
stable. It does no harm to the system, but incorrect operation may result in the system update failure. If
the update fails, the system cannot be started up, or even the system hardware will be damaged.
Therefore, we suggest the user not upgrade the system software without authorization. It is
recommended that the upgrade service be provided by our professional staff with our after-sale service
center.
The system memory upgrade is to upgrade the system memory, including the memory occupied by
the system software.
If the memory upgrade fails, serious consequences may occur. It is suggested that the
operation be performed by our professional technician instead of the user.
The methods of upgrading the system and memory include: USB mode and RS232 mode; the
operation can be performed only with the authority of the machine tool builder.
1)
System software upgrade using USB mode:

After inserting a U disc, operate the system based on the system prompts; then the system
automatically completes the software upgrade. When using USB mode for upgrade, create a
folder with the name C001DATA in the root directory of the U disc. The sending and receiving of
codes are in the folder. Format of the file name: DATA + file number (three digits) + .TXT.
Range of the file number: 0~254.
97
OPERATION
The FLASH memory is capable of storing the data permanently without any battery. If the current
is, to solidify the parameters that have been modified to the FLASH memory of the system as a backup.

2)
System software upgrade using RS232 mode:

The system can be upgraded by using the communication software GSKCOM_C001.EXE. For
the operation of the communication software with RS232 mode, see PartOperation: Chapter
Five RS232 and USB System Communication .
When upgrading the memory with USB mode, create a folder with the name C001MEMO in the
root directory of the U disc. The receiving and sending of codes are in the folder. Format of the file name:
MEMO+ file numberthree digits+.TXT. Range of the file number: 0~254. When upgrading the
OPERATION
memory
with
RS232
mode,
complete
the
operation
using
the
communication
software
GSKCOM_C001.EXE.
Note
1)
After the upgrade using USB mode succeeds, if ESC key or RESET key is pressed, the user
needs to return the control to Edit operation mode to re-edit the current program, or the system
issues an alarm.
4.6.3.4
Function Command Authority
On the parameter page, some operation function options are also relative to the authority; it is not
allowed to operate those function options displayed in grey white.
Correspondence between function options and password authorities
Operation authority
Operation option
Step,
servo
parameter
initialization
Extracting
parameters
of
machine tool builder
Parameter
solidification
operation
Parameters received with USB
and RS232
Parameters sent with USB and
RS232
System software update and
memory update
Level 1
Machine
tool builder
Level 2
Device
administrator
Level 3
Machine
tool
operator
According to
parameter
level
All
According to
parameter
level
All
According to
parameter
level
All
Level 4
No
password
According to
parameter
level
All
The in the table indicates the required authority; the space indicates no authority is required.
4.6.4
Description of Parameters
The system parameters are classified based on their use and functions. Their functions are as
follows: (Y axis function is invalid)
4.6.4.1
Parameters of Reference Point, Soft Limit __ P000P020
The reference coordinate parameters include the important coordinate position points of machine
Z/X/Y axes. The movement of each axis is based on these points.
98
Chapter Four
Program reference point of Z/X/Y axis__ Reference coordinate parameters P000, P001, P002
This parameter is used for setting the position of the program reference point. In Manual/Auto
operation mode, the machine returns to this position after performing the program reference point return.
The setting of the position can be modified by inputting a command (in Manual operation mode) or
executing G50 command (in Auto operation mode) .
The coordinates of the program reference point are the machine coordinates, which are not affected
by the tool offset.
P004, P005, P006, P007, P008

The second and third program reference points resemble the program reference point: in Auto
operation mode, after specifying G30 command, the machine returns to the second or third program
reference point specified by G30 command. For details, see Section 4.11 G30-Return to 2nd, 3rd
Program Reference Point in Part Programming.
Positive, negative tool nose software limit of Z/X/Y axis__Reference coordinate parameters
P009, P010, P011, P012, P013, P014
This parameter is used to limit the motion range of the tool nose coordinates. It determines the max.
strokes of the tool post on the positive and negative direction of Z/X/Y axis.
In Manual/Auto operation mode, if the tool nose coordinates of Z/X/Y axis are greater than or equal
to the positive soft limit values of the tool nose, the tool cannot be moved in the positive direction any
more. It can only be moved in the negative direction. Otherwise, the system issues an alarm: Positive
tool nose software limit alarm. This also applies to negative movement.
Positive, negative machine software limit of Z/X/Y axis__ Reference coordinate parameters
P015, P016, P017, P018, P019, P020
This parameter is used for limiting the motion range of the machine coordinates. It determines the
max. strokes of the machine in the positive and negative direction of Z/X/Y axis.
In Manual/Auto operation mode, if the machine coordinates of Z/X/Y axis are greater than or equal
to the positive soft limit values of the machine, the tool cannot be moved in the positive direction any
more. It can only be moved in the negative direction. Otherwise, the system issues an alarm: Machine
positive soft limit alarm. This also applies to negative movement.
4.6.4.2
Parameters of Zero Return Function__ P021P026, P109P111, P406
P407
Machine zero coordinates of Z/X/Y axis__Reference coordinate parameters P021, P022, P023
This parameter determines the coordinates of the machine zero point position. If the machine is
equipped with the device to detect the machine zero point, and P407_d1 is set to 0, after the Machine
Zero Return (or G28) is executed in Manual/Auto operation mode and the system detects the Zero
99
OPERATION
Second, third program reference point of Z/X/Y axis__ Reference coordinate parameters P003,

Signal, the system automatically modifies the current machine coordinates to the values set in
P021/P022/P023.
Zero offset value of Z/X/Y__ Reference coordinate parameters P024, P025, P026
When using a servo motor, in general, the zero return detection is to detect the deceleration signal
and the zero point rotation signal of the motor encoder; When the deceleration signal installed on the
axis coincides with the zero point rotation signal, the zero return precision may be affected (the
OPERATION
difference my be one revolution); in this case, set the offset to 2mm to avoid 2mm, then perform the
detection.
Zero-return low speed of Z/X/Y axis__ Motion parameters P109, P110, P111
Zero-return low speed is the traverse speed of the axis when detecting the zero signal during the
execution of machine zero function. When the zero return speed is higher than the minimum start speed,
the zero return is performed at the minimum start speed. When the zero-return speed is lower than the
start speed, the zero return is performed at the zero-return speed. After setting the zero-return speed, do
not modify it freely. Otherwise, the zero-return precision may be affected.
Zero setting 1__ Bit parameter P406 (password level: 1)
d7
d6
d 5
d4
d3
d2
reserved
d0
d7__ With/without Z deceleration signal

d6__ With/without X deceleration signal
d5__ With/without Y deceleration signal
0: Without.
// If the machine is not equipped with a deceleration switch or stopper, set it to 0;
1: With.
// If the machine is equipped with a deceleration switch and stopper, set it to 1;
d4__ With/without Z zero point signal

d3__ With/without X zero point signal
d2__ With/without Y zero point signal
0: Without.
// If the machine is not equipped with a machine zero switch or stopper, set it to 0;
1: With.
// If the machine is equipped with a machine zero switch and stopper, set it to 1;
// The system provides four types of zero return (see CONNECTION for details) as follows:
Zero return
type
1
2
3
4
100
Deceleration
signal
Zero
signal
With
With
With
Without
Without
With
Without
Without
Remarks
Return to machine zero using both the deceleration
signal and zero return signal
Return to machine zero only using the deceleration
signal
Return to machine zero only using the zero signal.
Return to the zero coordinates set by parameters
(without a machine zero)
Chapter Four
d0__ Without machine zero, the zero-return key is:

0: Disabled. // When the system has no machine zero, the Machine zero return key on the panel is
disabled, but G28 zero return in the program is still enabled.
1: Enabled. // When the system has no machine zero, the Machine zero return key on the panel is
enabled, and the system returns to the machine zero by means of type-4 zero return.
// When neither the machine zero switch and stopper, nor the deceleration switch and stopper are
OPERATION
coordinates set by parameters when there is no machine zero.

Zero setting 2__ Bit parameter P407 (password level: 1)
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
Reserved
d7__ Zero return direction of Z axis

d6__ Zero return direction of X axis
d5__ Zero return direction of Y axis
0: Positive.
// If the deceleration switch is installed at the end of the positive direction for the
coordinate axis, the parameter is set to 0, and the system moves towards the
positive direction to detect the zero point;
1: Negative.
// If the deceleration switch is installed at the end of the negative direction for the
coordinate axis, the parameter is set to 1, and the system moves towards the
negative direction to detect the zero point;
d4__ Deceleration signal level of Z axis

d3__ Deceleration signal level of X axis
d2__ Deceleration signal level of Y axis
0: Low.
// The system decelerates to stop during axis zero return when detecting the
deceleration signal is the low level.
1: High.
// The system decelerates to stop during axis zero return when detecting the
deceleration signal is the high level.
d1__ Whether to modify machine coordinates after the machine zero is returned.
0 Modify machine coordinates
1:
4.6.4.3
equipped, the system returns to the machine zero by type-4 zero return, i.e. returning to the zero
// In general, set it to 0. The machine coordinates are
modified after zero return.

Not modify machine coordinates // Set it to 1 when debugging zero return function, then the
zero return precision can be known visually.
Parameters of Movement Speed and Acceleration Time __P100 P108,
P112P119
To enhance machining efficiency, the system can be applied to motors of different types or machine
tools of different loads by adjusting parameters P100P116, etc. E.g. When using a stepper motor,
adjust the parameters to a lower value to prevent stepout; when using a servo motor, adjust the
parameters to a higher value appropriately.
101

For details, refer to Section 4.6.5 Appendix in PartOperation. The stepper initial values differ from
the servo initial values in the motion parameter list
Max. traverse speed limit of Z/X/Y__Motion parameters P100, P101, P102
Parameters P100, P101, P102 determine the rapid traverse rate for X, Y, Z axis respectively in
manual rapid traverse and G00 command. Meanwhile, the actual rapid traverse rate of Z, X, Y axis is
also controlled by the rapid override.
Actual rapid traverse rate of Z axis = P100 rapid override (unit: mm/min)
OPERATION
Actual rapid traverse rate of X axis = P101 rapid override (unit: mm/min)
Actual rapid traverse rate of Y axis = P102 rapid override (unit: mm/min)
Minimum initial speed of Z/X/Y__Motion parameters P103, P104, P105
Parameters P103, P104, P105 determine the minimum initial speed for Z, X, Y axis respectively
when the axis movement is performed in MANUAL operation mode or G00 is performed in AUTO
operation mode; When the speed of Z, X, Y axis is lower than the value set in P103, P104, P105, the
value set in P103, P104, P105 takes precedence.
Adjust the value of this parameter to a proper value based on the actual loading of the machine tool.
(Unit: mm/min)
Z/X/Y rapid feed acceleration/deceleration timems__Motion parameters P106, P107, P108
Parameters P106, P107, P108 determine the time that the speed linearly increases from 0 to
15m/min for, X, Y, Z axis respectively when the axis movement is performed in MANUAL operation mode
or G00 is performed in AUTO operation mode; (X axis is programmed in radius ). The greater the values
of P106, P107, P108, the longer the acceleration process of Z, X, Y axis. To improve machining
efficiency, decrease the values of P106, P107, P108 as much as possible on the condition that the load
characteristics are satisfied. (Unit: ms)
Initial speed of cutting feed__Motion parameterP112
P112 cutting initial speed. Parameter P112 determines the initial speed of cutting commands such
as G01, G02, G03, G05 during system automatic machining. (Unit: mm/min)
Max. speed limit of cutting feed__Motion parameter P113
P113 maximum speed of cutting feed. P113 determines the maximum speed of cutting commands
such as G01, G02, G03, G05 during system automatic machining. When the F speed value specified by
the program is greater than the one set in P113, the latter takes precedence. When the thread cutting
speed exceeds P113, the system issues an alarm, terminating the thread machining. (Unit: mm/min)
Cutting feed linear/exponential acceleration/deceleration time (ms)__Motion parameters P114,
P115
P114 Feed linear acceleration/deceleration time; P115 Feed exponential acceleration/deceleration
time;
Parameters P114 and P115 determine the time that the speed of cutting commands such as G01,
G02, G03, G05 accelerates from 0 to 15m/min during system automatic machining. (Unit: ms)
Thread cutting acceleration/deceleration time (ms)__Motion parameter P116
102
Chapter Four
Parameter P116 determines the time that the speed of the thread cutting axis accelerates from 0 to
15m/min. The smaller the P116, the shorter the generated distance. If P116 is too small, the stepper
motor may step out. (Unit: ms)
Thread run-out acceleration/deceleration (ms)__Motion parameter P117
When there is run-out in thread cutting, parameter P117 determines the acceleration/deceleration
time is the time that the speed accelerates from 0 to 15m/min. The smaller the P117, the steeper the
run-out. If P117 is too small, the stepper motor may step out. (Unit: ms)
If the parameter is set to 0, the system detects the lines of the spindle encoder each time it executes
G99 command. It starts to execute the commands following G99 when the encoder rotates to the lines
set in P118, i.e. the spindle rotates to a specific angle.
If the setting value of the parameter is not 0, the system does not detect the lines of the encoder, but
directly executes the commands following G99.
The lines that the system detects is four times that of the spindle encoder.
E.g. If the lines of the encoder installed is 1200, the lines that the system detects changes between
0~4800 recurrently. This parameter should be set between 04800 as well, or the system keeps waiting
because G99 command cannot be detected.
Delay time when positioning converts to cutting (ms)__Motion parameter P119
If the last command is a rapid positioning command, and its following one is a cutting command, the
delay set in P119 is automatically inserted between these two commands;
This parameter is used for preventing the taper streak on the workpiece due to the excessively fast
command transition. If the parameter is too large, the machining efficiency may be affected. In general,
set it between 0100.
Example 1:
G00 U-50
Rapid positioning
G01 W-10 F100 The following command (this one ) is a cutting command. Before executing this
command, delay P119 is inserted; to prevent taper streak generating on the front end.
Example 2
G00 U-50
Rapid positioning
S1000
G01 W-10 F100 Since this command does not follow the rapid positioning command closely (another
command separates them ), no delay is inserted during execution.
4.6.4.4
Parameters of Drive and Compensation P200P209, P411, P1000P1905
Command pulse multiplier of Z/X/Y__Drive parameters P203, P205, P207
103
OPERATION
G99 initial lines__Motion parameter P118

Command pulse division coefficient of Z/X/Y__Drive parameters P204, P206, P208
P203 Z multiplier coefficientNumerator of Z axis electronic gear.Range: 199999
P204 Z division coefficientDenominator of Z axis electronic gear.Range: 199999
P205 X multiplier coefficient: Numerator of X axis electronic gear.Range: 199999
P206 X division coefficient: Denominator of X axis electronic gear.Range: 199999
P207 Y multiplier coefficient: Nominator of Y axis electronic gear. (Range: 199999)
P208 Y division coefficient: Denominator of Y axis electronic gear. (Range: 199999)

Note
OPERATION
1)
When setting parameters of drive, the ratio of the multiplier coefficient to the division coefficient
should be limited between 1/128 128, or the system issues an alarm.
2)
When the ratio of multiplier coefficient to division coefficient is 1:1:

Z/Y axis: The system outputs one pulse each time 0.001mm is moved;
X axis: In system radius programming, each time 0.001mm is moved, two pulses are output.
(In system diameter programming, each time 0.001 mm is moved, one pulse is output.)
3)
When the ratio of the multiplier coefficient to division coefficient is not 1:1:
Z/Y axis: Each time 0.001 mm is moved, the pulse that the system outputs is: multiplier
coefficient/division coefficient
X axis: In system radius programming, each time 0.001 mm is moved, the pulse output is:
multiplier coefficient * 2/divisioin coefficient. (In system diameter programming, each
time 0.001 mm is moved, the pulse output is: multiplier coefficient/division coefficient. )
4) The maximum pulse output frequency of the system is 511pps/ms. This value cannot be exceeded
anytime, or an alarm occurs during movement. I.e. System parameter P100 (maximum traverse
speed) multiplier coefficient/division coefficient should not be greater than 30000mm/min.
Spindle encoder lines__Drive parameter P209
This parameter determines lines with settable range between 1005000 for the spindle encoder.
When the spindle is ON and the diagnosis operation mode is entered, if the set value is inconsistent with
the lines of the spindle encoder, the diagnosis check prompt : Encoder lines inconsistent with parameter
is displayed in the diagnosis mode. Unit: line/rev.
Backlash value for Z/X/Y__ Drive parameters P200, P201, P202
These parameters respectively determine the backlash values of mechanical drive for Z, X, Y axes.
Unit: mm.
Because gaps exist in the driving parts such as a screw and speed reducer on the machine tool,
errors occur when the tool post moves back and forth. To compensate the errors caused by the gaps,
Parameters P200, P201, P202 are provided. By setting these three parameters, the system
automatically compensates the gap errors when the machine changes its direction during movement.
The mechanical drive gap of the machine can be measured with following method (an example for Z
axis)
1)
Select MANUAL operation mode and proper feedrate.
2)
Mount the dial-indicator to a proper position on the machine, move the tool post till it touches
the measuring head, and then set the pointer of the dial-indicator to 0.
104
Chapter Four
3)
Select manual STEP operation mode, with a step width of 1.0mm.
4)
Press Z axis coordinate axis move key to move the tool post towards the dial-indicator, then
make the pointer of the dial-indicator rotate one revolution and point at 0.
5) Press Z axis coordinate axis move key to move in the reverse direction, the dial-indicator rotates
back because the pointer cannot return to 0 position due to the gap. Here, the difference
between the position where the pointer points and 0 position is the backlash value of Z axis.
Note
It is necessary to repeat the above steps several times to measure the gap correctly.
2)
The measuring method for X axis is the same, but the measured value should be multiplied by 2
to convert to the diameter amount.
3) The backlash compensation speed of Z, X, Y axis is set in P411_d1.

Note: For GSK928TD, pitch error compensation function and tool nose radius compensation function
are not provided.
Precision compensation__Bit parameter P411password level: 2
d7
d6
d5
d4
Reserved
Reserved
d1
Reserved
d7__Ptich error compensation function

0: Disabled.
// The pitch error compensation function is disabled.
1: Enabled.
// The pitch error compensation function is enabled.
d6__ Representation of pitch error compensation value

0:
Unequal space.
// also referred to as corner description method. 150 groups of corner
information can be input for each axis.

1: Equal space.
// By using equal-space description method, 300 compensation points can be
input for each axis; the interval between points is the same.
Since the compensation data formats for corner description method and equal-space description method
are different, the system prompts whether to confirm the modification when modifying this bit parameter.
If the modification is confirmed, the original compensation data will be cleared, and the user needs to
re-input the data in terms of the new format.
d5__ Tool nose radius compensation function
0: Disabled.
1:
// Tool radius compensation commands G41, G42 are disabled.
Enabled.
// Tool radius compensation commands G41, G42 are enabled.
d4__ Tool radius compensation mode

0: Line transition.
// The system processes the transition mode for the sharp corner as the line
transition in executing tool nose radius compensation.

1:
Arc transition // The system processes the transition mode for sharp corner as the arc
transition in executing tool nose radius compensation.
d1__Backlash compensation mode

0: Low speed.
// Z/X/Y axis performs backlash compensation at the low speed, which is set by
P103, P104, P105.
1: High speed.
// Z/X/Y axis performs backlash compensation at the high speed, which is set by
P100, P101, P102.
105
OPERATION
1)

FPitch error compensation parameter__Pitch error compensation parameters P1000
P1905
The pitch error compensation parameters can be divided into unequal-space representation and
equal-space representation, based on the setting of bit parameter P411_d6.
4.6.4.5
Parameters of Spindle and Coolant __ P300P317, P326, P329, P341, P410
Spindle configuration__Bit parameter P410password level1
OPERATION
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
Reserved
Reserved
d7__ Spindle control output

0:
Level.
// The spindle (M03/M04/M05) and coolant (M08/M09) are controlled by system

level output.
1:
Pulse.
// The spindle (M03/M04/M05) and coolant (M08/M09) are controlled by system

pulse output. P326 is the pulse width.
d6__ Spindle S control

0: Gear shift. // The spindle is the gear-shift spindle, using S commands to shift gears; M41~M44
are forbidden.
1: Frequency conversion. // The spindle is the frequency-conversion spindle, the speed of
which is commanded by S, with gears M41M44.
//For details, refer to Section 4.4.3.2 Spindle S Command -- Gear Shift Control and Section 4.4.3.3
Spindle S command Speed Control in PartOperation
d5__S Gear shift output
0: Direct.
// The control signals for the spindle gear are direct outputs S01S04. It is forbidden to
use S05S15 commands.
1: Coded.
// The control signals of the spindle gear are coded outputs S00S15.
// This parameter is used together with P310 (Occupied lines of the spindle gear control ). If it is set
to direct output, each control line controls one gear, and the total number of gears is the same as
that in P310; If it is set to coded output, it performs coded output based on the number of control
lines in use. The total number of control gears is 2P310 ; up to 4-channel control line output can be
set as gear control signal.
d4__ Switching between spindle and Y axis
0: Not performed. // The spindle cannot operate in position control mode. It is forbidden to use
M47/M48 command.
1: Performed.
// 928TD does not support this function.
d3__ Spindle brake signal output

0: Used.
// When executing M5, the brake signal MSP is output.
1: Not used.
// When executing M5, the brake signal MSP is not output. The MSP signal interface
can be used for other interface controls.
106
Chapter Four
d2__ Spindle CCW signal output

0: Used.
// To output spindle CCW signal M04
1: Not used.
// Not to output spindle CCW signal M04
Maximum speed of gear M41, M42, M43, M44__ Auxiliary parameter P300, P301, P302, P303
This parameter is the maximum speed of gear M41, M42, M43, M44. When the system employs a
the spindle is controlled by a spindle multi-gear switch value, parameters P300, P301, P302 and P303
are disabled. (Unit: r/min)
Spindle minimum speed in constant surface speed__ Auxiliary parameter P304
This parameter limits the minimum speed in the constant surface speed cutting. According to the
computational formula for the constant surface speed cutting:
Surface speed = Spindle speed * |X| */1000 (Unit for X: mm, unit for spindle speed: r/min)
The X in the above formula means the absolute value (diameter value) of the X-axis tool nose
coordinate. When X is smaller than a certain value, the spindle speed calculated is smaller than the
value set in P304. In such a case, the spindle speed is clamped to the speed set in P304.
Spindle maximum speed in constant surface speed__ Auxiliary parameter P305
This parameter limits the maximum speed in the constant surface speed cutting. According to the
computation formula for the constant surface speed cutting:
Surface speed = Spindle speed * |X| */1000 (Unit for X: mm, unit for spindle speed: r/min)
The X in the above formula means the absolute value (diameter value) of the X-axis tool nose
coordinate. When X is greater than a certain value, the spindle speed calculated is greater than the
value set in P304. In such a case, the spindle speed is clamped to the speed set in P305.
Thread smooth speed boundary__Auxiliary parameter P306
During thread machining, the system has two modes: One is the high-speed machining, the other is
the low-speed machining. Parameter P306 is the boundary between the two machining speeds (unit:
r/min ). In general, P306 should be greater than 100.
If P306 is set to 300, make a judgment on the mode to be used based on the currently-detected
actual spindle speed before the system machines the thread. If the actual speed is greater than 300, use
the high-speed machining mode. Otherwise, use the low-speed machining mode.
When using the high-speed machining mode, the system following performance for the spindle
speed fluctuation is the highest, but the motor running stability may be reduced; When the spindle speed
fluctuation is intensive, there may be vibrating streak generated on the machining surface, or step-out
occurs on the stepper motor.
When using the low-speed machining mode, the system following performance for the spindle
speed fluctuation is slightly lower, but the motor running stability may be enhanced; When the spindle
speed fluctuation is intensive, the vibrating streak is not obvious and the stepper motor is not easy to be
out of step.
107
OPERATION
the maximum speed corresponding to the machine when the system outputs 10V analog voltage. When
frequency converter to control the spindle, and the spindle gear is in gear M41, M42, M43 or M44, it is

Thread spindle fluctuation alarm__Auxiliary parameter P307
During thread cutting, if the spindle speed fluctuation exceeds the value set in P307, the system
issues an alarm after the current thread block machining is completed, and suspends the workpiece
machining; by pressing CYCLE START key, the user can proceeds to the next step of the machining
program.
This parameter is valid for G33, G92, G32 command. (Unit: r/min)
Spindle JOG timems__ Auxiliary parameter P308
OPERATION
In spindle JOG mode, it is the time for starting the spindle, then the spindle stops automatically after
the time is up. When parameter P308 is 0, the spindle JOG function is disabled. (Unit: ms)
Speed in spindle JOG__ Auxiliary parameter P309
When the spindle is in the JOG state in MANUAL mode, it is the speed after spindle start key is
pressed. (Unit: r/min)
If P309=0, the JOG output speed is the same as the speed at which M03/M04 is executed.
Occupied lines of spindle gear control__Auxiliary parameter P310
The parameter limits the number of output control lines used for spindle gear control. Up to 4 control
lines can be used. When the control lines are less than 4, only the low-digit control lines can be used,
and the unused high-digit control lines can be used for other purposes.
When the occupied number of lines =0, no output is available.
When the occupied number of lines =1, only S01 output is available.
When the occupied number of lines =2, only S02 and S01 outputs are available.
When the occupied number of lines =3, only S03, S02 and S01 outputs are available.
When the occupied number of lines =4, S04, S03, S02, S01 outputs are available.
Frequency-conversion spindle gear shift time 1, 2ms
__ Auxiliary parameters P311, P312
The spindle gear shift time for M41~M44 when the spindle is the frequency-conversion spindle.
(Unit: ms). For details, refer to Section 4.4 Manual Operation Mode in PartOperation.
Interval time for spindle gear shift(ms)__ Auxiliary parameter P313
This parameter determines the time interval from cancelling the original gear signal to outputting the
new gear signal. (Unit: ms)
Output voltage during spindle gear shift (mV)__ Auxiliary parameter P314
It is the output voltage during spindle gear shift. (Unit: mV)
Delay time from spindle stop to spindle brake (ms)__ Auxiliary parameter P315
This parameter determines the delay time from sending the spindle stop signal to sending the
spindle brake signal. (Unit: ms)
Spindle brake output time (ms)__Auxiliary parameter P316
This parameter means the brake signal output time. In general, it is set to the time required for the
spindle motor to stop completely from the braking. (Unit: ms)
Spindle maximum speed limit__Auxiliary parameter P317
This parameter limits the spindle maximum speed. (Unit: r/min)
108
Chapter Four
If the S speed set by the program command is greater than the value given by P317, the spindle
speed is clamped to the one set in P317.
Spindle control pulse time (ms)__Auxiliary parameter P326
This parameter determines the hold time of the pulse signal when the spindle (M03/M04/M05),
coolant (M08/M09) output is the pulse control mode. (Unit: ms)
M code response detection timems__
Auxiliary parameter P329
(Unit: ms). E.g. When executing M10 in MANUAL operation mode, if the chuck clamping response signal
is not detected after waiting for the period of time set in P329, the system issues: Chuck clamping
response detection overtime alarm.
Cutting enabled when rotation speed reaches certain percentage__Auxiliary parameter P341
If the cutting is started immediately after the spindle is started or the gear is shifted, the tool life and
workpiece will be affected because the spindle has not reached the preset speed.
This parameter is used for the automatic identification of the spindle speed arrival. E.g. P341=80
means the cutting is allowed when the spindle actual speed is within the speed range (100%20%) set
by the program, i.e. within the range between 80%120% ; If the programming is S2000, the cutting is
allowed when the actual speed detected by the system is within the range of 16002400. Otherwise,
the system has to wait.
When P341=0, this function is disabled. When P341 is not set to 0, the system automatically detects
the actual speed in MANUAL or Auto mode, with the state of the spindle actual speed being displayed on
the screen; if the spindle speed Sxxxx is displayed in yellow, it means the preset range has not been
reached; if it is displayed in green, it means the preset range has been reached.
Use: When using either a frequency-conversion spindle or gear-shift spindle, this parameter is valid.
When using the frequency-conversion spindle, the system makes a judgment by using the
programmed speed S and actual speed.
When using the gear-shift spindle, the spindle speeds of gears S1S4 respectively correspond to
the set values of parameters P300P303; e.g. when the gear of the gear-shift spindle is S1, the system
makes a judgment by using parameter P300 and the actual speed. P341 is invalid for other gears, so
they are not restricted by P341 during cutting.
This parameter is valid only for the cutting commands, e.g. G01, G02, G33; and it is also valid for
the cutting in compound commandsWhen cutting commands are executed continuously, only the first
cutting command is detected. If the spindle speed is displayed in yellow, and the cutting command does
not move, it means the system is waiting for the spindle to reach the preset speed.
4.6.4.6
Parameters of Tool Post __ P318P325, P408
Tool post setting__Bit parameter P408password level2
109
OPERATION
signal is not detected within this period of time, the system prompts the corresponding alarm message.
This parameter determines the limit for M code response detection time. If the M code response

d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
Reserved
Reserved
d7__ Tool number signal detection mode

0: Default
// The tool number detection method is preset inside the system.
1: Table checking
// For some special tool posts, it is necessary to use the table checking
method, which requires to set the tool number detection signals in
parameters P541P556 . For details, refer to Section 3.4.4 in Part
Connection.
OPERATION
d6__ Tool post clamping in-position signal

0: Without.
1: With.
// Without the tool post clamping in-position signal (input interface 9 can be released).
// With the tool post clamping in-position signal (input interface 9 is occupied).
d5__ Tool post clamping signal level

0: Low
// Tool post clamping signal low level is valid.
1: High
// Tool post clamping signal high level is valid.
d4__ Tool post overheat detection level (this parameter is invalid)

0: Low
// Tool post temperature control switch (TGR signal) low level is valid.
1: High
// Tool post temperature control switch (TGR signal) high level is valid
d3__ Strobe signal level

0: Low
// Tool post encode strobe signal low level is valid.
1: High
// Tool post encoder strobe signal high level is valid.
d2__Pre-indexing in-position detection level

0: Low
// Tool post pre-indexing switch low level is valid.
1: High
// Tool post pre-indexing switch high level is valid.
Tool post type__ Auxiliary parameter P318maximum value: 9

This parameter is determined by the tool post type installed on the machine. The system performs
the tool change mode according to this parameter.
P318=0the machine installs the line-up tool post, which does not occupy any input/output interface
of the system.
P318=1or 2, the machine installs the common electric rotation tool post; performs tool change mode
1 or mode 2.
P318=3, it is applicable for the 8-station tool posts of Taiwan Genyang machine tool
CLT-63~CLT300 series; performs tool change mode 3
P318=4, it is applicable to the tool post type which can change the tool nearby in the
forward/reverse direction; performs tool change mode 4.
P318=9, use M60 to self-define a command to change the tool. See the example in Section 3.4
Tool Change Control Function and Connection in Part Connection.
If P318 is not the numbers described above, the system performs tool change in terms of tool
change mode 1.
Maximum tool number __Auxiliary parameter P319
This parameter determines the maximum tool number on the electric tool post of the machine. The
110
Chapter Four
standard configuration of the system is 8-station electric tool post. The tool number signal can be
extended to 12~16 stations electric tool post according to the specific coded input. See Section 3.4 Tool
Change Control Function and Connection in Part Connection
Number of lines occupied by tool number signal__ Auxiliary parameter P320
This parameter determines the number of system hardware interfaces occupied by the tool number
signal. The maximum number is 8, i.e., up to 8 interfaces can be occupied. In general, it is set in
Tool change time T1 T2 T3ms__ Auxiliary parameter P321, P322, P323

T1__ Delay time from stopping CW rotation to starting tool post CCW rotation after tool post CW
rotation detects the tool number signal during tool change. (Unit: ms)
T2_ During the tool pose CCW rotation, if it is necessary to detect the tool post clamp in-position
signal TCP, P323 is the delay time from after the tool number clamp signal is detected to when the tool
post CCW signal stops .
T3_Reserved. (Unit: ms)
Tool post CCW rotation clamping timems
__Auxiliary parameter P324
During tool change of the electric tool post, this parameter determines the duration of the tool post
CCW signal if it is not necessary to detect the tool post clamping in-position signal TCP; and the tool post
maximum CCW clamping time if it is necessary to detect TCP. (Unit: ms)
Note: The value set in P324 should be adjusted properly depending on the actual electric tool
post. An excessively large value may cause overheat or even damage to the motor. An
excessively small value may not clamp the tool post firmly. Therefore, the user should use
different values for debugging and then choose a proper one during debugging.
Tool change rotation time limitms__Auxiliary parameter P325
Maximum duration from when the tool post CW rotation starts to when tool number signal of the
target tool is detected. (Unit: ms)
The below parameters are the dedicated interface parameters for tool change mode 3. Refer to Section
3.4.3.4 Tool Change Mode 3 in Part Connection.
Tool post brake outputTZD__Interface parameter P507
This parameter controls the brake device of the tool post motor.
Tool post pre-indexing outputTFD__Interface parameter P508
This parameter controls the pre-indexing proximity switch.
Pre-indexing in-position detection: TFDC__Interface parameter P528
This parameter detects the in-position signal of the pre-indexing proximity switch.
Tool number strobe signal: TXT__Interface parameter P529
This parameter is the strobe signal for tool post encoder. It controls the tool number output together
with the binary absolute value of the encoder. Up to 12 positions can be controlled.
111
OPERATION
operation mode.
combination with the maximum tool number. The interface occupation can be displayed in the Diagnosis

Tool post overheat detection: TGR__Interface parameter P530this parameter is invalid
This parameter detects the temperature control signal of the tool post. When the temperature is
higher than 120, the temperature control switch is turned off.
4.6.4.7
Parameters of Chuck and Tailstock __ P327P328, P409
Chuck control pulse timems__Auxiliary parameter P327
OPERATION
If the chuck is in the pulse control mode, this parameter determines the duration of the pulse signal
output by executing the chuck command (M10/M11). (Unit: ms)
Tailstock control pulse timems
__Auxiliary parameterP328
If the tailstock is in the pulse control mode, this parameter determines the duration of the pulse
signal output by executing tailstock command (M78/M79). (Unit: ms)
Chuck tailstock__Bit parameter P409password level: 1
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
d7__ Chuck control function

0: Enabled. // The system has the hydraulic chuck control function.
1: Disabled.
// The chuck control function is disabled. It is forbidden to use M10/M11command.
d6__ Chuck clamping mode

0: Outer chuck. // The hydraulic chuck is the outer chuck mode.
1: Inner chuck. // The hydraulic chuck is the inner mode. For the execution of M10/ M11 command,
refer to Section 4.4 Manual Operation Mode in PartOperation.
d5__Chuck response detection
0: No performed.
1: Performed.
// If the response detection is required, input interfaces RM10 and RM11 are
respectively used as clamping and release in-position signal inputs
d4__Tailstock control function

0: Enabled. // The system has the hydraulic tailstock control function.
1: Disabled.
// The system disables the M78/M79 command, so it has no hydraulic tailstock

control function.
d3__Chuck control output

0: Level.
// Level mode control M10, M11 signal output
1: Pulse.
// In pulse control mode, the output holding time of signals M10, M11 is set by parameter
P327.
d2__Tailstock control output

0: Level.
// Level mode control M78, M79 signal output.
1: Pulse.
// Pulse control mode, the output holding time of signals M78, M79 is set by parameter
P328.
d1__Hydraulic chuck foot switch input

0: Required.
// In addition to controlling the hydraulic chuck using a command, it is also

available to control the hydraulic chuck by an external foot switch.
112
Chapter Four
1: Not required.
d0__Hydraulic tailstock foot switch input
0: Required.
// In addition to controlling the hydraulic tailstock using a command, it is also

available to control the hydraulic tailstock by an external foot switch.
1: Not required.
Bit Parameters of Running and Efficiency__ P400P401
OPERATION
4.6.4.8
Running setting__Bit parameter P400 password level3

Reserved
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
Reserved
d6__Spindle gear memory

0: Disabled.
// Spindle gears M41M44 are not memorized in MANUAL or AUTO state. The
gear is M41 after the power is turned off and then back on.
1: Enabled. // Spindle gears M41M44 are memorized in MANUAL or AUTO state. The gear
after power on is the one before the last power-off.
d5__ Spindle in AUTO mode
0: Is controlled by keys. // In the state that no program is executed in AUTO mode, Spindle CW,
Spindle CCW, Spindle Stop keys are enabled.
1Is not controlled by keys.
// In AUTO operation mode, Spindle CW, Spindle CCW, Spindle

Stop keys are disabled.
d4__MPG 0.1mm step width

0Enabled.
// In MANUAL operation mode, it is allowed to select a large override (0.1mm gear)

to rotate the MPG.
1: Disabled.
// In MANUAL operation mode, it is not allowed to select a large override (0.1mm

gear) to rotate the MPG.
d3__Rapid positioning mode

0: Independent traverse. // G00 performs rapid positioning respectively by the rapid traverse
mode for each axis.
1: Interpolation traverse. // G00 performs rapid positioning simultaneously by the scaling mode.
d2__ Arc across vertex process mode
0: Precise.
// Precisely processing the backlash in the arc across the vertex.
1: Smooth.
// Smoothly processing the backlash in arc across the vertex.
d1__ MPG axis select

0: Selecting axis with keyboard.
1: External axis select.
// The axis select key on the keyboard is enabled.
// The external MPG control knob is enabled, and the axis select key on
the keyboard is disabled.
// In MANUAL operation mode, after pressing MPG key to switch to MPG mode, the indicator lights
up, and on the screen are displayed the states of the external MPG control knob, axis select key and
movement amount knob. The coordinate axis selected is highlighted.
113

Efficiency setting__Bit parameter P401password level3
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
d7__ TMS command in dry run

0: Executed. // In the dry run state, when executing the auxiliary function command, the signals are
output and detected as normal machining.
1: Skipped.
// In the dry run state, when executing the auxiliary function command, the signals are
not output and detected.
OPERATION
d6__Feed command in dry run

0: Normal speed. // In the dry run state, the executed speed of the feed command is set by the
program, just as normal machining.
1: Acceleration. // In the dry run state, the executed speed of the feed command is out of the
control of the program. The system demonstrates the program path at the
maximum speed (P113) for the cutting feed.
d5__Short linear high speed
0: High speed connection. // Short linear connection transition uses the high-speed connection.
1: Not used.
//Short linear connection transition does not use the high-speed connection.
// When P401_d5=0, for the successive short line blocks (no empty line, notation line, or other block
between blocks) with short movement distance and fast executed speed, the CNC realizes the
optimal speed connection transition by adopting the advanced preview control mode. Up to 80
blocks can be pre-read.
d4__Cutting command
0: Continuous smooth transition.
1: Deceleration to 0.
// In G01, G02, G03 cutting feed, when bit parameter P401_d4=0, the system employs
post-acceleration/deceleration. At the intersection of the paths of the two adjacent cutting feed
blocks, an arc transition is formed due to the acceleration/deceleration. In such a case, the
intersection of the two paths cannot be precisely positioned, so there is an error between actual
path and programmed path. To prevent such a contour error, insert a delay command (G04)
between the two blocks or set the system bit parameter P401_d4 to 1. At this moment, the former
block decelerates to 0 when it moves to the block end point, precisely positioning at the end point.
Then the system proceeds to the next cutting feed block; in this mode, however, because each
block starts to accelerate from 0 speed, and the next block is not executed until it decelerates to 0
at the end point. Thus, the program run time will increase, reducing the machining efficiency.
d3__ Execution sequence of multiple commands in the same block
0 step by step
1: Simultaneously.
// It is referred to as multiple blocks in the same block when a block contains

several commands. The commands in the same block are executed at the
same time; after all the commands are executed, the next block is executed
114
Chapter Four
// When P401_d3=1, the execution is simultaneous execution; in this mode, the irrelative
commands are executed almost at the same time, without following the execution sequence of
step by step or waiting for each other. However, for those M codes with interlock relationship, the
system automatically arranges the execution sequence according to the parameter.
// When P401_d3=0, the execution is performed step by step; the non-simultaneous execution
sequence is as follows: after a function command is executed, the next function command can be
executed; till all of them are executed.

0: OFF
1: ON.
// Under the premise that P401_d3=1, P401_d2=1 is valid. When P401_d2=1, the rapid
block skip execution is allowed. In the mode, as long as the axis move commands in
the current block are executed (without waiting for the completion of the execution of
other MST commands), the system rapidly skips to the next block to execute.
d1__G92
Run-out
0: Optimized. //When there is run-out in G92, the run-out axis directly retracts to the start point of
G92 if there is only I; thus enhancing the efficiency and improving the run-out effect.
1: Common. // The run-out is performed according to the G92 run-out mode described in Section
4.13.2 in Part Programming.
d0__Cutting efficiency
0: Normal state.
// The cutting speed is the normal value set by cutting feed command F.
1: Optimized. // The cutting efficiency is improved by 5% by optimizing the speed; which applies to
the situation that F is not modified, but efficiency needs to be improved.
4.6.4.9 Relationship between Path and Parameters of Running and Efficiency

1)
When P401_ d4=0, it is the cutting command continuous smooth transition. The system
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is valid:
Processing of G01:
When P401_ d5=0, G01 command has the acceleration/deceleration function before
interpolation, and the connection transition between G01 and G02 is performed at the optimal speed;
then the system performs the acceleration/deceleration processing after interpolation; When the
cutting speed is high, the line segment path is accurate, and the transition point is smooth. In this
case, the acceleration/deceleration function after interpolation does not have much effect on the
path precision.
When P401_ d5=1, G01 command does not employs high-speed connection. It directly
performs the acceleration/deceleration after interpolation instead of acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation.
Processing of an arc
When P400_ d2=0, it is the path precise processing when the arc crosses the vertex. The arc
command has the acceleration/deceleration function before interpolation. The speed decelerates to
115
OPERATION
d2__ Rapid block skip execution function

the start speed when the quadrant is crossed, then the backlash is performed, and the machining
path transits to the next quadrant, then accelerates, and then decelerates before the end. Finally the
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is performed.
When P400_ d2=1, it is the smooth processing when the arc passes the vertex; the arc
command directly performs the acceleration/deceleration after interpolation without performing the
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
2When P401_ d4=1, the cutting command decelerates to 0; the deceleration function after
OPERATION
interpolation is invalid:
Processing of G01:
interpolation, and the connection transition between G01 and G02 is performed at the optimal speed;
all the G01 commands decelerate to 0 speed when moving to the end point of the block, and are
positioned at the end point precisely; when the cutting speed is high, the line segment path is
accurate, and the transition point is smooth.
interpolation. Each cutting command decelerates to 0 after it is executed.
Processing of an arc
When P400_ d2=0, it is the path precise processing when the arc passes the vertex. The arc
command has the acceleration/deceleration function before interpolation. The speed decelerates to
the start speed when the quadrant is passed, then the backlash is performed, and the machining
path transits to the next quadrant, then accelerates, and then decelerates before the end.
When P400_ d2=1, it is the smooth processing when the arc passes the convex; the arc
command has the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. If the backlash is 0, the
deceleration is not performed when the quadrant is passed.
4.6.4.10
Bit Parameters of Safety and Debugging__ P402P404, P419
Safety setting 1_ Bit parameter P402 (password level: 3)

d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
d7__ Hard limit alarm

// This parameter specifies the processing mode when the hard limit alarm signal is detected during
axis movement.
0: Deceleration.
// When it set to 0, the move axis decelerates to stop if the hard limit alarm
occurs. The coordinate is the same as the actual position.
1: Emergency stop.
// When it is set to 1, the move axis immediately stops after the hard limit
alarm occurs. The coordinate may not be the same as the actual position.
d6__Spindle abnormal stop detection

0: Performed.
// If the spindle stops during cutting, the system stops the feed and turns off the
spindle, with an alarm being issued.
116
Chapter Four
1: Not performed.
// In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, after the spindle is started, the system automatically detects
the spindle speed. If the spindle is not started normally, the system prompts Spindle rotation
abnormality. If the spindle stops rotating by accident during cutting feed, the system will stop the
feed, suspend the program execution and turn off the spindle, issuing an alarm.
// When the spindle is required to work at a very low speed (lower than 1 r/min), the system may
perform detection or give an alarm.

d5__ Interlock between chuck and spindle
0: Is performed.
// When it interlocks with the spindle, the chuck cannot be controlled before the
spindle stops; the spindle cannot be started neither when the chuck is not
clamped tightly.
1: Is released. // When the interlock between chuck and spindle is released, neither the spindle
starting is affected by the state of the chuck, nor the chuck control is affect by the
state of the spindle.
d4__ Chuck response signal consecutive detection alarm is
0: Not issued.
1: Issued.
// This bit indicates whether to detect the state of the chuck in real time. Anytime the
chuck is released, an alarm is issued. This control bit is valid only when there is a
response signal for the chuck (P409_ d5=1).
d3__Interlock between tailstock and spindle

0: Is performed.
// When the tailstock interlocks with the spindle, the tailstock cannot be controlled
before the spindle stops; the spindle cannot be started neither when the tailstock
is not clamped tightly.
1: Is released. // When the interlock between tailstock and spindle is released, neither the spindle
starting is affected by the state of the tailstock, nor the tailstock control is affect by
the state of the spindle
d2__ Tailstock response signal consecutive detection alarm is
0. Not issued.
1: Issued // This bit indicates whether to detect the state of the tailstock in real time. Anytime the
tailstock is released, an alarm is issued. This control bit is valid only when there is a
response signal for the tailstock (setting parameter P519, P520).
d1__ Auto MPG control
0: Disabled.
// In AUTO operation mode, using MPG to control the rapid/feed override is invalid.
1: Enabled.
// In AUTO operation mode, using MPG to control the rapid/feed override is valid.
d0__Auto MPG mode

0: Mode 1. // In AUTO operation mode, use mode 1 to control MPG rapid/feed override.
1: Mode 2. // In AUTO operation mode, use mode 2 to control MPG rapid/feed override. For
details about mode 1 and mode 2, please refer to Section 4.5 Auto Operation Mode
117
OPERATION
frequency-conversion spindle, when the programmed speed is lower than S0, the system will not
issue an alarm by mistake. In this case, the user should set the parameter to 1. For the

in PartOperation.
Safety setting 2__Bit parameter P403password level3
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
d7__ Tool change operation
0: Allowed. // Tool change is allowed in MANUAL and AUTO states.

1: Forbidden. // Tool change is forbidden in MANUAL and AUTO states.
OPERATION
d6__ Tool Offset operation mode is

0: Coordinate modification.
// The tool offset operation mode in MANUAL state is machine

coordinate modification.
1: Tool post movement.
// Tool offset operation mode in MANUAL state is tool post movement.
d5__Manual tool change

0: Confirmed by a key.
// During tool change in MANUAL state, the system prompts Confirm tool
change?, then you can execute tool change by pressing ENTER key.
1: Performed immediately. // Tool change is performed immediately in MANUAL state.

d4__ Tool setting record check
0: OFF.
// The program compound check prompt alarm caused by inconsistence with the tool
setting record is not displayed.
1: ON.
// The tool setting record has been set in the tool offset number. When the other tool
numbers still use this tool offset number during programming, the system displays
[Program compound check prompt alarm]. E.g. T0205 is inconsistent with the tool
setting record T0105.
d3__ M output during emergency stop

0: Only the spindle and coolant are turned off.
// When the emergency stop alarm is valid, the
system only turns off the output signals of the spindle, coolant and lubricant.
1: All are turned off.
//When the emergency stop alarm is valid, the system turns off all the output
signals of the auxiliary functions.
d2__ By pressing Reset key, M function output is

0:
Turned off.
// After pressing Reset key, the system turns off the output signals of M03, M04,
M08, M32.
1: Not turned off.
// After pressing Reset key, the system does not turn off the output signals of
M03, M04, M08, M32.
d1__ During M function alarm

0: The program is terminated. // The program is terminated during M10 M11 M78 M79 Txx
function alarm.
1: Selection is prompted. // The system prompts whether to retry during M10 M11 M78 M79 Txx
function alarm.
// When the conditions that P401_d3=0 (execution step by step in a block with multiple commands)
and P403_d1=1 (Prompt in M function alarm) are satisfied simultaneously, the retry function is valid.
118
Chapter Four
Otherwise, the system issues an alarm and terminates the machining program when the relative
commands cannot be completed.
In the process of automatic machining, the commands that can be retried are: T commands, chuck
(M10/M11) control and tailstock (M78/M79) control.
When executing these commands, if the corresponding valid input signal is not detected, the
commands cannot be completed within a specified period of time, then the system prompts whether to
After the fault is removed, press R key to re-execute the command which caused the fault. After the
retry operation is correctly completed, the system is at the pause state, and the user can continue the
machining by pressing CYCLE START key. If the retry execution is still incorrect, you can perform the
retry operation several times; if the command cannot be executed correctly after multiple retry
operations, you can exit the machining program by pressing ESC key.
d0__ Waiting for the speed to be stable before thread machining is
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
// Whether the spindle speed is stable is not detected before thread machining.
// Whether the spindle speed is stable is detected by the system automatically

before thread machining. The system machines threads after the speed is
stable.
// This parameter is valid for G33, G92, G32 commands.

// The system detects the spindle speed in an instant. If it detects the spindle is in the progress of
acceleration or deceleration, it does not machine the threads until the progress is finished. If the thread
command is executed immediately after the speed is changed, the function of detecting whether the
spindle speed is stable may be invalid.
E.g., in S1000 stable state, when executing S200, if G33 command is executed immediately, the
system will immediately execute the program for detecting whether the speed is stable. In this case, the
system misjudges the speed is stable in S1000 stable state; because there is a time difference between
system command and spindle speed actual change. To prevent the misjudgment, specify a delay of 0.3s
between S200 and G33.
When the spindle is required to work at a very low speed (lower than 10 r/min) to cut threads, the
system may remain in the state of detecting whether the spindle speed is stable for a long time; in this
case, set this parameter to 0 to cancel this function.
Safety setting 3__Bit parameter P419password level3
d7
d6
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
d7__ Turning off spindle during driver alarm is

0: Not performed. // When the system detects the driver unit alarm, it does not turn off the spindle.
1: Performed. // When the system detects the drive unit alarm, it turns off the spindle.
d6__ M state change during machining is
0: Not prompted. // The system does prompt the state change of the spindle, chuck and tailstock.
1: Prompted.
// The system displays a window to prompt the state change of the spindle, chuck
and tailstock.
119
OPERATION
check relative input signals and remove the fault in terms of the prompted message.
retry. After the retry message appears, the system is at the pause state; at this moment, the operator can

// In AUTO machinig, it is require to pause sometimes, e.g., after the pause, turn off the spindle for
observation, then turn on the spindle, and press CYCLE START key to continue the machining. If the
execution is continued witihout turning off the spindle, unexpected accidents may occur. Setting bit
parameter P419_d6 to 1 can provide protection to some extent. When P419_d6=1, at the beginning of
the signle block or pause, the system needs to memorize the states of the spindle (M3/M4/M5),
chuck(M10/M11) and tailstock (M78/M79). If some operations are performed afterwards, the system first
judges whether the state is consistent with the previous one after CYCLE START key is pressed. If the
OPERATION
states are inconsistent with each other, a window pops up to prompt the changed contents. In such a
case, you can recover the state by another operation, or press Y key to continue the execution; after N
key is pressed to exit, the window displaying prompts for M3/M4/M5, M10/M11, M78/M79 dispappears,
and the system returns to the pause state.
Debugging setting__Bit parameter P404 (password level: 2)
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
This parameter is set for the convenience of the system debugging. In the online state, it must be
set to the valid state. Otherwise, it cannot provide protection.
d7__Emergency stop alarm is
0: Detected.
// The external emergency stop signal function is valid.
1: Shielded.
// The external emergency stop signal function is invalid.
d6__Hard limit alarm

0: Detected.
// The hard limit alarm function is valid.
1: Shielded.
// The hard limit alarm function is invalid.
d5__Drive unit alarm

0: Detected.
// The drive unit alarm function is valid.
1: Shielded.
// The drive unit alarm function is invalid.
d4__Mechanical soft limit alarm

0: Valid. // The mechanical soft limit alarm function is valid.
1: Invalid. // The mechanical soft limit alarm function is invalid.
d3__Tool nose soft limit alarm
0: Valid.
// The tool nose soft limit alarm function is valid.
1: Invalid. // Tool nose soft limit alarm function is invalid.

d2__254 Program limit
0: Forbidding move command.
// All G codes (other than G04) in M60M74 blocks are

forbidden.
1: Allowed.
// M60M74 are user-defined commands. When the program is written according to

the program format, it is allowed that the blocks contain G move codes.
d1__Hard limit alarm level

0: Low. // The hard limit alarm low level is valid.
1: High. // The hard limit alarm high level is valid.
120
Chapter Four
d0__ No. 254 program solidification limit

0: Forbidden. // It is forbidden to modify or re-solidify No. 254 program, i.e. it is forbidden to
modify the self-defined command.
1: Allowed. // It is allowed to modify and re-solidify No. 254 program, i.e. it is allowed to modify the
self-defined command.
OPERATION
machine tool builder.
4.6.4.11 Bit Parameter of Motor Driver__ P405

Motor driver__Bit parameter P405password level2
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
This parameter sets the motor working state and whether there is the Y axis control.
d7__Z axis motor direction;
d6__X axis motor direction;
d5__Y axis motor direction;
0: Positive.
1: Negative.
// By setting the parameter for the motor direction, it is available to change the
motor rotation direction without changing other external conditions. Make the tool
post actual movement direction the same as the system-defined direction.
d4__Z axis drive unit alarm level;

d3__X axis drive unit alarm level;
d2__Y axis drive unit alarm level;
0: High.
// When the input signal of drive unit alarm for Z, X, Y axis is the high level, Drive unit
alarm is issued.
1: Low. // When the input signal of drive unit alarm for Z, X, Y axis is the low level, Drive unit
alarm is issued.
d1__Control axis
0: Without Y axis.
1: With Y axis.
// It is forbidden to use Y axis move command.
// The control axis has Y axis, and Y axis move command is allowed. Note: 928TD
has no Y axis function.
d0__Motor acceleration/deceleration control

0: Linear.
// The motor acceleration/deceleration adopts the linear control.
1: Exponential.
// The motor acceleration/deceleration curve is an exponential curve or adjusted

exponential curve.
4.6.4.12
Parameters of Other Interfaces__ P412,
Whether to modify and then re-solidify the solidified program is determined by the
P330P332
relative Interface__Bit parameter P412password level: 2

121

d7
d6
d5
d4
Reserved
d2
d1
d0
d7__External start/pause signal

0: Disabled.
// The external start and pause signals are invalid.
1 Enabled
// The external start and pause signals are valid.
d6__External feed hold knob

0: Disabled.
// The system external interface for the feed/spindle hold knob is invalid.
1: Enabled. // The system external interface for the feed/spindle hold knob interface is valid.
OPERATION
d5__ Function of detecting low pressure

0: Not provided.
1: Provided.
// The system is provided with the low pressure detection function; P412_d4 sets
the alarm level.
d4__Low pressure alarm level

0: High.
// Disconnected with 0 V.
1: Low.
// Connected with 0 V. After the system low pressure alarm detection function is selected,
the Low pressure alarm is issued once the system detects the low pressure alarm
signal PRES is valid and the signal hold time exceeds the set value of data parameter
P332; at this moment, the axis feed pauses, the spindle stops, and the automatic cycle
cannot start.
d2__ Executing M73 in MANUAL/AUTO reset is

0: Not performed. // In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, by pressing the reset key, the system
only executes the standard reset function.
1: Performed.
// In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, by pressing the reset key, the system

executes the solidified M73 self-defined command after executing the standard
reset function.
d1__Executing M74 in MANUAL/ATUO emergency stop

0: Not performed.
// In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, the system only executes the standard

emergency stop function when the emergency stop alarm is valid.
1: Performed.
// In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, the emergency stop alarm is valid. The

system will execute the solidified M74 self-defined command after executing the
standard emergency stop function.
d0__Macro programming for auxiliary function output pin

0: Disabled.
// It is forbidden to perform the statement programming to the defined dedicated

pins of the input signals. It is only allowed to perform the statement
programming to the pins which display UO on the diagnosis page. It is
forbidden for M81, M82, M83 commands to program the defined dedicated pins
of input signals, but to program the pins which display UO on the diagnosis
page.
1: Enabled. // It is allowed to perform the statement programming to the pins of all input signals.
Automatic lubrication start time (s)__Auxiliary parameter P330:
This parameter determines the lubrication start time. (Unit: s)
122
Chapter Four
Automatic lubrication interval time (s)__Auxiliary parameter P331

This parameter determines the automatic lubrication time interval. (Unit: s)
Hold time of low pressure alarms__Auxiliary parameter P332
This parameter determines if the low pressure signal hold time exceeds the value set in P332, the
system issues an alarm. (Unit: s)
Other Parameters__ P413P416, P333
OPERATION
4.6.4.13
Interface language__Bit parameter P413 (password level: 2)
d7
d6
d5
Reserved
d3
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
d7__Interface language
0: Chinese.
// The interface is displayed in Chinese.
1: English. // The interface is displayed in English.

d6__System parameter and programming
0: Diameter.
// The command value of X axis in the program is input in diameter, and the
coordinate of X axis is displayed in diameter.
1: Radius.
// The command value of X axis in the program is input in radius, and the coordinate
o f X axis is displayed in radius.
// The coordinate value of X axis in the system can be expressed in radius and diameter. When
modifying this bit parameter, the system will prompt whether to convert the parameter. If the
conversion is confirmed, the system will convert the reference coordinate parameters P001, P004,
P007, P011, P012, P017, P018, P022 and P025.
// After modifying this bit parameter, it is required to re-perform tool setting and programming.
Otherwise, the data in X axis direction is incorrect.
d5__Coordinate system setting
0: Front tool post.
// The definition of the front tool post is shown in figure 1-1 in Chapter One in
Part Programming
1Rear tool post.
// The definition of the rear tool post is shown in figure 1-2 in Chapter One in
Part Programming.
// This parameter is used only for displaying the icon of the imaginary tool nose number visually in
manual tool setting; during manual tool setting, the system uses this parameter to judge whether the
front tool post coordinate system or rear tool post coordinate system is used, in order to correctly display
the position relationship between tool nose center and imaginary tool nose.
// 928TD does not support the tool nose radius compensation function.
d3__ Lease command increment
0: Metric.
1: Inch.
// The unit of the command value in the program is mm.

// The unit of the command value in the program is inch. (This option is invalid currently.)
123

Communication interface__Bit parameter P414 (password level2)
d7
d6
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
d0
d7__Baudrate selectvalid when P414_d6=0

0 9600
1 19200
d6__Baudrate select (prior)
OPERATION
0: Decided by d7.
1 38400
Baudrate
d7 =0 d6 =0
9600
d7 =1 d6 =0
19200
d7 =0d6=1
38400
d7 =1d6=1
d0__Bit of debugging function

0: Normal state.
Bit select
// The user generally sets it to the normal state.
1: Debugging state.
// Used when debugging the software.
Display interface__Bit parameter P415password level3

d7
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
d3
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
d7__ Prompting range in parameter interface

0: OFF.
1: ON.
// The parameter range prompt is turned off;

// The parameter range prompt is turned on.
d3__Diagnosis interface prompt

0: OFF. // The prompt message in diagnosis mode is turned off.
1: ON.
// The prompt message in diagnosis mode is turned on.
Function switch__Bit parameter P416password level3
d7
d6
d5
d4
Reserved
Reserved
d1
d0
d7__ Memorizing the current password level

0: Not performed.
// The parameter password level is not memorized. When entering the

parameter password input interface, Please input user password is
displayed.
1: Performed.
// The parameter password level is memorized. The last parameter setting

interface memorized by the system is entered.
d6__Operation of deleting all programs in EDIT mode

0: Enabled. // In EDIT mode, it is allowed to delete all the programs in the system.
1: Disabled.
// In EDIT mode, it is forbidden to delete all the programs in the system.
d5__ Operation of clearing all tool offset in tool offset mode

0: Allowed.
1: Disabled.
// In tool offset mode, it is allowed to delete all the tool offset values.
// In tool offset mode, it is forbidden to delete all the tool offset values.
d4__Turning off driver unit enabling in MANUAL mode

0: Disabled.
// It is forbidden to turn off the drive unit by pressing DELETE key in MANUAL state.
1: Enabled. // It is allowed to turn off the drive unit by pressing DELETE key in MANUAL state.
124
Chapter Four
d1__ Parameter display select

0: All are displayed.
// According to the parameter password level, both the parameters alterable

and unalterable are displayed.
1: Alterable items are displayed. // According to the parameter password level, only the alterable
parameters rather than all parameters can be displayed.
d0__Program modification in EDIT mode
// The program lock function is invalid, and it is allowed to modify the program using
1: Disabled.
// The program lock function is valid. It is forbidden to modify the program using keys
in EDIT mode. Otherwise, the system issues an alarm.
Program line number auto interval__Auxiliary parameter P333

In the Edit operation mode, this parameter determines the increment from last program line number
to current one, i.e. the difference value between two line numbers.
Y axis rotation clear coordinate__ Reference coordinate parameter P027
928TD does not support this function.
When Y axis is used for spindle or worktable rotation control, the user should set the counting range
of the rotation coordinate in this parameter. E.g. When Y axis rotates 360 degrees, P027 should be set
to 360.000; when Y axis is moving, its tool nose and machine coordinates change circularly within the
range of 0~359.999.
When P027 is 0, the rotation axis coordinate clearing function is invalid. Range of P207: 09999.
Record alarm__Bit parameter P417password level: 2
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Parameter P417 is for setting whether to record the contents of alarms. When the bit parameter is set
to 0, the system records the alarm messages; when changing a part program or during the emergency
alarm or alarms in MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, the system automatically records the alarm without
bit parameter setting; alarm messages of the system are classified into the following types:
P417 bit parameter
(record or not)
P418 bit parameter

(display or not)
d7
d7
d6
d6
d5
d5
d4
d3
d4
d3
d0
Alarm message
Alarms in parameter/tool offset operation mode
(E001~ E099)
Alarms in EDIT operation mode (E101~ E199)
Alarms relative to program (E201~ E299, E601~
E699)
M03/M04/M05 start/stop operation
Tool change T operation
Emergency
stop
alarm,
alarms
in
MANUAL/AUTO mode (E301~ E499)
Program change in EDIT operation mode
125
OPERATION
keys on the operation panel in EDIT mode.
0: Enabled.

d7__Recording parameter/tool compensation is
0: Performed.
// The alarm messages in parameter/tool offset operation mode are

recorded.
1: Not performed.
// The alarm messages in parameter/tool offset operation mode are not

recorded.
d6, d5, d4, d3__ Recording edit alarm, program alarm, spindle alarm, tool change alarm is
0: Performed.
OPERATION
1: Not performed.
Display alarm__Bit parameter P418 (password level: 3)
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
Reserved
Reserved
d0
Parameter P418 sets whether to display the alarm messages recorded by the system. When the bit
parameter is set to 0, the system displays the alarm messages; the system automatically displays all the
messages about program change, without bit parameter setting; The system displays the alarm
messages as follows:
d7__ Displaying parameter/tool compensation is
0:
Performed.
// The alarm messages recorded by the system in parameter/tool offset

operation mode are displayed.
1: Not performed. // The alarm messages recorded by the system in parameter/tool offset
operation mode are not displayed.
d6, d5, d4, d3, d0__ Displaying edit/program/spindle/ tool change alarm, emergency stop in
MANUAL/AUTO is
0:
Performed.
1: Not performed.
Note
1)
Alarm record is only a search function provided in some special cases; it is suggested that the
operator not operate it without special reasons.
4.6.4.14
Parameters of Interface __P500P556
In addition to the control and detection functions for the main devices, like spindle, chuck, tailstock
and tool post, this system also provides the control and detection functions for the additional devices
such as the signal lamp, lubrication and safety door. The former occupies the fixed signal pins. However,
the system does not set fixed signal pins for the additional devices due to the limited number of pins.
They are set by the machine tool builder based on the actual conditions.
If the unused signals for the main devices are released, it is available to add the signals required by
the additional devices by means of interface parameter setting. In this case, the system can realize the
control and detection for the additional devices.
First judge what the interface parameter occupies is the input or output interface. P500P510 are
output interface parameters, and P511P540 are input interface parameters.
126
Chapter Four
Parameters P541P556 are used for the multiple-station tool number signal encoding. When bit
parameter P408_d7 is set to 1 (tool number signal detection mode: Table checking), parameters P541
P556 are used for setting the tool number check signal.
If the interface parameter value is not 0, the input or output interface is occupied; If the set value is
the sequence number of a common signal name, it means the pin corresponding to the common signal
name of the occupied input or output. If the initial value of the interface parameter is 0, the function of
this parameter is not used, i.e. the pin is not occupied.

set to the occupied common signal name, and the system prompts: [Parameter alarm] Illegal I/O
setting, this input or output pin has been occupied.
It is allowed to view those unoccupied pins, which are displayed in white and whose names are
displayed with common signal names, on the diagnosis page. The pin numbers of input or output on the
diagnosis page are arranged from top to bottom, and from left to right, which increase from number 1.
For the standard definition and use of the interface parameters, please refer to Section 4.6.5.8
Interface Parameter List in the appendix of this chapter.
Example
Setting P511 SAGT to 5 indicates that SAGT occupies the output interface UI05; System UI05 pin
inputs the safety door detection function.
Setting P506 M32O to 9 indicates that M32O occupies the output interface UO09; The system
UO09 pin outputs the lubrication control function.
4.6.4.15
Initial Values of Variables __P600P639
The initial values of variable parameters P600P639 correspond to the variable initial values
r001r040; for details about the variable explanation, please refer to Chapter Severn Statement
Programming in Part Programming
Note: 928TD has no statement programming function.
4.6.4.16
Parameters of G76 __P336P339
When using G76 command, the information about the thread machining can be notified in advance,
then the system automatically arranges the thread cutting, and finally machines the threads conforming
to the requirements.
G76 tool angle P__Auxiliary parameter P336
This parameter determines the angle between two adjacent teeth threads. The actual thread angle
is decided by the tool angle. Therefore, P336 should be the same as the tool angle. Unit: Degree.
G76 fine turning times L__Auxiliary parameter P337
This parameter determines the number of times for the thread fine turning.
127
OPERATION
If the pin of input or output is already occupied by other functions, the interface parameter cannot be

G76 fine turning cutting amount R__ Auxiliary parameter P338
This parameter determines the cutting amount for the thread fine turning. Unit: mm.
G76 rough turning minimum cutting amount Q__ Auxiliary parameter P339
This parameter determines the minimum cutting amount in the thread rough turning. Unit: mm.
Note
1)
When the system is executing G76 command , it will automatically set the values of words P,
L, R, Q of G76 command into their corresponding parameters P336, P337, P338, P339
OPERATION
respectively, because these parameter items need to be used in executing command .

2)
When P, L, R, Q in G76 command are entirely or partially omitted, the execution of G76 is
performed by the set values of parameters P336, P337, P338, P339.
4.6.5
Appendix
4.6.5.1
Reference Parameter List
Parameter
No.
P000
P001
P002
P003
P004
P005
P006
P007
P008
P009
P010
P011
P012
P013
P014
P015
P016
P017
P018
P019
128
Parameter List
Parameter
level
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
Parameter designation
Unit
Initial value
Range
Z program reference point

X program reference point
Y program reference point
2nd program reference
point of Z axis
point of X axis
point of Y axis
3rd program reference
point of Z axis
point of X axis
point of Y axis
+ direction tool nose soft
limit of Z axis
- direction tool nose soft
limit of Z axis
limit of X axis
limit of X axis
limit of Y axis
limit of Y axis
+ direction mechanical soft
limit of Z axis
- direction mechanical soft
limit of Z axis
limit of X axis
limit of X axis
limit of Y axis
mm
mm
mm
200.000
150.000
100.000
-99999.999
+99999.999
mm
210.000
mm
160.000
mm
110.000
mm
220.000
mm
170.000
mm
120.000
mm
8000.000
mm
-8000.000
mm
8000.000
mm
-8000.000
mm
8000.000
mm
-8000.000
mm
8000.000
mm
-8000.000
mm
8000.000
mm
-8000.000
mm
8000.000
User
backup
Chapter Four
P020
P021
P022
P023
P024
1
1
1
2
P025
2
2
4.6.5.2
P101
P102
P103
P104
P105
P106
P107
P108
P109
P110
P111
Parameter
level
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
P112
P113
2
2
P114
P115
P116
P117
P118
P119
-8000.000
mm
mm
mm
300.000
200.000
200.000
mm
mm
mm
010
010
010
09999
Motion Parameter List
Parameter
No.
P100
mm
2
2
2
2
2
Maximum rapid traverse
rate limit for Z axis
rate limit for X axis
rate limit for Y axis
Minimum start speed for Z
axis
Minimum start speed for X
axis
Minimum start speed for Y
axis
Z
axis
rapid
feed
acceleration/deceleration
time (ms)
X
axis
rapid
(ms)
Y
axis
rapid
feed
time (ms)
Zero return low speed of Z
axis
Zero return low speed of X
axis
Zero return low speed of Y
axis
Cutting feed initial speed
Maximum speed limit for
Cutting feed
Linear
time for cutting feed (ms)
Exponential
time for cutting feed (ms)
Acceleration/deceleration
time for thread cutting
(ms)
Acceleration/deceleration
time for thread run-out
(ms)
G99 initial lines
Delay when positioning is
switched to cutting (ms)
Unit
Stepper
initial
value
Servo
initial
value
Range
mm/min
5000
8000
115000
mm/min
2500
4000
115000
mm/min
5000
6000
115000
mm/min
300
600
110000
mm/min
150
300
110000
mm/min
300
600
110000
ms
400
150
112000
ms
400
150
112000
ms
400
150
112000
mm/min
100
100
02000
mm/min
100
100
02000
mm/min
100
100
02000
mm/min
mm/min
100
4000
200
6000
12000
15000
ms
500
200
112000
ms
500
200
112000
ms
400
150
18000
ms
300
150
18000
ms
0
100
0
100
030000
08000
User
backup
129
OPERATION
P027

limit of Y axis
Z axis zero coordinate
X axis zero coordinate
Y axis zero coordinate
Z axis zero point offset
value
X axis zero point offset
value
Y axis zero point offset
value
Y axis rotation zeroing
coordinate
P026

4.6.5.3
Drive Parameter List
Parameter
No.
P200
P201
P202
P203
Parameter
level
2
2
2
1
P204
P205
OPERATION
P206
P207
P208
P209
P210
4.6.5.4
1
0
Z axis backlash
X axis backlash
Y axis backlash
Z axis command pulse
multiplier
Z axis command pulse
division coefficient
X axis command pulse
multiplier
X axis command pulse
Y axis command pulse
multiplier
Y axis command pulse
Spindle encoder lines
Undefined (reserved)
Initial
value
0.000
0.000
0.000
Unit
mm
mm
mm
Range
User
backup
010.000
1
1
1
199999
1
1
1
1200
0.000
1005000
-1.0001.000
Auxiliary Parameter List
Parameter
No.
P300
Parameter
level
2
P301
P302
P303
P304
P305
P306
P307
P308
P309
P310
2
2
2
2
1
P311
P312
P313
P314
P315
P316
P317
P318
P319
P320
2
2
1
1
1
P321
P322
2
2
130
Unit
Maximum speed for spindle M41

gear
gear
gear
gear
Spindle minimum speed limit in
constant surface speed
Spindle maximum speed limit in
constant surface speed
Thread smooth speed boundary
Thread spindle fluctuation alarm
Spindle JOG time (ms)
Speed in spindle JOG
Lines occupied by spindle gear
control
Gear shift time 1 of the variable
frequency spindle (ms)
Gear shift time 2 of the variable
frequency spindle (ms)
Interval time for spindle gear shift
(ms)
Output voltage during spindle
gear shift (mV
Delay time from spindle stop to
spindle brake (ms)
Spindle brake output time (ms)
Spindle maximum speed limit
Tool post type (0__9)
Maximum tool number
Lines occupied by tool post
signal
r/min
Initial
value
3000
r/min
3000
r/min
3000
r/min
3000
r/min
100
r/min
8000
r/min
r/min
ms
r/min
100
300
0
200
4
19999
199999
099999
099999
04
ms
100
199999
ms
100
199999
ms
100
199999
mV
010000
ms
100
199999
ms
r/min
1000
8000
1
4
4
199999
199999
09
116
18
ms
ms
100
100
199999
199999
Tool change time T1 (ms)

Range
099999
User
backup
Chapter Four
P323
P324
2
2
P325
P326
P327
P328
P329
2
2
2
P332
P333
P334
P336
P337
P338
1
3
3
3
P339
P341
100
1000
199999
199999
ms
10000
199999
ms
ms
ms
ms
10
10
10
5000
199999
199999
199999
199999
60
099999.999
600
099999.999
600
0.001
99999.999
10
0100
h
deg
0
0.000
1
0100000
099.000
199
mm
0.000
099.999
mm
0.000
099.999
090
Cutting enabled when rotation

speed reaches the percentage
OPERATION
ms
ms
P331
4.6.5.5

Tool post CCW rotation clamping
time (ms)
Tool change rotation time limit
(ms)
Spindle control pulse time (ms)
Chuck control pulse time (ms)
Tailstock control pulse time (ms)
M code response detection time
(ms)
Automatic lubrication start time
(s)
Automatic lubrication interval
time (s)
Hold time of low pressure alarm
s
Program line number automatic
interval
Automatic machining time limit
G76 tool angle P
G76 fine turning times L
G76 fine turning cutting amount
R
G76 rough turning minimum
cutting amount Q
P330
Bit Parameter List
The corresponding bits of the bit parameters are set to 0 or 1 to realize different control functions,
thus satisfying the requirements of different machine tools.
Parameter
No.
P400
P401
P402
P403
P404
P405
P406
P407
P408
P409
Parameter
level
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
P410
P411
1
2
P412
P413
P414
2
2
2
P415
P416
P417
P418
P419
3
3
2
3
2
Parameter
designation
Running setting
Efficiency setting
Safety setting 1
Safety setting 2
Debugging setting
Motor drive
Zero point setting 1
Zero point setting 2
Tool post setting
Chuck
tailstock
(hydraulic system)
Spindle configuration
Precision
compensation
Other interfaces
Interface language
Communication
interface
Display interface
Function switch
Record alarm
Display alarm
Safety setting 3
Initial value
Range
User
backup
00000100
00000000
01000000
00100001
00000000
00011100
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000010
0000000011111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
10001000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
131

4.6.5.6
OPERATION
132
Interface Parameter List
Parameter
No.
P500
Parameter
level
1
Signal
designation
M21O
Function
explanation
User
command
output
User
command
output
Program run
signal light 3
Alarm light
control
signal 2
Alarm light
control
signal 1
Machine
electricity
delay
power-on
control
signal
P501
M23O
P502
LMP3
P503
LMP2
P504
LMP1
P505
MDLY
P506
M32O
P507
TZD
P508
TFD
P509
P510
P511
1
1
1
A001
A002
SAGT
P512
Dalm
Feed device
alarm
detection
P513
M41I
Gear
shift
in-position
signal
P514
M42I
Gear
shift
in-position
signal
P515
M43I
Gear
shift
in-position
signal
P516
M44I
Gear
shift
in-position
signal
P517
M91I
P518
M93I
User
command
input
User
command
input
Lubrication
control
switch
Tool
post
worktable
brake output
Tool
post
pre-indexing
output
Reserved
Reserved
Safety door
detection
Standard definition
and use
I/O
O
Initial
value
17
18
For
tricolor
light
control (green light)
For
tricolor
light
control (yellow light)
For
tricolor
light
control (red light)
For controlling the

lubrication switch on
the machine tool
Applicable
to
SWD120, AK31,
SBWD-80 tool post
Applicable to AK31,
SBWD-80 tool post
For detecting the

state of the machine
safety door
For detecting the
state of the feed
device
when
executing M230
Using
the
frequency-conversion
spindle
in-position
detection signal M41
Using
the
spindle
in-position
Using
the
spindle
in-position
Using
the
spindle
in-position
Range
099
User
backup
Chapter Four
RM78
P520
RM79
P521
Wsp
P522
WsY
P523
WsX
P524
WsZ
P525
Wbk2
P526
Wbk1
P528
TFDC
P529
TXT
P530
TGR
P532
G31I
P533
M61I
P534
M63I
P535
M65I
P541
P556
Tailstock
advancing
in-position
detection
Spindle
retracting
in-position
detection
External
MPG
emergency
stop
External
MPG
axis
select Y
External
MPG
axis
select X
External
MPG
axis
select Z
External
MPG
override 2
External
MPG
override 1
Pre-indexing
in-position
detection
Tool number
strobe signal
Tool
post
overheat
detection
G31
input
detection
M61/M62
execution
switch
M63/M64
execution
switch
M65/M66
execution
switch
Number 1
16
tool
number
detection
signal
Used when using a

hydraulic tailstock
Used when suing a

hydraulic tailstock
Applicable
to
external MPG
an
Applicable
to
external MPG
an
Applicable
to
external MPG
an
Applicable
to
external MPG
an
Applicable
to
external MPG
an
Applicable
to
external MPG
an
Applicable to AK31,
SBWD-80 tool post
Applicable to AK31,
SBWD-80 tool post
Applicable to AK31,
SBWD-80 tool post
G31 input interface
M61/M62 foot switch
M63/M64 foot switch
M65/M66 foot switch
Used
for
multiple-station
tool
post signal encoding
OPERATION
P519
032
and 99
0
255
Note
1) When bit parameter P409_d4 =1 (the tailstock control function is invalid), the interfaces RM78, RM79 for tailstock
advancing/retracting in-position detection are invalid.
2) When bit parameter P410_d6 =0 (spindle S gear shift control), the interfaces M41I, M42I, M43I, M44I for gear
shift in-position signals are invalid.
4.6.5.7
Variable Initial Value List
Parameter No.
P600P639
Parameter
level
3
Parameter
designation
r001r040
Initial
value
0
Range
User
backup
-9999999999999999
133

4.6.5.8
PARA.
No.
P1000
P1001
P1002
P1299
OPERATION
P1300
P1301
P1600
P1601
P1900
P1901
P1902
P1903
P1904
P1905
Pitch Error Compensation Parameter List

Parameter designation (in
equal-space mode)
Compensation value (um)
Parameter range
-1000+1000
-1000+1000
-1000+1000
-1000+1000
-1000+1000
-1000+1000
-1000+1000
Position of Z axis pitch

measurement start point
on
machine
coordinate
system (mm)
Position of X axis pitch
on
machine
coordinate
system (mm)
Position of Y axis pitch
on
machine
coordinate
system (mm)
Z axis pitch compensation
interval (mm)
X axis pitch compensation
interval (mm)
Y axis pitch compensation
interval (mm)
Parameter designation (in

unequal-space mode)
1st compensation position
point of Z axis (mm)
Compensation value of 1st
point of Z axis (um)
Z axis compensation position
point
(mm)
~
Z
axis
compensation value (um)
point of X axis (mm)
point of X axis (um)
point of Y axis (mm)
point of Y axis (mm)
Parameter
range
09999.999
-1000+1000
0-9999.999
-1000+1000
0-9999.999
-1000+1000
09999.999
-1000+1000
-9999.9999999.999
-9999.9999999.999
-9999.9999999.999
With the same names as the

left parameters
With the same

ranges as the left
parameters
0999.999
0999.999
0999.999
Note: 1. T level of all pitch error compensation parameters is 1.

2.
Pitch error compensation interval range for P1903P1905: 0999.999, with the interval not smaller than
0.256 mm.
4.6.5.9
List of Parameters Relative to Command Disabling
Some command names in this system are forbidden to use due to the parameter setting relative to
them; once the parameter setting satisfies the conditions to forbid a command name, the system will
forbid the use of corresponding command and its function. The parameters relative to command
disabling are as follows:
Command name
Command function
M41M44
Automatic spindle gear

shift control
S05S16
Spindle S control
M47M48
M32M33
M04
Lubrication function
Spindle CCW rotation
134
Explanation: When the condition below is

satisfied, the command is disabled.
P410_d6 =0: Spindle S control: Gear shift
P410_d6=0 and P410_d5=0: only input S00S04 in
spindle gear shift output
P410_d4=0: Spindle is switched to Y axis
Interface P506=0
P410_d2=1: Spindle CCW rotation signal output is not
used.
Chapter Four
Chuck
clamping/releasing
Tailstock
advancing/retracting
M10M11
M78M79
Command relative to Y
axis
Pin
programming
command
P409_d7=1: The chuck control function is invalid.

P409_d4=1: The tailstock control function is invalid.
P405_d1=0: Without Y axis
P412_d0=0: The pin programming for auxiliary
function output is not allowed.
r1001r1032
4.6.5.10
List of Parameters Relative to Output Interface Releasing
released interfaces can be used as common output interfaces; the interface parameters can be defined
as the released output interfaces. The parameters related to output interface releasing are as follows:
Special
signal name
Function
Common
signal name
Variable
name
M79
Tailstock retraction
UO16
r2016
M78
Tailstock advance
UO15
r2015
M10
Chuck clamping
UO14
r2014
M11
Chuck releasing
UO13
r2013
TL+
Tool
post
CW
rotation
output
signal
UO12
r2012
TL-
Tool
post
output signal
UO11
r2011
M8
Coolant ON
UO10
r2010
M9
Coolant OFF
UO09
r2009
MSP
Spindle brake signal
UO08
r2008
M3
Spindle CW rotation
Spindle
CCW
rotation
UO07
r2007
UO06
r2006
M4
CCW
M5
Spindle stop
UO05
r2005
S04/M44
Spindle gear output
UO04
r2004
S03/M43
Spindle gear output
UO03
r2003
S02/M42
Spindle gear output
UO02
r2002
S01/M41
Spindle gear output
UO01
r2001
Released as a common signal by a

parameter
P409_d4=1: Tailstock control function
is invalid.
P409_d4=1: Tailstock control function
is invalid.
P409_d7=1: The chuck control
function is invalid.
P409_d7=1: The chuck control
function is invalid.
P318=0: Line-up tool
P318=9 M60 tool change by a
self-defined command
P318=9 M60 tool change by a
P410_d7=0: Spindle control: Level
mode
P410_d3=1: Without spindle brake
signal output
P410_d2=1: Spindle CCW rotation
signal unused
P410_d7=0: Spindle control: Level
mode
P310<4: Releasing this signal, with
0/1/2/3 channel occupied
0/1/2 channel occupied
0/1 channel occupied
P310=0: Releasing this signal, with 0
channel occupied
4.6.5.11 List of Parameters Related to Input Interface Releasing

By parameter setting, the interfaces are not necessarily used for special signals. In this case, the
released interfaces can be used as common input interfaces; the interface parameters can be defined as
the released input interfaces. The parameters related to input interface releasing are as follows:
135
OPERATION
By parameter setting, the interfaces are not necessarily used for special signals. In this case, the

Special
signal name
+LT
-LT
DecY
DecX
OPERATION
DecZ
Z/X/Y axis + direction

limit
Z/X/Y axis direction
limit
Y axis deceleration
signal
X axis deceleration
signal
Z axis deceleration
signal
Common
signal name
Variable
name
UI32
r1032
UI31
r1031
UI30
r1030
UI29
r1029
UI28
r1028
Released as a common signal by a

parameter
P404_d6=1: Shielding the hard limit
alarm
P404_d6=1: Shielding the hard limit
alarm
P405_d1=0: Without Y axis
P406_d5=0: Without Y axis machine
deceleration switch
P406_d6=0: Without X axis machine
deceleration switch
P406_d7=0: Without Z axis machine
deceleration switch
P412_d7=0:
Without
external
start/pause signal
P412_d7=0:
Without
external
start/pause signal
P412_d6=0: Without an external
feed/spindle hold knob
P412_d6=0:
Without
external
feed/spindle hold knob
P409_d7=1:: Chuck control function is
invalid
P409_d5=0: No chuck response
detection
P409_d7=1: Chuck control function is
invalid.
P409_d5=0: No chuck response
detection
P409_d4=1: Tailstock control function is
invalid.
P409_d0=1: No hydraulic tailstock foot
switch input
P409_d7=1: Chuck control function is
invalid.
P409_d1=1: No hydraulic chuck foot
switch input.
P412_d5=0: No low pressure detection
P318=9: M60 tool change by a
P408_d6=0: No tool post clamp
in-position signal
SP
External pause signal
UI27
r1027
ST
External cycle start

signal
UI26
r1026
MXZ1
Feed hold signal
UI16
r1016
MXZ2
External feed/spindle
hold signal
UI15
r1015
RM10
Chuck clamp in-position

detection
UI14
r1014
RM11
Chuck releasing
in-position detection
UI13
r1013
TPS
Input signal of hydraulic

tailstock foot switch
UI12
r1012
SHL
Input signal of hydraulic

chuck foot switch
UI11
r1011
PRES
Low pressure detection
UI10
r1010
TCP
Tool post clamp

in-position signal
UI09
r1009
UI01
r1001
P318=0 or 9
UI02
r1002
P318=0 or 9: P320<2 is released
UI03
r1003
UI04
r1004
UI05
r1005
UI06
r1006
P318=0 or 9: P320<6 is released.
UI07
r1007
UI08
r1008
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
136
Function
Tool post
signal T1
Tool post
signal T2
Tool post
signal T3
Tool post
signal T4
Tool post
signal T5
Tool post
signal T6
Tool post
signal T 7
Tool post
signal T8
tool number
tool number
tool number
tool number
tool number
tool number
tool number
tool number
Chapter Four
4.7
System Operation Tool Offset
Tool Offset Operation Mode
Tool offset operation mode: The system compensates the tool offset. For each step of
operation, the system provides corresponding intelligent prompt messages. It is also available to
The explanations for the input format and examples about related setting and operation in the
manual are as follows: The function keys required to press are indicated by a sign; the letter keys,
numeric keys to be input are indicated by an underline; the prompt messages of the system are
indicated by a rectangle.
If incorrect data are input during the input of letters or figures, press
key to delete
them, and then input the correct data

before confirmation, the current operation is quit.
There are 64 groups of tool offset values from T01T64 set in this system, with each tool offset
number corresponding to one group. In each group are recorded five data, which are Z offset value, X
offset value, R tool radius, T tool shape, S tool setting record. Therein, by the manual tool setting
operation, the number of tool offset groups can be the same as the number of used tools. Other tool
offset data can only be input from the keyboard.
The main functions of the tool offset operation mode consist of:
Selecting, modifying and clearing tool offset data;

Through a USB interface, transmitting the tool offset data between U disc and CNC system.
Through RS232 communication interface, transmitting the tool offset data between external
computer and CNC system;
Through RS232 communication interface, transmitting the tool offset data between two CNC
systems.
to enter Tool offset operation mode, as displayed in fig.
4-9. (Y axis offset value is invalid)
137
OPERATION
system tool compensation.
press the hp2 key on the upper right corner of the system to view the operation key list for the

hp2
[ OFFSET ]
OFFSET NO.
OPERATION
0001.111
-0001.111
0000.100
00
0001.111
02
0002.222
-0002.222
0000.200
00
0002.222
03
0003.333
-0003.333
0000.300
00
0002.222
04
0004.444
-0004.444
0000.000
00
0002.222
05
0000.000
0000.000
0000.000
00
0000.000
06
0000.000
0000.000
0000.000
00
0000.000
07
0000.000
0000.000
0000.000
00
0000.000
EDIT
AUTO
JOG
Fig.
4.7.1
01
PARA
OFFT
DGN
4-9 Tool compensation operation mode
Searching Tool Offset Value
The search of the tool offset value is to search the desired tool offset value; there are two methods:
Method one: Scanning
The contents of each tool offset value can be viewed in Tool Offset operation mode. By pressing
,
key, the last or next tool offset value can be searched. By pressing
key,
the last page or next page of tool offset values can be searched, with each page containing 7 lines.
Method two: Searching
P + Offset number +
4.7.2
ENTER .
Inputting Tool Offset Data from Keyboard
Range of word X, Z: -8000.000 mm8000.000mm; Range of word R: 0 mm8000.000mm;

Range of word T: Integer 08; Range of word S: Integer 016.
There are two ways to input tool offset data from the keyboard: absolute input and relative input.
The operations are as follows:
Absolute input of tool offset data:
1)
Select Tool Offset operation mode.
2)
Press
key to move the highlighted block cursor to the tool
offset number to be changed; or find the tool offset number to be changed using SEARCHING
method; then press
key to move the highlighted block cursor to the Z offset
value, X offset value, R tool radius, T tool shape or S tool setting record to be changed,
138
Chapter Four
3)
Press Input key, or directly input the desired data.
4)
Input the desired data from the keyboard. During the data input, if incorrect data is input, press
key to cancel it then input the right value.
5)
Press ENTER key to store the input data into the offset value of the currently-selected tool
If sign * appears ahead of the data to be changed, it means the data modification succeeds
Relative input of tool offset data:

1)
Select Tool Offset operation mode; then move the highlighted block cursor to the data to be
changed.
2)
Press INPUT key, or directly input the desired data from the keyboard.
3)
Input the desired data from the keyboard. During the data input, if the input data is incorrect,
press
key to cancel it then input the right value. By pressing ALTER key, the system
performs addition operation by adding the input data to the original value of the selected offset
value.
4.7.3
Clearing Offset Values of Each Group
The procedures of clearing the offset values of each group are as follows:
1)
Select Tool Offset operation mode.
2)
Move the highlighted block cursor to the S tool setting record of the tool offset number to be
cleared.
3)
Press Delete key to clear the Z offset value, X offset value, R tool radius, T tool shape and S
tool setting record of the tool offset number.
4.7.4
Tool Compensation hp6 Function
By pressing hp6 key on the page of Tool Offset operation mode, the display is as follows:
Tool offset transfer menu

Key U USB interface operation
Key R RS232 interface operation
Key Z Clearing all tool offse data
Key ESC Exit
139
OPERATION
6)
offset number.

4.7.4.1
1.
Communication and Standard Format of Tool Offset Data

Tool offset data transmission through USB interface:
In the root directory of the U disc, a folder with name C001OFT needs to be created. The naming
rule of the tool compensation file includes 10 characters, i.e. OFT+File number3 digits+.TXT. The
file number cannot be greater than 666, or the system will not list the file when reading the U disc. The
tool compensation files must be placed in the folder C001OFT.
OPERATION
2.
Tool offset data transmission through RS232 interface
For details about the operation of the transmission software using RS232, please see
PartOperation: Chapter Five RS232 and USB System Communication. The transmission of the tool
compensation can be completed according to the system operation prompts.
3.
Standard format of TXT Tool Compensation File on PC
On a PC, it is possible to edit tool compensation files using TXT, LST text. but the file name and its
contents must be edited in the standard format required in the system, so that the files can be sent to the
system correctly. The specifications are as follows:
1)
On a personal computer, the user should name the tool compensation file with suffix TXT or LST,
e.g. OFT088.TXT; It is recommended that the user use suffix TXT for the convenience of the
parameter file operation on the PC.
2)
The first line of the contents of the TXT file must be the tool compensation mark:
CNC_GSKC001; which is indispensable.
3)
The contents behind // are the annotation, which lists in turn the offset number, Z offset value,
X offset value, tool radius, tool shape, tool setting record.
4)
The contents of the tool compensation must be consistent with the requirement of the standard
format.
E.g. T01
00000.000
00000.000
00000.000
00
Thereinto:
Range of tool number: 0164. If it is exceeded, the system processes it as an error;
Offset number format: Three parts: T + Number (0164) + : , which are indispensable.
A comma must be used to separate different tool compensation data in a line;
There are five compensation data for each line. More than five data indicates there are illegal
characters in the tool compensation data;
If there are less than five tool compensation data in a line (i.e. not all Z offset value +X offset
value + R tool radius +T tool shape + S tool setting record are included), the system
processes the data as Z offset value , X offset value , R tool radius, T tool shape and S tool
setting record from left to right; if the data at the end of a line need to be modified, the data
at the beginning should be added first. The values of Z, X, R, T and S cannot exceed their
respectively-specified ranges.
140
Chapter Four
Example
CNC_GSKC001
// Tool No. Z offset
X offset
Tool nose radius Imaginary tool nose Clamp tool NO.
T01:
00000.000,
00000.000,
00002.000,
0,
00
T02:
00000.000,
00000.000,
00000.000,
0,
00
T03:
00000.000,
00000.000,
00000.000,
0,
00
T04:
00000.000,
00000.000,
00000.000,
0,
00
T05:
00000.000,
00000.000,
00000.000,
0,
00
T06:
00000.000,
00000.000,
00000.000,
0,
00
T07:
00000.000,
00000.000,
00000.000,
0,
00
..
T63:
00000.000,
00000.000,
00000.000,
0,
00
T64:
00000.000,
00000.000,
00000.000,
0,
00
OPERATION
4.7.4.2 Tool Compensation Data Clearing

First set bit parameter P416_d5=0 (Clearing all tool compensation values in Tool Offset mode is
allowed), then press hp6 key in the Tool Offset operation mode, finally press Z key to clear all the tool
compensation data.
141

4.8
Diagnosis Operation Mode
Diagnosis operation mode: The system detects and displays the states of input/output (I/0)
signals, spindle speed, encoder lines in real time. For details about the operation key list for the
system diagnosis, press hp2 key on the upper right corner of the system.
OPERATION
The main functions of the diagnosis mode consist of:
Self-diagnosis function;
Displaying the states of the input/output (IO) signals;
Diagnosis of spindle control function input, output signals.
Diagnosis of tool post control function input, output signals;
Diagnosis of hard limit signals for each axis;
Diagnosis of machine zero point (machine reference point ) signal for each axis;
Diagnosis of spindle speed and encoder lines

displayed in figure 4-10:
to enter the page of Diagnosis operation mode, as
[ DIAGNOSIS ]
UI01 1
UI09 1
UI17 1
UI25 1
ALZ 1
UI02 1
UI10 1
UI18 1
UI26 1
ALX1
Spindle speed
UI03 1
SHL 1
UI19 1
UI27 1
ALY 1
0000
UI04 1
TPS 1
UI20 1
UI28 1
PCZ 1
UI05 1
UI13 1
UI21 1
UI29 1
PCX 1
Encoder lines
0000
UI06 1
UI14 1
UI22 1
UI30 1
PCY 1
UI07 1
UI15 1
UI23 1
-LT 1
PA 1
UI08 1
UI16 1
UI24 1
+LT 1
API 1
EDIT
JOG
AUTO
PARA
Fig. 4-10
4.8.1
hp2
Input interface
OFFT
DNG
Diagnosis operation mode
Searching Interface Signal
First set bit parameter P415_d3=1 (the diagnosis page prompt is ON). In the Diagnosis operation
mode, not only the explanations of each I/O but also the common signal name, hardware interface and
pin number of each I/O can be viewed; if the bit parameter is set to OFF, it is unavailable to view the
relative explanations.
Press
142
key to search each I/O. The I/O searched is highlighted.
Chapter Four
Press
4.8.2
or
System Operation Diagnosis
key to display the pages of input interface and output interface alternately.
Explanations for Display of Interface Signals Names
This system has 23-channel switch value input signals and 18-channel switch value output signals;
each signal has a name, which indicates the meaning of the signal.
UO01UO32, with each signal corresponding to one pin. Thereinto, UI17UI25 signals and UO19
UO32 signals are not led out in the interfaces.
Special signal name: For a specific machine tool, once a signal is occupied by a special function,
the signal is assigned a special name. The system sets a standard special signal name for the signal to
be used by each function.
On the display of Diagnosis, the signal used by a special function is indicated by a special signal
name; it means this function is set enabled in the parameter. The initialization parameters in the system
has enabled most of the auxiliary functions. Thus most of pin signals are displayed with a special signal
name, while the unoccupied signals are displayed with a common signal name.
For the explanations and connection of command signal names and special signal names, please
refer to Part Connection in this manual.
4.8.3
Explanation of Input Interface Diagnosis
On the display of input interface diagnosis, when an external signal is valid, its corresponding bit is
displayed as 0; when an external signal is invalid, its corresponding bit is displayed as 1. The diagnosis
of input interface signals is performed recurrently all the time, displaying the current signal states
anytime.
The definition of the input interface signal is determined by parameter. Therefore, the definition
varies with the corresponding setting of the parameter.
Example
The standard configuration of the electric tool post is 4 stations. When electric tool post
configuration of the system is 4 stations, the diagnosis messages are shown as follows:
The auxiliary parameter P320 is 4; parameter P319 is 4; parameter P318 is 1: Electric tool post.
The leftmost column on the diagnosis input page displays the diagnosis messages of T1 ~ T4.
4.8.4
Explanation of Output Interface Diagnosis
When the bit in the output interface diagnosis is displayed as 0, the output of the corresponding bit is
valid; and when the bit is displayed as 1, the output is invalid. The output interface diagnosis displays the
current hold state of each output bit. If the signal is pulse, and the pulse time is short, the output of the bit
is valid, but it is still displayed as 1.
143
OPERATION
Common signal name: The names of input signals are UI01UI32, and those of output signals are

The definition of the output interface signal is also determined by the parameter, and the definition
varies with the setting of the parameter.
4.8.5
Output Interface Operation Function
Move the cursor to the input signal to be modified using direction keys, and change the value of the
output signal where the cursor is located by pressing 1 or 0 key. If the value differs from the current value,
it is displayed in red; if the value is the same as the current value, it is displayed in yellow.
OPERATION
Note
Diagnosis output interface operation is used for system debugging. For system safety, the
operation is available only when the parameter password level is higher than 2.
4.8.6 Spindle Encoder and Spindle Speed Detection

The system can detect and display the pulse number per revolution for the spindle encoder, and
display the number of lines of the encoder automatically according to the detection result.
The number of lines of the encoder indicates the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder in
use.
The spindle speed indicates the current spindle actual speed (unit: r/min).
Explanation
1)
If the spindle is not started, the spindle speed is displayed as 0.
2)
When the spindle is started, and the initial page of the Diagnosis operation mode is entered, if
the detected number of lines of the encoder is inconsistent with the number of lines of the
spindle encoder, the system prompts: [Diagnosis check prompt]: Encoder line number
inconsistent with parameter.
3)
The spindle encoder rotates simultaneously with the spindle: I.e. each time the spindle rotates
one revolution, the encoder also rotates one revolution; otherwise, the spindle speed detected
is inconsistent with the actual value.
4.8.7
Diagnosis hp6 Function
Press hp6 key on the diagnosis page, then the display is as follows:
Key 0 Viewing alarm messages
Key 2 Entering keyboard test
Key 4 Viewing version info.
ESC - Exit
Key 1 Viewing color coding

Key 3 Viewing CPLD pulse number
Key 5 RAM import/export
Key 0 Viewing alarm messages: Displaying the system alarm record;

Key 1 Viewing color coding: Displaying 256 kinds of color and code, e.g. 00 indicates black, FF
144
Chapter Four
indicates white;
Key 2 Keyboard test: Testing the keyboard;
Key 3 Viewing CPLD pulse number:
Displaying the number of pulses of X/Y/Z;
Key 4 Version information: Displaying the system version information: System software, CPLD
version information and software version re-loading operation;
Key 5 RAM import and export: The system RAM is transmitted through U disc or serial port
RS232.
It is required to create a folder with name C001RAM in the root directory of U disc. The naming
rule of the system RAM file includes 10 characters, which are RAM+File number3 digits+.TXT. The
file number cannot be greater than 999, or the system does not list the file when reading the U disc. The
memory file must be placed in the folder C001RAM. If there is no such a folder, the system prompts: No
RAM file in the directory after detection. After opening the RAM directory page, the system can only send
the RAM files.
2. RAM data transmission through RS232 interface
This CNC system can transmit RAM data through RS232 interface. It is possible to complete the
RAM transmission in terms of the operation prompts provided by the system.
Note
1)
It is suggested that the user not use hp6 function key.
2)
For the system safety, it is allowed to operate the RAM and load and upgrade the version
only when the parameter password level is higher than level 2.
4.8.7.1
Display of Alarm Record
In the Diagnosis operation mode, press hp6 key, then 0 key. Then the system displays the alarm
record messages, as shown in figure 4-11.
Alarm record function: The system records the alarm messages in detail. For each step of
operation, the system provides corresponding intelligent prompt messages. It is also available to view
the operation key list for the system alarm record function by pressing the hp2 key on the upper right
corner of the system.
This system is capable of storing up to 4031 alarm messages. When the alarm record number
exceeds 4031, the system will automatically delete the oldest alarm messages, and display the newest
alarm messages. Therefore, it is necessary for the operator to download and save the alarm record, lest
the old alarm record cannot be referred to.
The main functions of the alarm record consist of:
Searching the number of startup times, alarm messages
Displaying the total alarm record counts, the record counts required to list according to parameter
setting, and the current record number.
Transmitting the alarm record to a U disc through USB interface.
Transmitting the alarm record to the external computer through RS232 communication interface.
145
OPERATION
1. RAM data transmission through USB interface
Total records890
NO.125
90:59:02
1001:20:59
OPERATION
NO.129
No. 0220
hp2
E346
Tailstock retracting response detection overtime alarm
M05
Spindle stop
2001:05:59 %028
NO.126
Displayed records220
Part program change
00:01:59
E367
Chuck unclamp in-position signal abnormal
01:11:20
E606 Illegal use of M91; M91 not defined in interface parameter
01:21:59
E302
Z driver alarm
00:40:20
E303
X driver alarm
120:40:20
E317
X tool nose - direction soft limit alarm
Fig. 4-11
Alarm record display
Example
E.g. latest alarm record:
120:40:20
E317
X tool nose direction soft limit alarm
Thereinto, the system startup times is the NO.129 displayed in the last alarm record, i.e. the time
this alarm record (220th) occurs is 120 hours 40 minutes and 20 seconds after the 129th startup. The
contents of the alarm is E317: X tool nose direction soft limit alarm.
Note
1)
When replacing a program, the alarm record will display the program number; just like %028 in
figure 4-13, which indicates the part program is changed to %028 after 2001 hour 05 minute 59
second after the 125th startup.
2)
The maximum time displayed for the alarm record is 99999 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds;
the maximum number of startup times displayed for the alarm record is 999.
3)
The current alarm record is highlighted, and on the right side of the scrollbar is displayed the
position where the current alarm record is located among all the displayed alarm records.
4)
The alarm record is a search function provided in some special cases; the operator should not
operate it without special reasons.
4.8.7.2
Searching Alarm Record
The alarm record search is to search the specified alarm record, view the identical alarm records, or
count the number of error numbers which is the same as the error number (alarm number in system
alarm message, e.g. E001) of the current alarm record. There are three methods:
Method one: Scanning
It is possible to view the contents of the record on the alarm record display page. By pressing
,
key, you can view the last or next record. By pressing
view the last or next page of records, with each page displaying up to 8 lines.
146
key, you can
Chapter Four
Method two: Positioning

P + Record number +
ENTER . (Record number meansNth piece of alarm record)
Method three: Others

F + Searching type + Number +
ENTER
The searching type includes: Eby alarm error number, M by spindle command, T By tool
In addition, the system provides the function of viewing the identical alarm records. By pressing
,
key, you can view the alarm records which is identical with the current one upward and
downward.
By pressing
key, you can count the number of alarm records which is identical with the
current one; The display window disappears in 5 seconds, or it disappears immediately within 5 seconds
if any other key is pressed.
Relative parameters
Parameters relative to the alarm record function: P417, P418.
4.8.7.3
Alarm Record hp6 Function
By pressing hp6 key on the alarm record display page, the display is as follows:
Alarm record sending mode select
Key U USB interface transmission
Key R RS232 interface transmission
Key ESC Return
1. Sending alarm records through USB interface:

The alarm records sent through the USB interface are saved in the folder C001ERR in the root
directory of the U disc. The naming rule of the alarm record files includes 10 characters, which are
ERR+ File number3 digits+.TXT. The file number cannot be greater than 254.
2. Alarm records sent through RS232 interface
For the operation of the communication software using RS232 for transmission, see Chapter Five
RS232 and USB System Communication in PartOperation. GSKCOM_C001.EXE can realize the file
transmission between PC and CNC, which is easy to operate and has high communication efficiency
and high reliability. The transmission of alarm records can be completed by following the system
operation prompts.
147
OPERATION
types.
change number, P by program number; press E, M, T or P key to enter the search modes of different

4.8.8
Machine Auxiliary Function Control
You can execute the machine auxiliary functions by using the auxiliary function keys on the
operation panel, rather than by inputting commands.
Press
key: The spindle rotates clockwise. When bit parameter P410_d7=0, the LED
indicator lights up, and the corresponding bit of M3 in the output interface
OPERATION
displays 0. (When bit parameter P410_d7=1, the LED indicator lights up, and
M3 in the output interface firstly outputs validity. After the pulse output, the
corresponding bit of M3 displays 1.)
Press
key: The spindle stops. (When bit parameter P410_d7=1, the diagnosis output
interface page displays M5.)
Press
key: The spindle rotates counterclockwise. When bit parameter P410_d7=0,

P410_d2=0, the LED indicator lights up, and the corresponding bit of M41 in
the output interface displays 0. (When P410_d7=1, P410_d2=0, the LED
indicator lights up, M4 in the output interface firstly outputs validity. After the
pulse output, the corresponding bit of M4 displays 1. When bit parameter
P410_d2=1, the diagnosis output interface page does not display M4.)
Press
key: The coolant switches between ON/OFF. When bit parameter P410_d7=0 and
the coolant is ON, the LED indicator lights up, and the corresponding bit of M8
in the output interface displays 0; when the coolant is OFF, the LED indicator
goes out, and the corresponding bit of M8 in the output port displays 1. (When
P410_d7=1 and the coolant is ON, the LED indicator lights up, and the
corresponding bit of M8 in the output port firstly outputs validity. After the pulse
output, the corresponding bit of M8 displays 1. When the coolant is OFF, the
indicator goes out, M9 in the output interface firstly outputs validity. After the
pulse output, the corresponding bit of M9 displays 1.)
Press
key: Used for spindle gear cycle. The spindle motor executes S01S04 or S00
S15 (based on the setting of parameter P410_d6, P410_d5)
Press
148
key: The tool post rotates to the next tool number, and the tool number state is
displayed on the corresponding position of input interfaces T1~T4.
Chapter Five
CHAPTER FIVE
System Communication
RS232 AND USB SYSTEM COMMUNICATION
This system can transmit the part programs, system parameters, system software and tool offsets
through RS232 and USB interfaces; for the operation of the part program transmission, see Section
parameters and system software, see Section 4.6.3 Parameter Operation Mode in Part; for the
OPERATION
operation of tool offset transmission, see Section 4.7.4 Tool Offset Operation Mode in Part.
5.1 RS232 Communication

RS232 communication is the serial port communication mode, which realizes data transmission
between CNC and PC, or between CNC and CNC, through the serial port communication cable (with
three lines).
5.1.1 Communication between CNC and PC

The file sending and receiving between CNC and PC is realized by the communication software
GSKCOM_C001.EXE. The software is easy to operate, and characterized by high communication
efficiency and reliability.
1)
PC configuration:
Hardware: Common-use PC with RS232 serial port; serial port communication cable (with three
lines)
Operation system: Microsoft Windows 98/2000/2003/XP.
2)
Introduction to GSKCOM_C001.EXE communication software:

See the communication software GSKCOM_C001.EXE on PC.
Preparation before communication

1)
Connect the communication cable on the condition that both PC and CNC are powered off:
Insert DB9 female plug into the RS232 communication interface on the front cover of the CNC,
and insert the other DB9 female plug into the 9-pin serial port (COM1or COM2) on the PC;
2)
4.3.3 Edit Operation Mode in PartOperation; for the operation of the transmission of system
Select the port and baudrate for communication on PC. The communication baudrate is
determined by the sender.
Setting the port of GSKCOM_C001.EXE communication software on PC
After running the communication software, leftclick to select port number, selecting the
communication serial port..
Setting the baudrate of GSKCOM_C001.EXE communication software on PC
After running the communication software, leftclick the baudrate to select the communication
baudrate (Set to: 38400 (unitb/s
149

3)
Set the communication baudrate of bit parameters P414_d7, P414_d6: See Section 4.6
Parameter Operation Mode in PartOperation.
5.1.2 Communication between CNC and CNC

For convenient operation, it is allowed to transmit data between two CNC systems (both are
GSK928TD) . The CNC for sending data is referred to as the sender; while the CNC for receiving the
OPERATION
data is the receiver, as shown in the figure below:
CNC1
Sender
CNC2
Receiver
Preparation before communication

1)
Connect the communication cable on the condition that both CNC systems are powered off:
Insert the DB9 female plug into the RS232 communication interface on the front cover of each
CNC.
2)
Set the communication baudrate of bit parameters P414_d7, P414_d6: See Section 4.6
Parameter Operation Mode in Part Operation.
Precautions for data communication between two CNC systems

1) The sender and receiver are in the same operation mode (Edit, Parameter, Tool Compensation);
2) During parameter sending or receiving, the sender and receiver must enter corresponding
operation authority.
3) The operation procedures are the same as those of data sending and data receiving of the
communication software GSKCOM_C001.EXE.
Note
1)
To stop the transmission, press Cancel button on the communication software; or

press RESET key or ESC key on the CNC.
2)
Do not turn off the power during the data transmission,. Otherwise, the data
transmission error may occur.
3)
The communication cable for the communication between CNC and PC is the same as
that for the communication between CNC and CNC.
5.2 USB Communication

This system supports USB communication mode, thus realizing the data transmission between
CNC and U disc with the USB interface.
150
Chapter Five
5.2.1
System Communication
USB Operation
When performing USB operation, insert the U disc directly into the USB interface on the system
panel. If the U disc contains the folder and file names created in accordance with the system
requirements in its rooted directory, the system automatically identifies and opens the U disc. At the
same time, on the system interface is displayed the USB icon.
1) After the U disc operation, the user must press ESC key to turn off the U disc before
Then when the USB icon displayed on the system interface disappears,
pull the U disc out from the USB interface. Otherwise, the system hardware and U disc
may be damaged.
2) Never attempt to pull the U disc out when its indicator is blinking, because it is reading or
writing data at this moment. Pulling it out halfway may cause damage to the hardware or
result in data loss.
3) A U disc generally has a write-protect switch. The switch should be performed before the
U disc is inserted into the system interface rather than during the U disc running.
4) The storage size of the U disc should be as small as possible, in case that the
communication speed between system and U disc is affected. It is suggested that the
user not use those removable storage devices with a size larger than 8G. Otherwise, the
system hardware and the devices may be damaged.
5) When the U disc operation fails, press RESET key on the system, and then re-insert the U
disc after pulling it out.
5.2.2
USB File Directory Requirements
When transmitting different kinds of data during USB communication, the system requires different
names for the USB files. The folder names required to create in the rooted directory of U disc are as
follows:
Data type
Name type
Part program
Parameter
data
Tool offset
data
System
software
upgrade
Folder name in rooted

directory of U disc
C001PRO
C001PAR
C001OFT
C001DATA
File name in folder
CNCxxx.TXT
PARxxx.TXT
OFTxxx.TXT
DATAxxx.TXT
Range of XXX in file

name
0254
0999
0999
0254
Memory whole
upgrade
Alarm history
System RAM
Data type
Name type
Folder name in U disc
rooted directory
C001MEMO
C001ERR
C001RAM
File name in folder
MEMOxxx.TXT
ERR xxx.TXT
RAMxxx.TXT
XXX range in file name
0254
0999
0999
151
OPERATION
pulling it out.
Note
OPERATION
152
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
153
PROGRAMMING
154
Chapter One
Programming Fundamental
PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER ONE
PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL
The automatic machining of CNC machine is the course of automatically running edited part
programs. The programming is defined that the drawing and the technology of machining workpiece are
described with CNC language and are edited to the part programs. Here describes the definition of
command and the programming mode of CNC part programs. Please read carefully these contents
before programming.
1.1 Coordinate Axis and Its Direction

This system has defined the controlled axis and its motion according to GB/T 196602005/ISO
PROGRAMMING
841:2001 Industrial Automation System and Integration-Numerical Control of MachinesCoordinate System and Motion Nomenclature. The two coordinate axes are named with X and Z,
which are perpendicular to each other to form XZ plane rectangular coordinate system as Fig. 1-1:
Fig. 1-1
XZ plane rectangular coordinate system 1front tool post coordinate system
X: It is defined to be perpendicular with the rotary centerline of spindle. X positive direction is the
one in which the tool leaves from the rotary center of spindle.
Z: It is defined to be coincident with the rotary centerline of spindle and Z positive direction is the
one that the tool leaves from the headstock.
Fig. 1-2 X-Z plane rectangular coordinate system 2 (rear tool post coordinate system)
155

The coordinate system in the manual defines X, Z based on Fig. 1-1 (front tool post coordinate
system).
The execution course of G02,G03 commands is different from that in front tool post coordinate
system when Fig.1-2 (rear tool post coordinate system) is used to define X, Z (see G02, G03
commands):
1.2
Machine Coordinate System, Machine Zero

Machine coordinate system is the reference for the system to count coordinates, and is fixed on the
machine.
Machine zero (or machine reference point, or mechanical zero) is a fixed point on the machine.
Generally, it is set at the position of X, Z max. stroke in the positive direction, with the machine zero
check device installed on the machine. Do not use the machine zero return function or set bit parameters
P406_d7, P406_d6, P406_d5, P406_d4, P406_d3, P406_d2 to 0, i.e. no machine zero when the
machine zero check device is not installed.
PROGRAMMING
1.3
Program Reference Point

In the machine coordinate system, the operator should set a position that is convenient and safe for
tool change and workpiece fixing when the tool post stops at it. Program reference point is set when the
tool post stops at the position, which is called program reference point (or program zero). Program
reference point coordinates are relative to the machine coordinate system.
Once the reference point is determined, the tool can return to the reference point by executing the
reference point return function in JOG operation mode or AUTO operation mode. Even if the system is
switched off, the reference point remains valid. If the stepper motor is employed, there may be slight
error caused by the motor vibrating upon system power on. Execute the reference point return once to
avoid the error.
The program reference point is automatically set to X=150, Z=150 without setting the program
reference point after the system is switched on for the first time.
1.4
Machine 2nd, 3rd Program Reference Point

In the machine coordinate system, the operator can also set the 2nd, 3rd program reference point.
Their functions are similar to the program reference point, and the system has corresponding commands
to move the worktable to the 2nd, 3rd program reference point.
1.5
Workpiece Coordinate System

A coordinate system with a certain point on the workpiece set as its origin is referred to as a
workpiece coordinate system. Its axes are separately parallel with X, Z axis in the same direction.
156
Chapter One
After the workpiece coordinates is created, all absolute coordinate values in programming are the
coordinate values in the workpiece coordinate system. Generally, Z axis in the workpiece coordinate
system is set on the rotary center of workpiece.
According to the actual condition in programming, define the workpiece coordinate origin, i.e. the
programming origin in the workpiece drawing and the coordinate origin of CNC system command. The
workpiece coordinate system is created by setting workpiece coordinates.
1.6 Programming Coordinate

Programming coordinate is for workpiece coordinate system.
This system can use absolute coordinates (X, Z word) relative coordinates (U, W word) or
compound coordinates (X/W, U/Z word) for programming
1.6.1 Absolute Coordinate Values
PROGRAMMING
The absolute coordinate value is the distance to the coordinate origin, i.e. the coordinate position
of the end point of tool movement, as Fig. 1-3
Z
B
A
x
Fig.1-3
Absolute coordinate value
Tool traversing from A to B uses B coordinate values as follows: X 50
Z 70.
1.6.2 Relative Coordinate Values

The relative coordinate value is the distance from the previous position to the next one, i.e. the
actual traversing distance of the tool as Fig. 1-4:
157
Z
B
x
Fig.1-4
Incremental coordinate values
Tool traversing from A to B uses the incremental coordinates as follows: U -30

diameter programming)
W -40 (X with
PROGRAMMING
1.6.3 Compound Coordinate Values

The relative coordinates and the absolute coordinates can be applied at the same time, but one
coordinate axis in one block can only be defined by one method, i.e. X , W or U , Z can be applied, but
the X, U or Z, W cannot be applied.
For tool traversing from A to B as Fig. 1-4, X is applied with the absolute coordinate and Z with the
incremental coordinate as : X 5 0
W - 4 0.
1.7 Diameter Programming and Radius Programming

X coordinate value is input with diameter or radius in programming: diameter programming,
radius programming.
Diameter programming: when P413_d6 bit is set to 0, X command value is input with diameter,
and X coordinate value is with diameter and its traverse speed is with radius in the
system (program, parameter, tool offset, coordinates).
Radius programming: when P413_d6 bit is set to 1, X command value is input with radius, and X
coordinate value is with radius and its traverse speed is with radius in the system
(program, parameter, tool offset, coordinates).
Notes
1)
Diameter programming rules in the manual are described except for special explanations.
2)
Arc radius is unrelated to diameter programming or radius programming.
3)
Execute the tool setting and programming again after P413_d6 is modified, otherwise, X data
is not correct.
1.8 Interpolation Function

Interpolation is defined as a planar or three dimensional contour formed by path of 2 or multiple
axes moving at the same time, also called contour control. The axes controlled during interpolation are
158
Chapter One
called link axes. The moving distance, direction and speed of the link axes are controlled synchronously
in the course of movement to form the required composite motion path. Positioning control is defined
that only motion end point of one axis or multiple axes and only the motion path in the course of
movement are controlled.
This system is a two-axis linkage CNC, with X and Z as its link axes. It provides includes linear,
circular and thread interpolation functions .
Linear interpolation: Composite motion path of X, Z axis is a straight line from starting point to end
point.
Circular interpolation: Composite motion path of X, Z axis is an arc with its radius specified by R (or
by center by I, K) from starting point to end point; or an arc formed by
coordinates I, K of a mediate point on the curve.
Thread interpolation: Move amount of X or Z or both X and Z is determined by the rotation angle of
the spindle to form a helical cutting path on the workpiece surface (rotating
PROGRAMMING
along with the spindle) to realize the thread cutting.
159
CHAPTER 2
PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
A group of commands edited according to the requirement of moving a machine is referred to as

program. According to the sequence of command, the system can move the tool along a straight line or
a circular arc, start/stop the spindle and cooling, or select a tool, etc. The command sequence is edited
according to sequence required by the workpiece technology.
2.1
Character
Character is the basic unit to compose the program. The characters in the system are English
letters, digits and some symbols.
An English letter is the address character of a command or data: D
PROGRAMMING
U V
W X
Y Z
H I
Digits are the specific data of an address character: 0123456789

Macro word: If
If
then
then
else
and
or
else : select statement;
<
>
()
exampleIf(x>y) then (z=0 ) else(z=1);
and: logic and ;

or: logic or ;
>: more than ;
<: less than;
=: equal to ;
Sign%
/;
% Start sign of program name
Negative data or reduction;

+ Addition;
Multiplication or modification;
. Decimal point;
/ Division in assignment statement, and block skip sign in others;
Blank space;
; Comment.
2.2
Word
A word consists of an address character and the following digits. For example: N0100 X12.8
W-23.45. Rules are as follows:
Each word must have an address character (an English letter) and the following number
character string.
160
The invalid 0 of digital character string can be omitted.
Chapter Two
Program Configuration
The leading zero of a command can be omitted. For example: G00 can be written as G0.
The positive sign must be omitted, but the negative sign must not be omitted.
2.3 Block Number

The block number is divided into two formats: the one with a line number and the one without a line
number; block number is the line number of a block which is either automatically created or manually
input and modified. A block number consists of the letter N and the following 4-digit integer(range:
0000-9999). The sequence of block number can be free, and its interval can also be unequal. It is
suggested to increase the block number in ascending order for convenient program search and analysis.
When manual input is executed, block number N * * * * (* is 09) can be directly input at the
beginning of program line. When the integer following block number N needs to be modified, please
modify the integer according to the block content modification mode described in Section 4.1 Edit
Operation Mode in PartOperation.
number can be automatically created. If P333 is not set to 0, the line number cannot be created
automatically. Please refer to Section 4.6 Parameter Operation Mode in PartOperation for parameter
setting; set P333 to 0; each program includes many blocks, and each block begins with block number
N**** . After a new program is created, the system automatically creates the first block number
N0000 , and after each block is input and ENTER is pressed, the system automatically creates the
next block number. The program number increment is determined by P333. The system automatically
creates block numbers according to the increment which is 1/4 integer of P333 content.
Note
1) When the system judges that current line has no line number, it will automatically create a new
line number N1000.
2) When commands M98, M97, M91, M92, M93, M94 related to block number are used, there
should be no repetitive block number. Otherwise, the system will issue an alarm. A block
number can be repeated without executing the above commands.
2.4 Block
A block with a line number is composed of a block number and several words; a block without a line
number has no block number. One block can contain 255 characters at most (including spaces between
words). The block number is indispensable for a block. It can be either created automatically by the
system, or modified in EDIT state.
A block can contain several words or no words. When a block contain many words, one or more
blank space must be input between words.
161
PROGRAMMING
When automatic block number creation is selected, and parameter P333 is not set to 0, the line
A complete block is as follows:

N0120
G1
X130
W-40
F50
N0120
Block number
G1
Preparatory function
X130
W-40
Enter
Motion data
F50
Motion speed
Enter
Block end, not displayed on the screen. However, each program ends with
ENTER.
Note
1) Each word of a block is separated with a blank space generated automatically by the system;
but it is necessary to input the blank space manually by user when this system cannot
distinguish words.
PROGRAMMING
2) A word can be placed anywhere in a block.
2.5 Block Skip Symbol and Comment

Insert skip symbol / or comment symbol ; before the block which needs not to be executed (and
not be deleted) during execution. Then the system skips this block in the program being executed.
When a comment symbol is added behind each block, the user can add comments for each block;
the comments are edited by only English letters and digitals on CNC, and can be edited by Chinese on
PC. The CNC can display Chinese comments after programs are downloaded to CNC.
The system skips the block with / at the line beginning to execute the next one.
The system skips the block with ; at the line beginning or block beginning to execute the next one.
Input ; at the end of a line and then input simple comments.
Note
1)
Press W key to insert ; or /.
2)
Block contents following ; will become green.
3)
Insert / in front of the head of the block, the block will turn into green.
4)
Except for the first condition above, the block where the cursor is located becomes light green;
and becomes orange in other conditions.
5)
Chinese comments following ; can be input only through serial port or USB instead of the
system keyboard, but the system can display Chinese.
6)
; must be input in half-width format, when comments are input through serial port or USB,
because the system does not support full-width input format.
162
Chapter Two
2.6
Program Configuration
Program Structure
A block consists of a group of commands realizing one or several technology operations in the
course of machining. A machining program (also referred to as part program) consists of multiple
blocks arranged according to the machining technology. A block number (line number) is used for
identifying different blocks, and a program name is used for identifying programs.
Each part program consists of one program number and some blocks (up to 9999 blocks). A block
number is composed of letter N and the following 4-digit integer. A program name is comprised of sign %
and a program number (3-digit integer). The general structure of a program is as Fig. 2-1.
Program name %020

[ Edit ]
%020
Blank space before block

Block skip symbol
EDIT LSL
N0010 G50
X0 Z0
/N0020 G1
X100 Z100
Line 8
Total lines 10
Length 1KB
hp2
Program comment
F200
Word
N0030 G2 U100 W50 R50 F250

N0040
Block number
N0070
Block number omitted

End of block
G0
X0
Block
Z0
N0050 X100 Z100

N0060
T0202; tool change block comment symbol and comment
G0
G1
X0
X50
Z30
Cursor
Z0
N0080 M30
Fig. 2-1
General structure of program
According to the figure above, a program consists of program comments and blocks; each block
begins with a block number (omissible), followed by characters and words; and there is a block skip
symbol and comments in a block.
Example
Program (program name%012)
N0000 G50 X200 Z300
G00 X200 Z200
N0020 T11
N0030 G00 X100 Z100
/N0040 G02 X150 Z150 R50
N0030 G01 X100 Z100
2008
N0050 M30
Remarks
Blocks containing N**** are the blocks with a line number,
blocks not containing N**** are the blocks without a line
number;
Home of each line is a blank space;
There is a blank space between line number and code for the
program with line numbers;
/ Block skip
; The followings are comments.
163
PROGRAMMING
; 2008.12.12
Column 15
CHAPTER 3
MSTF COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS
This chapter introduces in details all MSTF command functions and their use in this CNC system.
3.1
M Auxiliary Function (Command List)

M function, which consists of address symbol M and its following two-digit integer, is used to control
the ON/OFF of some machine operations and execution sequence of the machine program. The used M
functions in the system are as follows:
PROGRAMMING
Command
Function
Programming
format
Explanation
M00
Pause to wait for starting
M00
Press CYCLE START to restart
M02
End of program
M02
Return to No.1 block
M20
End of program
M20 L
Return to No. 1 block to execute cycle

machine, L being cycle machine times
M30
M30
M03
M04
M05
End of program for spindle OFF and

cooling OFF
Spindle CW
Spindle CCW
Spindle OFF
M03
M04
M05
M08
Cooling ON
M08
M09
M10
Cooling OFF
Workpiece clamp
M09
M10
M11
Workpiece release
M11
M12
Chuck output signal cancel
M12
M32
M33
M41
M42
M43
M44
M78
Lubricating ON
Lubricating OFF
Spindle gearing No. 1
Tailstock forward
M32
M33
M41
M42
M43
M44
M78
M79
M80
Tailstock backward
Tailstock output signal cancel
M79
M80
M96
Call cycle execution
M96 P Q L
M97
Program transfer
M97 P
M98
M99
Subprogram call
Subprogram return
M98 P L
M99
M21
Set No. 1 user output to be valid
M21 D
M22
Set No. user output to be invalid
M22 D
M23
M24
M91
Set No. 2 user output to be valid

Set No. 2 user output to be invalid
No. 1 user input is invalid until input is
invalid.
Wait when No. 1 user input is valid till
the input is invalid
M23 D
M24 D
M91 P
M92
M93
164
M92 P
M93 P
Transfer entry block number specified

by P
M98/M99 call times specified by L
Output signal keeping for the time
specified by D, and the signal is
cancelled after the time is up.
Transfer entry block number specified
by P
Chapter Three
M94
M60~M74
MSTF Commands and Functions

Customized commands
M94 P
Refer to Chapter 8 Custom Command Programming in
Part Programming
M81
M82
M83
Control according to input signal state

Output control and detection
Control according to output signal
state
See Section 3.2 in Part Programming for introduction

to M81, M82 and M83.
Note
1)
The leading zero of M command can be omitted; Example: M00 can be abbreviated to M0,
which is the same as M00.
2)
Bit parameter P403_d3, P403_d2: When Emergency Stop button or Reset key is pressed, they
are used to set the M function output state.
3)
M commands which must be in a separate block without other commands are:

M00, M02, M20, M30, M96, M97, M98, M99
PROGRAMMING
M21, M22, M23, M24

M91, M92, M93, M94
M81, M82, M83
M60M74can be in the same block with F, S command
3.1.1
M00 Pause
Command format
M00
; Program pause
Explanation
M00 suspends the program execution temporarily and the system prompts PAUSE in flash; the
program execution is continued after CYCLE START is pressed.
Press ESC to exit from program running.
M00 function is different from that of CYCLE START key. M00 is used to perform pause before a
specified block in advance, and CYCLE START is used to perform pause at random.
3.1.2
M02 End of Program
Command format
M02
; End of program
Explanation
M02 indicates that the program ends, and the system returns the control to the first block to wait.
3.1.3
M20 Program End Cycle Machining
Command format
165

M20
L ; Return to the first block to cycle the machining, L is the cycle machining
times, range: 1 ~ 9999.
Explanation
L is the cycle machine times (when L is equal to 3, the actual machined workpiece is 4PCS)
The system defaults the infinite cycle machine when L is omitted.
M20 indicates that the program ends and the system returns the control to the first block to execute
repetitively; M20 is used when the system or machine is tested.
3.1.4
M30 End of Program, Spindle OFF, Cooling OFF
Command format
M30
; Endo of program, spindle OFF, cooling OFF
Explanation
PROGRAMMING
M30 indicates the program ends, spindle is OFF and cooling is OFF and the system returns the
control to the first block to wait.
3.1.5
M03, M04, M05 Spindle Control
Command format
M03
; Spindle CW
M04
; Spindle CCW
M05
; Spindle stop
Explanation
The system is in M05 state after power-on.
When M03/M04 is executed, M03/M04 output is valid and the spindle ON state remains unchanged.
Turn OFF the spindle when M05 is executed. Cancel M03/M04 signal output during system emergency
stop.
See Section 4.4.3.1 Spindle Start/Stop Control in PartOperation for details.
3.1.6
M08, M09 Coolant Control
Command format
M08
; Cooling ON
M09
; Cooling OFF
Explanation
The system is in M09 state upon power-on.
When M08 is executed, its output is valid, and the cooling is ON; when M09 is executed, M08 output
is cancelled, and the cooling is OFF. M08 signal output is cancelled when the system is in the
emergency stop state.
See Section 4.4.4 Coolant Control in Part Operation for details.
166
Chapter Three
3.1.7
M10M11, M12 Clamping/Releasing Chuck, Cancelling Chuck Output Signal
Command format
M10
; Clamping chuck
M11
; Releasing chuck
M12
; Cancelling chuck output signal; (only some special chuck devices can use M12)
Explanation
M11 output is valid while M10 output is invalid when the system is turned on.
Whether M10, M11 are valid, whether they require response detection, whether they are pulse
control output or level control output, and whether they are in inner or outer chuck control mode can be
set by parameters. Interlock between chuck and spindle is decided by P402_d5: When P402_d5=0, they
are interlocked; when P402_d5=1, their interlock is released.
See Section 4.4.7 Hydraulic Chuck Control Function in PartOperation for details.
PROGRAMMING
3.1.8
M32, M33 Lubricating ON/OFF
Command format
M32
; Lubricating ON
M33
; Lubricating OFF
Explanation
M33 output is valid while M32 output is invalid upon power-on.
For details, see Section 4.4.9.2 Lubricating Control in PartOperation.
3.1.9
M41, M42, M44, M43 Spindle Automatic Gear Shift Control
Command format
M41
; Spindle (variable-frequency type) automatically shifts to No. 1 gear
M42
M43
M44
Explanation
M41, M42, M43, M44 can be used only when the machine employs the variable-frequency spindle.
See Section 4.4.3.3 Spindle S CommandRotation Speed Control in PartOperation for details.
167

3.1.10
M78, M79, M80 Tailstock Advancing and Retracting, Tailstock Output Signal
Cancelling
Command format
M78
; Tailstock advancing
M79
; Tailstock retracting
M80
; Cancelling tailstock output signal (only some special tailstock devices can use M80)
Explanation
Whether M78, M79 are valid, whether they require response detection, and whether they are pulse
control output or level control output can be set by parameters. The tailstock is interlocked with the
spindle. See Section 4.4.8 Hydraulic Tailstock Control Function in PartOperation for details.
3.1.11 M96 Calling Cycle Execution
PROGRAMMING
Command format
M96
; Calling cycle execution
Word
P Entry block number of called program. The leading zero of the block number can be omitted.
Q Last block number of called program. The leading zero of the block number can be omitted.
L Call times. The number of call times is 1 when L is omitted or is 1. L is within 19999 times.
Explanation
Program group called by M96 can contain M96, M98/M99, G22/G80, and allows nesting.
The embedded use of M96 and M97 can prevent the program returning to the block following M96
and then rerunning after M96 is executed.
Example
Method
Method
N0010 G00 X100 Z100
N0010 G00 X100 Z100
N0020 M96 P70 Q80 L3
N0020 M96 P40 Q50 L3
N0030 G01 W-5
N0030 M97 P0060
N0040 U5 W-5
N0040 G02 U5 W-5 R5 F300
N0050 W-5
N0050 G03 U5 W-5 R5
N0060 M30
N0060 G01 W-5
N0070 G02 U5 W-5 R5 F300
N0070 U5 W-5
N0080 G03 U5 W-5 R5
N0080 W-5
N0090 M30
Method 1: After M96 specifies that the specified program is called three times, the cursor returns to N0030 and the
subsequent blocks are executed till the program ends.
Method 2: After M96 specifies that the specified program is called three times, the cursor returns to N0030 and
then the system uses M97 to continue executing the subsequent blocks till the program ends. The
results of method 1 and method 2 are the same.
168
Chapter Three
3.1.12
M97 Program Transfer
Command format
M97
; Program transfer
Word
P Block number which is transferred to. The leading zero of the block number can be omitted.
Explanation
M97 command causes the program to transfer from the current block to the block specified by P
and then continues the execution. Block number specified by P should exist in the program. Otherwise,
the program issues the alarm E215Line number missing.
The block number specified by P cannot be M97 block.
Prevent the endless loop when using M97 command.
Example
G00
X100
N0040
M98
P0060
N0050
M97
P0090
N0060
G01
U2
N0070
W-5
N0080
M99
N0090
M02
PROGRAMMING
N0030
When executing N0050, the program directly executes N0090 instead of N0060.
3.1.13 M98, M99 Subprogram Call and Subprogram Return

Command format
M98
M99
Word
P Block number where the subprogram is located. The leading zero of the block number
can be omitted.
L Call times of subprogram. The subprogram is called once if L is omitted or is 1. L is
within 19999.
Explanation
If a fixed sequence which appears repetitively in the program, the sequence can be taken as a
subprogram, so it can be called instead of being compiled when it is needed again.
When M98 calls the subprogram and there is M99 in the execution of the subprogram, the
subprogram call ends and the program returns to the main program and proceeds the block following the
subprogram block.
169

Note
1 M98 should be used together with M99. When M98 is used alone, the subprogram can only be
called once instead of L (L1) times.
2 When the program has M99 without M98, the program ends after executing M99.
3 M98/M99 can be contained in the subprogram call, i.e. they can be nested; up to 18 levels of
M98/M99 subprogram call can be nested.
4 The subprogram is usually behind M02/M30 of the main program, and the last block of this
program must be M99 (subprogram return). If the subprogram is not behind the main program,
M97 command should be used for program transfer. (see the following example)
Example
PROGRAMMING
z
x
Fig. 3-1
M98 M99 subprogram call cutting example
Two programming methods as Fig.3-1:

Method 1
N0010 G00 X100 Z50
N0020 M03 S01
N0030 G0 X50 Z15 F500
N0040 M98 P0060 L5
Call subprogram
N0050 M97 P0130
Transfer program
N0060 G0 U-4
N0070 G01 Z-10 F80
N0080 U20 Z-25
Subprogram is inserted
N0090 Z-35
in the main program
N0100 G0 U2 Z1
N0110 U-22
N0120 M99
N0130 G0 X100 Z50
N0140 M05
N0140 M02
End of main program
Method 2
N0010 G00 X100 Z50
N0020 M03 S01
N0030 G0 X66 Z15 F500
N0040 M98 P0080 L5
Call subprogram
N0050 G0 X100 Z50
N0060 M05
N0070 M02
End of main program
N0080 G0 U-4
N0090 G01 Z-10 F80
N0100 U20 Z-25
Subprogram follows the
N0110 Z-35
main program
N0120 G0 U2 Z1
N0130 U-22
N0140 M99
Transfer the program with M97. Otherwise, the program

does not accord to the actual machining requirement.
The subprogram must follow the main program

without M97
Method 1: When the system executes N0040, it calls the subprogram and executes N0060N0120
five times. Then it executes N0050and the program skips to N0130 and executes the
following blocks.
Method 2: When the system executes N0040, it calls the subprogram and executes N0080N0140
five times, and then executes blocks from N0050 to N0070, and so the program ends.
170
Chapter Three
3.1.14
M21, M22, M23, M24 User Output Control
Command format
M21
M22
M23
M24
D
D
D
D
; The output of No.1 user output signal is valid (output low level)
; The output of No.1 user output signal is invalid (output OFF)
; The output of No.2 user output signal is valid (output low level)
; The output of No.2 user output signal is invalid (output OFF)
Word
D Signal hold time. (unit: s; range: 09999.999). When D is omitted, the output signal is always
being held.
Explanation
M21, M22, M23, M24 have no concrete definitions specified the system, so the user can specify
their definitions according to the specific requirements. M21, M22, M23, M24 separately correspond
PROGRAMMING
to two user-defined output points. By using corresponding commands, the states of output signals
can be changed.
User output point 1 and 2 are defined in the interface parameters (M210, M230). See Part
Connection after defining the output interfaces.
Note
1) M21, M22, M23 and M24 cannot be in the same block with other commands. Each of them
must be specified in a separate block.
2) M21M24 can contain parameter D: when M21M24 are executed with parameter D, the
time specified by D is delayed after corresponding output is executed, and then the previous
output is cancelled. If the command has no D, the output signal is being kept.
3.1.15
M91, M92, M93, M94 User Input Control
Command format
M91
M92
M93
M94
P
P
P
P
;
;
;
;
Word
PBlock number of the target block which is jumped to. It does not skip when P is omitted. The
leading zero of the block number specified by P can be omitted.
Explanation
The definitions of input signals corresponding to M91, M92, M93 and M94 are not determined, so
the user can define them according to the requirements. M91, M92, M93, M94 separately correspond to
two user-defined input points. User input point 1 and 2 are defined in the interface parameters (M911,
M931). See Part Connection after defining the output interfaces.
171

When P is omitted, and the state of the check input point meets the command requirement, the
system orderly executes the next block, and it keeps waiting when the requirement is not met.
When P0, the system skips to the block specified by P when the input point state meets the
command requirement, otherwise orderly executes the next block.
When P is omitted:
M91 checks the state of No. 1 user input. When the state is valid (the input terminal is
connected to 0V), the systems waits till the input is invalid.
M92 checks the state of No. 1 user input. When the state is invalid (the input terminal is
disconnected to 0V), the system waits till the input is valid.
M93 checks the state of No. 2 user input. When the state is valid (the input terminal is
connected to 0V), the system waits till the input is invalid.
M94 checks the state of No. 2 user input. When the state is invalid (the input terminal is
disconnected to 0V), the system waits till the input is valid.
When P0
PROGRAMMING
M91 checks the state of No. 1 user input. When the state is valid (input terminal is connected to
0V), the system skips to the block specified by P. Otherwise the next block is executed.
M92 checks the state of No. 1 user input. When the state is invalid (input terminal is
disconnected with 0V), the system skips to the block specified by P; otherwise the next block is
executed.
M93 checks the state of No. 2 user input. When the state is valid (input terminal is connected to
0V), the system skips to the block specified by P; otherwise the next block is executed.
M94 checks the state of No. 2 user input. When the state is invalid (input terminal is
disconnected to 0V), the system skips to the block specified by P; otherwise the next block is
executed.
3.1.16
M60~M74 Custom Command
Command format
M60
M74
Explanation
See Chapter 8 Customized Command Programming in Part Programming for details.
3.2
M81, M82, M83User Input/Output Condition Control
M81, M82, M83 are a group of condition control commands based on input/output signal state.
Representations of signal point, level and holding time are: for example: I8.1, Q17.0, R18.0, D5, etc.
172
Chapter Three
1) Letters I, Q, R represent the input signal, output signal and output signal state respectively (two
states: when 0 is output, the external can form a conducted circuit; when 1 is output, it means high
impedance state, and the external cannot form a conducted circuit.); D represents the signal holding
time.
2) The integral part after letters represents signal points, corresponding to the pin of input signal UIxx
or output signal UOxx pin; the range is 1~32 point.
3) .0 behind the decimal point represents low level (0, which is the system default, can be omitted); .1
represents high level.
4) D: Signal holding time; (unit: s
range: 0~9999.999); when D is omitted, the output signal remains.
5) Relevant parameter: Bit parameter P412_d0. M81, M82, M83 are affected by this parameter.
3.2.1
M82 Output Control and Detection
Code format. Example

Q17.0
; UO17 pin outputs low level (conducted)
M82
Q17.1
; UO17 pin outputs high level (high-impedance)
M82
Q17.0
D3
PROGRAMMING
M82
; UO17 pin outputs low level, and the output is cancelled after delaying time
D.
M82
Q17.0
I8.0
; UO17 outputs low level, and the next is executed after detecting UI18
pin is at low level;
M82
Q17.0
I8.0
D3
; UO17 pin outputs low level, after delay time D, the output is
cancelled; the next is executed after detecting UI08 pin is low level;
Note. Example
M81, M83 cannot be executed in MANUAL mode, and M82 can be executed in following two formats:
M82 Q17.0 D3 or M82 Q17.0
For example: M82 Q17.0 D5
; UO17 pin outputs low level (conducted), then the output is
cancelled after 5 seconds delay. In MANUAL mode, it can be simply input as M Q
1 7 D 5.
3.2.2
M81Control According to Input Signal State

M81
I8.0
If the input UI08 pin is at low level, the system proceeds to the next
command; otherwise, it keeps waiting.
M81
I8.1
If the input UI08 pin is at high level, the system proceeds to the next
M81
I8.0 P1000
If the input UI08 pin is at low level, the system transfers to P1000;
otherwise, it proceeds to the next command.
M81
I8.0 Q17.0
If UI08=0, then, UO17 outputs 0, and the system proceeds to the next
M81
I8.0 Q17.0
D3 If UI08=8, UO17 outputs 0, the signal holds for D3, and the system
proceeds to next command; otherwise, it keeps waiting
173

3.2.3
M83Control According to Output Signal State

M83
R8.0
If the input UO8 pin is at low level, the system proceeds to the next
M83
R8.0
P1000
If the input UO8 pin is at low level, the system transfers to P1000;
otherwise, it goes to the next command.
M83
R8.0
Q17.0
If UO8 pin is at low level, UO17 pin outputs 0, and system proceeds to
the next command; otherwise, it keeps waiting.
M83
R8.0
Q17.0
D3
If UO8 pin is at low level, UO17 outputs 0, the signal holds D3, and
the system proceeds to the next command; otherwise, it keeps
waiting.
PROGRAMMING
3.3 S function Spindle Function

S and the following data are used to control the spindle speed and there are two modes as follows:
1) Spindle speed switch value control mode: Sx or Sxx, the system outputs the gear signal to the
machine to realize spindle speed step change.
2) Spindle speed analog voltage control mode: Sxxxx specifies the actual speed, and the system
outputs 0~10V analog voltage signal to the spindle servo device or converter to realize the
spindle speed stepless change.
According to the machine configuration, whether the spindle function is used for controlling
multi-speed or variable-frequency motor is set by bit parameter P410_d6.
3.3.1
Spindle Motor Controlled by Gear Shift
Command format
S01 ~ S04
; 4-gear direct outputs, leading zero can be omitted.
S00 ~ S15
; 16-gear BCD code outputs, leading zero can be omitted.
Explanation
When P410_d6=0, S function controls the multi-speed spindle motor; when it controls the
multi-speed spindle motor, whether to directly output 4-gear control signal or output16-gear BCD code
signal can be selected.
P410_d5=0: Spindle control is the 4-gear direct control output S01S04, each gear corresponds
to one output point;
P410_d5=1 Spindle control is 16-gear BCD code output S00S15.
174
Chapter Three
3.3.2
Variable-frequency Motor Controlled by Speed

P410_d6=1: S function controls the variable-frequency motor. The system outputs 010V DC
analog voltage signal to control the converter to realize the stepless speed regulating for the spindle
motor.
Gear control of variable-frequency spindle
Command format
M41
; Corresponds to output point S01
M42
M43
M44
Speed control of variable-frequency motor
G96
G96
PROGRAMMING
Command format
; Setting constant surface cutting state;
S__
; Setting constant surface cutting state, and specifying the surface speed
value;
range: 09999 m /min;
G97
G97
; Cancelling constant surface speed state;

S__
; Cancelling constant surface speed state, specifying speed value;

range: 09999 r /min
S__
; According to the current state; speed value or surface speed value cutting.
. Explanation
1)
In JOG and AUTO operation mode, the screen displays the actual spindle speed S_.
2)
In JOG and AUTO operation mode, the screen displays the cutting constant surface speed
control G96
3)
S___mor constant speed control G97
S___r.
Parameters related to the spindle speed analog voltage control are as follows:
Data parameter P305: Max. spindle speed of constant surface speed;
Data parameter P304: Min. spindle speed of constant surface speed;
Data parameter P300P303: Max. spindle speed in the spindle gear 14 (corresponding to
M41M44).
4)
See Section 4.4.3.3 Spindle S CommandRotation Speed Control in PartOperation for

details.
175

3.4 T Function Tool Function
Generally, machining one workpiece requires several different tools. This system can control the
motor tool post with 416 stations. The position of each tool is different when it is at the cutting position
because of the installation error or abrasion. To prevent the programming being affected by these
factors, the tool change and tool compensation function are provided.
Tool setting operation is executed before machining to obtain the position offset data of each tool
(referred to as tool offset). After T command is executed in program execution, the system
automatically executes the tool offset. Therefore, each tool is programmed according to the workpiece
drawing dimension without considering the position relationship among the tools in the machine
coordinate system.
If the deviation of machining dimension caused by tool wear occurs, the user can modify the tool
offset according to the dimension deviation.
Command format
PROGRAMMING
Txx
____
The first digit is the tool number; the second one is the tool offset number;
Txxx
____
The first digit is the tool number, the last 2 digits is the tool offset number;
Txxxx
____
The first digit is the tool number and the last two digits is the tool offset number.
Word
1) Tool number range: Determined by P319 (maximum tool number: 116); E.g. if P319 is 4, the
tool number is 04; if the input tool number is 0, it means keeping the current tool number.
2) Range of tool offset number: 064; if the input tool offset number is 0, it means cancelling the
tool compensation.
Explanation
1)
The system can select up to 16 tools and P319 sets the maximum tool number.
2)
When the system executes the manual tool setting operation, it automatically matches the tool
offset number to the tool number and saves it to the tool compensation table. When P403_d4 is
set to 1, the system automatically identifies the relationship between tool setting record and tool
number and tool offset number of the tool change command in the program; if inconsistency
occurs, the system issues the Program Compound Check Alarm but does not lock the program
execution.
3)
The system executes the tool setting operation based on the trial cutting mode or fixed point
mode in Jog operation mode. See Section 4.4.6 Manual Tool Setting in PartOperation.
3.4.1
Tool Offset Execution Mode-Moving Slide Carriage
When executing T command, the system first changes the tool to the tool number specified by T,
then executes the tool compensation of T command. In such a case, the system modifies the tool nose
coordinates. The system uses two methods according to the parameters:
P403_d6 = 0: After the system executes the tool compensation and modifies the tool nose
coordinates, it does not move the slide carriage, i.e. the execution is completed;
176
Chapter Three
P403_d6 =1: After the system executes the tool compensation and modifies the tool nose
coordinates, it moves the slide carriage to recover the too nose coordinates (move to
the position before modification, making the tool nose coordinates unchanged).
Move the machine slide carriage:
1)
Move the carriage in JOG operation mode to recover the tool nose coordinates. X, Y axes
rapidly traverse simultaneously.
2)
In AUTO operation mode, when T command is a separate block, its execution mode is the same
as that in JOG operation mode, i.e. the system moves the carriage to recover the tool nose
coordinates. X, Y axes rapidly traverse simultaneously.
3)
3.4.2
In AUTO operation mode, when T and G00/G01 are in the same block, the system executes the
tool change first, and then adds the tool compensation value to X, Z coordinates of G00/G01 for
movement. The system performs the rapid traverse in G00 and cutting speed in G01.
Tool Offset Execution Mode- Modifying Coordinates
PROGRAMMING
When P403_d6=0, the tool compensation execution mode is to modify the system coordinates.
In JOG and AUTO operation modes, the slide carriage does not move after the system executes
the tool compensation and modifies the tool nose coordinates.
In AUTO operation mode, after the system executes the tool compensation, the workpiece
program is in undefined state if the tool nose coordinates are changed and not recovered. The
solutions are as follows when the system executes different subsequent commands:
1) When the subsequent command is G00 Z/X absolute coordinate positioning, the tool directly
traverses to G00 positioning point;
2) When the subsequent command is G00 W/U relative coordinate movement, the tool directly
traverses one relative amount;
3) When the subsequent command is G00 single-axis positioning, the other axis does not move.
Note
1) Correct programming method: After the system executes the tool change command, use G00 to
perform Z/X double-axis re-positioning, or use G00 single-axis repositioning in order. Prevent
unexpected alarms during machining.
2) To improve the machining efficiency, T command and G0 must be in the same block. For
example, 0
X100
Z200
T0202.
3) Adding the tool compensation to program command value is available only when G0/G1 and the
tool compensation command are in the same block.
4) For G0/G1 in the compound cycle, no T command is allowed in the same block.
3.5 F Function
Feedrate Function
It defines the tool cutting feedrate. I.e. the feedrate function (G98/G99, F command).
177

Command format
G98
F.
; Feed per minute
G99
F.
; Feed per rev
Explanation
Cutting feed: The system can simultaneously control X, Z motion, making the tool motion path and
the path defined by commands (straight line, arc) consistent, and the instantaneous
speed in the tangent direction of motion path and F word consistent. This kind of
motion control is called cutting feed or interpolation. The cutting feedrate is
specified by word F. When the system executes the interpolation command (cutting
feed), it divides the cutting feedrate specified by F into X, Z direction according to the
programming path, and simultaneously controls X, Z instantaneous speed to make the
vector resultant speed of speed in the two directions equal to F command value.
PROGRAMMING
fx =
fz =
dx
dx + dz2
2
dz
dx2 + dz 2
F
F
F is the vector resultant speed of instantaneous speed in X/Y direction;

dx is the instantaneousincrement of X axis,
fx is the instantaneous speed in X direction; the speed of X axis is the
speed on the radius.
dz is the instantaneous(increment of Z axis,
fz is the instantaneous speed of Z axis.
The command determines the cutting feedrate of the tool.

Feedrate function in feed per minute (G98) is expressed with F. . (range: 0
4000.000
unitmm/min)
Feedrate function in feed per rev (G99) is expressed with F. . (range: 0

4000.000
unitmm/r)
F is a modal value. Once specified, it is not necessary to input it again. It is the feed per minute (G98)
state upon power-on, and the tool actual traverse rate is controlled by F and feedrate override.
Tool actual cutting speed = Fx feedrate override (feed per minute)
Tool actual cutting speed = Fx spindle speed x feedrate override (feed per rev)
Reduction formula between feed per rev and feed per min: Fm = FrS
Fm: Feed per min (mm/min);
Fr: Feed per rev (mm/r);
S: Spindle speed (r/min)
F value keeps unchanged after F command is executed, and is not changed during system reset
and emergency stop. The system provides 16-level feedrate override (0150increment of 10%). In
MANUAL and AUTO operation modes, the feed override keys on the system panel can regulate the
feedrate in real time, and the actual feedrate can be regulated within 0150% of the command speed.
In addition, the feedrate override is memorized after power-off. For details about feedrate override
regulation, refer to Section 4.4.1.5 Selecting Speed for Low-Speed Feed in PartOperation.
178
Chapter Three
Relative parameters
1) System parameter P112: Initial speed in cutting feed.
2) System parameter P113: Max. speed limit of cutting feed.
3) System parameter P114: Linear acceleration/deceleration of cutting feed.
4) System parameter P115: Exponential acceleration/deceleration of cutting feed.
5) System parameter P118: G99 initial lines.
Note
Uneven cutting feedrate occurs when the spindle speed is lower than 1 r/min (in G99 modal state);
and following error occurs in the actual cutting feedrate when there is fluctuation in the spindle
speed. To ensure the machining quality, it is recommended that the selected spindle speed
should not be lower than min. speed of the effective torque output by the spindle servo or the
converter.
PROGRAMMING
179
CHAPTER FOUR
G COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS
Here describes the functions and use of the G commands in the system
Note: The Y command function is invalid for GSK928TD.
4.1 G00 Rapid Positioning G00

The tool rapidly traverses to the specified position in G00.
Command format
G00
ZW)_
XU)_
Two axes rapid traverse
G00
ZW)_
Z independent rapid traverse
G00
XU)_
X independent rapid traverse
PROGRAMMING
Word
X, Z Absolute coordinates of end point;
U, WRelative movement from starting point to end point;
Use relative or absolute coordinates; the coordinates not to be moved can be omitted; G00 without
coordinate words cannot be specified.
Word range
X, Z, U, W
-9999.9999999.999mm
Explanation
Z/X can select single-axis movement and simultaneous two-axis movement.
If the tool change command and tool offset command is in the same block with G00, the tool offset
value is added to G00 movement value, in order to improve the work efficiency. In general, the tool
change and tool offset commands should be specified in the same block with G00.
G00 actual run speed is controlled by the rapid override. For example, when G00 rapidly traverses
in the independent movement mode, the actual speed is set by P100, P101.
Z actual rapid speed = P100 rapid override
X actual rapid speed = P101 rapid override
The actual max. speed of the machine depends on its actual condition and matched motor. For
particular parameters, please see the manual issued by the machine tool builder. G00 is a modal
command, which can be omitted in the next block in which it is used. G00 can be abbreviated to G0,
and G0 and G00 are equivalent.
Relative parameters
Parameters related to G00: P100, P101, P103, P104, P106, P107, P112, P114, P400_d3.
180
Chapter Four
G Commands and Functions
Each axis can move at its respective rapid traverse rate or simultaneously rapidly move according to
the proportion, and their movement mode is defined by P400_d3: P400_d3=0, each axis performs
positioning at rapid traverse rate separately (independent movement mode) in G00; P400_d3=1, each
axis performs positioning rapidly and simultaneously (interpolation movement mode) in the proportion
mode in G00.
When P400_d3=0, the independent movement mode is executed as follows: (an example of Z axis)
Speed raising stage: Z axis raises the speed at the initial speed of P103;
Raise the speed to max. speed set by P100; the acceleration time in the speed raising stage is
P106.
When each axis moves at the rapid speed, the actual speed displayed by the system is the resultant
rapid traverse speed; when two axes or more move simultaneously, the actual rapid traverse speed
displayed will be greater than the values set in P100, P101and P102.
P400_d3=1: interpolation movement mode is executed as follows:
The acceleration time in the speed raising phase is P114.
Here, the traverse speed is the resultant speed of the system. The movement axes rapidly
perform positioning according to the proportion, and their actual speeds are controlled by
P100, P101.
Note
Ensure the tool is placed at a safe position to prevent the tools collision when G00 is executed.
Example
Fig. 4-1
G00 rapid positioning
As Fig.4-1, the tool traverses from A to B using G00 mode.

Absolute programming: N0010
G00
X18
Z0
Relative programming: N0100
G00
U-52
W-30
181
PROGRAMMING
Raising speed stage: Raising the speed at the initial speed of P112;

4.2
G01 Linear Interpolation
Command format
G01
ZW)_
ZW)_
G01
XU)_
F_
Z/X two-axis simultaneous feed
F_
XU)_
Z single-axis feed
F_
X single-axis feed
G01 command causes the tool to move along the line from current point to XU, Z Wspecified
point at the set speed, and to reach the specified end point simultaneously.
Word
X, Z: Absolute coordinates of end point;
U, W: Relative move amount from starting point to end point.
PROGRAMMING
F: Cutting feedrate. F value is modal, which can be omitted when it is not changed. At the
same time, it is controlled by the feedrate override.
Word range
X, Z, U, W
-9999.9999999.999mm
F0.001mm/min4000mm/min
Explanation
Z/X can select single-axis feed and two-axis simultaneous feed.
The traverse speed of G01 is specified by F and controlled by the feedrate override.
Actual feedrate
feedrate override
G01 is a modal command which can be omitted in the next block if used. G01 can be abbreviated to
G1, and G1 and G01 are equivalent.
Relative parameters
Parameters related to G01: P112, P113, P114, P401_d5, P401_d4
Interpolation movement execution is as follows:
Raising speed stage: Raising speed at the initial speed of P112;
The acceleration time of raising speed stage is P114; at the same time, the system checks
whether the feedrate (Fx feedrate override) exceeds P113 limit. If it does, the feedrate is P113.
P401_d5, P401_d4 set in the cutting machining: Whether the system uses high-speed connection
mode, and whether uses continuous smooth transition or deceleration to zero.
182
Chapter Four
Example
Fig. 4-2 G01 linear interpolation

The tool traverses from A to B in G01 at the speed of 150 mm/min, as Fig. 4-2:
G01
X45
Z-35 F150
Relative programming: N0100
G01
U25
W-35
F150
Note
F cutting feed command in the examples of this chapter is executed with feed per minute (G98)
except for special explanations; F word can be 0 during programming; when it is 0, and the program is
executed in AUTO operation mode, the system issues an alarm: Feedrate is zero.
4.3
G02, G03, G05 Circular Interpolation
Command format
G02
ZW)_
XU)_
I_
G02
ZW)_
XU)_
R_
G03
ZW)_
XU)_
I_
G03
ZW)_
XU)_
R_
G05
ZW)_
XU)_
I_
K_
F_
F_
K_
Arc radius programming, CCW arc

F_
F_
K_
Circle center coordinate programming, CCW arc
Circle center coordinate programming, CW arc

Arc radius program, CW arc
F_
Arbitrary point (I, K) on arc programming
The G02, G03, G05 causes the tool to traverse along the arc from the current point to X(U), Z(W)
specified point at the set speed. The arc radius is R or the vector from circle center to starting point is I, K
(G02, G03), or arbitrary point I, K (G05) on the arc.
Word
X, Z: Absolute coordinates of end point;
U, W: Relative move amount from starting point to end point;
F: Cutting feedrate;
R: Arc radius;
183
PROGRAMMING
Absolute programming: N0100

K: It is Z different value between circle center and starting point of arc in G02/G03;
It is Z coordinate value of an arbitrary point on the arc in G05;
I: It is X different value between circle center and starting point of arc in G02/G03;
It is X coordinate value of an arbitrary point on the arc in G05.
Word range
X, Z, U, W-9999.999 mm9999.999mm
I, K -1000000.000 mm1000000.000mm in G02, G03-9999.999 mm9999.999mm in G05
F0.001 mm/min4000mm/min
R0R100000.000mm
Explanation
G02, G03, G05 can only be Z/X programming; the traverse rate is set by F and controlled by
PROGRAMMING
the feedrate override.

F value is modal, which can be omitted when it is not changed. Meanwhile, it is controlled by
the feedrate override.
Actual feedrate = F feedrate override
G02, G03 and G05 are modal commands, which can be omitted when used in the next block.
G02 can be abbreviated to G2 and they are equivalent; G03 can be abbreviated to G3 and they
are equivalent; G05 can be abbreviated to G5 and they are equivalent. The words are explained
as follows:
Table 4-1
Word
G02
Specified content
Arc rotation direction
G03
Arc rotation direction
X,Z
U,W
I,K (G02,G03)
Absolute coordinate
Relative coordinate
Circle
center
coordinates
Meaning
CCW arc in front tool post coordinate system/ CW arc
in rear tool post coordinate system
CW arc in front tool post coordinate system/ CCW arc
in rear tool post coordinate system
Absolute coordinates of arc end point
Distance from starting point to end point of arc
Vector from circle center to starting point of arc in
G02 ,G03
R
F
I,K (G05)
Arc radius
Feedrate
An intermediate point
on arc
Distance between any point and circle center

Arc cutting speed
An arbitrary point on arc ( three points determine one
circle)
G02, G03 cause the tool to move along the specific arc path at the set speed. G02/G03 arc direction
definition: Taking the circle center as the reference point, their directions are reverse in the front/rear tool
post coordinate system as follows:
184
Chapter Four
Front tool post

coordinate system

X
G02
G02
Rear tool post

coordinate system
G03
G03
X
G03
G02
G02
G02
G03
G03
Z
G02
G03
Fig .4-3 G02/G03 arc direction definition

X and Z or U and W specify the end point of arc. The end point is presented with either absolute or
relative coordinates. The relative coordinate is the distance from starting point to end point of arc.
For G02/G03: I, K specify the circle center coordinates of arc. I and K respectively correspond to X
component. I, K are positive when their directions are the same those of X, Z. Otherwise, they are
negative. Use radius R programming when I, K programming is not used. See Fig. 4-4:
G03 X..Z..I..K..F..;
or
G03 X..Z..R..F..;
Absolute value
Diameter programming
G02 X..Z..I..K..F..;
or
G02 X..Z..R..F..;
Absolute value
Diameter programming
X
Z
Center of circle
Z
X
Center of circle
Z
K
Fig. 4-4 Center circle coordinate definition
G05: I, K specify the coordinates of an intermediate point on the arc. Three points determine one
circle: Starting point, end point and an intermediate point on arc as Fig. 4-5:
0
Z
End point
An intermediate point
on arc
(IK)
Starting point
X
Fig. 4-5
Definition of coordinates of an intermediate point on arc

185
PROGRAMMING
and Z vector from starting point to the circle center. I is X vector component (in diameter), K is Z

Related parameters
Parameters related to arc interpolation: P112, P113, P114, P401_d4, P400_d2.
Interpolation movement execution is as follows:
Raising speed stage: Raising the speed at the initial speed of P112;
The acceleration time of raising speed stage is P114; meanwhile, the system checks whether
the feedrate (F x feedrate override) exceeds P113 limit, if it does, the feedrate is P113.
P401_d4, P400_d2 set in the cutting machining: Whether to use continuous smooth transition or
deceleration to zero, whether to use front/post acceleration/deceleration , and whether to use arc
crossing vertex precision execution.
Note
1 I value is expressed with the diameter. The value calculated according to the drawing is
generally in radius. It should be multiplied by 2 in programming.
2 Max. arc radius is not more than 100000mm. Otherwise, it may be incorrect in the system.
PROGRAMMING
3 For the arc with very small radius R, when the value of programming speed x feedrate is too
large, the step angle in interpolation should not be more than 1.5 degree. Otherwise, the
system automatically decelerates and there is the difference value between the actual
feedrate and programmed speed.
4 The system automatically decelerates when the programmed speed is tool high in machining
small arc.
5 When using K, I programming in G02, G03, the system checks the current coordinates
(starting point), end point coordinates and circle center coordinates; when the end point is not
on the circle, and Z deviation is more than 0.015mm or X deviation is more than 0.03mm mm,
the system issues: E238 Distances between circle center to two points are not equal.
6 when using G05 programming , the system checks the current coordinates (starting point),
end point coordinates and coordinates of an intermediate point on the arc; the system issues
the alarm: E239 Three points are in one line and cannot consist of an arc when the three
points cannot form a triangle. However, when the specific intermediate point, arc start point
and end point are the same, the system processes the tool path as one point.
7 The system alarms: E237 chord length is greater than the diameter when the diameter 2R is
less than the distance between the current point (starting point) and end point in R
programming.
8 G02, G03, G05 cannot be in the same block with T, or the system issues: E205 Command
incompatible.
9 The arc cannot be more than 180 in R programming.
186
Chapter Four
Example 1
Draw the full circle along the arc direction to

judge whether the mached arc is CCW or CW
interpolation. When it is CW, the system
executes G03; when it is CCW, the system uses
G02, as shown in the left figure.
x
PROGRAMMING
Fig. 4-6 arc interpolation

Clockwise interpolation from A to B at feedrate of 100mm/min as Fig. 4-6:
N0100
G00
X20 Z60
N0110 G03 X60 Z40 I0 K-20 F100

N0110 G03 X60 Z40 R20 F100
Or N0110 G03 U40 W-20 I0 K-20 F100
N0110 G03 U40 W-20 R20 F100
; Rapid positioning to arc machining start point

; Circle center programming
; Radius programming
;
;
Counterclockwise interpolation from A to B at the feedrate of 100mm/min:
Or
N0100
N0110
N0110
N0110
N0110
G00
G02
G02
G02
G02
X20
X60
X60
U40
U40
Z60
Z40 I40 K0 F100
Z40 R20 F100
W-20 I40 K0 F100
W-20 R20 F100
; Rapid positioning to arc machining start point

; Circle center programming
; Radius programming
;
Example 2
Absolute programming
N0000 G0 X18 Z0 ;
N0010 G02 X30 Z-15 R20 F100 ;
N0020 M30
Relative programming
N0000 G0 X18 Z0 ;
N0010 G02 U12 W-15 R20 F100 ;
N0020 M30
Fig. 4-7 Circular interpolation
187

4.4 Thread Cutting Command
The CNC system can execute many kinds of thread cutting function including machining inch/metric
single, multi-thread, variable pitch thread and tapping cycle; the thread run-out length and the angle can
be changed, and the cycle thread cutting can perform cutting by single side, which protects the tool and
improve the surface smoothness. The thread function includes: continuous thread cutting command G33,
tapping cycle cutting command G32, thread cycle cutting command G92, multiple thread cutting cycle
command group G76.
The machine with the thread cutting function must be installed with a spindle encoder whose
number of lines is set by P209. In thread cutting, the system starts to move X or Z axis to execute the
thread machining after it receives the one-turn signal of the spindle encoder. Therefore, the system can
execute the roughing, finishing many times to complete machining of the same thread without changing
the spindle speed.
The system has many kinds of thread cutting function used to machine the thread without the tool
PROGRAMMING
retraction groove. However, there is large pitch error due to the acceleration/deceleration of X axis and Z
axis at the beginning and end of the thread cutting. Therefore, it is necessary to leave the thread lead-in
length and the tool retraction distance at the actual thread start point and the end.
When the thread pitch is determined, X, Z traverse speed is determined by the spindle speed in
thread cutting and is not related to feedrate override. When the spindle override control in the thread
cutting is valid and the spindle speed changes, there is pitch errors because of X, Z
acceleration/deceleration. Therefore, never attempt to adjust the spindle speed or stop the spindle in
thread cutting. Stopping the spindle may cause damage to the tool and workpiece. The thread cutting
command can only be Z/X programming.
4.4.1
G33 Thread Cutting
Command format
G33
XU )_
ZW)_
PE)_
G33
ZW)_
PE)_ K_
I_
Q_
H_
Axial straight thread cutting
G33
XU )_
PE)_
I_
Q_
H_
End face straight thread cutting
K_
K_
I_
Q_
H_
Thread cutting
Word
P Metric thread lead.
E Inch thread lead.
It is the axial thread and Z axis is the thread axis when P/E is a positive value; it is the end
face thread and X axis is the thread axis when it is a negative value.
X(U) /Z(W) Absolute/relative coordinates of thread end point.
For the axial thread, Z movement amount cannot be 0; it is the axial straight-thread if X is
omitted.
188
Chapter Four
For the end face thread, X movement amount cannot be 0; it is the end face thread when Z
is omitted.
K It is the length from the thread run-out starting point to the thread end point in the thread
machining axis.
K cannot be negative and must be less than the movement amount of thread machining axis.
I Total movement amount in thread run-out axis direction during thread run-out. (there is no
thread run-out when it is omitted).
For straight-thread, the thread runs-out in the positive direction when I is positive; the
thread runs-out in the negative direction when I is negative.
For taper thread, the thread run-out direction is same as that of the taper, the sign of I has
no effect.
For axial taper thread, the thread runs-out in the positive direction when U is positive; the
thread runs-out in the negative direction when U is negative.
For end face thread, the thread runs-out in the positive direction when W is positive; the
Q Initial angle, which is 0 if not specified; it is used to thread part.
H Execution mode symbol, each bit has different meaning (H_d7 ~ H_d2reserved) ; it is
00000000 if it defaults
H_d0 = 0: Retraction is limited by K value;
H_d0 =1: Thread run-out starts when the thread cutting axis reduces speed, and K value is
invalid.
H_d1: It selects the continuous thread machining raising/reducing speed mode
H_d1 = 0: In continuous thread cutting, between two neighboring threads, the thread
machining axis has a process of reducing the speed from machining speed to initial
speed, and then raising the speed from initial speed to thread machining speed. The
thread pitch length changes in the transition stage of speed raising and reducing
H_d1 = 1: In continuous thread cutting, between two neighboring threads, the machining
speed of the current thread suddenly changes to the one of the next thread without
the process of reducing the speed from machining speed to initial speed, and then
raising the speed from initial speed to thread machining speed. Therefore, it is not
suitable to machine those taper threads with a large taper using this mode.
Otherwise, the motor may step out.
Word range
X, Z, U, W-9999.999mm9999.999mm
I-9999.999mm9999.999mm
K09999.999mm
P0.001mm500.000mm (the negative sign can be added at the front of the range. The positive
value indicates the axial thread, and the negative value indicates the end face thread.)
E(0.06025400.000) tooth/inch(the negative sign can be added to the front of the range. The
189
PROGRAMMING
thread runs-out in the negative direction when W is negative.

positive value means to the axial thread, and the negative value means to the end face thread.)
Q0360.000
H0000000011111111
Relative parameters
Parameters related to G33: P100, P101, P103, P104, P106, P107, P113, P116, P117, P209, P306,
P307, P403_d0.
Taking axis thread for example, the relationship between G33 and relative parameters:
Before the system enters raising speed stage, it firstly checks whether the thread cutting speed
exceeds P113, if it does, the system issues an alarm to terminate the thread machining;
Raising speed phrase: Z axis raises speed at P103 initial speed; Acceleration time of raising
speed stage is P116;
When there is thread run-out, X axis rapidly executes the thread run-out at P101 speed;
PROGRAMMING
When there is thread run-out, its acceleration/deceleration time is P117;

The boundary of two thread machining modes is P306;
During thread cutting, the system detects the spindle speed through spindle encoder line
number P209. If the spindle rotation speed exceeds P307, an alarm occurs after the current
thread machining block is finished, and then the machining is suspended; by pressing CYCLE
START key, the system continues executing the next step of the machining program.
P403_d0=0: the system does not check whether the spindle speed is stable before the thread
machining.
P403_d0=1: the system checks whether the spindle speed is stable before the thread
machining. It does not machine threads until the speed becomes stable.
G33 execution process
G33 execution process is as follows (taking axial thread cutting as an example):
Z
D
K1
B
C
I/2
X
Fig. 4-8a G33 execution path 1
I=0, no run-out at the end of thread:
Check the spindle speed, count the reference speed of thread machining according to the
rotation speed and the lead P. When the reference speed exceeds P113 (max. cutting
feedrate), the system issues an alarm. Before this, the user must ensure the spindle speed is
stable; otherwise, there may be confused machining teeth.
190
Check one-turn signal of coder from the initial angle; Z axis raises speed from the current
Chapter Four
position A (G33 starting point), which makes the traverse speed reach the reference speed, At
the moment, Z moves to B; the lead of AB section maybe not standard (in the actual
machining, the front of AB section must reserve an idle distance which does not touch the
workpiece), the higher the reference speed is, the longer AB section is.
The system follows the spindle speed from B to execute the cutting to C; the cutting speed
changes with the spindle speed; the lead of BC section is standard.
Z reduces speed from C till D position Z (W); CD lead maybe not standard, CD length is equal
to AB section (when the reference speed is lower than the initial speed, raising/reducing
speed is not required, the lengths of CD and AB are 0); therefore, X should execute the thread
run-out in advance when the end of thread has no thread run-out groove.
I0thread end has run-out:

Z movement is the same as the above; X starts executing the thread run-out at different
position in advance according to the value of H_d0; X thread run-out is performed based on
G00 speed, it also has a process of raising speed, constant speed and reducing speed; the
40mm.
When H_d0=1, and Z moves to the reducing speed point C, X starts executing the thread
run-out in advance, which is not limited by K; it finally moves to E.
If H_d0=0, and Z moves to the position where the distance to the end point D is K (K point), X
starts executing the thread run-out in advance till E. If K is big, the system executes the thread
run-out in the middle of BC section, which will result in untimely run-out (see Fig. 4-8b for its
path); when K is small, the system executes the thread run-out in the middle of CD section.
Fig. 4-8b
G33 execution path 2
Explanation
1) G33 can machine metric/inch constant straight, taper, internal and external threads.
2) In the spindle CW rotation, the positive cutting is the right-hand thread, and the negative is the
left-hand thread. For the spindle CCW rotation, they are reverse.
3) Generally, it is necessary to rough turn and finish turn the same path many times during thread
machining. The thread cutting starts after 1-turn signal from the spindle coder is detected, so the
cutting points on the circumference of the workpiece are the same after multiple thread cuttings.
However, the spindle speed must keep unchanged; otherwise there is an error in the thread.
4) The thread machining cutting speed is controlled by P113 (max. cutting feedrate); when the
speed exceeds the max. feedrate, the system issues an alarm. It is suggested that the thread
machining cutting speed should be less than 3000 mm/ min; if the speed is too high, the motor
may be slow to response, causing confused thread teeth.
The thread feedrate formula is as follows:
191
PROGRAMMING
longer the X distance I is, the better the effect is. If permitted, the speed should be more than

Inch thread speed N 25.4 / E
Metric thread speedN P
N Speed (unitr/min) max. speed is less than 2000r/min.
P Thread lead (unitmm). It is switched into the metric unit to count when it is in the
inch thread.
5) In thread cutting start and end, the lead is not correct because of raising/reducing speed, so, the
commanded thread length should be longer than the actual required length. Generally, the
length for raising speed > 1.3 mm.
6) For axial taper thread, the pitch P/E is the pitch of the thread axis direction (Z); for the end face
thread, it is the pitch of the thread axis direction (X).
Note
1 Start the spindle before machining the thread; otherwise, the system keeps waiting all the time
(not system crash).
PROGRAMMING
2 In the course of thread cutting, the feed hold key and the feedrate override are invalid; the feed
stops as the spindle stops.
3 As soon as the spindle starts, do not machine the thread because of the unstable spindle speed,
otherwise, the thread machining precision may be affected.
4 In thread cutting, the photoelectric coder with 1200 or 1024 lines are generally installed to rotate
with the spindle synchronously. The selected coder lines must be the same as those of the
actually-installed coder. When the coder lines are 1200, P209 should be set to 1200; when the
coder lines are 1024, P209 should be set to 1024. If P209 setting is wrong, the pitch will be
incorrect when the thread is machined.
5 For the thread with run-out, the effect of thread run-out is affected by the spindle speed, the pitch,
the acceleration time of the run-out axis, the initial speed and I value. The higher the speed is,
and the bigger the pitch is, and the longer the acceleration time is, and the lower the initial speed
is, and the smaller I value is, the poorer the thread run-out effect will be.
6 When the previous block and the current one are both the thread cutting command, the system
does not detect the thread head signal (only one per revolution) but directly starts movement.
This function can realize the continuous thread machining.
E.g. G33 W-20 P3; The system detects 1-turn signal in thread cutting.
G33 W-30 P2; The system does not detect 1-turn signal in thread cutting.
7 The command must not be in the same block with other commands. It should be an independent
block.
G33 thread cutting programming modes (diameter programming)
0
K
1) G33 axial straight thread:

P is positive;
I sign determines the direction of the thread run-out;
there is no thread run-out when I is omitted;
Example: G00 Z100 X100
G33 W-40 K1 I5 P2
M30
End point (Z60X105)
2G33 axial straight thread:

P is positive;
there is no thread run-out when I is omitted;
I/2
X
192
0
W
I/2
Chapter Four
Z
W
U/2
I/2
3G33 axial taper thread

P is positive;
U sign determines the direction of the thread run-out;
I sign is invalid;
ExampleG00 Z100 X20
G33 U6.2 W-40 K3 I5 P2
M30
End point (Z60X31.20)
U/2
X
PROGRAMMING
4G33 end face straight thread

P is negative;
when I is omitted, there is no thread run-out;
G33 U20.7 K3 I1.6 P-2
M30
End point (Z101.60X40.70)
K/2
I
U/2
5G33 end face taper thread

P is negative;
W sign determines the direction of the thread run-out;
I sign is invalid;
ExampleG00 Z100 X20
G33 U20.7 W-8.3 K3 I1.6 P-2
M30
End point (Z90.10X40.70)
K/2
Example
1) G33 axial straight thread: as Fig. 4-9
193
Fig. 4-9
I sign determines the direction of thread run-out; there is no thread run-out if I is omitted;
Example:
G00
X100
Z100
G33
W-40
K3 I5 P2
; End point (Z60X105)
M30
PROGRAMMING
2)
G33 end face taper thread: as Fig. 4-10
Fig. 4-10
P is negative; W sign determines the direction of the thread run-out; I sign is invalid;
Example: G00
G33
Z100
U20.7
X20
W-8.3
K3 I1.6 P-2
M30
3) G33 axial taper thread: as Fig. 4-11
194
; end point (Z90.10X40.70)
Chapter Four
Fig. 4-11
U sign determines the direction of the thread run-out; I sign is invalid;
Example: G00
G33
Z100
X20
U6.2 W-40
K3 I5
P2
; End pointZ60X31.20)
M30
PROGRAMMING
4) G33 end face straight thread: as Fig. 4-12
Fig. 4-12
P is negative; I sign determines the direction of the thread run-out; there is no run-out if I is omitted;
Example: G00
G33
Z100
X20
U20.7 K3
I1.6 P-2
; End point (Z101.60X40.70)
M30
5) Comprehensive example: as Fig. 4-13
Fig. 4-13 Thread cutting

195

Examplethread lead: 2mm, cutting depth: 2.5mm(diameter valuecutting twice) as Fig. 4-13:
N0000
N0010
N0020
N0030
N0040
N0050
N0060
N0070
N0080
N0090
4.5
G00
G01
G33
G00
Z5
G01
G33
G00
Z5
M30
X25 Z5
X23.5 F100
Z-50 P2 K2.5 I5.0
X26
X22.5
Z-50 P2 K2.5 I5.0
X26
; Approaching the workpiece

; Tool infeed 1.5 mm (diameter programming)
; First thread cutting
;
; Return to the starting point
; Second tool infeed 1mm
; Second thread cutting
;
; Z returns to starting point
G32 Tapping Cycle
PROGRAMMING
Command format
G32
ZW)_
PE)_ H_
; Z axis taping
Word
Z(W): Position which the taping is performed to; Z is the absolute coordinate of Z axis, and W
is the relative coordinate of Z axis; the user can use either relative coordinate or
absolute coordinate. The relative coordinate is the movement amount relative to the
current position
PMetric thread lead;
EInch thread lead;
HExecution mode symbol (reserved)
Word range
Z, W-9999.999mm9999.999mm
P0.001mm500.000mm
E0.060 teeth/inch25400.000 teeth/inch
H0000000011111111
Relative parameters
Parameters related to G32: P100, P103, P106, P112, P113, P114.
Explanation
G32
196
Z tapping cycle execution process:
Spindle rotation starts; Z axis feeds for tapping.
Spindle OFF.
Chapter Four
Waits the spindle to exactly stop.
The spindle rotates in the reverse direction
Z axis retracts to the starting point of the cycle.
The spindle stops.
Note
1) Determine the spindle rotation direction according to the direction in which taping is possible
before tapping. The spindle will stop after the tapping ends. Restart the spindle if you need to
continue the machining.
2) There is a deceleration time for the spindle after the spindle is turned off. At the moment, Z
axis still rotates along with the spindle till the spindle stops completely. Therefore, the thread
bottom hole in actual machining is deeper than the actually-required one. The actual depth
should be determined by the spindle speed in tapping and by whether the spindle brake is
installed or not.
PROGRAMMING
3) The system forbids executing G32 in DRY RUN mode.

4) The other cautions are the same as those of G33.
Example
Fig. 4-15 tapping

ExampleSingle thread with 1.5 mm lead
N0010 G00 X0 Z20
N0020 M3 S01
N0030 G01 Z2 F500
N0040 G32 Z-30 P1.5
N0050 G00 Z20
N0060
M02
; Rapidly positioning the starting point of workpiece

; Spindle CW rotation
; Z axis approaches the workpiece
; Z axis infeed taping
; Moving away from the workpiece and returning to
program start point
; End of program
4.6 G50 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System

The system directly modifies the current tool nose coordinates into the coordinate values set by G50
when executing G50 and sets the current machine coordinates to the program reference point, which is
equivalent to modifying the tool nose coordinates in Manual operation mode and then re-setting the
program reference point.
197

After executing G50 command, there is a green icon
being displayed ahead of the
corresponding axis, which prompts the program reference point return.

The coordinate system created by G50 is referred to as the workpiece coordinate system. After the
workpiece coordinate system is created, the position of absolute coordinates of the following commands
is the coordinate values in this coordinate system.
In creating workpiece system, the X axis in the workpiece coordinate system is generally defined at
the workpiece rotation center, while the Z axis in the workpiece coordinate system can be defined at the
chuck end face or workpiece end face according to your custom.
Command format
G50
Z_ X_
Two-axis workpiece coordinate system setting
G50
X_
X single-axis workpiece coordinate system setting
G50
S_
Max. spindle speed limit in constant surface speed state. See

G96, G97
PROGRAMMING
Word
Z, X, Y are absolute coordinate values. S limits the max. spindle speed (r/min). Refer to G96,
G97 for details.
Word range
X, Z-9999.999mm9999.999mm
Explanation
1) Z/X/ cannot be in the same block with S. Z/X can select single-axis or simultaneous two-axis to
set the workpiece coordinate system.
2) G50 must be specified in an independent block. It cannot be in the same block with other
commands.
3) Because there has been one workpiece coordinate system and one program reference point in
Jog operation mode, the system uses the new workpiece coordinate system and program
reference point in Auto and Jog operation modes after the system executes G50 till they are
replaced.
Relative parameter
Parameters related to G50: P000, P001.
Example
G50
X100
Z100
; Two-axis workpiece coordinate system setting
4.7 G51 Recovering Workpiece Coordinate System Setting

Command format
G51
198
Chapter Four
Explanation
G51 must be specified in an independent block. It cannot be in the same block with other
commands.
Recover the workpiece coordinate system and reference point set in Jog operation mode. When
the workpiece coordinate and the program reference point set in Jog operation mode are replaced after
G50 is executed, use G51 to recover them. After recovering, the system uses the previous workpiece
coordinate system and program reference point in Jog and Auto operation modes till they are replaced.
4.8 G26 X, Z Reference Point Return

Return to the program reference point through the intermediate point at rapid traverse rate by G00.
Command format
ZW)_
XU)_
Z/X rapidly and simultaneously move to the program

reference point through the intermediate point
G26
ZW)_
Z axis rapidly moves to the program reference point

without moving other axes.
Word
X, Z: Absolute coordinates of the intermediate point;
U, W: Relative movement amount from starting point to middle point.
Word range
X, Z, U, W-9999.999mm9999.999mm
Explanation
1 After this command is executed, the specified coordinate axes move to the point defined by
G50. The axes move to the program reference point defined in the Jog operation mode if
there is no G50 in the program. After the corresponding axis executes the reference point
return, ahead of the machine coordinates of this axis is displayed a green icon as a prompt.
2 The command and other commands cannot in the same block.
3 The execution mode of this command is the same as that of G00; refer to G00, G50 for
relative parameters.
4 Z/X can select single-axis, two-axis simultaneous program reference point return.
Example
G26
Z150
X100
Return to program reference point through the intermediate

point (Z150X100)
G26
U0
X axis directly returns to program reference point without

moving other axes
199
PROGRAMMING
G26

4.9 G28 Return to Machine Zero (Machine Reference Point)
Command format
G28
Z(W) _
; Z axis rapidly moves to machine zero through the intermediate point

without moving other axes
G28
X(U) _
; X axis rapidly moves to machine zero through the intermediate point

without moving other axes
Word
X, ZAbsolute coordinates of the intermediate point;
U, WRelative movement amount from starting point to intermediate point.
Word range
X, Z, U, W-9999.999mm9999.999mm
Relative parameter
PROGRAMMING
Main parameters related to G28: P021P026, P109, P110, P406 and P407.
Explanation
1 When the machine zero detection devices (zero switch and deceleration switch) are not
installed on the corresponding coordinate axis, the corresponding bit of P406 should be set to
0; in executing G28, the system does not detect the zero signal and deceleration signal, but
moves the axis to the intermediate point and then returns to the zero coordinate position of
this axis.
2 When the machine zero detection devices (zero switch and deceleration switch) are installed
on the corresponding coordinate axis, the corresponding bit of P406 should be set to 1; in
executing G28, the axis directly returns to the machine zero at the rapid traverse rate from the
start point without passing the intermediate point; which is equivalent to the machine zero
return in Jog operation mode.
3 For G28 machine zero return, see Section 4.4 Machine Zero Return in Jog Operation Mode in
PartProgramming.
4 G28 is a one-shot G command; its execution mode is the same as that of G00; for other
relative parameters, refer to G00.
5 After the corresponding axis executes the machine zero return, there is a blue icon
being displayed behind its machine coordinate
6 This command must be specified in an independent block. It cannot be in the same block with
other commands.
7 Z/X can only perform the single-axis machine zero return.
Example
200
G28
U0
; X axis rapidly returns to the machine zero without moving other axes
G28
W0
; Z axis rapidly returns to the machine zero without moving other axes
Chapter Four
4.10
G30 2nd, 3rd Program Reference Point Return
Command format
G30
P2
ZW)_
XU)_
; Z/X rapidly return to the 2nd program reference point via

the intermediate point
G30
P3
ZW)_
XU)_
; Z/X rapidly return to the 3rd program reference point via

the intermediate point
G30
P2
ZW)_
; Z axis returns to the 2nd program reference point via the

intermediate point without moving the other axes
Word
X, Z: Absolute coordinates of the intermediate point;
U, W: Relative movement amount from starting point to intermediate point.
P2 specifies the 2nd program reference point; P3 specifies the 3rd program reference
PROGRAMMING
point.
Word range
X, Z, U, W-9999.999mm9999.999mm
P2 or 3
Relative parameters
Main parameters related to G30: P003P008.
Explanation
1 The execution mode of the command is the same as that of G00; for other relative
parameters, refer to G00.
2 This command must be specified in an independent block. It cannot be in the same block
with other commands.
3 Z/X can select single-axis, two-axis simultaneous 2nd, 3rd program reference point return.
Example
G30
P2 Z150
X100
; Return to 2nd program reference point via the intermediate

point (Z150X100)
G30
P3
Z150
X100
; Return to 3rd program reference point via the intermediate

point (Z150X100)
G30
P3 W0
; Z axis rapidly returns to 3rd program reference point directly.
4.11 G04 Timing Delay

Command format
G04
D__
; Timing delay
201

Word
D Dwell time. (units)
G04 defines the time interval between two blocks
Word range
D09999.999 s
Explanation
1 G04 cannot be in the same block with other commands except S, F command.
2 In executing G04, pressing CYCLE START can terminate the delay, and then the system
proceeds to the next command.
Example
Example G04
4.12
D2.5
; 2.5s is delayed
G96 Constant Surface Speed Control, G97 Constant Surface Speed Cancel
PROGRAMMING
Command format
G96
; Constant surface speed control
G97
; Cancelling constant surface speed control
Word
S in G96 specifies the constant surface speed. (unit: m/min)
S in G97 specifies spindle speed after the constant surface speed is cancelled. (unit:
r/min)
Word range
S09999 r/min
09999 m/min
04multi-gear spindle
Explanation
G96, G97 are the modal words in the same group, only one of which is valid. G97 is the initial word
and it is valid by default when the system is switched on.
When the machine tool is turning the workpiece, the workpiece usually rotates taking the spindle
axis as the center line, the cutting point of tool cutting workpiece is a circle motion around the spindle
axis, and the instantaneous speed in the circumference tangent direction is called cutting surface
speed (or surface speed for short). Different workpieces and tools with different materials require
different surface speed.
The constant speed control is valid only when the spindle speed analog voltage control function is
valid. In the constant speed control, the spindle speed changes with the absolute value of X tool nose
coordinate in the programmed path (tool length compensation is ignored). When the absolute value of X
tool nose coordinate is increased, the spindle speed is reduced, and when absolute value is decreased,
202
Chapter Four
the spindle speed is increased, which ensures the cutting surface speed keeps unchanged at S value.
The use of constant surface speed control function for workpiece cutting can make the smoothness of
workpiece surface with diameter change even.
Surface speed = spindle speed |X| 1000
(unit: m/min)
Spindle speed: r/min;

|X|: Absolute value of X tool nose coordinate value (diameter value), unit: mm;
3.14.
In constant surface speed control, the spindle speed changes along with the absolute value of X tool
nose coordinate of programmed path only in the process of cutting feed (interpolation).
In constant surface speed control, Z coordinate axis of workpiece coordinate system must coincide
with the spindle axis (rotary axis of workpiece). Otherwise, there is different between actual surface
speed and specified speed.
In constant surface speed control, G50 S_ can limit the max. spindle speed (r/min). The actual
spindle speed is the limit value of max. spindle speed when the spindle speed counted by the surface
switched on, the max. spindle speed limit value is P305 (max. spindle speed of constant surface
speed ).
Max. spindle speed limit value defined by G50 S_ is maintained before it is defined again and its
function is valid in G96. Max. spindle speed defined by G50 S_ is invalid in G97 but its limit value is still
maintained.
Relative parameters
Main parameters related to G96, G97: P410_d6, P304, P305;
P410_d6 setting determines whether the system executes the constant surface speed control in
G96;
Min. and Max. speed limits of constant surface speed control are P304, P305 respectively.
Note
1)
The system issues E272- S value cannot be 0 in G50 when G50 S0 is programmed.
2)
The constant surface speed function can actually control the spindle speed only when the
variable-frequency spindle is used, i.e. bit parameter P410_d6 = 1. If the gear-shift spindle is
used, the constant surface control cannot be performed even if G96 command is specified.
3)
The constant surface speed control can be performed anytime when executing G00, G01, G02,
G03, G05, G90, G94, G71, G72 or G73; the constant surface speed control is invalid during
thread cutting when executing G32, G33, G34, G76 or G92; when X coordinate is changed in
G50 or executing the tool offset, the spindle speed adjustment is valid in the next command.
4)
Min./max. speed of constant surface speed control is set by P304/P305 respectively.
5)
The rotary axis in the constant surface speed must be set in Z axis (X=0) of the workpiece
coordinate.
203
PROGRAMMING
speed and X coordinate value is more than the max. spindle speed set by G50 S_. After the system is

6)
G96 is modal command. When G96 is valid, the single S command is taken as the new surface
speed data.
7)
In DRY RUN mode, the constant surface speed control is valid. Whether the single S command
is executed in Dry run is controlled by P401_d7: P401_d7= 0: T, M, S command is executed in
DRY RUN; P401_d7=1: T, M, S command is not executed.
8)
The constant surface speed control is invalid to get the constant spindle speed in thread cutting.
9)
In G96, when the system defaults S word, the system automatically counts the surface speed as
S value according to the current spindle speed (the last speed is taken as the current speed
when the spindle does not start, or the spindle initial speed is taken as the current speed when
the system is switched on just now) and X absolute coordinate value of tool nose.
10) In G97, when the system defaults S word, the system automatically counts the speed as S value
according to the current constant surface linear speed and X absolute value of tool nose.
11) In AUTO operation mode, if the initial state of the program execution is G96, the system
automatically changes G96 into G97 after CYCLE START key is pressed. The constant surface
PROGRAMMING
cutting is valid in machining the arc and straight line in the course of machining.
12) In Jog operation mode, move X coordinate in feed state (rapid/feed indicator OFF) in G96, G96
is valid, the spindle speed changes along with X coordinate value; and is invalid in rapid feed
state(rapid/feed indicator ON).
13) S value of G96 is limited by S value of G50 Sxxxx and P304, P305. The S value of G50 is
initialized to P305 upon power on, and their limit relationship is as follows:
G50 Sxxx<P304: G50 Sxxxx is invalid, the spindle speed is adjustable between P304~P305
in G96 .
G50 Sxxx>=P304: G50 Sxxxx is valid. The min. value of spindle speed range is limited by
P304 and max. value is limited by G50 Sxxx or P305, whichever is smaller.
Example
P304 value is the lower limit of the spindle speed in constant surface speed control. When the
spindle speed counted by the surface speed and X coordinate value is lower than P304 value, the lower
limit of the spindle speed is the actual spindle speed.
Exampleas Fig. 4-17; surface speed is 300m/min which can count the spindle speed annotated in
Table 4-2.
Fig.
204
4-15
Chapter Four

Table 4-2
N0010
M3 G96 S300
N0020
N0030
N0040
N0050
G0 X100 Z50
G0 X50 Z0
G1 W-30 F200
X80 W-20 F150
N0060
N0110
G0 X100 Z100
M30
; (Spindle rotates clockwise, the constant surface speed control is

valid and the surface speed is 300 m/min)
; (Rapidly traverse to A point at the spindle speed of 955 r/min)
; (Rapidly traverse to B point at the spindle speed of 1910 r/min)
; (Cut from B to C at the spindle speed of 1910 r/min)
; (Cut from C to D, with the spindle speed changing from 1910 r/min to
1194 r/min)
; (Rapidly retract to A point at the spindle speed of 955 r/min)
; (End of program, spindle stopping and coolant OFF)
4.13 Single Canned Cycle
4.13.1
G90 Outer Cylinder Face Turning Cycle (Axial Cutting Cycle)
Command format
G90
ZW)_
XU)_
XU)_
F_
R_
F_
; Inner/outer cylinder face turning cycle;

; G90 cycle subsequent command; which indicates
cycling once again by G90 contour.
Word
X(U) Z(W) Cylinder(taper) face end point; two axis coordinates should be given;
R Diameter difference between starting point and end point of cycle. It is the axis surface cutting if
R is omitted.
F Feedrate.
Word range
X, Z, U, W, R-9999.999mm9999.999mm
Command execution process
205
PROGRAMMING
It is necessary to cut the same machining path repeatedly in the course of some special roughing.
To simplify the programming and improve the programming and the machining efficiency, the canned
cycle is set. The tool will automatically return to the coordinate position before execution when executing
the canned cycle once. If the cycle needs to be executed again, you only need to program the feeding
data again instead of re-writing the canned command. The control is returned to the starting point of the
cycle after the system executes the cycle. If other G commands are contained in the block behind the
canned cycle, the cycle automatically ends. The single canned cycle only uses Z/X programming.
Fig. 4-16a Outer/inner cylinder (taper) face turning cycle
Fig. 4-16b Incorrect programming contour,

causing system alarm
G90 cycle process(Fig. 4-16a)

X axis rapidly moves from A to B.
PROGRAMMING
X, Z axes cut from B to C at F speed (X does not move without R).

X axis cuts from C to D at F speed.
Z axis rapidly moves from D to A.
Relative parameter
In the process of G90 cycle execution, refer to G00 for the relative parameters of rapid traverse,
and refer to G01 for relative parameters of cutting feed.
Explanation
1 The directions of inner, outer machining and cutting feed are determined automatically by the
cycle start position and X, Z coordinates.
2 The tool stops at the cycle starting point after the cycle ends. The sign of U is determined by X
direction from A to B when the system uses the relative coordinates. The sign of W is
determined by Z direction from B to C. In taper face cutting cycle, the sign of R is determined
by X direction from C to B
3 In programming, A B C D must form one quadrangle or a triangle in sequence; i.e. B, C must
be on the same side of straight line AD, otherwise, an alarm is issued (Fig. 4-16b). When C
coincides with D or A coincides with B, they form a triangle.
4 G90 can be followed by the cycle subsequent commands, which sets again X end point
coordinate, and the system executes the cycle once again based on G90 contour; U in the
subsequent command is relative to the cycle starting point. For example, when the system only
redefines X end point coordinate (X/U), it repeats the above cycle according to the new X (U)
coordinate. The cycle contour of the subsequent command must be consistent with the
direction of G90.
5 There is only the single X (U) word (with F command) in the cycle subsequent command;
the next block of the subsequent command can also be the subsequent command; if the next
206
Chapter Four
block is not the single X (U) command but other G commands instead, the system cancels the
cycle; if the next block is not the single X (U) but M, S, T command, the system prompts the
alarm message.
6 In single block execution, by pressing CYCLE START key once, one cycle step is executed.
The system stops at the end point of each step during single block stop.
7 This command cannot be in the same block with other commands. It can only be specified in
an independent block.
8 The explanations of the cycle contour of G94, G92 are the same as those of G90.
9 Relationships between the data behind U, W, R and the tool path are as follows:
1U0W0R0
2U0W0R0
U/2
U/2
PROGRAMMING
X
X from A to B is negative, so U<0;
Z from B to C is negative, so W<0;
X from C to B is negative, so R<0.
3U0W0R0
X from A to B is negative, so U<0;

X from C to B is positive, so R>0.
4U0W0R0
X from A to B is positive, so U>0;

X from C to B is negative, so R<0.
Fig. 4-17
X
X from A to B is positive, so U>0;
X from C to B is positive, so R>0.
Relationships between signs of U, W, R and tool path in G90
Example
207
X
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse
Fig. 4-18
Example 1:
G90 cutting example
Fig. 4-18a outer cylindrical face: the first cutting feed= 5 mm, the second cutting
feed= 2 mm, cutting feedrate F=100 mm/min.
PROGRAMMING
N0010
G00
X47 Z62
N0020
G90
X40 Z30
N0030
X35
; Rapid positioning to A
F100
; Cycle A B C D A once
; The first tool infeed executes E A B1 C1 D A
cycle once
N0040
X33
; The second tool infeed executes A B2 C2 D A

cycle
N0050
M30
The tool is still on A after executing the above-mentioned blocks.

Example 2: Fig. 4-18b taper surface: the cutting feed R=- 5 mm once, F=100 mm/min.
N0010
G00
X55 Z5
; Rapidly positioning to A
N0020
G90
X50 Z-20
R-5
N0030
G90
X50 Z-20
R-10
; Executing cycle A B2 C D A
N0040
G90
X50 Z-20
R-15
N0050
G90
X50 Z-20
R-20
N0060
G90
X50 Z-20
R-25
; Executing cycle A B C D A
N0070
M30
F100
The tool is still on A after executing the above blocks.
4.13.2 G92 Thread Cutting Cycle

Thread cutting cycle is realizable using G92. The system rapidly traverses to the thread start point
from the start point, then performs the cutting of the thread face, and then retracts from the thread face
rapidly, finally returns to the start point rapidly. The whole motion path forms an enclosed path. If the
thread is a multiple thread, another single-thread cutting cycle is performed. If a subsequent command
208
Chapter Four
with another cutting depth follows G92, another cutting is also performed. Increasing the cutting depth
gradually using the subsequent command can machine the threads which accord to the depth
requirement.
Command format
G92
XU )_
ZW)_
PE)_
K_
I_
R_
L_
H_
Thread cutting cycle.
Word
P Metric thread lead; E Inch thread lead.
When P/E is positive, Z axis is the thread axis; When P/E is negative, X axis is the thread
axis.
X(U), Z(W) Absolute/relative coordinates of the thread end point
Z movement amount of axial thread cannot be 0; X movement amount of end face thread
cannot be 0 either.
and
thread end point (it is the straight thread when R is omitted).

For the end face thread, it is Z coordinate difference between thread start point and thread
end point.
For taper thread, R determines the direction of the thread run-out; i.e. the direction is
positive when R is negative, and the direction is negative when it is positive.
K It is the length from the start point of the thread run-out to the thread end point in thread
machining axis.
K cannot be negative and must be less than the movement amount of thread machining
axis.
I It is the total movement amount in the run-out axis direction in thread run-out. (There is no
thread run-out when it is omitted).
For the straight thread, the thread run-out is positive when I is positive; the thread run-out is
negative when I is negative.
For the taper thread, the direction of thread run-out is the same as that of the taper; the sign
of I is invalid.
L Thread number of multi-thread (it is single thread when L is omitted).
H Sign of execution mode, each bit has different meaning (H_d7H_d3reserved) ; the default
is 00000000 when it is omitted.
H_d0=1: Thread run-out starts when the thread machining axis reduces speed, which is not limited
by K value.
H_d0=1: The system executes the thread run-out according to the proportion between K and I. (if
one of K, I is 0, the bit is invalid; H_d1 is prior to H_d0).
Note When the system executes the thread run-out according to K and I proportion, if I/K ratio is
big, the run-out axis speed raises rapidly, which can cause the stepper motor step-out, and
the alarm of the servo motor.
209
PROGRAMMING
R For the axial thread, it is the difference of X coordinate between thread start point

H_d2=1: It indicates precession; the programming rules for the thread precession function (feeding
from the middle of the workpiece) are as follows:
1)
In G92 command, I and K indicate the depth of precession, which are not omissible.
2)
H_d1=1 in G92: When the run-out is performed using I, K linkage mode, the conditions of
precession are the same as those of run-out.
3)
H_d1=0 in G92: When the run-out is performed respectively using I, K rapid traverse mode, the
conditions of precession differ from those of run-out.
Word range
X,Z,U,W,R-9999.999mm9999.999mm
I-9999.999mm9999.999mm
K09999.999mm
P0.001mm500.000mm (An negative sign can be added in front of this range. The positive
means the axial thread, the negative means the end face thread)
PROGRAMMING
E(0.06025400.000) teeth/inch (An negative sign can be added in front of this range. The positive
means the axial thread, the negative means the end face thread)
L199
H0000000011111111
The execution process of G92 thread cycle is as Fig. 4-19 (taking axial thread cutting for
example)
Check the spindle speed, count the reference speed of thread machining according to the
speed and the pitch P. The system issues an alarm when the value exceeds P113 value
(max. cutting feed speed). Before it, the user must ensure the spindle speed is stable;
otherwise, it may cause to be the confused thread teeth.
X axis rapidly traverses from A to B: X (U) + R position (Thread start point B).
XZ execute the thread cutting from B to C.( including thread run-out); the process is the
same as that of G33.
X rapidly returns to D.
Z rapidly returns to A ( starting point).
Multi-thread, repeat the above step 24 to execute the multi-thread cutting.
Fig. 4-19
210
G92 Thread cutting cycle
Chapter Four
Relative parameter
In G92, refer to G00 for the relative parameters of rapid traverse, and refer to G33 for the relative
parameters of thread cutting
Explanation
1) The thread cutting generally requires several times feeding. At the moment, the user only needs to
alter X coordinate value of end point of cutting feed (or the increment value relative to the starting
point). The coordinate position is still on the starting point when the thread cycle ends.
2) The command cannot be in the same block with other commands. It must be specified in an
independent block.
3) G92 recycle subsequent command means the system executes one time the contour in G92 again;
when P(E) is positive, G92 recycle subsequent command can only be X(U) ; when P(E) is negative,
G92 recycle subsequent command can only be Z(W) .
the end point of the thread in cutting taper thread; it is limited by Z coordinate difference between
the starting point and end point of the cycle in cutting end face thread.
5) Notes are the same as those of G33 thread cutting.
6) For axial taper thread, the pitch P/E is the pitch in the thread axis (Z) direction; for the end face
thread, it is the pitch in the thread axis (X) direction.
7) The relationship between R, K, P and tool path is as follows:
P/E is positive (axial thread, Z is the thread axis):
1 U<0W<0R<0
2 U>0W<0R>0
3U<0W>0R<0
4U>0W>0R>0
5 U<0W<0R>0
6 U>0W<0R<0
7U<0W>0R>0
8U>0W>0R<0
Fig. 4-20
G92 thread cutting tool path
211
PROGRAMMING
4) The axial thread machining is limited by the diameter difference between the starting point and

P/E is negative (end face thread, X is the thread axis):
1 U<0W>0R>0
5 U<0W>0R<0
2 U<0W<0R<0
6U<0W<0R>0
PROGRAMMING
Fig. 4-21
3U>0W>0R>0
4U>0W<0R<0
7 U>0W>0R<0
8U>0W<0R>0
G92 thread cutting tool path
G92 thread cutting programming forms: (diameter programming)
1G92 axial face straight thread:

P is positive;
R=0;
U<0;
The thread run-out is in the positive direction when I is
positive; there is no thread run out when there is no I;
the end position does not change;
2G92 axial face straight thread

P is positive;
R=0;
U<0;
The thread run-out is in the negative direction when I is
negative; there is no thread run out when there is no I;
the end position does not change;
W
K
I/2
X
0
W
I/2
Z
W
K
I/2
X
212
R/2
3G92 axial face taper thread

P is positive;
The thread run-out is in the positive direction when R is
negative;
U<0;
G92 W-60 U-50 R-10 K3 I6 P2
U-51
M30
Chapter Four
0
4G92 end face taper thread

P is negative;
R is positive;
There is no the thread run-out when there is no I;
G92 W-10 U60 R10 K3 I1.5 P-2
W-10.5
W-11
M30
U/2
K/2
I
R
Z
U/2
X
K/2
PROGRAMMING
5G92 end face thread

P is negative;
R=0;
The thread run-out is in the positive direction when I is
positive;
G92 W-30 U80 K5 I2.5 P-2
W-31.5
W-32
M30
The programming example of G92 thread precession function machining is as follows:

0
W
K
I/2
I/2
W
K
I/2
K
I/2
1. G92 axial precession straight thread:

P is a positive value; the sign of I determines the
direction of run-out; I and K are not omissible; the
linkage precession and linkage run-out are performed
by I/K proportion.
E.g. G00 Z100 X100
G92 W-60 U-50 K3 I6 P2 H00000110
M30
2.G92 axial precession straight thread

P is a positive value; the sign of I determines the
direction of run-out, I and K are not omissible; rapid
precession and rapid run-out.
E.g. G00 Z100 X100
G92 W-60 U-50 K3 I6 P2 H00000100
M30
Example
1) G92 axial straight thread: as Fig. 4-22
213
Fig. 4-22
P is positive; the sing of I determines the run-out direction; there is no the thread run-out when I
is omitted;
2) G92 axial taper thread: as Fig. 4-23, P is positive; the sign of R determines the run-out direction;
the sign of I is invalid.
PROGRAMMING

G92 W-60 U-50 R-10 K3 I6
P2
U-50.5
U-51
M30
Fig. 4-23
3) G92 end face thread: as Fig. 4-24
P is negative; the sign of I determines the run-out direction; there is no run-out if I is omitted.
G92 W-30 U80 K5 I2.5 P-2
W-31.5
W-32
M30
214
Chapter Four
Fig. 4-24
4) G92 end face thread: as Fig. 4-25
P is negative; the sign of I determines the run-out direction; there is no run-out if I is omitted;
G92 W-30 U80 K5 I2.5 P-2
W-31.5
PROGRAMMING
W-32
M30
Fig. 4-25
5) Compound exampleas Fig. 4-28
Example 1: Metric cylinder thread as Fig. 4-26 a.( G1 14 : teeth 11d=41.910d2=40.431d1=38.952)
N0010
N0020
G00 X45 Z5
M03 S600
N0030
G92
X41 Z-50
; Rapidly position A
; Spindle CW, 600r/min
E11
; First tool infeedcutting 0.91 mm
N0040 X40.2
; Second cutting 0.8mm
N0050 X39.6
; Third cutting 0.6mm
N0060 X39.2
; Fourth cutting 0.4mm
N0070 X38.952
; Fifth cutting to the required dimension
N0080 M30
215

Z
R114
B
A
C
D
a inch straight thread
B
B3
B2
B1
E
A(45,5)
b taper outer thread
Cutting feed
Rapid feed
Fig. 4-26
Example 2: Taper Outer thread as Fig. 4-26 b (R1 14 :d=41.910d2=40.431d1=38.952P=2.309,
thread valid length is 19.1)
PROGRAMMING
N0010
N0020
N0030
N0040
N0050
N0060
N0070
G00 X45 Z5
M03 S600
G92 X41 Z-19.1
X40.3
X39.9
X39.352
M30
P2.309 R-1.506
; Spindle CW, 600r/min
; First tool infeed cutting
; Second tool infeed cutting
; Third tool infeed cutting
; Fourth tool infeed cutting
4.13.3 G94 Inner/outer End (Taper) Face Turning Cycle

Command format
G94
ZW)_
ZW)_
XU)_ R_
F_
F_
Inner/outer end (taper) face turning cycle

G94 recycle subsequent command; which means G94
coutour is cycled once again.
Word
XUZW End point coordinate. The coordinates of two axes must be given.
R Z coordinate difference between starting point and end point of taper face. It is the
end face cutting if R is omitted.
F Cutting speed
Word range
X, Z, U, W, R-9999.999mm9999.999mm
216
Chapter Four
Fig. 4-27a
G94 end face turning cycle
Fig. 4-27b Incorrect programmed contour

which causes system alarm
G94 cycle execution process (Fig. 4-27a):

Z axis rapidly moves from A to B.
Z axis moves at F speed from C to D.
X axis rapidly moves from D to A.
Relative parameter
parameters of cutting feed.
Explanation
1 The G94 can be followed by the recycle subsequent command, which means the Z end point
coordinate is respecified, and the system recycles one more time according to the contour of
G94; W in the subsequent command is relative to the cycle starting point. E.g. After the system
redefines Z end point coordinate(Z/W), it repeats the cycle process according to the new Z (W)
coordinate. The subsequent command cycle contour must be consistent with that of G94,
otherwise, the system alarms.
2 There is only the independent Z(W) word in the cycle subsequent command; the next block of
the subsequent command can also be the subsequent command; if the next block is not the
independent Z (W) word but other G commands, the cycle is cancelled; when it is not the
independent Z (W) word but M,S,T, the system prompts the alarm message.
3 This command cannot be in the same block with other commands. It must be specified in an
independent block.
4 Other explanations of G94 are the same those of G90.
5 Relationships between the data behind U, W, R and the tool path are as follows:
217
PROGRAMMING
X, Z axes move at F speed from B to C (Z does not move when R is omitted) .
X from B to C is negative, so U0;

Z from A to B is negative, so W0;
Z from C to B is negative, so R0;
X from B to C is negative, so U0;

Z from C to B is positive, so R0;
PROGRAMMING
X from B to C is positive, so U0;

Z from C to B is positive, so R0;
Fig. 4-28
X from B to C is positive, so U0;

Z from C to B is negative, so R0;
G94 relationship between U, W, R sign and tool path
Example
Z
Z
C2 C1 C D
C
A(62,45)
B2 B1 B A
G
F
B B4B3B2B1 E
D
A(55,5)
X
a
Fig. 4-29
G94 Cutting example
Example 1: Fig. 4-29a, the first feed= 5 mm, the second feed= 1.5 mm, cutting speed =80 mm/min, and
its programming is as follows
N0010 G00 X62 Z45
N0020 G94 X25 Z40 F80
N0030
N0040
N0050
Z35
Z33.5
M30
; 1st cutting cycle of end face cycle cutting A
BCDA
; Tool infeed 5mm, the 2nd cycle A B1 C1 D A
; Tool infeed 1.5m, the 3rd cycle A B2 C2 D A
Example 2: Fig. 4-29b, feed R=-5 mm once, cutting speed =100 mm/min and its programming is as
follows
218
Chapter Four
N0010 G00 X55 Z5
N0020 G94 X30 Z-5 R-5
N0030
N0040
N0050
N0060
N0070
4.13.4
G94
G94
G94
G94
M30
X30
X30
X30
X30
Z-5
Z-5
Z-5
Z-5

; 1st cycle cutting of end face cycle cutting A
B1 C D A
; Tool infeed 5mm, 2nd cycle A B2 C D A
; Tool infeed 5mm, 3rd cycleA B3 C D A
; Tool infeed 5mm, 4th cycle A B4 C D A
; Tool infeed 5mm, 5th cycle A B C D A
F100
R-10
R-15
R-20
R-25
G74 End Face Deep Hole Machining Cycle
Command format
G74
XU)_
ZW)_
I_
K_
R_
E_
F_
End face deep hole machining cycle
Word
X(U) Z(W) Coordinates of hole bottomIt is the deep hole drilling cycle when X is omitted
K Each Z tool retraction amount (Z axis)
R Pecking cycle or deep hole cycle selection. When R is omitted or R=0, the distance of
retraction each time is only K, i.e. pecking cycle. When R=1, the tool retracts to the
starting point of the first hole drilling each time, i.e. deep hole drilling cycle
E Each offset value in X direction (diameter value) .
F Feedrate.
Word range
X, Z, U, W-9999.999mm9999.999mm
I, K09999.999mm
EDeep hole drilling cycle is 09999.999 mmEnd face deep hole machining cycle is0.001
mm9999.999 mm
R0 or 1
Explanation
R=1, the cycle process of G74 command is as follows:
Fig. 4-30
G74 Cycle- Deep hole drilling cycle(R=1)

219
PROGRAMMING
I Each Z tool infeed amount (Z axis)
Z feeds from A to B at F speed.

Z returns to A at the rapid traverse rate.
Z feeds I-K to C at the rapid traverse rate.
Z feeds I+K at F speed from C to D.
Z feeds 2I-K to E at the rapid traverse rate
Z feeds I+K from E to F at F speed.
Z returns to A at the rapid traverse rate
Z feeds 3I-K to G at the rapid traverse rate.
Z feeds I+K from G to H at F speed.
When R is omitted or 0, the execution process of G74 end face deep hole machining cycle is as
PROGRAMMING
follows:
Fig. 4-31
G74 end face deep hole machining cycle
Z feeds a distance of I from A point at F speed.

Z retracts a distance of K.
Z feeds a distance of I+K at F speed
The above-mentioned steps 23 are repeated until Z feeds to B
Z rapidly retracts to A.
If X is not 0, X rapidly offsets a distance of E.
Repeat steps 14 until X, Z feed to D
Z rapidly returns to C, and then X rapidly returns to A.
The tool still stops at the starting point of the cycle when G74 cycle ends.
Relative parameter
parameters of cutting feed.
Note
1 In the command, the tool width has not been taken into account, so the X coordinate of the end
point should be the actual end point coordinate plus or minus the tool width.(depending on the
feeding direction.)
220
Chapter Four
2 None of I, K, E has signs. The system executes the operation according to K =I when K is
greater than I.
3 G74 cannot be in the same block without other commands. It must be specified in an
independent block.
4 In the end face deep hole machining cycle, E cannot be 0, otherwise, the system issues No.
E269 alarm; in the deep hole drilling cycle, E can be 0, which is valid.
Example
Executing end face deep hole machining cycle as Fig. 4-32: tool width= 5 mm, each tool infeed =6
mm, tool retraction= 2 mm, each offset= 5 mm, F=100 mm/min.
End face deep hole machining cycle example (R=0)
N0010 G0 X0 Z40
N0020 G74 X22.5 Z20 I6 K2 E5 F100
; Positioning to the tool infeed point;

; End face machining cycle. The programming end point is
the coordinate of X end point plus tool width.
N0030 M30
4.13.5 G75 Grooving Cycle

Command format
G75
XU)_
ZW)_
I_
K_
E_
F_
Grooving cycle
Word
XUZWGroove end point coordinates.
I Each X tool infeed.
K Each X tool retraction.
E Each Z offset.
F Feedrate.
Word range
X, Z, U, W-9999.999mm9999.999mm
I, K, E09999.999mm
221
PROGRAMMING
Fig. 4-34

Explanation
Execution process of G75 grooving cycle is as Fig. 4-33:
X feeds a distance of I at F speed.
X rapidly retracts a distance of K.
X feeds a distance of I+K at F speed.
The steps 2~3 are repeated until X feeds to B.
X rapidly feeds to A.
If Z is not 0, Z rapidly offsets a distance of E.
Repeat steps 1~4 until Z, X feed to D.
X rapidly returns to C and then Z rapidly returns to A.
The tool still stops at the starting point of the cycle after G75 is completed.
PROGRAMMING
Rapid feed
Cutting feed
The broken line means transiting to the next step.
Fig. 4-33
G75 grooving cycle
Relative parameter
They are the same those of G74
Note
1 In G75, the tool width has not been taken into account, so the Z coordinate of the end point
should adds or subtracts the tool width depending on the actual condition (it is determined by
the tool infeed direction).
2 None of I, K, E has signs. The system executes the operation according to K =I when K is
greater than I.
3 This command cannot be in the same block with other commands. It must be specified in an
independent block.
4 In the outer grooving cycle, E cannot be 0. Otherwise, the system issues E269 alarm; in the
outer machining cycle, E can be 0, which is valid.
222
Chapter Four
Example
Executing the grooving cycle as Fig. 4-34: tool width= 5 mmeach tool infeed = 6 mmeach
retraction= 2mmeach offset= 5 mmF=150 mm/min
N0010
G0
X125
N0020
G75
N0030
M30
Z100
X80 Z35
; Positioning to the starting point

I6 K2 E5
F150
; Grooving cycle. The tool width should be

added to the end point coordinates.
4.14 Compound Cycle

To simply the programming and reduce the calculation, the compound cycle is applied. Only the
path of the machining shape needs to be given during programming, then the system can automatically
determines the tool path of roughing halfway.
4.14.1
G71 Axial Plane Rough and Finish Command Group
Using the command group can realize the compound cycle rough and finish cutting of one group of
slope command collection. The system firstly starts from the starting point to rough the blank along the
axial direction (the tool is parallel to Z axis), and then cuts along the command group path, and finally
returns to the starting point to finish the roughing. If the roughing offset value (roughing allowance) is set
in advance anytime before executing the roughing command, the system automatically offsets one offset
value to execute the roughing. Anytime after executing the roughing command, the finishing tool can be
used along with G710 to execute the finishing.
G71 includes the following 3 commands:
G71
U W
G71
X(U) I
G710
X(U)
Using U, W to specify roughing offset value

K F
P Q
P Q F
G71 axial plane roughing cycle

G710 finishing
The following introduces the above 3 commands separately.

223
PROGRAMMING
Fig. 4-34 grooving cycle
G71 axial plane roughing cycle

G71 is called the axial roughing cycle command, which realizes the compound cycle roughing of
one group of slope command group. The system executes the gradual roughing in the axial direction
(referred to as sidestep roughing), and then executes the cutting along the command group path
(referred to as contour roughing), and at last returns to the initial point to complete the roughing. The
section describes the execution process of G71 roughing command.(assuming the roughing offset value
of command is: W0, U0) .
Command format
G71
XU)_
I_
K_
F_
P_
Q_
; Axial roughing cycle
Word
XUX coordinate value of machining contour starting point.
I Each X tool infeed, without sign; I cannot be 0.
PROGRAMMING
K Each X tool retraction, without sign.

P, Q Block line numbers describing the starting and final path of the machining contour.
F Roughing cutting speed.
Word range
X, U-9999.999mm9999.999mm
I0.001mm9999.999mm
K09999.999mm
P, Q19999
Fig. 4-35 Inner/outer roughing compound cycle

G71 execution process:
X rapidly traverses a distance of I from starting point A in G71.
Cutting feed is performed along Z axis at F speed, and the end point of the feed is
calculated by the system automatically.
X retracts a distance of K at F speed.
Z rapidly returns to the starting point.
X feeds another distance of I+K.
224
Chapter Four
Repeat steps to rough the blank until X reaches the specified machining contour
starting point specified by X in the command.
X, Z execute the cutting at their respectively-specified speed according to the final path
and machine the shape described by the final path.
Finally, Z rapidly returns to starting point, and then X rapidly returns to the starting point.
Relative parameter
In G71, refer to G00 for the relative parameters of rapid traverse, and refer to the linear and circular
interpolation for the relative parameters of cutting feed.
Explanation
When executing G71, the system automatically searches and executes PQ blocks; after
executing them, it proceeds to the block following G71. However, if PQ blocks are
complied following G71, the system returns to the starting point and then executes the
block following Q.
programmed contour. To prevent imprint on roughing points, there should be an
allowance between roughing point and contour: 0.03 in X direction, 0.05 in Z direction.
In PQ blocks can only include G commands: G00, G01, G02, G03, G05, G04, G96,
G97, G98, G99; and common input/output control M commands; other commands are not
allowed (e.g. T, transfer, call command). The system only uses Z/X programming. The
number of paths in PQ blocks cannot exceed 1000.
F, S command in PQ blocks are invalid when executing the sidestep roughing, and they
are valid only in the cuntour path; thus, F speed should be specified in advance or F is
programmed in the same block with G71 in the sidestep roughing.
In PQ blocks, X, Z dimension data must be monotonous slope-type change (always
increasing or reducing) ; and X must starts from the machining contour starting point B to
monotonously change to G71 starting point A.
None of address I, K has signs, and the tool infeed direction is automatically determined by
the system. The smaller I is, the more the roughing layers are.
I range is related to X(U) range; I, U range must meet the requirement that U/I is smaller
than 10000.
When executing feed hold, single block, the system pauses after it executes the path end
point of the current step.
This command cannot be in the same block with other commands. It must be specified in
an independent block.
There are four cases when using G71 command to cut the workpiece, as in Fig. 4-36; For
each one, the tool cuts from G71 starting point A and roughs the blank in parallel with Z till
B is reached.
225
PROGRAMMING
Before roughing, the system will calculate the rough turning point according to

Generally, X coordinate of BCD section should be within the range between B and A; when
D exceeds A, the system does not rough the exceeded part.
There are four cases for the shapes cut by G71 command: in Fig. 4-36, A is G71 starting
point, B is the starting point of machining contour, D is end point of machining contour,
BCD section is the machining path.
Fig. 4-36
Example
As Fig. 4-37: bar stock 82each tool infeed = 4 mm, each tool retraction= 2.5 mm, F= 60mm/min
PROGRAMMING
N0000
G00
X115
Z155
N0010 M3 S02
N0020 M8
N0030 G00 X83
N0040 G71 X0 I4 K2.5
F100 P0090
; Start the spindle, set to spindle high speed

; Cooling ON
; X tool infeed to approach workpiece
; Self defining roughing cycle parameter
Q0160
N0050 G00 X115 Z155

N0060 M5
N0070 M9
N0080 M2
N0090 G01 Z145 F60
N0100 X15
N0110 W-30
N0120 G03 X55 W-20 I0 K-20
N0130 G01 W-25
N0140 G01 X80 W-20
N0150 W-50
N0160 X81
; Return to tool starting point

; Stop the spindle
; Cooling OFF
; End of program
;
;
;
;
Defining the final path
;
;
;
80
50
Fig. 4-37
226
20
25
20
G71 cutting example
30
10
Chapter Four
G71 roughing offset command and G710 finishing command

G71 includes 3 commands. When using command to set the roughing offset value (roughing
allowance) in advance anytime before executing the roughing command , the coordinate axis firstly
offsets one offset value automatically and then executes the roughing path during the execution of
command , i.e. the roughing path creates the whole offset to leave the allowance for the next
finishing. When command is omitted, the roughing offset value is W0,U0. Anytime after the
roughing, the user can use a finishing tool to perform finishing by using command .
Command format and definition

G71
U_ W_
; Specifying the roughing offset value
Thereinto: U X offset value
U-9999.999mm9999.999mm
W Z offset value
W-9999.999mm9999.999mm.

X(U) _
P_
Q_
Or G710
F_ G710 finishing
The omission of the subsequent words indicates the
words are the same as those of roughing command
.
X(U) X coordinate value of starting point of finishing contour.

P, Q Block line numbers describing the initial to the final path of finishing contour.
F Finish cutting speed.
Explanation
1 In executing command , the coordinate axis does not move actually, the system
automatically memorizes the offset value to the internal and the value keeps valid; it is 0 by
default when it is not specified.
2 The offset value set by G71 command is only valid for G71 command .
3 U, W words in G71 command must be specified simultaneously.
4 X(U), P, Q words in G71 command should be the same as those of G71 command ; if
they are re-input, they must be input completely; the word range is the same as that of
command .
5 In G71 command , the command programming rules in PQ blocks are the same as those
of G71 command .
6 When executing the roughing G71 command the system automatically memorizes X(U), P,
Q data of the latest G71; if X(U), P, Q are omitted in G710, the system directly refers the data of
the internal memory. Therefore, the words following G710 can be omitted when the system
executes finishing to the latest roughed G71 path.
7 When the system executes G710 finishing, it performs the cutting along the command group
path, and finally returns to the initial point, thus completing the finishing.
227
PROGRAMMING
G710

8 The tool nose position before executing G710 finishing should be consistent with that before
G71 roughing
9 Coordinate offset direction in reserving roughing allowance: U,W in command expresses
the coordinate offset and cut-in direction in finishing; there are four kinds of combination
according to the signs of U, W (see Fig. 4-38): BC is finishing path, BC is roughing
contour, A is the start-up point.
PROGRAMMING
Fig. 4-38
4.14.2
G72 End Face Roughing/Finishing Command Group
Using the command group can realize the compound cycle rough and finish cutting of one group of
slope command collection. The system firstly starts from the starting point to rough the blank along the
axial direction, and then cuts along the command group path, and finally returns to the starting point to
complete the roughing. When the roughing offset value (roughing allowance) is set in advance before
executing the roughing command, the system automatically offsets one offset value and then performs
roughing. The finishing tool can be used along with G720 to execute the finishing anytime after
executing the roughing command.
G72 command group includes 3 commands:
G72
U W
G72
Z(W) I
G720
Z(W)
Specifying roughing offset value using U, W

K
P Q
P Q F
G72 end face roughing cycle

G720 finishing
They are respectively described as follows:
G72 end face roughing cycle

The command in G72 command group is called the axial roughing cycle command, which can
realize the compound cycle roughing of one group of slope command group. The system executes the
gradual roughing along the radial direction (called sidestep roughing), and then executes the cutting
228
Chapter Four
along the command group path (called contour roughing), and finally returns to the initial point to
complete the roughing. This section describes the execution process of G72 roughing command
(assuming the roughing offset value of command is: W0, U0).
Command format
G72
Z(W) _
I_
K_
F_
P_
Q_
; End Face Roughing Cycle
Word
Z(W) Z coordinate value of the starting point of machining contour
I Each Z tool infeed, without sign; I cannot be 0.
K Each Z tool reaction, without sign.
P, Q Block line numbers describing initial and final path of machining contour.
F Roughing cutting feedrate.
Word range
Z, W-9999.999mm9999.999mm
K09999.999mm
P, Q19999
Relative parameters
They are the same as those of G71 command
Explanation
1)
The reserved allowance between G72 command roughing point and contour: 0.05 in X
direction, 0.03 in Z direction; other explanations are the same as those of G71.

G72 cycle execution process is as Fig. 4-39
Start from G72 starting point A, Z rapidly traverses a distance of I.
X cuts along X axis at F speed, and the feeding end point is counted automatically by the
system.
Z retracts a distance of K at F speed.
X rapidly returns to the starting point;
Z feeds another distance of I+K;
Repeat steps to rough the blank gradually till Z reaches the starting point B of
the machining contour specified by Z in the command.
X, Z perform cutting according to the final path at their respectively-specified speed and machine
the shape described as the final path.
Finally, X rapidly returns to the starting point, and then Z rapidly returns to the starting
point.
229
PROGRAMMING
I0.001mm9999.999mm
Fig. 4-39
G72 end face roughing compound cycle
Example
PROGRAMMING
Blank shape
Fig. 4-40
G72 cutting example
As Fig. 4-40 : bar 163, each tool infeed =5mm, each tool retraction =3 mm, F=80mm/m
N0000
G00
X180
N0010
N0020
N0030
N0040
M3 S02
M8
G00 X165 Z5
G72 Z-125 I5 K3 F80 P0100
N0050 G00 Z50

N0060 X180
N0070 M5
N0080 M9
N0090 M2
N0100 G01 X160
N0110 Z-55
N0120 X80 Z-35
N0130 Z-20
N0140 X30 Z0
N0150 X0
230
Z50
Q0150
; Start the spindle, set to spindle speed 2

; Cooling ON
; Tool infeed to approach workpiece
; Defining roughing cycle parameter
; Z returns to machining starting point
; X returns to machining starting point
; Spindle stop
; Cooling OFF
; End of program
;
;
;
Defining final path
;
;
;
Chapter Four

command , i.e. the roughing path creates the whole offset to leave the allowance for the next finishing.
When command is omitted, the roughing offset value is W0,U0. Anytime after the roughing, the user
can use a finishing tool to perform finishing by using command .
Command format and meaning

G72
U_
W_
; Specifying the roughing offset value
Thereinto: U X offset value;
U range-9999.999mm9999.999mm;
W Z offset value;
W range-9999.999mm9999.999mm.
G720
Z(W) _
P_
Q_
Or G720
F_
G720 finishing
The omission of the subsequent words indicates they
are the same as those of roughing command
Z(W) Z coordinate value of starting point of finishing contour.

P, Q Block line numbers describing the initial to final path of the finishing contour.
F Finishing cutting speed.
Explanation
1 G720 gradually cuts the workpiece according to the tool being parallel with X axis.
2 The other explanations of G720 are same as those of G71 and G710.
3 Coordinate offset direction in reserving roughing allowance: U,W in command expresses
the coordinate offset and cut-in direction in finishing; there are four kinds of combination
according to the signs of U, W, as Fig. 4-41: BC is finishing path, BC is roughing contour,
A is the start-up point.
231
PROGRAMMING
Command format and meaning
Fig. 4-41
4.14.3 G73 Closed-loop Cutting Cycle Command Group

This command group can realize the closed-loop compound cycle roughing and finishing. The
system gradually cuts the blank and then cuts along the command group path, and finally returns to the
starting point, to complete the roughing. When the roughing offset value (roughing allowance) is set in
PROGRAMMING
advance before executing the roughing command, the system automatically offsets one offset value to
execute the roughing. The user can use a finishing tool along with G730 command to execute finishing
anytime after executing the roughing command.
G73 starting point is identical with the end point, and the command is applicable to the roughing of
formed blank. G73 is a one-shot command and its path is as Fig. 4-42.
G73
U W
G73
X(U) Z(W) I
G730
X(U) Z(W)
Specifying roughing offset value using U, W

K
F P Q
G73 closed-loop roughing cycle
P Q F
G730 finishing
The commands above are respectively described as follows:
G73 closed roughing cycle

The command in G73 command group is called the closed-loop roughing cycle command which
can realize the compound cycle roughing of one group of closed-loop command group. The system
firstly cuts the blank (called step roughing) gradually from the starting point, and then cuts along the
command group path (called contour roughing) and finally returns to the initial point, completing the
roughing.
The section describes the execution process of G73 roughing command (assuming roughing offset
value of command is W=0,U=0) .
Command format
G73
XU)_
Z(W) _
I_
K_
L_
P_
Q_
F_
Closed-loop roughing cycle
Word
XU X coordinate value of starting point B of roughing contour.
ZWZ coordinate value of starting point B of roughing contour.
232
Chapter Four
P Initial block line number describing the roughing contour.

Q Final block line number describing the roughing contour.
F Roughing cutting feedrate.
I Retraction value on X axis during the first roughing (with sign). Refer to the distance I in
Fig. 4-44.
K Retraction value on Z axis during the first roughing (with sign). Refer to the distance K in
Fig. 4-44.
L Cutting times, i.e. the number of gradual cutting layers.
X(U) ,Z(W) ,P, Q describe the ABCA closed path in the figure, i.e. the tool rapidly positions from A to B,
and then the system performs PQ blocks to C, and finally the tool returns to A rapidly. ABCA is the path
of the last roughing.
I, K in the figure below describe the system firstly offsets I then K value and then executes the first
roughing; i.e. the system executes A1B1C1 A2 path. L describes that L layers need to be performed from
the first roughing before the last roughing is performed; the infeed amount for each layer should be
approaches the ABC layer from the A1B1C1 layer. The actual cutting times are L+1.
Word range
X, U, Z, W-9999.999mm9999.999mm
I, K-9999.999mm9999.999mm
P, Q 19999
L19999
Execution processas Fig.4-44. Suppose L=2 layers.
Fig. 4-42 G73 command execution path

233
PROGRAMMING
even, i.e. the amount of each layer is I/L in X direction, and is K/L in Z direction. The tool gradually

AA1Rapidly traverse, offset I, K, to A1;
The first roughing, A1B1C1
A1B1Rapidly traverse to B1;
B1C1Cutting feed;
C1A2Rapidly traverse;
The second roughingA2B2C2
A2B2Rapidly traverse;
B2C2Cutting feed;
C2ARapidly traverse;
The last roughing
ABRapidly traverse;
BCCutting feed;
PROGRAMMING
CARapidly traverse to the starting point.
Command explanation
1) PQ blocks are different from those of G71/G72. It is unnecessary to ensure the dimension
data monotonous change in X and Z directions.
2) The tool retraction direction is determined by the signs of I, K.
3) The F, S commands in P~Q blocks are valid for both workblank roughing and finishing.
4) For other explanations, refer to G71, G72.

command , i.e. the roughing path creates the whole offset to leave the allowance for the next finishing.
When command is omitted, the roughing offset value is W0,U0. Anytime after the roughing, the user
can use a finishing tool to perform finishing by using command .
Command format
G73
U_
W_
Specifying the roughing offset value
U X offset value
U range-9999.999mm9999.999mm
W Z offset value
W range-9999.999mm9999.999mm
Command word definition

U X offset value (roughing allowance), which means X coordinate offset of the last roughing path
relative to the finishing path;
234
Chapter Four
W Z offset value (roughing allowance), which means Z coordinate offset of the last roughing path
relative to the finishing path.
G730
X(U) _
Z(W) _
P_
Q_
F_
Or G730
G730 finishing
The omission of the subsequent words indicates they are
the same as those of roughing command
XU X coordinate value of starting point of finishing contour.

ZWZ coordinate value of starting point of finishing contour.
P, Q Block line numbers describing the initial and final path of the finishing contour.
F Finishing cutting feedrate
Explanation
1 The other explanations of G730 are the same as those of G71 G72 and those of G710 and G720.
2 When executing G730 finishing, the tool cuts along the command group path, and finally
3 When the finishing positioning point does not coincide with the roughing positioning point, the
tool execution path will automatically coincide.
4)
Coordinate offset direction in reserving roughing allowance:

I, K, U, W express the coordinate offset and cut-in direction in roughing and finishing; In
general, the sign of I is the same as that of U, while the sign of K is the same as that of W;
generally, there are four kinds of combination for I, K, U, W, as fig. 4-43: A is the start-up point,
BC is the workpiece contour, BC is the roughing contour, and BC is the finishing
path.
1I<0
U<0 K>0
W>0
2I>0
U>0 K>0
Z
C
A
A
W>0
B
B
B
C
C
B
B
B
3I<0
U<0K<0
W <0
4I>0 U>0 K<0
A
A
C
C
A
B
W<0
A
A
B
B
B
B
Z
A
A
A
C
C
C
Fig. 4-43
235
PROGRAMMING
returns to the starting point to complete the finishing.
Example
14
14.5
PROGRAMMING
14.5
(200,30)
Fig. 4-44
Cutting figure is shown as the shape in fig. 4-44:
N0010
T11
N0020
G00
X200
N0022
M03
S500
N0030
G73
U0.5
N0040
G73
X80 Z0 P50 Q100 I14 K14 L5 F300
N0050
N0070
N0080
G01 Z-20 F100

X120 Z-30
Z-50
Positioning starting point
Z30
Start the spindle

W0.5
N0090 G02 X160 Z-70

N0100 G01 X180 Z-80
N0110 T22
N0120 G00 X200 Z30
N0130 G730
An allowance of 0.5 mm for X, 0.5 mm for Z

X tool retraction 14mmZ 14mm in roughing
Workpiece shape blocks

R20
Finishing with finishing tool
4.14.4 G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle

The cutting path of G76 threading cycle is almost the same as that of G92. The difference is that G92
completes the cutting depth by the subsequent command while G76 informs the last cutting face and the
relative information about the gradual cutting depth in advance and then the gradual cutting depth is
arranged by the system to machine the qualified thread.
236
Chapter Four
G76 command group includes 2 commands:
G76
D_
I_ Q_
G76 XU_
P_
L_ R_
ZW_
; G76 cycle information
PE_
I_ K_
R_ L _
H_ ; G76 threading
The commands above are respectively described as follows:
G76 multiple repetitive threading cycle command

The command of G76 command group is called the multiple repetitive threading cycle command,
which can realize the multiple thread cutting.

When the thread angle is 0, in the process of each threading cycle of G76 from the starting point to
end point, the thread axis does not move, and the non-thread axis moves to the cut-in point
independently. The cutting path is the same as that of G92.
Command format
XU_
ZW_
PE_
I_
K_
R_
L _ H_
G76 threading
Command definition explanations

Word definitions, data range of this command are the same as those of G92, as Fig. 4-47:
Starting point (end point): Position before the block is executed and after the execution
ends, which is expressed by point A.
Thread end point: Threading end point defined by X(U)
Z(W)
, which is expressed by
point C.
Thread starting point: Z absolute coordinate is same as that of A point, and the difference
between X absolute coordinate and that of C point is the thread
taper, expressed with E. When the defined thread angle is not 0 , the
tool cannot reach E point in cutting.
Tool retraction end point: Radial (X axis) retraction end point after threading in each thread
roughing cycle or finishing cycle, which is expressed by D point.
G76 multiple repetitive threading cycle command

The command of G76 command group is used for informing relative information about threading
in advance.
G76
D_
I_
Q_
D Tooth depth, total depth
P_
L_
range:0.0019999.999mm
I The first cut depth in roughing
G76 cycle information

Not omissibleD cannot be negative
range:( 0.0019999.999) mm; Not omissible; I cannot be negative
Q Least cutting amount in roughing

P Tool angle
R_
range:099.999mm Omissiblecorresponding to P339
range:099.000degree Omissiblecorresponding to P336

237
PROGRAMMING
G76

L Number of finishing times
range199
Omissiblecorresponding to P337
R Finishing cutting amount
range:099.999mm
Omissiblecorresponding to P338
Command relative definitions

DThread tooth depth, and the thread total cutting depth. The system issues an alarm when D
is not input.
I The first threading depth. The system issues an alarm when I is not input.
QLeast cutting amount in thread roughing. n is the cycle times in the current roughing; when
I n - the last cutting depth) Q, Q is taken as the cutting amount of this roughing, i.e.
this thread cutting depth is (the last cutting depth+Q). Setting Q is to prevent too small
roughing cutting amount and too many roughing times because of the thread cutting
amount gradually decreasing.
PAngle between neighboring two threads. The actual thread angle is determined by the tool
angle, and so P value should be consistent with the tool angle.
PROGRAMMING
LThread finishing times.

RCutting amount in thread finishing, which is equal to the difference between the X absolute
value of the thread finishing cut-in point Be and that of the last thread roughing cut-in point
Bf. In the thread finishing, the first cutting amount is R and the following finishing amount is
0.
Command explanation
1)
When the system executes the command, it loads P, L, R, Q values to their corresponding
parameters, because these parameters are used when the system executes the command .
2)
When the system executes the command, D, I are memorized to the system internal and are
used in G76 .
3)
The system must firstly execute one G76 commandand then can execute one or more G76
commands. Otherwise, an alarm is issued because of lacking some necessary information.
4)
All P, L, R, Q can be omitted. When they are omitted, the system runs according to the setting
values of P336, P337, P338, P339 in executing G76; D, I , however, cannot be omitted.
Relative definitions(as Fig. 4-45)

Thread cut depth reference point: Z absolute coordinate of the thread cut depth reference
point is the same as that of E, and the difference between its X absolute coordinate and X
absolute coordinate of E is D (total thread cut depth). The thread cut depth reference point is
expressed by B. Thread cut depth of B is 0, and is the reference point for the system to count
each thread cut depth.
Thread cut depth: Cut depth of each threading cycle. The cut depth of the thread is the
difference (without sign) between X absolute value of the intersection point (between the
reserve extension line of each threading path and line BE) and that of B. The thread cut
238
Chapter Four
depth of each roughing is

n I. Thereinto, n is the current roughing cycle times, and I
is the thread cut depth of the first roughing.

Threading amount: The difference between current thread cut depth and last one: ( n -
n 1 ) I. The cutting amount cannot be less than the least cutting amount Q.
Thread cut-in point: The point from which the actual threading starts in each thread roughing
and finishing, which is expressed by Bn (n is the current roughing cycle times). B1 is the
cut-in point of the first thread roughing, Bf is the cut-in point of the last thread roughing,
and Be is the cut-in point of the thread finishing. The displacement formula of Bn relative
to X, Z of B is as follows:
tg
P Z axis displacement
=
2 X axis displacement
PThread angle
The tool rapidly traverse to B1 from the starting point, and the first thread cut depth is I. If
P=0, only X axis moves; if P0X and Z move simultaneously, and their movement
directions are the same as that of AC;
Threading to the intersection with CD in the direction parallel with EC (when there is
run-out, there is the thread run-out process) ;
X axis rapidly traverses to D;
Z axis rapidly traverses to Athen the single roughing cycle is completed;
The tool rapidly traverses again to Bn (n is the current roughing cycle times)and the cut
depth is ( n I)
or (the last cut depth +Q), whichever is greater. If the cut depth is less
than (D-R)the system shifts to ; if the cut depth is greater than or equal to (D-R)the tool
feeds the cut depth (D-R) to Bfand the system shifts to to execute the last thread
roughing;
Threading to the intersection with CD in the direction parallel with EC (when there is
run-out, there is the thread run-out process) ;
X axis rapidly traverses to D;
Z axis rapidly moves to Athen the thread roughing cycle ends and the thread finishing
starts;
The thread finishing is executed after the tool rapidly moves to Be (thread cut depth is D, the
cutting amount is R)and finally the tool returns to A, completing one thread finishing cycle;
If the finishing cycle times is less than L, the system shifts to execute the next finishing
cycle, and the thread cut depth is D, the cut amount is 0; if the finishing cycle times is L,
G76 compound thread machining cycle ends.
239
PROGRAMMING
Fig. 4-45
The cut-in method is shown in Fig. 4-46:
PROGRAMMING
Fig. 4-46
Command explanation
1)
Using G76 thread cycle cutting command group can complete the thread cutting with specified
tooth height (total cut depth) by multiple thread roughing and finishing; when the thread angle
defined by the command is not 0, the cut-in point of thread roughing gradually moves to
the thread tooth bottom from the thread tool top, so that the angle between two neighboring
teeth is the specified thread angle.
2)
G76 command group can machine the straight and taper thread with the thread run-out and
can realize the single-side tool edge threading, which protects the tool and improves the thread
precision.
240
Chapter Four
3)
G76 command group can also machine multiple thread and end face thread. When G76
machines the multiple thread, each time the cut depth is fed, each thread is cut the same cut
depth till the multiple thread is completed. Then the system executes the next cut depth.
4)
If the thread angle defined by G76 command is not 0, the difference between G76
command and G92 is: in the process of each thread cycle of G76 from the stating point
to cut-in point, X, Z move simultaneously at first, and the thread axis reaches the cut-in point,
and then the non-thread axis moves to the cut-in point independently; the other cut path is the
same as that of G92 . See Fig. 4-46.
Example
ExampleAs fig. 4-47the thread is M686.
6
PROGRAMMING
68
60.64
Cuttnig point zoom out

62
Fig. 4-47
Program
G50
X100
Z50
G00
X80 Z10
G76
D7.36
M3 S300
; Sets workpiece coordinate system, starts the spindle

and specify its speed
; Rapidly moves to the machining start point
I3.6 Q0.3 P60 L2 R0.2 ; Thread tooth height 7.36the 1st thread cut depth 3.6;
; The least cut-in depth 0.3tool angle 60
; Repetitive finishing 2 times, finishing cutting amount 0.2.
G76
X60.64
G00
X100
Z-62
P6 I0.5 L3
Z50
M30
4.15
; Pitch 63-head thread

; Returns to program start point
; End of program
G22, G80 Program Local Cycle

In the course of actual machining, for the workpiece part of which needs to be repetitively machined,
or the basically-formed workpiece, the user can employ local cycle command to simplify the
programming. The cycle body of the local cycle is programmed by the user, and the end point
241

coordinates after execution are determined after the program execution.
Command format
G22
L_
Cycle body program
G80
Word
G22 defines the starting of cycle body;
L defines the cycle times, range 19999;
G80 defines the end of cycle body.
Explanation
PROGRAMMING
G22 defines the starting of cycle body and L defines the cycle times.
Execute the cycle body program.
When G80 cycle body ends, if L is not 0, it reduces by 1 and then the system executes the
cycle body program again; if L is 0, the cycle ends, and the system executes the following
program in order.
Note
1 Only when G22 and G80 are used together, can the cycle body be formed; there can be G22 and
G80 in the cycle body, i.e. they can be nested.
2 The subprogram can be called in the loop body, which can also include M96 and M97. For the
parts whose shapes have been determined and which need to be roughed, using G22 and G80
to program is very convenient and can improve the machining efficiency.
3 For the axis needing to create the cycle offset, the program in the cycle body uses the relative
programming. And by making an offset between the exit coordinates and entry coordinates of the
cycle body, the user can realize the purpose that each time the cycle program and machining
contour are the same, but the machining path is different.
4 G22, G80 can nest G90, G92, G94, G71, G72 and other cycle commands.
Example
10
30
20
10
N50 Starting point

N60
20
25
N60
N50
N60
N50
End point
Fig. 4-48
242
Chapter Four
It is convenient to program using G22, G80 cycle when machining the workpiece whose shape is
shown in Fig. 4-48a. The program is as follows:
N0000
G50
X100
Z100
N0010
M3 S01
; Starts the spindle, sets to the spindle low speed
N0020
M8
; Cooling ON
N0030
G00
X10 Z30
; Rapid positioning to cycle start point
N0040
G22
L3
; Program cycle starts and cycles 3 times
N0050
G01
W-5 F50
; Z negatively cuts 5mmF=50mm/min
N0060
U5
N0070
G80
N0080
G26
N0090
M5
; Stops the spindle
N0100
M9
; Cooling OFF
N0110
M2
; End of program
W-5
; Defines coordinate system
; X positively cuts 5mmZ negatively cuts 5mm

; End of cycle body
X100
Z100
; X, Z rapidly retract to program reference point
N0000
G00
X36 Z-5
; Rapid positioning to the arc start point
N0010
G22
L3
; Program cycle starts and cycles 3 times
N0020
G01
U-2
N0030
G02
W-14.28 R10
; X, Z feed to cut the arc
N0040
G01
W14.28 F500
; Z retracts to the arc start point
N0050
G80
N0060
M30
F50
; X feeds 1mm
; End of cycle body
The above two examples are programmed according to the actual workpiece shape. The
programming method in Fig. 4-48a is applicable to the roughing like smithing and casting, which can
improve the machining efficiency, while the one in Fig. 4-48b is applicable to the bars.
4.16
G98 Feed per Minute, G99 Feed per Revolution
Command format
G98
F.
Feed per minute
G99
F.
Feed per revolution
Word
G98
F. F unitmm/min
F - Sets the feedrate for the interpolation command following it in mm/min.

G99
F. F unitmm/r
F - Sets the feedrate for the interpolation command following it in mm/r.

243
PROGRAMMING
When machining the arc shown in fig. 4-48b, the programming using G22, G80 cycle is as follows:

Word range
F:
04000.000 mm/min
04000.000 mm/r
Note
1)
The value format of G98/G99 must be matched with that of F word. Otherwise, the system
issuesMissing information.
2)
G98/G99 is the modal command and it keeps valid before being changed. The single F
command can be taken as the new feedrate.
3)
G98 is the initial state of the system and the system automatically sets to G98 during initialization
(mm/min).
4)
When F=0, the system suspends and prompts an alarm message when executing the machining
the program.
5)
In G99, when the spindle speed is 0, the feed automatically pauses and the system displays
Pause: the spindle speed is 0. It keeps the state till the spindle speed is not zero, then, by
PROGRAMMING
pressing CYCLE START key again, the system recovers the execution.
6)
In G99, generally, when the spindle is just started, the system should delay a proper period of
time to wait the spindle speed to become stable, and then executes the cutting. Otherwise, the
system fails to detect the spindle speed, displaying Pause: the spindle speed is 0.
Example
N0100
G98 F800
; Sets the feed per minuteF feedrate: 800 mm/min;
F50
; F feedrate: 50 mm/min;
G99 F2.1
; Set the feed per revolutionF feedrate: 2.1 mm/r;
N0160
N0200
N0250
F0.56
; F feedrate 0.56mm/r
4.17
G31 Skip Function
The execution of G31 is almost the same as that of G01, and the difference is that G31 constantly
detects the state of the external input interface signal (G31I). If the signal meets the condition, the
coordinate axis stops the feed and then continues executing the next command; if the signal cannot
meet the condition, the coordinate axis feeds to the end point, then the system goes to the next
command.
Command format
244
G31
ZW)_
XU)_
G31
XU)_
F_
H_
F_
H_
Z/X two-axis simultaneously feed

X single-axis feed
Chapter Four
Word
X, Z, Y End point coordinates after the command ends.
U, W, V Incremental value counted by the theory end point.
F Feedrate. F is modal and can be omitted when it is not changed; it is controlled by the
feedrate override.
H Command bit parameter(H_d7 ~ H_d1reserved) ; the system defaults it to be 0 when it
defaults.
H_d0=0: G31I LOW meets the skip condition;
H_d0=1: G31I HIGH meets the skip condition;
Word range
X, Z, U, W
-9999.9999999.999mm
H0000000011111111
Z/X can select single-axis or two-axis simultaneous feed.

G31 traverse speed is specified by F and controlled by the feedrate override.
Actual feedrate = F x feedrate override
G31 is a non-modal command, which cannot be omitted in the next block if used.
Note
1 G31 input check function is non-standard pin input control; when the function is needed, the
user needs to define its pin in the interface parameter P532 (G31I) and connects the lines
correctly. For the details about the interface parameter definitions, see Section 4.6 Parameter
Operation Mode in Part Programming; for the wiring connection, see Chapter 3 CNC Device
Connection in Part Connection.
2 To ensure the position is correct, the execution decelerates to stop once the system detects the
external input interface signal change. Therefore, the actual feedrate in G31 cannot be too high
and it is suggested that it should be less than 1000mm/min. Otherwise, G31 cannot realize the
skip function because it cannot check the change of the interface signal .
Relative parameters
Interface parameter P532 defines the common signal names of the input interfaces.
Refer to G01 for the relative parameters of cutting feed.
Example
Current: X=100
G31 Z30
Z=100;
F500;
The move distance is Z70, Z moves at the speed of 500 mm/min till it reaches Z30 if G31I signal
does not meet the skip condition; if Z68.37, G31I meets the skip condition and Z immediately stops
running and the system executes the next command.
245
PROGRAMMING
Explanation

4.18
G66 -Memorizing Current Coordinates, G67-Return to Memorized Coordinates
Command format
G66
Memorizes the current coordinate of tool nose on Z, X, Y axes;
G67
W0
U0
Returns to the G66 position. The axis uncommanded in G66

does not move;
Explanation
X, Z: If they are specified using absolute coordinates, it means the axes rapidly traverse to those
absolute coordinate points.
U, W: If the relative coordinates which are not 0 are used, it means the axes rapidly traverse to the
new coordinates of G66 position plus the increment.
Z/X/Y can select single-axis, two-axis rapid traverse. Absolute coordinates and relative coordinates
cannot be used at the same time. The axis that does not move can be omitted, but G67 must be
PROGRAMMING
specified with coordinate words.

G66 is to store the current tool nose coordinates; G67 is to command the axis to move to the
coordinates rapidly.
G67 should be used only when G66 has been used once. Otherwise, the system issues an alarm. In
the program, G66 can be used several times, and G67 is to command to specified axis to rapidly
traverse to the latest coordinate position stored by G66.
G66/G67 cannot be in the same block with other commands. It must be specified in an
independent block. The movement path of G67 is the same as that of G00.
Example
N0010
G00 Z350 X280
N0010
T11
N0100
G00 Z102 X120
N0200
G66
Stores the current coordinates Z102, X120
N0200
T22
The tool nose coordinates are uncertain after tool changing;
N0300
G67
X120
W10
Defines the machining original point and position to this point;
X axis rapidly moves to 120, and Z axis rapidly moves to

102+10.
N0200
4.19
M02
Appendix: G function and Its Explanation Table (Table 4-3)

Programming format and explanation
Code
G00
G01
G02
G03
246
Function
G00
XU ZW single or two-axis
Rapid traverse
G01
XU ZW F single or two-axis
Linear interpolation
G02
XU ZW R F
XU ZW I K F
CCW
interpolation
circular
XU ZW R F
XU ZW I K F
CW
interpolation
circular
G02
G03
G03
Group
Remarks
Initial G
Modal G
Chapter Four
G05
G32
G33
G26
G28
G30
G05 XU ZW I K F
IKan intermediate on the arc
Circular interpolation
G32 ZW PE H
G33 XU ZW PE I K Q H
G26 XU ZW single or two-axis
Return to the program reference point via the
intermediate point; rapid traverse by G00.
G28 XU or G28 ZW
G30 P2 XU ZW) single or two-axis
G30 P3 XU ZW
G50
G50
G51
G51
G31
G31
G66, G67
XU ZW I
K R E
G75
G75
XU ZW I
K E
G90
G90
XU ZW R F
G92
G92
XU ZW PE I
G94
G94 XU ZW R F
G22 L
G80
G71
G72
G73
rd
Return to 2 , 3
program reference point
G76
G76 D I Q
P L R
G76 XU ZW PE I
G96
G96
G97
G97
G98
G99
G98
G99
F
F
One-shot G
One-shot G
One-shot G
One-shot G
One-shot G
End face drilling cycle
R L H
Outer/inner
grooving
cycle
Outer/inner
cylinder
face cycle
Thread cutting cycle
One-shot G
Local cycle start

Local cycle end
One-shot G
One-shot G
Delay
One-shot G
One-shot G
Outer/inner taper cycle
D
U W
XU I K F P Q
XU P Q F
U W
ZW I K F P Q
ZW P Q F
U W
XU ZW I K F P Q
XU ZW P Q F
Outer
roughing,
finishing
cycle
command group
End face roughing,
finishing
cycle
command group
L
R L H
Closed-loop
cutting
cycle command group
Multi threading
command group
cycle
Constant surface speed

ON
OFF
Feed per minute
Feed per revolution
Modal G
7
Initial G
8
Initial G
Modal G
Note: The system is in the G00G97G98 states upon power-on and reset.
247
PROGRAMMING
G74
G04
G71
G71
G710
G72
G72
G720
G73
G73
G730
nd
Return to the coordinate

point memorized by
G66
V0
G74
G04
One-shot G
Return to machine zero
H single or two-axis Skip function
G66
G22
G80
Program reference point

return
Memorizing current
coordinate point
G67 W0 U0
One-shot G
Workpiece coordinate
system setting
Workpiece coordinate
system recovery
single or two-axis
XU ZW F
Taping cycle
Constant thread cutting

4.20
AppendixG and Its Relative Parameter Explanation (Table 4-4)
Code
Function
Relative parameter explanation
G00
Rapid traverse
G01
Linear interpolation
G02
CCW circular interpolation
G03
CW circular interpolation
G05
Circular interpolation
G32
Taping cycle
P100, P103, P106, P112, P113, P114
G33
Constant thread cutting
P100, P101, P103, P104, P106, P107, P113, P116, P117,

P209, P306, P307, P403_d0
G26
G28
P100P108, P112, P114, P400_d3

P112, P113, P114, P401_d5, P401_d4
program reference point

return
Return to machine zero
nd
PROGRAMMING
G74
G75
Outer/inner grooving cycle
G76
Multiple thread cutting

cycle command group
G50
G51
G90
G92
Outer/inner cylinder face

cycle
Threading cycle
G94
Outer/inner taper cycle
G22
G80
G04
Local cycle start

Local cycle end
Delay
G71
G72
G73
G96
G97
G98
G99
G31
Outer roughing, finishing

cycle command group
End roughing , finishing
cycle
Closed-loop cutting cycle
command group
ON
OFF
Feed per minute
Feed per revolution
P021P026, P109, P110, bit parameter P406 and P407.

Refer to G00 for others
P003P008. Refer to G00 for others
P000, P001, P002
Refer to G00 and G01

The same as those of G74
P336, P337, P338, P339. Refer for G00 and G33 for
others
Refer to G00 for the relative parameters of rapid

traverse, and refer to linear and circular interpolation for
those of cutting feed
The same as those G71
Refer to G71, G72
P410_d6, P304, P305
P532. Refer to G01 for others
Skip function
G66
Memorizing
coordinates
G67
Return to coordinates
memorized by G66
248
rd
2 , 3 program reference
point return
Workpiece
coordinate
system setting
Workpiece
coordinate
system recovery
End face drilling cycle
G30
P112, P113, P114, P401_d4, P400_d2
the
current
Remarks
Chapter Five General Programming Rules and Examples
CHAPTER FIVE
5.1
GENERAL PROGRAMMING RULES AND EXAMPLES
General Programming Rules
The command compiling must meet the rules in one block, so that the system can identify them
conveniently; it is suggested that the command character should be placed in front of the data words.
When the system executes the Programming Rule Check, only the program meeting the programming
rules can be compiled; if an error is detected, an alarm is issued. Please observe the following rules:
1) No repetitive command is allowed in one block; otherwise, the system issues E202: Repetitive
command;
Incorrect example: N0200
G00 G00 Z30
2 The command character must be followed by the valid digital command; otherwise, the system
G23
Z30
No such a command.
3) There must be no repetitive data word in one block, otherwise, the system issues E234: the
data word is repetitive ;
G00 Z20 Z30
4) There must be no conflicting data words; otherwise the system issues E210; the excessive
words;
Incorrect exampleN0200
G00 Z20 W30;
5) The command character and word character must be followed by valid digits without a blank
space; otherwise the system issues E204: command format error;
N0200
6)
G00
Z 20
G 00
Z30
No blank space between Z and 20
No blank space between G and 00
The required data in the block cannot be omitted, otherwise, the system issues E206: missing
message;
G90
X100
The coordinates of the two axes must be

given. Z coordinate data is missing here.
7) There must be no words, letters and digits unrelated to the command; otherwise, the system
issues E203: Illegal message;
8)
G00
X W 100
; Unnecessary character W
The values of the data word must be within the valid range; otherwise, the system issues E211:
Data exceeding the range
9)
G00
X100
Z99999
; the data 9999 exceeds the range.
The first digit can be omitted when it is zero in the command.

Example: G00 can be abbreviated to G0.
249
PROGRAMMING
issues E201: Illegal command;

5.2
Programming Rules for Commands in One Block

Programming for multiple commands in one block means that there are many commands in one
block simultaneously, but all these commands cannot be in the same block. When the system
executes Programming rule check, only the programs meeting the programming rules can pass the
compiling; otherwise, the system issues an alarm and prompts Some commands need to be used
independently. And the rules are as follows:
1)
Commands only specified in an independent block:

G50, G51, G26, G28, G30, G31
G32, G33
G04
Program local cycleG22, G80
PROGRAMMING
Single canned cycleG92, G74, G75

Single canned cycleG90, G94
Compound cycleG71, G72, G73, G76
M00, M02, M20, M30, M96, M97, M98, M99
M21, M22, M23, M24
M91, M92, M93, M94
M81, M82, M83M60M74Self-defined commands can be in the same block with F,
S command
2The system cannot make a judgment for some commands below have mutually-contradictory
operations or the same data. To avoid the above, M, G commands which cannot be in the same
block are divided into many groups and only the commands in the different group can be in the
same block as follows:
M commands which can be in the same block are divided into many groups as follows:
Group 1M03, M04, M05
Group 2M08, M09
Group 5M32, M33
Group 6M41, M42, M43, M44
M commands which can be in the same block are divided into many groups as follows:
Group 1G00, G01, G02, G03, G05(Thereinto, G02, G03, G05 cannot be in the
same block with T command)
Group 2G96, G97
Group 3G98, G99
250

Note
1) The commands which must be specified in an independent block cannot be in the same block with
other commands; otherwise, the system issues E205: Incompatible commands, and they do not
meet the rules for the commands in the same block;
2) The commands in the same group cannot be in the same block; otherwise, the system issues
E205: Incompatible commands;
3) T command cannot be in the same block with G02, G03, G05; otherwise, the system issues E205:
Incompatible commands; and they do not meet the rules for the commands in the same block;
5.3
Command Execution Sequence
Relative parameters
P401 bit parameter
efficiency setting (3-level)
P401_d3 Execution sequence of many commands in the same block: 0-substep 1-synchronism
Substep execution for many commands in the same block

P401_d3=0substep; at the moment, P401_d2 is not active.
When many commands in the same block are executed, their execution sequence is as
follows: after one functional command is executed, the system executes the next one till all are
performed.
Table 7-1 V Command execution sequence table
Command execution sequence(from top to down)
Function
M32
M10
M78
M41, M42, M43, M44
Cooling ON
Chuck clamping
Tailstock advancing
Spindle gear shifting 1st, 2nd, 3rd,
4th gear
Spindle gear shifting or rotating
speed
Spindle ON
Cooling ON
S function
M03, M04
M08
G98/G99 F function
G96/G97 S function
T function
G40/G41/G42
G00/G01/G02/G03/G05
M05
M09
M33
M79
M11
M12
M80
Tool change
Motion command
Spindle OFF
Cooling OFF
Lubricating OFF
Tailstock retracting
Workpiece releasing
251
PROGRAMMING
P401_d2 Rapid skip execution function: 0-ON 1-OFF
Example
N1000
T11 M03 M10 G00 X50 M08
Substep execution sequence: M10, M03, M08, T11, G00 ;

Total used time for executing the whole block is equal to the sum of each single command
execution time.
Synchronous execution for many commands in the same block

P401_d3=1synchronism; P401_d2=0: forbid the execution of rapid block jump function
In the synchronous execution in table 7-1, M, S, T before the motion command are executed at
the same time with the motion command, and M command after the motion command cannot be
executed till the motion command is executed. The system executes the next block after all are
executed.
The commands which are not relative to each other are almost executed simultaneously. They
PROGRAMMING
are not executed orderly. The system automatically arranges the execution sequence for those M
codes with
interlock relationship according to the parameters.
Example
N1000
T11 M03 M10 G00 X50 M08
When the parameter is set to starting the spindle after clamping (P402_d5=0), the system
follows the interlock relationship and its execution process is as follows:
1) Simultaneously start executing T11/ G00 X50/M10/M08;
2) Execute M03 after M10 is executed;
3) Execute the next block after all are executed.
When the parameter is set to starting the spindle without firstly being clamped, the execution
process is as follows:
1) Simultaneously start executing T11/ G00/M10/M08/ M03;
2) Execute the next block after all are executed.
The total used time for executing the whole block is equal to the longest single execution time.
Synchronous execution for many commands in the same block and rapid block jump execution
allowed
P401_d3=1synchronism;
P401_d2=1rapid block jump execution is allowed.
In the mode, the system rapidly skips to the next block after the axis motion commands of the
current block are executed (do not wait for the end of execution of other M, S, T).
Note
1) The system follows the rule: wait the others to be executed when other commands in the same
group are executed.
2) When the system meets The command only specified in an independent block , it waits to
execute it after the all the previous commands are executed; and it executes the next block
after The command only specified in an independent block is executed.
252

3) When the user needs to execute the next after all the previous commands are executed, he
needs to insert one G04 D0 command.
4) When rapid block jump execution is allowed, note that the distance between tool change point
and workpiece must be sufficient, to prevent the tool colliding with the workpiece when the tool
is being changed and approaching the workpiece.
5.4
Programming Example
All the following programming examples use the tool as Fig. 5-1:
No. 2 tool
No. 3 tool No. 4 tool
Fig. 5-1 Programming example tool shape
5.4.1
Outer Machining Example
Example 1Workpiece in Fig. 5-2. Bar: 64105 mm. No. 1 tool is used for roughing, No. 2 for finishing.
(G90 inner/outer cylindrical surface turning cycle) .
Fig. 5-2
N0000
N0010
G50 X100
M3 S01
N0020
M8
Z150
Outer machining example
;
;
;
Sets a the workpiece coordinate system

Starts the spindle and set to the spindle
speed gear 1
Cooling ON
253
PROGRAMMING
No. 1 tool

N0030
T11
PROGRAMMING
N0040 G00 Z103 X65

N0050 G01 X0 F60
N0060 G00 Z105
N0070 X60.5
N0080 G01 Z0 F60
N0090 G00 X62
N0100 Z105
N0110 X60.5
N0120 G90 X56.5 Z35 F100
cycle command
N0130 X52.5
N0140 X48.5
N0150 X45.5
N0155 G00 X45.5
cycle
N0160 G90 X40.5 Z65
cycle command
N0170 X35.5
N0180 X30.5
N0190 G00 X100 Z150
N0200 T22
N0210 S2
N0220 G00 Z103
N0230 X32
N0240 G01 X27
N0250 X30 Z101.5 F60
N0260 Z65
N0270 X45
N0280 Z35
N0290 X60
N0300 Z0
Z150
N0320 M5
N0330 M9
N0340 M2
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Executes NO.1 tool change and execute its

compensation
Tool rapidly approaches the workpiece
Cuts the end face at the speed of 60mm/min
Tool leaves the end face of workpiece
Positions the tool with the allowance 0.5mm
Turns outer 60.5
Tool leaves the surface of workpiece
Tool rapidly traverses to the workpiece
Turns outer 45mm with cylindrical surface
;
;
;
;
Tool infeed 4mm and cycles again

X rapidly traverses the starting point of next
Turns 30mm outer with cylindrical surface
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;

Retracts tool to a safety position
Changes the No.2 tool
Sets to the spindle high speed
Tool positions to the vicinity of the workpiece
Tool infeed to starting point of chamfer
Finishes chamfer 1.5mm
Finishes outer 30mm
Finishes outer 45mm
Finishes outer 60mm N0310
Tool returns the origin point
Spindle OFF
Cooling off
End of program
G00
X100
5.4.2 Thread Machining Example

Example 2as Fig. 5-3. Bar: 30100 mm, No. 1 is roughing tool, No. 3 is parting tool, No. 4 for 60
threading tool.
254
Fig. 5-3
G50 X50 Z11

M3 S2
M8
T11
N0040 G00 Z0 X35

N0050 G01 X0 F60
N0060 G00 W2
N0070 X24
N0080 G01 Z-78 F60
N0090 G00 X26
N0100 Z0
N0110 X24
N0120 G90 X21 Z-50
;
;
;
;
F100
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
N0130
N0140
X18
X15.9
;
;
N0150
N0160
N0170
N0180
N0190
G01 X14 Z0
X16 W-1
G00 X50 Z50
T44
S2
;
;
;
;
;
N0200
N0220
N0230
N0240
N0250
N0260
N0270
N0280
G00 X19
G92 X15
X14.2
X13.8
X13.6
G00 X60
T33
G00 X26
Z2
Z-50
Z50
Z-78
P1.5 K2
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Sets a workpiece coordinate system

Starts the spindle, sets the spindle speed to No.2 gear
Cooling ON
Executes No. 1 tool change and executes its tool
compensation
Tool approaches the workpiece
Cuts the end face at the speed of 60mm/min
Tool leaves the end face of workpiece
Turns outer 24 and reserves the cut width
Tool leaves the workpiece surface
PROGRAMMING
N0000
N0010
N0020
N0030
Thread machining example
Turns outer 16mm with cylindrical surface cycle

command
Tool infeeds 3mm and cycles again
Tool infeeds 2.1mm and cycles again, outer is less than
0.1mm
Tool positions to the starting point of chamfer
Cuts a chamfer
Retracts the tool to a safety position
Change No.4 thread tool
Sets the spindle to high speed (the speed is not more
than 800n/min)
Positions to the thread starting point of the first tool
Machines the thread, length of run out 2mm
Tool infeed 0.8mm to the 2nd thread machining
Tool infeed 0.4mm to the 3rd thread machining
Tool infeed 0.2mm to the 4th thread machining
Retracts the tool to a safety position
Change No. 3 tool with tool width of 3mm
Positions to the cut-off point
255

N0290
N0300
N0310
N0320
N0330
G01
G26
M9
M5
M2
X0 F50
;
;
;
;
;
Cut off
X, Z return to the starting point of machining
Cooling OFF
Spindle OFF
End of program
Example 3Cut the multiple threads with M98 subprogram call and M99 subprogram return commands.
Fig. 5-4a: metric multiple thread. Fig.5-4b: inch multiple thread with three threads. The program
is as follows:
PROGRAMMING
Fig. 5-4
Multiple thread cutting example
a (Metric multiple threads)

N0010
N0020
N0030
N0040
N0050
G50 X100 Z50

M03 S600
T44
G00 X25 Z5
G92 X19.5 Z-30
N0060 X19
N0070 X18.5
N0080 X18.35
N0090 G00 X100
N0100 M05
N0110 M02
; Sets a workpiece coordinate system

; Spindle rotates (CW) with 600 r/min
; Changes No. 4 tool and executes its offset
; Rapidly approaches the workpiece
P4.5 L3 ; Executes No. 1 thread cycleP= thread lead
; Tool infeed 0.5mm, executes the 2nd thread machining
; Tool feed 0.5mm, executes the 3rd thread machining
; Tool feed 0.15mm and executes the 4th thread machining
; Rapidly returns to program origin
; Stops the spindle
; End of program
Z50
b (Inch multiple threads)

N0010 G50 X100 Z50
N0020 M03 S600
N0030 T44
N0040 G00 X25 Z5
N0050 G92 X19.5 Z-30
N0060 X19
N0070 X18.5
N0080 X18.35
N0090 G00 X100 Z50
N0100 M05
N0110 M02
256
E4.667

; Spindle rotates(CW) with 600n/min
; Changes No. 4 tool and executes its offset
; Rapid approaches the workpiece
L3 ; Executes the 1st thread cycle
; Tool infeed 0.5mm, executes the 2nd thread machining
; Tool infeed 0.5mm, executes the 3rd thread machining
; Tool infeed 0.15mm, executes the 4th thread machining
; Rapidly returns to program reference point
; Stops the spindle
; End of program

5.4.3
Compound Machining Example
Example 4Compound machining as Fig. 5-5(G71, G92).

Bar 135178 mm. 4 tools are used for machining:
No. 1 is outer roughing tool; No.2 is outer finishing tool; No.3 is for grooving with 3mm width;
No.4 is 60 threading tool. The machining allowance in finish machining is defined by the
R2
1 45
PROGRAMMING
M40 3
offset parameter T8.
1 45
R2
Blank appearance
185
Reference point
Fig. 5-5
N0000 G50 X150 Z250
N0010 M3 S01
N0020 M8
N0030 T08
N0040 G00 X136 Z180
N0050 G71 X0 I4 K2.5 L10
N0060 G01 W-4
N0070 X16
N0080 W-23
N0090 X40
N0100 W-63
N0110 G02 X80 W-20 R20
N0120 G03 X120 W-20 R20
N0130 G01 W-20
N0140 G01 X130 W-5
N0150 G01 W-25
N0155 G00 X150
N0160 G26 X136
Z180
N0180 T22
N0190 S02
Machining example

; Starts the spindle and sets its speed to gear 1
; Cooling ON
; Executes the tool compensation with machining allowance
; Approaches the workpiece
F80 ; Outer compound cycle
; Approaches the face of workpiece
; Turns the end face
; Turns outer 16
; Turns outer 40
; Turns convex arc
; Turns concave arc
; Turns outer 120
; Turns taper
; Turns outer 130
;
; Returns to the starting point after roughing
; Changes No. 2 tool to finish the outer
; Sets to the spindle to high speed
257
PROGRAMMING
N0200
N0210
N0220
N0230
N0240
N0250
N0260
N0270
N0280
N0290
N0300
N0310
N0320
N0325
N0330
N0340
N0350
N0360
N0370
N0380
N0390
N0400
N0410
N0414
N0418
N0420
N0425
N0430
G00 X0 Z178
G01 Z176 F50
G01 X14
X16 W-1
W-22
X37
X40 W-1.5
W-61.5
G02 X80 W-20 I0 K-20
G03 X120 W-20 I40 K0
G01 W-20
X130 W-5
W-25
G00 X150
G26 X136
Z180
T33
G00 X42 Z120
G01 X30 F50
G01 X40
G01 Z121.5
X37 Z121.5
X41
G00 Z153
G01 X20 F200
X10 F50
G00 X100
G26 X136
Z180
T44 S01
N0440
N0460
N0470
N0480
N0485
N0490
N0500
N0510
N0520
N0530
G00 X42 Z155

G92 X39 W-34 P3
X38.2
X37.7
G00 X100
G26 X136
Z180
T11
M05
M09
M02
; Rapidly approach the workpiece

; Approaches the end face of workpiece
; Turns the end face to the chamfer
; Chamfer 145
; Finishes outer 16
; Finishes the end face 40
; Chamfer 145
; Finishes outer 40
; Finishes convex circle
; Finishes concave circle
; Turns outer 120
; Turns taper
; Finishes outer 130
; X rapidly retracts the tool
; Returns to the starting point of machining
; Changes No. 3 tool to groove
; Groove 30
; Retracts the tool
; Positions to the starting point of chamfer
; Chamfer 145
; Retracts the tool
; Rapidly traverses
; Groove 10
; Changes No. 4 tool to cut the thread and set to the spindle
low speed
; Executes the thread machining cycle
; Feeds 0.8 and executes the 2nd tool machining
; Feeds 0.5 and executes the 3rd tool machining
; Changes No. 1 tool
; Spindle OFF
; Cooling OFF
; End of program
Example 5Fig. 5-6. Bar: 50100. Machining with 3 toolsNo.1: outer turning tool; No.2: pointed tool;
No.3: grooving tool with 3mm width.
258
Fig. 5-6
Q0100
N0120 T22
N0130 G00 X51 Z-20
N0140 M98 P0160 L3
N0150 M97 P0200

; Spindle rotates(CW) with 600 rev/min
; Changes No.1 tool and executes its offset
; Cooling ON
F50 ; Executes the outer compound cycle
; Turns the arc R20
; Turns the outer 45
; Rapidly traverses to X50 safety position
; Rapidly returns to reference point (program starting
point X100 Z50)
; Changes No. 2 and execute its offset
; Rapidly traverse
; Calls subprogram
; Program skips to N0200
N0160 G01 U-2 F40
; X feeds 2approaches to workpiece
N0170 G02 U0 W-15 R7.5 F35

N0180 G01 W15 F500
N0190 M99
N0200 G26 X100
N0210 G26 Z50
N0220 T33
N0230 G00 X50 Z-43
N0240 G75 X30 Z-50 I5 K2 E3 F50
N0250 G01 X45 Z-42 F50
N0260 X43 Z-43
N0270 X30
N0280 Z-50
; Turns R7.5 arc

; Return to arc starting point
; End of subprogram
; X rapidly returns to program reference point (i.e. X100)
; Z rapidly returns to program reference point (i.e. Z50)
; Uses No. 3 grooving tool and executes its tool offset
; Rapidly positions to cycle starting point( tool width 3mm)
; Executes the grooving cycle command
; Chamfer
; Chamfer
; Moves to X30 outer to execute finishing
; Turns 30 outer
PROGRAMMING
N0010 G50 X100 Z50

N0020 M4 S600
N0030 T11
N0040 M 8
N0050 G00 X50 Z3
N0060 G71 X0 I3 K2 P0070
N0070 G01 Z0
N0080 X5
N0090 G03 X45 Z-20 R20
N0100 G01 Z-65
N0110 G00 X50
N0111 G26 X100 Z50
Machining example
259

N0290 G00 X45
N0300 G01 Z-51 F50
N0310 X43 Z-50
N0320 G00 X46
N0330 Z-62
N0340 G01 X42 Z-63 F50
N0350 X0
N0360 G26 X100
N0370 G26 Z50
N0380 T10
N0390 M5
N0400 M9
N0400 M2
PROGRAMMING
260
; Positions to the chamfer position

; Chamfer
; Position the cut-down point
; Chamfer
; Return to X reference point
; Return to Z reference point
; Uses the reference tool T10
; Spindle OFF
; Cooling OFF
; End of program
Chapter Six
CHAPTER SIX
Alarm Message
ALARM MESSAGE
All the alarm messages in this CNC system are prompted in the screen by Chinese characters.
Please performs corresponding handling according to the prompting content. Each alarm meaning is
shown in the following table. Workpiece program is also referred to as machining program in the
following table.
The alarm number starts with capital letter E followed by a three-digit number. The classification is
as follows:
E001~E009:
Alarms in PARAMETER, OFFSET operation mode;
E100~ E199Alarms in EDIT operation mode;

E200~ E299Alarms in PROGRAM COMMAND;
E600~ E699Alarms in PROGRAM CHECK;
E300~ E399Alarms in JOG, AUTO operation mode when executing relative operation;
E400~ E499Related Alarms in JOG, AUTO operation mode when executing statements.
Emergency Stop Alarm

For the details about the stop operation in system emergency, please refer to Section 4.1.4.3
Emergency Stop Alarm in PartOperation.
6.2 Alarm Table in PARAMETER, OFFSET Operation Mode (i.e. E001~E009)

Alarm
No.
Alarm prompt
Alarm cause
Troubleshooting
E001
Not support USB
Use USB device supported by the

system
E002
USB
suddenly
USB device isnt supported by

this system software
Device is removed suddenly in
making USB device check
Dont USB device is inserted
USB device doesnt create the
specified catalogue and file
Insert USB device

Create the valid catalogue and file in
USB device
USB file saving failure
Save again or check USB device
E003
Removed
E007
No USB inserted
Fail to find valid
catalogue or file
USB
file
saving
failure
Not enough memory
in USB
Create content fail
E008
Create file fail
Failure in creating file
E009
USB read file fail
USB is failed in reading file
E004
E005
E006
E010
E011
E012
E013
Not enough U disc rest room

U disc fails in creating
specified catalogue
the
Fail to find dedicated

content or file
File is too big
Fail to open file
USB is failed in reading catalogue

list
No dedicated file
The file in specified list does not

exist or has been destroyed
Too large file

Cant open the file in specified
catalogue or file is destroyed
Incorrect
operation
operation.
Forbid
this
Use a bigger U disc or check U disc

to release more space
Check USB device and create the
appointed catalogue again
Check USB device or create the
specified format file again
Check the USB device or read file
again
Check the USB device or create this
catalogue again
File is too large, modify the file
Check the file name ,suffix if they can
match the rule or check the USB
equipment, create the file again
Create the file in specified file
261
PROGRAMMING
6.1

Alarm
No.
Alarm prompt
Alarm cause
E014
Invalid Para NO
Parameter number exceeds

allowed range
E015
Para NO not standard
E016
E017
E018
E019
E020
E021
E022
PROGRAMMING
E023
E024
E025
E027
~
E029
E030
E031
Specify Para NO
before data
Error in Para data
Repeatedly
input
Para NO
Invalid characters in
the data
Wrong
Para
file
formula
S-upgrade code proof
error
Stop communication
Illegal I/O port set pin
NO out of range
Illegal I/O port set
input pin NO which
used
Illegal I/O port set
output pin NO which
used (33)
Modify the parameter data
Cant have illegal character in file
Delete the illegal character
Parameter file format cant meet

the requirement
Create the parameter file according

to the parameter file format or add the
parameter file sign
Contact the supplier
Software promoting
checking error
command
Delete manual, stop transmission,

RS232 communication is failed in
sending and receiving
Interface
parameter
setting
exceeds the maximal I/O pin
number
Parameter setting and I/O input
pin collision
Check and delete

parameter number
the
repeat
Check the command control unit

serial software tool or hardware
connection
Modify the I/O to the specified range
Release this I/O or use other I/O pin
Check the pitch

position and modify
Fail to read Para,

initialization
Illegal character OFT.
Failure
in
SRAM
saving
parameter, cant read
Illegal character in offset number
of
tool
compensation
transmission file
There is no tool compensation
number behind the T of tool
compensation transmission file,
or the offset number lack T sign
Illegal
exceed
data
Input data error

File symbol error
Send OFT fail
262
Parameter data exceeds

the
system specified range
Parameter number cant be input
repeatedly
Z/X/Y axis pitch setting value is

wrong, doesnt meet the standard
OFT. NO
164
E038
Add the parameter number of the first

parameter
Z/X/Y thread invalid
E034
E037
Invalid character in parameter

number, does not meet the
standard
Must have parameter number in
the first parameter
Change the parameter number into

the available parameter number
range
Delete the invalid character in the
parameter number
Release this I/O or use other I/O pin
E032
E036
the
Parameter setting and I/O input

pin collision
Tool
compensation
NO not standard
E035
Troubleshooting
The tool offset number in tool

compensation transmission file
exceeds (1~64) range
Tool compensation data in tool
compensation transmission file
has illegal character in
The tool compensation input data
in tool compensation transmission
file has mistake
File
type
mark
in
tool
compensation transition file is
wrong
sending tool compensation file
failure or be manually cancelled
compensation
Save again
Completing the number behind the T
sign in file, or add the sign of offset
number
Modify or delete the exceeded tool

compensation
number,
change
them to the specified range
Check data according the tool
compensation communication file
format and correct it
Modify the file type according to the
tool compensation file format
Sending tool compensation file
according to the correct tool
compensation
file
format
and
operation method
Chapter Six
Alarm
No.
Alarm prompt
Alarm cause
Receive OFT fail
File is too big
E041
~
E043
Z/X/Y
compensation
out of range
E044
~
E046
Ratio of magnify &

coefficient
exceed
(1/128-128)
Para set conflict,
input port was used
E047
E048
E049
E051
E053
E054
pitch
value
Para set conflict,

output port was used
(33)
Abnormal, ESC
Not support USB file
formula
USB memory is too
big
USB fails to transmit,
reset
Function not provided
in this system
tool
delete
The length of received file is out

of the maximal length of buffer
zone
Known from system internal
arithmetic, in the 0.254mm length
of Z/X/Y axis, the calculated
departure value is out of 7um
Ratio between multiplication and
division is out of (1/128 128)
range
The
corresponding
function is occupied
pin
in
The corresponding pin in inputting

function is occupied
Receive the tool compensation file

according
the
correct
tool
compensation
file
format
and
operation mode
Modify the file according the file
format, correct the received file
according the requirement
Change the pitch compensation
value
of
pitch
compensation
parameter to small
Modify parameter: multiplication or
division
Release the occupied input pin in
interface parameter, or set other free
input pin
Release the occupied output pin in
interface parameter, or set other free
output pin
In reading the USB process, it is

disordered
The system only reads FAT16 or
FAT32 file format
Operate the USB device over again
The system only supports the

maximal 8G USB device
Change the USB device
Failure in USB data transmission

process
Press system reset key and try again,

or operate the USB device again
928TD system does not provide

this function.
Only the
function
Check or change USB device
928TEa
provides
PROGRAMMING
E050
Troubleshooting
Fail
in
receiving
compensation file or
manual
E039
E040
Alarm Message
this
6.3 Table of Alarm in Edit Operation Mode(i.e. E100~ E199)
Alarm
No.
E100
E101
E102
E103
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Program to be deleted
doesnt exist
Block is too long in
received program
The program list hasnt

program to be deleted
Program which will

send doesnt exist
No specified program
Dont choose program in program

catalogue
Choose the needed program in

program catalogue
RS232- failure in communication

sending

serial system tool or hardware
interface
Check the receiving programs
number
E111
Received program NO
is wrong
Received program is
void
RS232-fail to receive
program
The program number

doesnt in (0~254)
Not support USB
E120
wrong operation
Modify the program to be sent
RS232-fail
program
E113
send
the
There are blocks exceeded the

length in the program of system
sent
The program catalogue hasnt the
program to be sent
E110
E112
to
Troubleshooting
range
Rebuilt the program to be sent
No content in program
Check and modify the program
RS232- failure in communication

receiving

serial system tool or hardware
interface
The system cant identify this USB
Use the USD equipment which can

263

Alarm
No.
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
E121
USB is removed
device
The system is identifying the USB
equipment, the equipment is
moved suddenly
Dont insert the USB equipment
Manual
operation,
press
emergency or reset key
The USB is failed in saving
program
be identified by the system

wrong operation, forbidden these
operation
E122
E123
Not insert USB

Stop opening USB
E124
Fail to save program

in USB
E126
Surplus space in USB

is not enough
Contents fail
The U disc doesnt have enough

rest room
Change the bigger U disc or tidy U

disc to release more room
The U disc creates

catalogue failure
Check the USB device
E128
Fail to set specified

content
The
program
in
specified
catalogue cant be opened
E129
Fail to set program
E130
Stop sending program
E131
No specified content
in USB: C928PRO
USB fails to transmit &
to send now
Stop receiving files
The U disc is failed in creating

program
Manual
operation,
press
The USB device doesnt have the
specified catalogue: C928PRO
E127
PROGRAMMING
E132
E133
E134
Check the USB device or the

program is destroyed and must to
be created over again
Manual operation, exit the sending
Create this catalogue
The USB device communication

error
Press reset key and then insert the

USB device again
Manual
operation,
press
The USB is failed in reading
program
Manual
operation,
exit
the
receiving
Check the USB device or create
this program
The
communication
program
capacity is too large
Cant open program, maybe its
destroyed
The program is too large, modify

the program
Check the USB device or create
this program
Check the program error again
E136
Fail to read program in

USB
Program is too big
E137
Fail to open program
E142
Program is too long,

delete extra part
Program is too long,
delete it
Current program is
void, so cant rename
USB-program
to
receive doesnt exist
Program error
E147
Not
support
file
system in USB, use
FAT32
The U disc isnt FAT16 or FAT32

file system
E160
Program NO is wrong
Modify the input program number
E161
Copied program exist
E162
Program is void &

cant copy
Editing 253 program
exceed memory
Only (000254) program can be

input
The program to be copied has
existed
The current program is empty and
cant be copied
The 4M program editing storage
room is full
Cant go on the next edit, except

the editing program can release
some storage room
Delete some programs in system
E143
E144
E145
E163
264
specified
Insert the USB device

Manual operation, stop to open the
USB device
E164
Exceed
program
memory, fail to save
E165
No
deleting
all
Check the program error again

Program error
The current program is empty and
cant change the name
Edit the program first
The USB receiving program does

not exist
No this program in the USB

equipment, create this program
again
Suggest using FAT32 file system
Power-off
protection
program
storage area is full and cant
protect any more
The system parameter enactment
The program has existed, this

operation cant go on
Edit the program first
Modify the enactment parameter
Chapter Six
Alarm
No.
Alarm Message
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
programs
Renamed
exist
E167
Fail to erase FLASH
E168
Fail to write FLASH
E169
Editing
program
exceeds memory
cant delete all program

The program to be changed the
name has been existed, cant
change the name
System hardware: storage CMOS
chip has problem
System hardware: storage CMOS
chip has problem
The storage room of 800k program
editing area is full
according to the privilege
E166
E171
No command in help
Command input error, or dont

support this command
E172
E173
Program line too long

Replace failed, no
content replace
Processing program
locked, no rewriting
Para set no line
number, no arrange
again
Edit and replace error

Edit and replace error
Please delete the old program

firstly
Contact the supplier, change the
storage CMOS chip
Contact the supplier, change the
storage CMOS chip
Cant go on the next edit, except
the editing program can release
some storage room
Check the command to be looking
for, input the correct command
again
Check the replacing content again
Check the replacing content again
Set the bit parameter P416_d0 to

be 1
Set the bit parameter P416_d0 to

be 0
E174
E175
program
Set the P333 to be 0, the system

compositor again function is invalid
Set the P333 to be non zero value

again
The types of alarm relative to programs are divided to: Alarm in PROGRAM COMMAND, Alarm
in PROGRAM CHECK.
6.4.1
Alarm in Program Command (i.e. E200~299)
Alarm in program command means the alarm due to incorrect command in workpiece program. It
can be eliminated by inputting the correct command, and it has little relation to the setting of parameters.
Alarm List in programming command
Alarm
No.
E201
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
Illegal command
E202
Command repeat
Input again according system

command list
Delete the repeated command
E203
Illegal information
E204
Command
format
wrong
Command
isnt
compatible
Lack of information
The
system
undefined
command
appears in block
The same command is input repeatedly in
the program
The system unidentified command
appears in block
The command format is wrong in the
block
Two or more commands incompatibility
appear in the same block
Delete
the
unwanted
command or line input
Missed the command needed content in

the block
Input the command needed

content according the correct
format
Modify program or tool nose
radius(happen in running)
E205
E206
E207
Tool tip radius too

much
E208
Brackets is miss
tool nose radius is too big or path is too

short, cant make the tool nose radius
compensation
Without brackets in the statement
Delete the wrong command,

Input the correct command
Input again according the
correct command format
Brackets are added to the

265
PROGRAMMING
6.4 Table of Alarms Relative to Program (i.e.E200~ E299, E600~ E699)

Alarm
No.
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
E209
Too
many
commands
&
characters
Surplus characters
The command character in same block is

over 20
source program
Modify source program, or line
input
The value in the block is over the

specified range
E215
Data
exceeding
range
Errors in data
Single block is too
long
Use
command
independently
Lack of line number
E216
Line number repeat
E217
Program stock data

has err
Errors in variable
NO
Edit
area
is
unusable
Sentences
calculate, divisor is 0
Not assign a value
to variable
Program executes,
information lost
E210
E211
E212
E213
E214
PROGRAMMING
E218
E219
E220
E221
E222
E224
E225
E226
E227
E228
E232
E233
266
Buffer area file too

big
Orbit data cant
compensate
Coordinate
fields
repeat
Data format wrong
Program hasnt end
command
Errors in command
data after G92
No
user-defined
command
E234
E235
Data field repeat

G71/G72 not inc &
dec relations
E236
Forbid com exist

G71/G72
(forbid
commands exist in
Unwanted field is input in the block
Delete the unwanted field in

the block
Modify the is wrong data again
The data dont meet the standard

The whole line number of part program is
over the range
Modify the is wrong data again

Modify the workpiece program
some commands are in an alone block

without others
Modify the source program
The specified program line number of

command G71, G72, M96, M97, M98
doesnt exist in this program i.e. the
system has not found the line number for
the call or the transfer
Repeated program line number in
program
makes
the
block
G71/G72/M96/M97/M98 not be identified
i.e. the program has more than two call or
transfer needed line number
System EMS memory error or program
error
Modify the source program,

input the correct block line
number
The variable number exceeds the set

range
Using the
number
System battery is shortage
Need to clear out program,

Edit the program again
In the statement operation, the divisor is

zero
Modify the divisor in macro

command, not to be zero
Input interface variable is read only,

cant evaluate it i.e. input
Modify source program
The data has problem

translate and edit process
Power on again
in
program
There is repeated program line

number in modifying program
Need the professional

check the system all sided
usable
to
variable
The editing single program is too big
Edit error, cant make the tool nose

radius compensation
Coordinate field repeat
Delete one field of them
Data format error (such as: F1r1, G1r,

M1r, T2r), or commands like G1r, M1r, T2r
are used.
The program dont have the ending
command M02 or M20 or M30
The followed command data dont meet

the format
At first make program for the needed

user-defined command M60, then harden
it
The same field in block is input repeatedly
The coordinate data in block which is
followed command G71/G72 doesnt meet
the condition of increase or decrease by
degrees
The block followed G71/G72 command
doesnt include the motion command
beside G01/G02/G03
Write M60
harden it
Modify source program, add

the ending command
program,
then
Delete the repeat data field

Chapter Six
Alarm
No.
E237
E238
E239
E240
E241
E243
E244
E246
E247
E248
E249
E250
E251
E252
E253
E254
E255
E256
E257
E258
E259
E260
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
Arc uses R program, the distance from

starting point to end point is longer than
diameter
When the arc command G02 and G03
use K.I program, the data cant form the
correct arc section
The data by G05 cant form the correct arc

section
Excessive nested call in the program
254 program has used motion command
Modify command or system

parameter
Too many data after

decimal
Too many decimal in
data
Lack of data after
decimal
Not
input
nega
(negative) NO in the
field
Too much leading
zero
Not
cancel
tool
radius
compensation
The data behind the decimal point

exceeds the limited range
At most three data is behind

the decimal point
Wrong data is input i.e. 0.343.44
Modify data
The decimal point is input, but no data

followed
Delete the decimal point
The negative is used in this field
Check the notebook, modify

the data
The data like 000033 is used
Omit the needless zero in the

front
Dont cancel the tool nose radius

compensation function before using
compound command
The cancel command G40 is

added in the proper place
No change in tip
radius
compensation
G00/G01
cancel
radius compensation
G00/G01 sets radius
compensation
No
replacing
variable
in
M
command
No
orbit
com
(command)
in
G71/G72 cycle
Forbidden
M3/M4
com in M47
Spindle allows to
use M47
Lack of module G
command
In the state of tool nose radius

compensation, there is operation of
changing tool
Delete
the
radius
compensation, then change
the tool
The command beside G00/G01 is used to

delete the tool nose radius compensation
Modify source command
The command beside G00/G01 is used to

create the tool nose radius compensation
Commands such as M81 Ir1 are used.
The command which can produce the

comparatively moving coordinate is
lacked in cycle
Check the block P, Q in G71,

G72 are correct or not
The M3/M4 command is used in M47

state
Using the command

change the state
The spindle dont stop
Stop the spindle
When
compound
command
is
consecutively cancelled, the G command
is not used
In the special situation, this kind of
variable is used in illegal
G command is added
So large chamfer data cant be carried in

this path
Reduce the chamfer data
G71/G72)
Chord is longer than
diameter
Dis (cen to 2 points)
not equal
(distances
from
center to 2 points
arent equal)
G05 data cannot
form arc
Too many program
nested calling layers
#254
not
use
traverse com
No using the type of

variable
Beveling data is too
big
Editing is cut off
No Y axis traverse in
Reset key is pressed in program

When the Y axis has exchanged the
PROGRAMMING
E245
Alarm prompt
Alarm Message
after
Modify the program according

267

Alarm
No.
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
M48
spindle, the moving command cant be

used in Y axis
The reset key is stopped in the drawing
demonstration
Whole circle is used in chamfer
to the real situation
E261
Drawing is cut off
E262
No chamfering to full
circle
Use pointer variable
wrongly
Arc radius is too big
E263
E264
E265
E266
E267
E268
PROGRAMMING
E269
E270
E271
E272
E273
E275
E276
E278
No calling in monitor
macro
Pointer
variable
points invalid NO
no
compensate
(compensating) to
full circle C
Traverse is 0, retract
too big (traverse
amount is 0 or
retraction is too big)
Traverse amount but
no offset (amount)
Orbit
(amount)
bigger
than
(stipulated) value
Start & orbit points
not meet (the
requirements)
S value cant be 0 in
G50
Macro
value
is
negative
Center of cycle isnt
in coordinate
Roughing
blocks
exceed
specified
value
Forbidden command
in G73 canned cycle
E279
Nesting call in this

command forbidden
E280
No
relevant
command
in
executed program
E281
R must be 0 when
using
precession
function
6.4.2
The pointer
variable has special
explanation, it must be used carefully
Divide into two semi-circles
Modify program
The arc radius by I/K program is over the

range
Call command is used in process monitor
r7000 ~r7009 commands
Modify program
The pointer
variable points to the
forbidden variable
Check the
modify it
Tool nose radius compensation, the

program path has the whole circle
program
Divide into two semi-circles
When making the G90 and G94 command

program, the starting point and end point
dont meet the regulation
Modify program

program, it doesnt meet the regulation
Modify program
When making G71 and G72 command

program, the path exceeds the specified
data
Modify program

program, it doesnt meet the regulation
Modify program
Used the G50 command, it doesnt meet

the program regulation
Modify the S value
The variable value is negative, but the

command need it be positive number
Modify program
When the arc interpolation uses R

program, the circle center doesnt in the
stated range
Not conforming to the programming
regulation in compound command
programming
Modify program

regulation
in
G73
command
programming.
regulation
in
G73
command
programming.
When executing G66/G67, G67 can be
executed only after G66 is executed at
least once; or G67 can be used when G66
is used at least once in programming,
regulation When using precession
function in G92 command
Modify program
Using jumping P or other

method to control
program,
then
Modify program
Modify program
Re-select program; or modify
program
Modify program
Alarm in Program Comprehensive Check Alarm (E600~E699)
Alarm in program comprehensive check alarm means the alarm due to the use of the command
268
Chapter Six
Alarm Message
which conflicts with the system parameters. When the workpiece program is checked independently,
there is no problem. Therefore, it is necessary to analyze the program from setting of the whole auxiliary
parameters and interface parameters, then to modify the program and parameter setting to eliminate the
alarm.
List of alarm in program comprehensive check
Alarm
No.
E601
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
Illegal use Sxxxx

Sxxxx out of gear range
The Sxxxx command is over the

parameter assured gear position
range
The M21 interface
parameter
doesnt specify the exact chip pin
Illegal use M21

No define M21 pin Para
E603
Illegal use M22

The M22 interface

parameter
E604
Illegal use M23

The M23 interface

parameter
E605
Illegal use M24

The M24 interface

parameter
E606
Illegal use M91

The M91 interface

parameter
E607
Illegal use M92

The M92 interface

parameter
E608
Illegal use M93

The M93 interface

parameter
E609
Illegal use M94

The M94 interface

parameter
E610
Illegal use M78

Command invalid
The function of M78 is set to be

invalid
E611
Illegal use M79

Command invalid

invalid
E612
Illegal use M41

Command invalid

invalid
E613
Illegal use M42

Command invalid

invalid
E614
Illegal use M43

Command invalid
The M43 function is set to be invalid
E615
Illegal use M44

Command invalid
E616
Illegal use M32

Command invalid
Illegal use M33
Command invalid
The M32 function is not expanded to

be effective
The M33 function is not expanded to
be effective
Set P506=1, or change the

program command
E617
PROGRAMMING
E602
Modify it to the gear position

value in correct range or modify
the P410 parameter
Set the interface
parameter
P500 is effective, or change the
program command
Set the interface
parameter
program command
Set the interface
parameter
program command
Set the interface
parameter
program command
Set the interface
parameter
program command
Set the interface
parameter
program command
Set the interface
parameter
program command
Set the interface
parameter
program command
Set the interface
parameter
P409_d4 is effective, or change
the program command
Set the interface
parameter
P409_d4 is effective, or change
the program command
Modify
P410_d6=1(frequency
conversion)
or
P410_d7=0(electrical level), or
change the program command
Modify
P410_d6=1(frequency
conversion)
or
Modify
P410_d6=1(frequency
conversion)
or
Modify
P410_d6=1(frequency
conversion)
or
Set P506=1, or change the
program command
269
PROGRAMMING
Alarm
No.
E618
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
Illegal use M10

Command invalid
E619
Illegal use M11

Command invalid
E620
Illegal use r10xx

No program pin
E621
Illegal use r20xx

No program pin
E622
No traverse command
in M61 program
The input chip pin by variable is

occupied by other function, or the
parameter forbids to use the input
chip pin statement program
The input chip pin by variable is
occupied by other function, or the
parameter forbids to use the output
chip pin statement program , or
used the user-defined changing tool
method
The parameter setting: the M61
program
forbids
the
motion
command
Modify
P409_d7
to
be
effective
, or change the
program command
Modify
P409_d7
to
be
effective
, or change the
program command
Modify P412_d1 to be effective,
or
change
the
variable
corresponding input chip pin or
Modify P412_d1 to be effective,
or
change
the
variable
corresponding input chip pin or
change the program command,
or modify parameter P318=9
E623
Illegal use M47
E624
Illegal use M48
E625
Illegal use M04
E628
E629
Tool type is 9, T
command need single
block
Illegal use Y command
E630
Cut NO. exceed
E631
Illegal use G96
E632
No define G31I input

interface, invalid
The switch setting in spindle and Y

axis is not
The switch setting in spindle and Y
axis is not
The spindle reversion signal is set to
be without
When the tool post type is 9, the T
command doesnt have separate
section
The control axis is set to be Y axis
In the program the tool number is
over the setting range
When the spindle S control is set to
be gear shifting mode, the constant
line speed cutting
Dont set the G311 interface
parameter, or the setting is wrong
Change the position parameter

P404_d2 to be allowed, or
change the program to dont
include motion command
Modify P404_d4=1, or change
the program command
the program command
the program command
Modify program

the program command
Modify P319, or change the
program command
the program command
Set the P532 to be effective, or
6.5 Table of Alarm in JOG or AUTO Operation Mode (i.e. E300~ E499)
The Alarm in JOG and AUTO is divided into two kinds: Alarm in executing relative operation and
Relative Alarm in executing statement
6.5.1 Alarm in Executing Relative Operations (i.e. E300~E399)
Alarm
No.
E302
E303
E304
270
Alarm prompt
Z driver
alarm
X driver
alarm
unit
Y driver
alarm
unit
unit
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
Z drive unit alarm
Check Z axis drive unit, resolve the

failure to power-on again
X drive unit alarm
Check t X axis drive unit, resolve the

Y drive unit alarm
Check Y axis drive unit, resolve the

Chapter Six
Alarm
No.
E305
E306
E307
E308
E309
E310
E311
Positive
hardware limit
alarm
Negative
hardware limit
alarm
Z machine (+)
software
limit
alarm
X machine (+)
software
limit
alarm
Y machine (+)
software
limit
alarm
Z machine (-)
software
limit
alarm
X machine (-)
software
limit
alarm
Y machine (-)
software
limit
alarm
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
X or Z positive limit switch is closed
X or Z negatively moves in JOG working

mode till the alarm is released
X or Z negative limit switch is closed
X or Z positively moves in JOG working

mode till the alarm is released
Z machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds

the positive software limit alarm
value (P015)
X or Z positively moves in JOG working

mode, or set the machine coordinate to
zero again, release the alarm
X machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds

value\(P017)
X negatively moves in JOG working

Y machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds

value(P019)
Y negatively moves in JOG working


the negative software limit alarm
value(P016)
Z positively moves in JOG working


value(P018)
X positively moves in JOG working

Y positively moves in JOG working
mode,
or
set
the
machine
coordinate/machine zero return again,
release the alarm
Z negatively moves in JOG working
mode,
or
execute
the
tool
setting/program reference point return
again, release the alarm
X axis negatively moves in JOG working
mode,
or
execute
the
tool
Y negatively moves in JOG working
mode,
or
execute
the
tool
mode,
or
execute
the
tool
X positively moves in JOG working
mode,
or
execute
the
tool
mode,
or
execute
the
tool
Reduce the moving speed or modify the
pulse multiplication ratio, division
coefficient(P203, P204) to the proper
value
Y machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds

value(P020)
E313
Z
nose
software
alarm
E314
X
nose
(+)software limit
alarm
X tool nose coordinate exceeds the

positive limit alarm value(P011)
E315
Y
nose
software
alarm
Y tool nose coordinate exceeds the

E316
E316: Z nose
(-)software limit
alarm
Z tool nose coordinate exceeds the

negative limit alarm value(P010)
E317
X
nose
(-)software limit
alarm
X tool nose coordinate exceeds the

E318
E318:Y
nose
(-) software limit
alarm
Y tool nose coordinate exceeds the

E319
Output
frequency
high
Z/X/Y pulse
exceeds the
range
E320
E321
(+)
limit
(+)
limit
too
Thread spindle
speed too high
Cant
execute
G32 in DRY
Z tool nose coordinate exceeds the

output frequency
system specified
the value of spindle speed

multiplying the thread pitch(P) is
more than max. speed limit of
cutting feed (P113)
The system cannot execute G32 in
DRY RUN working mode
PROGRAMMING
E312
Alarm prompt
Alarm Message
Reduce the feedrate or modify P113

value to the enough
Deleted G32, then execute the program
in DRY RUN working mode
271

Alarm
No.
E322
E330
E331
E332
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
G34:
Screw
pitch is out of
range
Before G34 thread machining, the

pitch is changing, and it exceeds the
permitted range or be a negative
value when the end point is reached.
Modify the machining program
Tool lock signal

does not use
Chuck release
P507 not define
Chuck
in-position P508
not define
E333
Tool-post gating
P529 not define
E334
Tool-post
locking
overtime
is
PROGRAMMING
E335
Tool-post
alarm
E336
No
tool
E337
Detect tool post

signal overtime
E338
Chuck
clamp,
spindle
E339
Spindle doesnt
stop, no chuck
E340
Forbid function
of chuck
E341
Spindle doesnt
stop, no tail
E342
Forbid function
of tail stock
E343
E344
NO
changing
doesnt
no
M10 no respond
M11 no respond
E345
M78 no respond
E346
M79 no respond
E347
E348
272
The non-frequency
spindle
The program is not

ready
The set tool post type need the

clamping signal, but the parameter
P408_d6 doesnt set it to be the
clamping signal
The system has not defined the tool
post using releasing signal (P507)
post in-position using signal(P508)
selection using strobe signal
(P529)
In tool post rotation(CCW) time in
tool change, it cant inspect the tool
post champing signal
After tool change completed, the tool
selection number isnt the target
number
The parameter set the tool changing
forbidden
In tool post rotation (CCW) time in
tool change, it cant inspect the tool
selection number
Forbid starting the spindle when the
chuck is released in spindle and
chuck locking each other
When the spindle and chuck are
locking each other, dont operate the
spindle without stopped the spindle
The parameter set chuck control
forbidden
When the spindle and chuck are
locking each other, dont operate the
tailstock without stopped the spindle
The parameter set tailstock control
forbidden
The system cannot check the valid
chuck champing in position signal
RM10 in controlling chuck champing
chuck releasing selection signal
RM11 in controlling chuck releasing
the system cannot check the valid
tailstock going-forward in-position
signal RM78 in controlling tailstock
going-forward
tailstock going-backward in-position
signal alarm 79 in controlling
tailstock going-backward
The system cant execute the
constant surface speed command
G96 or gear shifting command
M41~M44
in
non-frequency
spindle
Program
error,
execution
is
forbidden
Set P408_d6 to be the using tool post

clamping signal
Set the parameter P507 to be the
corresponding interface signal
Check the tool post champing signal is in
normal or not, or delay the reversion
time(P324)
Check the target tool selection signal is
in normal or not
Modify the forbidden tool changing
parameter P403_d7
Check the target tool selection signal is
in normal or not, or delay the time for tool
changing in properly
Execute the chuck clamping operation to
clamp the workpiece
Stop the spindle, then operate the chuck
Modify parameter P409_d7
Stop the
tailstock
spindle,
the
operate
the
Modify the parameter P409_d4

Check the chuck clamp selection signal
is in normal or not
Check the chuck releasing selection
signal is in normal or not
Check the tailstock signal is in normal
or not
Check the tailstock going-backward
signal is in normal or not
Modify the spindle collocated parameter

P410_d6
Modify the program, resolve error
Chapter Six
Alarm
No.
E349
E350
E351
E352
E353
E354
Alarm Message
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
Use return
machine zero
key
When the machine is back to zero

function, the modifying manual is
forbidden
Using MACHINE ZERO RETURN key

to zero
S exceed limit
Spindle
is
controlled by Y
axis
Spindle Y, levels
cant
be
changed
M47/M48
function doesnt
work
Spindle doesnt
stop,
no
M47/M48
The Sxxx value exceeds the gear

shifting range in the non-frequency
spindle gear shifting
When the spindle is controlled by Y
axis, the start and stop of the spindle
cant be controlled in JOG
Modify the S value to the correct gear

value
Execute M48 to get back the spindle
function
The spindle cant execute the gear

shifting command when it is
controlled by Y axis
Execute M48 to get back the spindle

function
The M47/M48 function forbidden is

set in parameter when there is no Y
axis(P405_d1) or Y axis cant be
changed (P410_d4)
Modify
parameter
P410_d4
The M47/M48 is forbidden to

execute when the spindle dont stop
Stop the spindle, then execute M47/M48
254 program error, the machining

program is forbidden to execute
Modify 254 program, resolve error
P405_d1
and
254 program error
E357
Feeding
override is 0.
The override is zero in feedrate
Adjusted to feedrate override nonzero
E358
Spindle running
is abnormal.
The spindle rotate speed is checked

to be zero after the spindle is started
Check the spindle relative part, resolve

the error or modify parameter P402_d6
to forbid its function
E359
Alarm: pressure
is low.
The system has checked the low

pressure and lasted the parameter
P332 specified time
Check the hydraulic pressure equipment,

resolve the error
E360
Alarm:
protecting door
isnt closed
Material convey
alarm
The safety door dont close in AUTO
Close the safety door
The system has checked its out of

rod in M20, automatism stop alarm
The system executes the M32/M33
command
without
lubricating
function
The target tool number exceeds the
parameter P319 specified value in
changing tool
The tool pose champing signal is
effective always in tool changing and
releasing tool post
The spindle and Y axis allow
change(P410_d4), but the system
dont allow to control the Y axis
moving in
current spindle
non-position control mode
When the following chuck respond
signal checking alarm function is
open,
the
chuck
champing
in-position signal is invalidation
When the following chuck respond
open,
the
chuck
champing
When the following tailstock respond
open, the tailstock going-forward
Change the rod, then go on the

machining
corresponding
lubricating
control
interface
E361
E362
Lubricating
doesnt start
E363
E363Tool NO
exceeds limit
E364
Tool
post
release overtime
E365
Y axis is speed
control mode
E366
Clamp
in-position
signal abnormal
E367
Release
in-position
signal abnormal
E368
Tail stock FW
signal abnormal
PROGRAMMING
E355
Modify tool number or modify P319 to be

the maxima system l tool number
Check the tool pose champing signal
and resolve error
Execute M47 first, change the spindle to
location control mode
Control the chuck champing again or

resolve the chuck error
Control the chuck champing again or
resolve the chuck error
Control the tailstock going-forward again
or resolve the chuck error
273

Alarm
No.
E369
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
Tail stock BK
signal abnormal
When the following tailstock respond

open, the tailstock going-backward
E370
P319 (number of
tools) and P320
(tool
position
signal number)
are not equal
The parameter setting P319P320

in tool changing, the position
parameter P408_d7=0
The outside starting key always isnt
released when the system changes
to JOG or AUTO working mode
The chuck foot switch always isnt
The tailstock foot switch always isnt
Control the tailstock going-backward

again or resolve the chuck error
Set the parameter P408_d7=0-1 again

or let P319 equal to P320
PROGRAMMING
E371
External
start
signal abnormal
E372
Chuck
foot
switch
signal
abnormal
E373
Tail foot switch

signal abnormal
E374
G31
monitor
interface
undefined
The
parameter
P532
undefined(G31 input checking)
Spindle doesnt
stop
When the system is in the tapping in

JOG working mode, the spindle
doesnt stop or the rotate speed isnt
zero
Its allowed to enter the tapping in JOG

working mode when the spindle has
stopped and the rotate speed is zero
The manual tapping rotate speed is

too fast
Reduce the tapping rotate speed in

properly
Used the
M60~M74
Modify the program
E375
E376
E377
Manual tapping
speed is too
high
Commands
have
been
undefined
E378
External
pause
signal abnormal
E379
Feed hold switch is

not reset
E380
Spindle/feed hold
switch is not reset
E382
Tailstock
ready;
operation
forbidden
6.5.2
is not
spindle
is
undefined
is
Check the outside startup signal and

resolve the error
Check the chuck foot switch signal and
resolve the error
Check the tailstock foot switch signal and
resolve the error
Set interface parameter P532 as a fixed

pin
command
The external pause key is not

released during MANUAL/AUTO
mode switching
Workpiece program cannot be
executed when the feed hold switch
is not cancelled
Workpiece program cannot be
executed when the spindle/feed hold
switch is not cancelled
Spindle is operated when tailstock is
not ready
Check the external pause signal

Check feed hold signal
Check spindle/feed hold signal
Check the tailstock
Relative Alarm in Executing Statement (E400~ E499)
Alarm in statement program means the alarm due to an incorrect statement command in the
workpiece program when using statement programming. The alarm can be resolved by inputting the
correct command.
274
Alarm
No.
E400
Alarm prompt
Alarm reason
Monitor variable
not described
E401
In macro, divisor
The system doesnt evaluate and

set the judgment condition to the
process monitor before startup
The divisor is zero in statement
operation
Troubleshooting
Modify workpiece program
Modify the divisor in macro command, let
it dont be zero
Chapter Six
Alarm
No.
Alarm prompt
Alarm Message
Alarm reason
Troubleshooting
The process monitor assignment

statement
has
assignment
operation which is not supported
by the system, i.e. square root,
sine operation
Evaluate the variable r5008 illegal
value
Illegally used the undefined r6xxx
series variable
Illegally used the undefined r4xxx
series variable
The illegal written operation is
made to variable r4003(spindle
real-time speed)
real-time speed)
Modify program
is 0
E402
not
support
monitor
calculation
E403
r5008 data error
E404
Variable data r6xxx

error
Variable data r4xxx
error
E405
r4003 cant be
written
E407
r4007 cant be
written
E408
r4008 cant be
written
E409
Not assign a
value to r6xxx in
monitor
r711x
Invalid
data
E410
E411
r4002 cant be
written
E412
The
variable
doesnt
support
this
kind
of
operation
The
unknown
process
monitor
description
E413
E414
Unknown
variable
E415
The variable r4004

cant be written
The variable r4012
cant be written
E416
pointer
Modify program
Modify program
Modify program
Modify program

real-time speed)
The condition statement in
process monitor evaluates the
r6xxx series variable
Modify program
Write the undefined value to r711x

series variable
Modify program
Written operation is made to the

read only machining time variable
r4002
The
system
non-supported
operator is used in the assignment
statement
Modify program
The
system
non-supported
judgment condition is used in the
statement of process monitor
description
The pointer variable points to the
non-common variable or the
exceeded range pointer variable
is used
Making written operation to
reading variable r4004
Making written operation to
reading variable r4012
Modify program
PROGRAMMING
E406
Modify program
Modify program
Modify program
Modify program
Modify program
Modify program
275
CHAPTER SEVEN
STATEMENT PROGRAMMING (not for GSK928TD)
This system has provided the programming method similar to the high level language, which
realizes the variable assignment, arithmetic operation, logic judgment and conditional transfer.
Programming using the statement and variable can realize the functions which cant be achieved by the
common G and M commands.
7.1
Variable
7.1.1 Variable Expression Method

The variable value can be assigned by the program command or set by keyboard directly. Multiple
variables can be used in a program and they can be distinguished by the variable number.
The variable expression method:
Using lowercase letter r + variable number( four-digit integer) to express, the leading zero
PROGRAMMING
can be omitted.
Such as:
r5:
referred to as number 5 variable; r1003: referred to number 1003 variable
7.1.2 Classification of Variable

According to the function and purpose, the variables in this system can be divided into: common
variables, pointer variables, input/output interface variables, special variables in system internal,
keyboard scan command register variables, display command register variables, function command
register variables, process monitor/ process monitor management variables, pulse signal monitor /pulse
signal monitor management variables, etc.
Different types of variable have different functions, and their use and value ranges are different too.
The types are described below:
Variable type
Common variable
Pointer variable
Input interface variable
Output interface variable
Register variable
System variable
Process monitor variable
Process
monitor
management
variable
Pulse signal monitor variable
Pulse signal monitor management
variable
Variable transfer register variable
276
Variable range
r001r299
r9000r9049
r1001r1032
r2001r2032
r5001r5004, r5008
r4001r4012, r6001r6006,
r6101r6164, r6201r6264
r7000r7009
r7010r7019
r7100r7103
r7110r7113
r7900
Remarks
Chapter Seven
Statement Programming
7.1.2.1 Command Variable

The variable number range of common variable is from 001 to 299 ( 299 variables in total).
The common variable is used to store a data which can participate in operation and also be quoted
by data word of G command, etc.
The data value range of command variable: -999999999999999999
Common variable reference
In the workpiece program, the system can use the variable to replace the data word values
Format: <address> + ri, means to treat the variable value as the word value
For example:
Fr003
; when r003 equals 15000, its function is same as that of F15 command.
Zr010
; when r010 equals 2500, its function is same as that of Z-2.5 command.
K r 010 ; when r010 equals 2500, its function is same as that of K2.5 command.
S r 003 ; when r003 equals 2000000, its function is same as that of Sr003 command.
For example
PROGRAMMING
N0010 r001=-3700
N0020 r002=150000
N0030 G00 Z100 X80
N0040 G01 Ur001 Fr002
; the same as U-3.700
F150.000 command function
N0050 G01 Wr001

N0060 M02
Explanation
1) The variable value doesnt include decimal point, and is obtained by the representative value
multiplied by 1000. When it is replaced to the words with decimal point, e.g. coordinates, divide
the variable value by 100, then the coordinate date including three decimals is obtained;
2) In the command symbol G, M, T, the variable cant be quoted; Gr003 cant be used for
programming;
3) The words for the program line number (i.e. P, Q etc) cant quote variables;
4) The word L indicating times and word H indicating location sign cannot quote variables;
5) Only the common variables can be quoted by command word; otherwise, an alarm occurs;
6) When the program is in AUTO operation mode, if the variable used in the main program is also
used in the subprogram(i.e.: M60~M74 command), please note the intercross use and change
of the variable in the main program and subprogram will affect the result of program execution.
The characteristics of common variable
When the system executes the program in AUTO operation mode, the variable value may change
with the program path. The common variable has the following characteristics:
277

1)
The system performs different initiation process according to the different sections of variable
number.
r001r040The variable parameter table offers the initial values for them (set by the user as
required)
r041r099This group of variables are assigned 0 in the initial state of program execution in
AUTO mode.
r100r199They are cleared upon power-on, and are not cleared afterwards.
2) In the AUTO operation mode, before executing the first program, by pressing the CYCLE START
key, the system will automatically load the contents of P600~P639 in the parameter table into
variable r001~r040 as the initial value; the variable r041~r099 is cleared.
3) After executing M20, in the recycle, r001r040 are assigned the initial value by the P600P639
in parameter table again; r041r099 and r100r199 are not cleared.
4)
The initial values of r100r199 are zero after power-on, later they are not cleared automatically.
However, their values can be changed in JOG or AUTO operation mode in real time. Their initial
PROGRAMMING
values can be set by the following method ( When using this group of variables for
programming, if the variables are not assigned the initial values before using, there is
uncertainty in the program, so the user should be careful). When the user is using these
variables and needs the initial values, the initial values of r100~r199 can be set in JOG
operation mode. In the JOG or AUTO operation mode, before the execution of the program,
press
to call the macro variable display window which displays all the macro variables
in the program, then press
and
to move the pointer to the variable to be
modified, press ENTER key to choose the variable and input the data, then press ENTER key
again. It is forbidden to modify the variable value during program execution.
Double-precision floating-point variable _ common variable r200~r299
The double-precision floating-point variable is the common variable; its range is between 200~299,
(100 variables in total).
As data overflow is easy to occur in the original command variables (r001r199), the use of
double-precision floating-point variable can solve this problem. The data range of double-precision
floating-point variable is: 64-digit number with sign.
Explanation
1Double-precision floating-point variable cannot be quoted by a code word; otherwise, an alarm
will occur.
2For the other explanations, refer to common variable (r001~r199).
Characteristics
In AUTO mode, the value of double-precision floating-point variable may vary with the program path.
The double-precision floating-point variable has following characteristics:
278
Chapter Seven
1) In AUTO mode, in the initial state of program execution, this group of variables is assigned 0.
2After the execution of M20, the variable is not cleared when it is cycled.
to call macro variable display window which does not
3) In MANUAL or AUTO mode, press
display double-precision floating-point variables.
7.1.2.2 Pointer Variable

The variable number range of the pointer variable is from 9000 to 9049 (50 variables in total)
The pointer variable is specially used to point to the address of a common variable. To assignment
to it means assigning the value to the pointed common variable; and its value means the value of the
pointed common variable. The pointer variable can participate in the operation or reading judgment.
The method of creating and changing pointer
The pointer must be created correctly and point to a specific common variable before using the
pointer variable. The pointing sign is indicated by - and > and a blank is allowed between them.
The variable format of creating and changing pointer: Pointer variable name -> Expression
;
PROGRAMMING
E.g. r 9001 -> 1
r9001 pointer variable points to r001 common variable;
r 9002 -> 199
; r9002 pointer variable points to r199 common variable;
r 9003 -> r100
; when r100 equals 5, r9003 points to r005 common variable
r 9003 -> r 9003+1
; r9003 points to next common variable, if it points r5 at first, then now

it points to r6;
r 9003 -> r 9003-1
; r9003 points to the last common variable, when it points r6 at first,

then now it points to r5;
The characteristic of pointer variable:

1) First set up the pointer variable and make it point to a certain specific common variable, then
perform the read/ written operation to it or use it for judgment; otherwise, an alarm occurs.
2) In setting up the pointer variable, its value range is from 1 to 199 (i.e. it can only point to
r1~r199).An alarm occurs when the range is exceeded;
3) The statement of setting up or changing the pointer variable can only be written in a
independent block; otherwise an alarm occurs; the expression in the right side of pointing
symbol can be the addition and subtraction operation between two of them;
4) The pointer variable can only be used in the numerical value operation, and it cannot be quoted
by the data word like G command, etc; e.g. for Ur9000, an alarm occurs;
5) In the assignment statement, conditional judge statement, the assignment of the pointer
variable means assigning the pointed common variable; while reading the pointer variable
means reading the value of the pointed common variable.
The use of pointer variable
Program example
In the following program, each time the Z/X axis moves a position, the coordinates of the position
are saved to the command variables (there are 10 groups of coordinates in total); then these 10 groups
279

of coordinates are taken out one by one and return to the initial position by the original path. The
following is realized by the pointer variable.
N0000
G00 Z200 X200
N0010
r9000 -> 1
; r9001 pointer variable points to r001 common variable;
N0020 M98 L10 P1000

N0030 M98 L10 P2000
N0040 M02
N1000 r9000= r6004
N1010 r9000 -> r9000+1
N1020 r9000= r6005
N1030 r9000 -> r9000+1
N1040 G00 W-25
N1050 G00 U-15
N1060 M99
N2000 r9000 -> r9000-1
N2010 r190= r9000
PROGRAMMING
N2020
N2030
r9000 -> r9000-1

r191= r9000
N2040
N2050
N2060
G01 Xr190 F1000

G01 Zr191
M99
;
;
;
; In the first calling, stores the Z coordinate of this position to r1
; In the first calling, the pointer +1 and points to r2
; In the first calling, stores the X coordinate of this position to r2
; In the first calling, the pointer +1 and points to r3
;
;
; In the first calling, the pointer -1 and points to r20
; In the first calling, takes out the X coordinate of the last but
two point from r20 and stores it to r190
; In the first calling, the pointer -1 points to r19
; In the first calling, takes out the Z coordinate of the last but two
point from r19 and stores it to r191
;
;
7.1.2.3 Interface Variable

This group of variables corresponds to input/output pins. They are used to check and control the
input/output pin signals of the system. The interface variables are divided into input interface variables
and output interface variables.
Input interface variable (read only)
The system has 32 input interface variables, each variable corresponds to one input signal pin ( the
variable number r1001 ~r1032 corresponds to the signal pin number U1001~U1032 respectively)
Note: The variable number r1000 is the integer state of 32 input interfaces; corresponding to signal
pin U1001 ~U1032 from low to high.
The two state values of the input interface variable is 0 (low level) or 1(high level). The low level
means the external signal is effective, which indicates the pin is connected to 0V; the high level means
the external signal is ineffective.
The input interface variable is a group of read-only variables, which cannot be assigned values
(written); otherwise, an alarm occurs.
After reading the value of input interface signal r1001~r1032 through the programming, the signal
level corresponding to the pin can be known. Then the system can perform program skip using the level
as a judgment condition.
For example:
r8=r1002
280
; Reading UI02 pin level; r8=0 or 1.
Chapter Seven
if (r1009=0) then(P1600) ; if the UI09 pin read is the low level, then the system goes to P1600.
r1007= r8
; System issues the alarm: Assignment cannot be done to read-only variables.
Output interface variable (readable/writable)

The system has 32 output interface variables, each variable corresponds to one output signal pin
( the variable number r1001 ~r1032 corresponds to the signal pin number U1001~U1032 respectively).
the output state of the corresponding pin can be changed by assigning a value to the output interface
variable.
When the system outputs 0, the outside can form the conductive loop;
When the system outputs 1, the interface is in the high resistance state, and the outside cannot
form the conductive loop.
The current assignment state of the output interface can be obtained by reading the output interface
variable.
It does not mean that all the output signal pins can be read; when bit parameter P412_d1=0, the
statement programming can only be performed to the pins which display UO on the Diagnosis page. If
the programming is performed to the output signal pins which have been defined, an alarm is issued.
PROGRAMMING
Example
R2002=0 ; Outputs 0 to UO02 pin, the outside can form the conductive loop.
R2016=1 ; Outputs 1 to UO16 pin, the interface is in the high resistance state, and the
outside cannot form the conductive loop .
r2007= r8 ; Determines the UO07 output state according to the content of r8 ( zero or non
zero)
if (r2016=1) then(P0100)
; If the output of current UO16 pin read is 1, then the system

goes to P0100.
Explanation
1) The assignment output is only allowed for the variables of the output pins which are released
by the standard function definition due to the system limitation; otherwise, an alarm occurs; i.e.
the statement programming is only allowed for the pins with UO displayed on the Diagnosis
page. If programming is performed to the output signal pins which have been defined, an
alarm occurs.
2) In the system boot-strap and power-on beginning, the system will set r2001r2032 to be 1,
and the outside cannot form the conductive loop.
7.1.2.4 Keyboard Scan Register r5001

Keyboard scan register: r5001
value range: 32 digits without sign.
The different numerical values written to the register have different meanings; the system executes
the corresponding function command according to the written numerical value. Please refer to the
table below:
Table of r5001 executable keyboard scan commands: (the system forbids using this variable in the
process monitor description statement)
281

Command
No.
Meaning
Keyboard scans once;

When the key is pressed, the r5001 equals the key value ; when there is no key pressed, r5001
equals zero;
Waiting for the keyboard to input a character ;
2
waiting until the key is pressed, and then recording it to r5001;
Waiting for the keyboard to input a character, with cursor and character displayed;
3
the value is recorded to r5001;
4
Waiting for the keyboard to input a character and releasing the press key;
Waiting for the keyboard to input a character and releasing the press key, with cursor and character
5
displayed;
Waiting for the keyboard to input a numerical value, and ending with ENTER; or you can quit by
6
pressing ESC, then the input value will be zero.
Note: If the assignment is not within 1~6, it is ineffective.
1
Use
R5001 assignment is the operation mode for setting keyboard register, the key value obtained
after executing the command is stored in register r5001, and can be read or used for the
conditional judgment.
Example
PROGRAMMING
r5001=4; The system is waiting for the keyboard to input a character, it will not proceed to the
next until the key is released.
Explanation
1) If the keyboard scan command 3 or 5 is chosen, the scanned key will be displayed in the display
window when the window is open; if the display window is not opened, the key cannot be
displayed after this operation.
2) In waiting for key pressing, if the ESC key is pressed, the press key input is cancelled, and the
next statement is executed.
3) The acceptable key symbols are shown in below table, the other key input is ineffective. Note:
The key value is the corresponding ASCII value of this key symbol.
Correspondence table between r5001 acceptable key symbols and obtained key values:
key
symbol
Key
value
Key
symbol
Key
value
ENTER
ESC
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
45
46
13
01
71
77
88
90
83
84
85
87
70
73
75
68
82
7.1.2.5 Display Window Register r5002

Display window register: r5002 (the system forbids using this variable in the process monitor
description statement)
Through the operation to the display window register, the system can construct a window on the
display screen to prompt the program execution steps, alarm etc information.
The different values written to the register have different meanings; the system executes the
corresponding function command according to the written value. Please refer to the following table:
282
Chapter Seven
Table of r5002 executable commands:

Command No.
0
1
PROGRAMMING
Meaning (the user information can only be displayed on the display window
Close the display window;
Open an empty display window;
When the window is not opened,
2
call the display window which has opened last time;
10
Set the cursor position, the cursor points to the first line home;
11
Set the cursor position, the cursor points to the next line home;
Erase the content from the current cursor position to the line end; the cursor position
12
does not change;
13
Erase all the content in window, the cursor points to the first line home;
Send an ASCII character to the display window; (see ASCII code table)
32126
The cursor is positioned to the specified line, the range is from 1 to 9;
201209
The cursor is positioned to the specified line, the range is from 10 to 30;
210230
Send a group of character strings to the display window;
10001099
the mantissa 00~99 are character string numbers. Up to
100 groups of character strings can be displayed;
Send a alarm number to the display window: displaying alarm XXX, the range of XXX is
20002999
from 0 to 999;
110001110009 Set the line number of the display window (line 1 to 9); (the system default is 6)
110010110040 Set the displayed character number in each line ( 10 to 40); (the system default is 30)
Set the window grounding or character grounding, 0 to 255 can be chosen; ( the system
120000120255 default is white, and the value is 255). See correspondence table between colors and
code values
130000130255 Set the character color, 0 to 255 are available ( the system default is black, the value is 0)
140000
Set the size of the character: 16*16
140001
Set the size of the character:: 8*16 (system default)
Note: when the assignment exceeds the range, it is ineffective.
Use
r5002 assignment is to set the command for displaying window register; the data is uncertain
when reading the register, so it cannot be used as the conditional judgment.
Example
r5002=1
; Opens an empty display window
r5002=49
; Sends the character 1 to the display window
r5002=49+r3
; Sends the character which deviates r3 position from 1 to the display window
r5002=2001
; The display window displays Alarm 001
Explanation
1) Set the size and color of the window before opening the display window; otherwise, they are
the system defaults;
2) When the current window is opened, if the parameters such as the window size is re-set, the
window content will be cleared automatically, and then the new setting takes effect;
3) For the selection of grounding and font color, refers to the attached table in this chapter: the
corresponding table between usually-used colors and command values;
4) In the single block mode in AUTO operation, if there is a window displaying characters
currently, , the window is closed by pressing ENTER key is pressed, then the program exits
the execution.
283

Expression of character string:
In the block, one of the below two expressions can be used to input the character string:
1) Common expression: Format: Serial number+ blank + S + display character string ;
Example: If the contents to be displayed of the character string 00 is 1~9 please press a key to
choose the working procedure to be repeated:, the block content is as follows:
N5000
00 S 19 please press the key to choose working procedure to be repeated;
N5010
r5002=1000 ; Displays the set 0 character string r5010
2) ASCII code decimal expression

Format: Serial number + blank + D + character code + blank space +character code +blank
space +character code
Example: If the contents of 04 character string to be displayed is 1-9 GongXu:, the block
contents are as follows:
N5000
N5010
04 D 49 95 57 32 71 111 110 103 88 117 58

r5002=1004 ; Displays the fourth group of character strings
PROGRAMMING
Explanation
1) The serial number must be a two-digit number, the range is from 00 to 99 (100 groups of
character strings in total), and the lowered two digit of the command word must correspond
to the serial number, then the contents of this character string can be displayed;
2) The contents behind the S blank is regarded as the contents of the character string by the
system; No comment can be added behind the character string;
3) Each group of character strings cannot exceed 40 characters (20 Chinese characters)
4) The character string can be written before or behind the program; Generally, it is written in
the end, which will not affect the program execution speed.
Program Example
It mainly demonstrates the use of keyboard scan register and display window register in the
following program. Suppose there are three working procedures, and each of them moves to different
position from start point, then goes back to start point. However, the three working procedures are
chosen by pressing keys according to the pop-up window prompt rather than being executed by turn.
%101
N0000 G00 Z0 X0
N0010 G00 Z100 X100
N0020 r5002 = 110003
; Sets the number of lines for the display window
N0030 r5002 = 110016
; Sets the number of displayed characters of each line
N0200 r5002 = 1
; Opens an empty display window
N0210 r5002 = 140001
; Set the character size: 8*16
N0220 r5002 = 130000
; Sets the character color: Black
N0230 r5002 = 1004
; Displays the 004 character string
N0240 r5002 = 11
; Sets the cursor position, the cursor points to the home of next
line
N0250 r5002 = 140000
; Sets the character size: 16*16
N0260 r5002 = 1006
N0270 r5002 = 11
; Changes line
284
Chapter Seven
N0280 r5002 = 130006
N0290 r5002 = 1005
N0300 r5002 = 130168
N0500 r5001 = 4
; Changes color: Blue

; Changed color: Red
; Waits for the keyboard to input a character, then executes the
next block after releasing the key
; If the character 1 is input, executes P1000
; If the character 0 is input, executes P600, ends
PROGRAMMING
N0510 if(r5001 = 49) then(P1000)

N0520 if(r5001 = 50) then(P2000)
N0530 if(r5001 = 51) then(P3000)
N0540 if(r5001 = 48) then(P600)
N0550 M97 P500
N0600 M02
N1000 r5002 = r5001
; Displays the character 1 input from the keyboard
N1020 G01 Z50 X10 F2000
N1030 G00 Z100 X100
N1040 M97 P200
N2000 r5002 = r5001
N2020 G01 Z120 X50 F2000
N2030 G00 Z100 X100
N2040 M97 P200
N3000 r5002 = r5001
N3010 G01 Z160 X90 F2000
N3020 G00 Z100 X100
N3040 M97 P200
N4000 ; No comment can be added behind the character string
N4000 ; The character string can be written finally, which will not affect the execution speed
N5000 04 D 49 95 51 32 71 111 110 103 88 117 58
N5010 05 SINPUT
N5030 06 S Three working procedures in total
7.1.2.6 Display Value Register r5003

Display value register: r5003 (it is forbidden to use this variable in the description statement of
process monitor)
Use
The r5003 assignment is a command to display this value(it can be viewed when the display
window is opened. The data is uncertain when reading the register, so it cannot be used as the
conditional judgment.
Example
r5003=r032
Displays the value in r032
r5003=r03+r01
; Displays the value of r03 plus r01
7.1.2.7 Graph Refresh Register r5004

Graph refresh register: r5004 (It is forbidden to use this variable in the statement description of
process monitor)
285

Use
The r5004 assignment is a command to clear the machining graph display area ((it can be viewed
when the graph display window is opened). the contents of the system machining graph display area
are cleared if any data is written to r5004.
Example
r5004= 0
Clears the contents of the display area, i.e. the machining graph path
Note: In the cycle machining, the last machining graph is not cleared; in order to observe the new
machining path and graph conveniently, execute this command to display the next machining
path and graph again at the end of the machining program,
7.1.2.8 Program Control Register r5008

Program control register: r5008 (usually used for description program of process monitor; do not
used in common programs). If the data is uncertain when reading this register, it cannot be used as the
reading or conditional judgment.
Different values written in the register have different meanings; the system executes corresponding
PROGRAMMING
function command according to the written value.

Table of r5008 executable commands
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
40
286
Meaning
Pause: movement stops (equals to key CYCLE PAUSE); press CYCLE START to resume;
Switch between SINGLE/CONTINOUS mode (equals to key SINGLE); press CYCLE START to resume;
(usually used for program description during monitoring. If it is used in common program, M00 command
is advised. )
Stop after cycle (movement stop after M20); press CYCLE START to resume;
Cycle starts (equals to key CYCLE START); usually used for description of process monitoring;
Set to SINGLE mode; press CYCLE START to resume;
Set to CONTINUOUS mode
Foot switch is allowed for chuck operation afterwards; M10/M11 switching;
If spindle and chuck are interlocked, it is valid only under M05 command;
If spindle and chuck are interlocked, it is valid only under M05 command and the actual speed is 0;
Foot switch is not allowed for chuck operation afterwards (except for SINGLE PAUSE); if the chuck
operation is not finished yet, the next program cannot be executed;
If spindle and chuck are interlocked, it is valid only under M05 command;
If spindle and chuck are interlocked, it is valid only under M05 command and the actual speed is 0;
Foot switch is not allowed for chuck operation afterwards (except for SINGLE PAUSE); if the chuck
operation is not finished yet, the next program cannot be executed;
Goes to next program if M10 is not finished; does not take up time;
Does not go to next program till all M commands are finished;
Chapter Seven
Explanation
1) During program execution, the operation of chuck and tailstock controlled by foot switch equals
to inserting a work during the execution of machining program, which does not take up time. If
the command in the same group is executed, it is invalid; it is valid by pedaling the foot switch
again after the execution.
2) In statement or whole process monitor, the operation of chuck and tailstock controlled by r5008
equals to inserting a work during the execution of machining program, which does not take up
time;
3) The operation of chuck and tailstock controlled by r5008 may be invalid; for instance, when M11
is being executed, and the chuck is clamped using r5008, the operation is invalid;
4) If the spindle is not interlocked with the chuck and tailstock, the operation of chuck and tailstock
controlled by r5008 is valid regardless the spindle state and spindle speed in the above table 2.
5) In program end, reset or emergency stop state, the current command is cancelled automatically.
Use
Assignment to r5008 means choosing program pause and start mode; usually it is used together
with monitoring description; see the example of monitor description;
r5008=1
r5008=3
PROGRAMMING
Example
; Program pauses immediately; press CYCLE START key to resume;
; Pause after cycle ends; press CYCLE START key to resume;
7.1.2.9 System Special Variable Group 1

System special variable group 1: readable/ writable (in the process monitor description
statement, read only, write forbidden).
Variable No.
r6001
r6002
r6003
r6004
r6005
r6006
r61016164
r62016264
meaning
Z machine coordinate
X machine coordinate
Y machine coordinate
Z tool nose coordinate
X tool nose coordinate
Y tool nose coordinate
Z tool offset 0164
X tool offset 0164
Use
For the writtable variables, the assignment is a command to modify the parameter, at the same
time the variables save the assignments and can be used as the reading or conditional judgment.
Usually, the system inner special variables should not be used, and the use must be careful when
using them.
Example
r6001=150000
when (r6005>3000) then P1500
; Modifies the current Z axis machine coordinate to 150.000

; If the current X tool nose coordinate is greater than 3.000,
then turns to P1500
r6201= r6201+20
; Adds 0.020 to the X tool compensation of the first group tool
offset number
The value range of the system inner special variables: 32 digits with sign.
287

7.1.2.10
System Special Variable Group 2
System special variable group 2 (used for the monitor description)

Variable
No.
r4001
r4002
r4003
r4004
r4005
r4006
r4007
r4008
PROGRAMMING
r4009
r4010
r4011
r4012
Meaning
Workpiece counter: the workpiece count displayed on screen
In the program execution, the counter will add 1 automatically when it meets a M02
or M30 or M20.
Time counter: workpiece processing time; unit: ms
Spindle real-time speed recorder : the real-time speed detected by the system; unit:
r/min
Spindle program rotate speed recorder : in executing the S command, the system
will automatically program the speed to this variable first.
Target tool number recorder: the system will input the tool position number to this
variable automatically in executing T command;
The target tool offset number recorder: the system will input the tool offset number
to this variable automatically in executing T command;
0tool offset number64
The current tool number recorder: after the tool changing finished every time, the
system will input the tool position number to this variable automatically.
The current tool offset number recorder: after the tool changing finished every time,
the system will input the tool position number to this variable automatically.
0tool offset number64;
Instantaneous interference recorder:
In the AUTO operation mode, when the system has checked the recently press key
G or M, it will input the corresponding ASCII value 71/77 to r4009; and display
the character on the top left corner of the screen. Write random number except the
71/77, or press X key, or enter the AUTO operation mode, the variable value will be
cleared to zero. Using r4009, two kinds of program branch transfer function can be
added, which are used for the specific manual interference temporally during
machining.
Timer
In the AUTO operation mode, when the variable value is not zero, it will
automatically reduce by 1 per ms till it is zero; it can be the timer used for
conditional judge ;
Timer
In the AUTO operation mode, when the variable value is not zero, it will
automatically reduce by 1 per ms till it is zero;
Spindle coder
When reading the spindle coder, the value range read is : among 0~ (four times of
actual coder LINEs); when the coder LINEs (parameter P209) are set to 1200, the
value range read will be 0~4800.
Property
Read/
write
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/
write
Read/write
Read only
Read only
Read/
write
Read/
write
Read/write
Read only
Use
For the writtable variables, the assignment is a command to modify the parameter, at the same
time the variables save their assignments, and can be used as reading or condition judgment.
Example
if (r4008=1) then P0060
; If the current offset is No. 1 tool offset, turns to P0060
if (r4001=1000) then P1500
; If the machining number equals 1000, turns P1500000
if (r4009=71) then P0050
; If the current special transfer function key is G, turns P0050

to execute
Explanation
1) The workpiece recorder can be read and written.
2) When the program has used r4009 instantaneous interference function, on the upper left
corner of display screen is displayed G or M character or blank, indicating which program
branch transfer function is used at present; G indicates r4009=71, M indicates r4009=77,
the blank indicates r4009=0. Here, the G or M is not related to command M, and is only
the sign of instantaneous interference function key. Assigning 71 or 77 to r4009 is
equivalent to inputting G or M by keys, the branch transfer is effective as well.
288
Chapter Seven
3) The r4010 and r4011 cannot be assigned a negative value, and they are meaningless if
assigned 0. Assignment range: 0~9999999 (i.e. 9999.999s). They can be used for read or
conditional judgment. I.e. r1=r4010 or if(r4010>1000) then P0020.
4) In general, the r4005~r4008 is used for tool changing distinguishing. I.e. using (parameter
P318=9) in M60 user-defined tool changing program
7.2
Statement
This system has assignment operation statement and conditional judgment statement, which are
described as follows.
7.2.1
Assignment Statement
This system provides assignment operation statement that can realize the operation between two
variables or values. For details about expression and operational symbols, see the table below.
Assignment operation statement table 9-1
rN=rA
rN=rA
rN=rA
rN=rA
rN=rA
rN=rA
rN=rA
rN=rA
Function
Assignment
+ rB
- rB
* rB
/ rB
or rB
and rB
xor rB
Definition
Assigning the value of rA to
rN variable
PROGRAMMING
Command format
Decimal addition operation

Decimal subtraction operation
Decimal multiplication operation
Decimal division operation
Binary or operation
Binary and operation
Binary exclusive or operation
rN=sqr (rA)
Decimal square root
rN=abs(rA)
Decimal absolute value
rN=rA % rB
Decimal remainder
rN = rA*rB/rC
Decimal multiplication and division

operation
rN=sqrf (rA rB)
Compound square root
rN=rA*sin(rB)
rN=rA*cos(rB)
rN=rA*tan(rB)
rN=rA*atan(rB/ rC)
Sine
Cosine
Tangent
Arc tangent
rN = rA (rA does not

support negative)
rN= | rA |
rN = the remainder of (rA
rB)
rN =
rA 2 + rB 2
In the above table: rN indicates the variable name which the operation result is stored to; rA, rB, rC indicate the
variables for running the operation, or constants.
Explanation
1) None of the value, variable value and operation result contains decimal point, the unit is 0.001;
For example: the assignment of Angle 45 should be rB=45000.
2) In the angle assignment operation statement, the rA cannot be omitted; otherwise, an alarm
occurs; it can be written to rN=1*sine(rB).
3) In the PROGRAM EDIT operation mode, all the special expressions can be obtained by
pressing the hp6 key on the panel.
4) Each assignment statement can only have one operator (except the operation of multiplication
and then division)
289

Incorrect example: r001= r002 + r003 r004.
The correct writing is : r001 =
r002 + r003
r001 =
r001 r004
Example
r3=r2*r41
; The result of r2 multiplied by r41 sends to r3
r2=sqr (100)
; The data after extracting 100 sends to r2
r1=0
The initialization r1 is angle 0
r51=1000*sin(r1)
The sine value of angle r1 multiplied by 1000 sends to r51
r1=r1+1000
The angle increases by 1
7.2.2 Conditional Statement

The if conditional statement can form the branch structure. It makes judgment according to the
given conditions, to decide which branch block is executed.
The basic format of if condition is:
if ( relationship expression) then statement 1 else statement 2
PROGRAMMING
Its meaning is: if the expression is established, execute the statement 1 behind the then,
otherwise execute the statement 2 behind the else.
Explanation
1 In the relation expression, the relation operators are <, >, = ; (less than, more than, equal
to); e.g. rA< rB, rA> rB, rA= rB;
2) The statement 1 and statement 2 can be one of transfer statement P, calling statement H,
and assignment statement;
3) Behind the transfer symbol P and calling symbol H is the block line number;
4) The operator in assignment statement can be only +, - (addition, subtraction); e.g. rN=rC + rD,
rN=rC rD.
The basic format and meaning of if statement:
if (rA= rB)
then
P1
else
P2
; If rA=rB, executes P1, otherwise executes P2;
if (rA = rB)
then
P1
else
rN=rC + rD
; If rA=rB, executes P1, otherwise executes rN=rC+rD
if (rA = rB)
then
rN=rC + rD else
P2
; If rA=rB, executes rN=rC+rD, otherwise executes P2;
Thereinto:
rNVariable name;
rA, rB, rC, rDVariable name, or constant;
P1, P2 Transferred block line number ;
H1, H2 The called block line number(in the above format, the place transferred by P can also
use call).
7.2.3
Statement Program Example
Program example 1
290
Chapter Seven
In the following program, it mainly demonstrates the method of automatically modifying tool
compensation in the program. In the batch machining, suppose each time 20 pieces are machined, the
tool T11 will fray one thread in the X direction regularly; when the workpiece recorder is the integer
multiple of 20, the program will modify the tool compensation automatically.
N0010 G00 Z200 X100
N1000 r1=r4001 % 20
N1010 if(r1=0) then P1030
M20
N1030 r6201=r6201-10
N1040 M20
; Obtains the remainder of workpiece recorder divided by 20

; If the remainder is zero, it is the integer multiple of 20 N1020
; No.1 X tool offset reduces one thread
;Recycles
Program Example 2
In the following program, it mainly demonstrates the method of temporary press key interference
PROGRAMMING
and call in the program. Suppose a receiver is controlled by the pins of UO31 and UO32. In the
batch cycle machining, if the operator needs to randomly sample the workpieces for test, press G
key, then the
receiver collects one sample automatically.
%104
N0010 G00 Z200 X100
;
N0020 G00 Z180 X80
;
N0030 G01 Z100 F200
; Cuts outer circle
N1000 if (r4009=71) thenH2000; If G key is pressed before, then calls program P2000 to
N1010 G01 X0 F200
N1020 r2031=1
N1030 r2032=1
N1040 M20
N2000 r2031=0
N2010 r2032=0
N2010 r4009=0
N2020 M99
execute
; Cut off
; Receiver returns to the original position
;
; Receiver goes forward
;
; Clears G state
Program example 3
In the following program, it mainly demonstrates the function operation. According to the elliptic
parameter equation, figure out that the point on the ellipse and use the short line approaching method
to move along the path of the ellipse.
The parameter equation of ellipse is X=50*sin(a) Z=100*cos(a); because X is diameter
programming, X=100*sin(a).
%103
N0010 G00 Z0 X0
291

N0020 G00 Z200 X200
N0022 G00 Z190 X110
N0030 r1=0000
N0040 r12=100000*sin(r1)
N0050 r13=100000*cos(r1)
N0060 r12=r12-110000
N0070 r13=r13-190000
N1000 r2=100000*sin(r1)
N1010 r3=100000*cos(r1)
N1020 r2 = r2 - r12
N1030 r3 = r3 - r13
N1040 G1 Xr2 Zr3 F500
N1050 if(r1=360000) then P1080
N1060 r1=r1+1000
N1070 M97 P1000
N1080 M02
;
;
;
;
;
Determines the start point of G01 path

The initial value of r1 is 0
The angle sine value is multiplied by 100000
The angle cosine value is multiplied by 100000
Figures out the relative difference between ellipse path start
point and G01 start point
; The angel sine value multiplied by 100000 sends to r2

; The angel cosine value multiplied by 100000 sends to r3
;
;
;
;
Moves along the ellipse path

Exits if the angle is not equal to 360
The value of r1 plus 1000 (angel plus 1)
Cycles
7.3 Process Monitoring and Execution
PROGRAMMING
The common part program is executed according to the pre-designed path one by one, so quick
response can not be performed in real time if some events occur during the command execution
In the system, there are ten monitors which are numbered from 0# to 9#, called 0# monitor, 1#
monitor 9# monitor. Their work process is called process monitor; in the same time of executing the
common part program, they specially track the events which occur in real time in the part program
execution process. However, the user must describe the task for the monitors, and tell them which event
is to be tracked and how to deal with it after the event happens. The monitor without task is in sleep
state.
Each monitor has a monitor register and a monitor management register, the corresponding
sequence number is as follows:
Monitor number:
0#~9# sequence number;
Monitor register number: r7000~r7009 corresponding to the monitor sequence number;

Monitor management register number: r7010r7019 corresponding to the monitor sequence number.
In the progress of machining, if there are progress monitors enabled, on the right side of the
program status bar is displayed M-n. Thereinto, M indicates the process monitor, and n indicates the
number of enabled process monitors. The operator can also view the states of process monitors
currently being used on the macro variable window.
E.g. M-2 indicates there are two process monitors enabled.
7.3.1
Process Monitor Description (r7000)
To use the process monitor, first describe the process monitor according to the rules. The process
monitor description includes an assignment statement and a if condition statement, neither of which can
be omitted; the assignment statement specifies the monitor object, the if condition statement makes the
judgment according to the obtained information by monitor, and decides whether to execute some
branch block or not.
292
Chapter Seven
Description method of process monitor

1) Assignment description:
The so-called assignment description is to specify the monitor object with an assignment
statement; all assignment statements which aim at monitor registers (r7000~r7009) are called
monitor description statements.
E.g. r7000= r1001 or r1002; 0# monitor r7000 objects are interface input signal UI01, UI02
r7001=r4003 ( rotation speed); 1# monitor r7001 comes from spindle real-time speed
Explanation
1) The system specifies: all assignment statements that aim at r7000~r7009, are the
description of monitor 0#~9#; according to the program execution path, the latest
description is effective.
2) The operator of assignment description statement only can be one of +, -, or, and;
otherwise, an alarm occurs.
3) It is allowed to perform the assignment description using the conditional judgment
statement, such as if (r5004=3) then r7000= r1001 + r1002is a legal statement.
4) system specifies: if r7000r7009 appears on the left of relational expression of if conditional
statement, it is regarded as the conditional description to 0#9# monitor. The call cannot be
used in then, else, only the assignment or transfer can be used.
5) The assignment description and if conditional description must appear in pair; if there is no
assignment description, or the variable which cannot be monitored is assigned, then r7000=0;
if there is no if conditional description, its allowed but the monitor function cannot be provided.
6) In the if condition description, the system does not execute the description statement
immediately, but waits for monitor function of corresponding serial number to be enabled, then
starts monitoring.
7) If the assignment meets the condition, its not the conditional transfer behind, but the common
variable assignment, such as if (r7000=100) then r3=r3+1the monitor will not close.
7.3.2
Process Monitor ON/OFF
After describing the process monitor according to the rules, assign the monitor management
register (r7010~r7019), then the monitor can be turned on or off. There are several working modes for
turning on the monitor.
293
PROGRAMMING
2) Condition description
The so-called condition description is to specify how to make judgment according to the
monitored information using an if statement;
The format of the condition description statement is the same as the basic format of common if
statement, and the program rules are also basically the same.
if (relation expression) then statement 1 else statement 2;
Thereinto: In the condition description statement, the left item of if () relation expression is the
monitor register name;
In the condition description statement, the call cannot be used in then, else, only the
assignment or transfer can be used.
E.g. if (r7000=1) then P1500 ; if the input signal satisfies the condition, then turns p1500
if (r7001>6000) then r3=r3+1
; if the condition is satisfied, r3 adds 1

Assignment
0
Event process mode

Turn off the monitor which has been turned on, cause the monitor to enter the sleep state; keep
its task, can open again and continue monitoring;
Turn on the monitor; in the monitor process, make the judgment according to the relation
expression of the event. When the condition is established, the process mode is as follows:
1) If the monitor executes the assignment to common variable or output variable, it continues
the monitor without affecting the execution of common program command;
2) If the monitor is to execute the special assignment, then turn off the monitor and stop the
current motion command immediately, wait for the execution completion of all MST
commands being executed, execute special assignment;
3) If the monitor needs to execute transfer, then turn off the monitor, stop the current motion
command immediately, wait for the execution completion of all MST commands being
executed, execute the transfer;
Turn on the monitor; in the monitor process, make the judgment according to the relation
expression of the event. When the condition is established, the process mode is as follows:
1) If the monitor executes the assignment to common variable or output variable, it continues
the monitor without affecting the execution of common program command;
2) If the monitor is to execute the special assignment, then turn off the monitor, wait for the
execution completion of all MST commands being executed, execute special assignment;
3) 3) If the monitor needs to execute transfer, then turn off the monitor, wait for the execution
completion of all MST commands being executed, execute the transfer;
Note: In execution, when meeting the M20/M02, turn off all the monitors, clear the task description;
Special assignment is to assign values to the program control register r5008, system special
variable group1 and group 2.
PROGRAMMING
Example
r7010= 0
r7016= 1
r7012= 2
; If the system writes zero to r7010, then cancels the r7010 monitor;
; Turns on r7016 monitor; if the condition is satisfied, stops the current motion
command immediately, executes the assignment or transfer;
; Turns on r7012 monitor; if the condition is satisfied, executes the assignment
or transfer after executing the current motion command;
Explanation
1) Once the monitor is turned on, while executing the common part program, actually there are
two description statements alternating and cycling in the system; until the monitor is turned off.
2) The if statement is allowed to turn on or off the process monitor; such as if (r1=0) then
r7010=1.
3) Its allowed that one monitor turns on another one without turning off itself; such as if (r7001=0)
then r7010=1, 0# monitor is turned off after 1# monitor meets the condition. A this time 1#
monitor is still ON.
4) In programming, before turning on the monitor, the user must describe the monitor; if a monitor
which is not described (without task) is turned on, the system prompts E400: process
monitoring variable undescribed.
5) After turning on a monitor, if its monitor description is changed without satisfying the condition
or stopping the monitor, the old monitor description is replaced by the new one, and the
monitor is still ON, so the restart is unnecessary. However, it is very dangerous in this state.
The user should turn off the monitor first, and then change its monitor description, finally turn it
on again.
6) After satisfying the monitor condition, if the command executed in monitor condition is jump
command (Pxxxx), the monitor is turned off automatically; if the executed command is
assignment or calculation command, the monitor is not turned off.
294
Chapter Seven
7) Monitor management register cannot be used as condition judgment; otherwise, the system
alarm occurs; for example, if (r7010 > 1) then (r002 = 2), system issues machining abnormal!
E413: unknown process monitoring description.
8) If a monitor is turned on, under the PAUSE/Block stop/Cycle stop state, the monitor is still
effective; its assignment or calculation command are executed after meeting the condition, the
skip command is executed by pressing CYCLE START key.
9) Once the monitor is turned on, inside the system, because its two description statements are
alternating and cycling, its execution speed is faster than the common program; for the
calculation statement which executes assignment after meeting the condition, it may have
been executed many times, so the result of this variable is uncertain (using it in this way is not
recommended). Please note that in the common part program, this variable must be used
carefully.
For example, if (r7000=100)
then
r3=r3+1 ; // if the condition is satisfied, r3 adds 1. At this
time, note that the value of r3 is very uncertain (the accumulation frequency is very high); if the
call of subprogram or transfer in the program uses r3, it will cause the uncertainty of the
PROGRAMMING
program execution. Therefore, in such a case, it is not suggested to use such uncertain
variables like r3 as the actual function of each kind of command
10) In the common program, read the monitor register, monitor management register, its value
is zero or uncertain; such as r5= r7000, the value of r5 is uncertain.
11) If only one monitor is turned on, the signal change of more than 3ms width can be detected;
if ten monitors are turned on, the signal change of 30ms width can be detected.
7.3.3
Monitor Program Example
Program example 1
The following program introduces the use of process monitor.
In the batch machining, if the lengths of rough bars are not the same, its hard to determine the
machining start point. If a sensor is installed on the tool, then the system can use the sensor to
determine the machining start point.
In the following program, if the system detection signal is connected to the corresponding pin of
UI05; when the tool is far away from the workpiece, UI05=1; when the tool is near the workpiece,
UI05=0; when the tool approaches the workpiece from a far-away position, it is stopped at the
position of UI05=0, and the system determines this point to be the machining start point.
%105
N0010 r7000=r1005
; 0# monitor detects the state of input signal r1005, and it forms the
monitor description together with the judgment statement below
N0020 if(r7000=0) then P1000 ; If the signal r1005 is monitored to be Zero, then turns to
P1000 program running
N0030 G00 Z300 X200 ; First positioning to the initial point
N0040 G00 X180
;
N0050 r7010=1
; Turns on 0# monitor by mode 1, if the condition is satisfied, stops the
295

motion immediately, and turns to P1000
F1000 ; The tool approaches the workpiece from a far-away position
; If the last command is finished, but nothing is checked, then turns
off the 0# monitor
N0080 G00 Z300 X200 ; Returns to the initial point
N0080 M02
N1000 G50 Z200 X180 ; Sets this point to be the machining start point, resets the workpiece
coordinate system
N1020 G01 Z90 F500 ; Cuts outer circle
N1030 G01 X0
; Cut off
N1040 G51
; Recovers the workpiece coordinate system
N1050 G00 Z300 X200 ; Returns to the initial point
N1060 M02
;
N0060 G00 W-100
N0070 r7010=0
Program Example 2
The system has the external cycle start/pause function, so the operator can realize the start/pause
PROGRAMMING
function with the external buttons from a position which is far away from the system. However, in the
position which is far away the system, it is hard to realize the single block stop. In the following program,
this function is realized through the process monitor.
In the program, it is supposed that the button switch signal is connected to the pin corresponding to
UI05; when pressing the switch, UI05=0, when releasing the switch, UI05=1. After turning on the
monitor, this press-button can switch between single block mode and continuous execution mode.
%106
N0030
N0040
r7000 =r1005
if(r7000 =0) then r5008=2
N0030
N0040
r7001 =r1005
if(r7001 =1) then r7010=2
N0070
N0070
N0010
N0020
N0050
N0060
N0080
N0080
N0080
N0090
N0160
r7011=2
r7010=2
G0 X100 Z200
G00 X50 Z190
G1 X50 Z160 F300
G2 W-80 R100
G1 U10 W-20
G1 W-20
G1 U10 W-20
G0 X100 Z200
M02
; 0# monitor detects the state of input signal r1005

; When the signal r1005 is monitored to be zero, then
pauses
; 1# monitor detects the state of input signal r1005
; When the press-button is released, then 0# monitor is
turned on again
; Turns on 1# monitor by mode 2
; Turns on 0# monitor by mode 2
Program Example 3
In the following program, it is supposed that the detection signal is connected to the corresponding
pins of UI05and UI06, and the output signal is UO05; in the machining process, when both UI05 and
UI06 are 0, the system is required to output 0 from UO05 pin, and output 1 in other instances.
296
Chapter Seven
%107
N0010 r7000=r1005 or r1006
N0020 if(r7000=0) then r2005=0
N0030 r7010=1
N1000 G00 Z300 X200
N1010 G00 X180
N1020 G01 Z90 F500
N1030 G01 X0
N1050 G00 Z300 X200
N1060 M97 P1000
N1070 M02
7.3.4
; 0# monitor detects the state of input signal r1005, r1006

; If the two signals r1005, r1006 are zero at the same time,
UO05 outputs zero;
; Turns on 0# monitor by mode 1, if the condition is satisfied,
UO05 outputs zero
; Positioning to the initial point
;
; Cuts outer circle
; Cut off
; Returns to the initial point
;
;
Pulse Monitoring (r7100)
In this system, there are another four pulse monitor variables numbered with 0#3#. They are
PROGRAMMING
specially used for the input signal pulse count. Each pulse monitor variable has a monitoring register
and a management register. The corresponding sequence numbers are as following:
Pulse monitoring variable number: 0#3# sequence number;
Pulse monitoring register number: r7100 r7103 correspond to the monitor variable
sequence numbers;
Pulse monitoring management register number: r7110r7113 correspond to the monitor
variable sequence numbers
The so-called pulse monitor belongs to process monitor too, and its description method, ON/OFF
method and the rules are the same as those of process monitor.
In the machining process, if there are monitors enabled, on the right of the program status bar is
displayed P-n. The user can also view the state of pulse monitor currently being used in the system on
the macro variable window. For example, P-1, indicates one pulse monitoring is enabled.
The use of pulse monitor:
1) First describe the pulse monitoring variable; (all assignment statements for r7100 are
description)
Example: r7100 = r1001;
r7100 adds 1 to the pulse signal of interface UI01
2) Then describe the pulse monitoring condition;

Example: if (r7100>50)
then P1500
; If the r7100 count value is greater than 50, then

turns to P1500
3) And then start the monitor through the assignment of pulse monitoring manager;
Through the assignment of pulse monitoring management register(r7110r7113) , the
monitor can be turned on or off.
297
Thereinto: When 0, 1, 2 is assigned, it is the same as the process monitor.

When 5 is assigned, the pulse monitor counter is cleared.
When 6 or 7 is assigned, the pulse monitor count mode is set.
Assignment
0
1
2
5
6
7
Event process mode

Turn off the monitor which has been turned on, which is the same as
that of the process monitor
Turn on the monitor; the process mode is the same as that of the process
monitor
Turn on the monitor; the process mode is the same as that of the process
monitor
When the 5 is assigned, the pulse monitor counter is cleared.
Set the counter mode: when the operation result is changed from zero to
non zero, the inner counter increases by 1.
Set the counting mode: when the operation result is changed from nonzero to zero, the inner counter increases by 1.
How is the pulse monitor counted;

1) After the pulse monitor is turned on, it executes the assignment description statement
PROGRAMMING
repeatedly, when the last operation result compares with the operation result of this time, it
matches the following skip, the inner counter increases by 1.
If set to 6, when the last operation result is 0, and this operation result is nonzero, the inner
counter increases by 1.
If set to 7, when the last operation result is non-zero, and this operation result is zero, the
inner counter increases by 1.
2) In the initialization when the pulse monitoring is turned on, the counter is automatically
cleared.
3) If only one pulse monitor is turned on, the system can check the signal change of more than
3ms width; if four pulse monitors are turned on, the system can check the signal change with
more than 12ms width.
7.3.5 Pulse Monitoring Programming Example

Program example
The following program introduces the use of pulse monitor.
In the following program, it is supposed that the detection signal is connected to the pin
corresponding to U105; in the machining, when the number of times of UI05 changing from 0 to 1 is
greater than 10, the program ends.
%108
N0010 r7100 = r1005
N0020 if(r7100>10) then
N0030 r1=0
N0040 r7110=6
298
; r1005 pulse signal plus 1

P2000; If the number of monitor pulses is greater than 10, then turns
to P2000 running
;
; Sets the count mode, when it is changed from zero to
non-zero, the inner counter plus 1.
Chapter Seven
N0050 r7110=2
N1000 G00 Z300 X200
N1010 G00 X180
N1020 G01 Z90 F500
N1030 G01 X0
N1050 G00 Z300 X200
N1060 M97 P1000
N2000 M02
7.3.6
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Chooses the monitor working mode 2 to turn on

Positioning to the initial point
Cuts outer circle
Cuts off
Returns to the initial point
Variable Transfer Register (r7900)
Variable transfer register: r7900; (the system forbid using this variable in the process monitor
description statement)
Use example
r7900= 1
Writing any number to this register means all the common variables in monitor backup area are
PROGRAMMING
copied to common variable storage area. The following will explain this register function.
In general, in order to avoid the collision, if a certain common variable is used in the monitor, the
user should avoided using this variable in the common block. Because the system has a common
variable storage area, and a monitor variable backup area, the variable value change in these two
sections may not be synchronous.
The change of common variable r3 is explained as follows:
1) If assignment statement of r3 is executed in a common program, r3 is modified, then the r3 in
the monitor will be modified immediately as well;
2) If the r3 assignment statement is executed in the monitor, it only modifies the r3 in the monitor
backup area; and the r3 in the common program is not modified.
3) After the variable transfer statement (i.e.r7900=1) is executed, the system will copy all common
variables in the monitor backup area to the common variable storage area; at this moment, the r3
in the common program is the same as that in the monitor.
Program Example
In the following program, it is supposed that the detection signal is connected to the pin
corresponding to U105; in the machining, when the times of UI05 changing from 0 to 1 is greater than
10, the program ends after the cycle execution is finished.
%109
N0010 r7100 = r1005
N0020 if(r7100>10) then
N0030 r1=0
N0040 r7110=6
N0050 r7110=2
; The pulse signal of r1005 plus 1

r1=1 ; If the number of pulses is greater than 10, r1 equals 1, and it is
the r1 in the monitor backup area that is actually modified
; Sets the initial value
; Sets the count mode, when changing from zero to non-zero, the
inner counter plus one.
; Chooses the monitor working mode 2 to turn on
299

N1000 G00 Z300 X200
N1010 G00 X180
N1020 G01 Z90 F500
N1030 G01 X0
N1050 G00 Z300 X200
N0060 r7900=1
N0020 if(r1=1) then P2000
N1060 M97 P1000
N2000 M02
; Positioning to the initial point

;
; Cuts outer circle
; Cuts off
; Returns to the initial point
; Read the common variable value in the monitor backup area
; If r1 equals 1, then turns to P2000
;
;
7.4 Attached List

7.4.1
ASCII List
character
PROGRAMMING
Space
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
.
/
7.4.2
300
ASCII
code
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
character
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
;
<
=
>
?
ASCII
code
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
character
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
ASCII
code
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
character
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
-
ASCII
code
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
character
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
K
l
m
n
o
ASCII
code
character
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
ASCII
code
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
Corresponding List between Common Colors and Code Values
Name
Black
Code
0
Blue
Green
35
Name
Cyan
Light
blue
Green
yellow
Code
41
54
80
Name
Purple
Light
green
Code
85
Name
Red
Code
168
Name
Yellow
Code
245
Name
Grey
Code
251
105
Pink
172
Golden
248
Hoar
253
Brown
126
Orange
231
Silver
white
250
White
255
Chapter Eight
Customized Command Programming
CHAPTER EIGHT CUSTOMIZED COMMAND PROGRAMMING

8.1
Customized Command
The system has a group of customized commands except the standard M commands. The machine
manufacturer can set some commands to realize the control of additional equipment, and the operator
can conveniently operate the additional equipment by inputting this command.
The system provides 15 customized commands from M60 to M74, and the number of the
commands is edited by the machine manufacturer. The customized commands must be edited in %254
program. First debug %245 program successfully with single block in AUTO operation mode, then
solidify the program in EDIT operation mode; after the program is solidified successfully, the solidified
customized command can be used in JOG mode or other programs (%000%253); otherwise, the
system issues an alarm prompting no customized command.
PROGRAMMING
8.1.1 Programming Format of Customized Command

In No. %254 program, the programming format of the system customized command is: input a
group blocks which starts with start sign-M60and ends with M99. This group of blocks constitutes
M60 command. Other blocks which starts with -M61 -M74 and ends with M99 constitute
M61M74 command.
Format
N1000 -M61
N1010 M8
M3
N1020 G4
D3
N1030 M99
; M61command start sign

; Cooling ON, Spindle ON
; Timing delay
; M61 end
Explanation
1) If G command is required to add in the customized command, set the position bit parameter
P404_d2 to 1, i.e. G motion command is allowed in M61 command; otherwise, the system
issues an alarm
8.2
Customized Command Library (P254)

The customized command is solidified in No. %254 program, so No. %254 program is also called
the user-defined command library: P254 mainly includes the M60~M74 commands which are formed
by statements and blocks, and the system will perform special compiling to P254 during compiling.
301

8.2.1 Programming Format and Debugging of Customized Command Library
Format
P254 program format:
N0010 M98 P1000
N0020 M98 P2000
N0030 M98 P3000
N0040 M02
; Starts executing No.%254 program

; Calls M61 command
; Calls M62 command
;
N1000 -M60
N1100 M99
The start of M60
The end of M60
N2000
N2100
;
;
;
The start of M61

Contents of customized M61
The end of M61
;
;
;
The start of M62

Contents of customized M62
The end of M62
PROGRAMMING
N3000
N3100
-M61
M99
-M62
M99
The debugging steps of customized command library are as follows:

1) Edit the user desired customized command according to the above programming format of
customized command library;
2) Debug the program by single block mode in AUTO operation mode;
3) After debugging the program, solidify the program in EDIT mode, by pressing keys: hp5
5 ;
the machine manufacturer determines whether the solidified program can be modified and then
be solidified again, i.e. set the position parameter P404_d0=1.
4) After the system prompts that the compiling and solidification of P254 succeeds, press ESC
key.
Explanation
After the compiling and solidification of No.%254 program succeeds, the user can also check
whether P254 is correct by inputting and then executing the customized command in P254 in JOG
operation mode.
8.2.2 Use of Customized Command Library

In the JOG operation mode, input the customized command directly when it is necessary to execute
the solidified customized command in P254. In editing program, the solidified customized command
in P254 can be used. Thus the operation is simple and convenient.
Format of using customized command

%001
N0010 M61
N0020 G04 D3
N0030 M62
302
; Executes the customized command in the programs except No.%254

program
; Executes M61 command
;
; Executes M62 command
Chapter Eight
N0040 G04 D3
N0050 M02
Customized Command Programming
Explanation
1) The M60~M74 can be directly used in JOG operation mode or other programs only after the
No.% 254 program has been solidified to FLASH; otherwise, the system issues an alarm; if
the corresponding customized command is not written in No. % 254 program, but this
command is used in JOG operation mode or other programs, the system also issues an alarm.
2) For the operation of how to solidify the No.%254 program to FLASH, please refer to the
explanation of the No.%254 program. For details, refer to Section 4.3 Edit Operation Mode in
PartOperation
3) After the No. %254 program is modified, it must be solidified to FLASH again; otherwise, the
M60~M74 command called in JOG operation mode or other programs are not the latest
customized command after modification.
PROGRAMMING
4) M60M74 command must be used in an independent block; if not, an alarm occurs.
Note
1) When the customized command is executed in AUTO mode, by pressing CYCLE PAUSE
key, the system will not stop the blocks in the customized command as the normal pause
function, but it will continue the execution after a short pause.
2) When the customized command is executed in AUTO mode, if SINGLE BLOCK is valid,
SINGLE BLOCK function is valid only for the whole customized command rather than
the
blocks in the command.

3) When the customized command is executed in MANUAL mode, by pressing CYCLE PAUSE
key, the system will perform pause function to the blocks in this command.
8.3.
Foot Switch of M61 command

Foot switch function of M61/ M62, M63/ M64, M65/ M66 commands:
When you need to use the foot switch to control the reverse motion commands in pair such as
M10/M11, M79/M78, you can use M61/M62. For example, program M61 as feeding-in, and M62 as
feeding-back, then set the corresponding I/O name of the input pin of the foot switch in parameter P533,
and connect them correctly. Then, M61/M62 can be executed alternately by pedaling the switch.
All of M61/62, M63/64, M65/66 can realize the pedal control function. You can set the corresponding
I/O name of the input pin of the foot switch in parameter P533P535 respectively, and set the valule to
the sequence number of the common signal name. Note that the corresponding M61M66 must be
solidified.
Key control M61~M66:

When the system input interfaces are not enough, set parameters P533~P535 to 99; in AUTO or
303

JOG mode, you can press keys to control the execution of customized commands M61M66.
When P533 is 99, key 1 corresponds to M61, key 2 to M62; when P534 is 99, key 3 to M63, key 4
to M64; when P535 is 99, key 5 to M65, key 6 to M66.
Explanation
1) In MANUAL/AUTO mode, key control M61M66 function can only be used when the system is
free or no program is executed. It cannot be used in SINGLE stop mode and when a window
pops up.
2) Upon the system power-on, M61/M63/M65 is alway executed when the foot switch is used for
the fisrt time.
3) In the process of executing M61/M63/M65, if the execution is interrupted by RESET operation,
the system will execute M62/M64/M66 by pressing down the foot switch again.
PROGRAMMING
304
Connection
CONNECTION
305
CONNECTION
306
Connection
CONNECTION
CHAPTER ONE
INTERFACE OVERVIEW
1.1 Rear Cover Interface Layout
AC 220V
Fig. 1-1 Rear Cover Interface Layout
X1Input/output, 44-pin D-type female socket, interface through which CNC receives
machine signals or CNC signals are output to the machine
X2Tool pose, 15-pin D-type male socket, which is the input/output interface
X3Motor, 5-pin D-type female socket, which is the interface of X/Z drive unit
X4Spindle, 26-pin D-type female socket, which is the interface for spindle coder, spindle
frequency converter and Y drive unit
X5MPG, 9-pin D-type female socket, which connects with MPG
X6Input power supply, green 4-pin female socket. The connection between the power box
and the system X6 interface has been performed, the user only needs to connect 220V
power supply.
Power supply box: adopts GSK-PB or GSK-PC2 power supply (Note that their connecting
terminals are different); Fig. 1-1 shows GSK-PB power supply, which provides GND, +5V,
+24V power.
307
CONNECTION
Explanation

1.2 Overall Frame
Power
supply
U disc
USB
interface
MPG
Front cover
Rear cover
To
machine
tool
X drive unit
Z drive unit
To tool post
To
converter
To encoder
CONNECTION
Fig. 1-2
Overall connection layout
Note
GSK928TD has no Y axis function, so it is unnecessary to connect the interfaces relative to Y
axis.
308
Chapter Two
CHAPTER TWO
2.1
Interface Table
INTERFACE TABLE
Interface Table
F ro n t c o v e r R S 2 3 2 c o m m unication(m ale)
D a ta re c e iving(R X D )
RTS
d a ta s e n din g(T X D )
CTS
GND
X 5 M P G (fem ale)
+5V
0V
M P G A p u lse(M A )+
M P G B p u lse(M B )+
M P G A p u lse(M A )-
M P G B p u lse(M B )-
X 2 to o l p o s t (m ale)
T o o l p o s t C C W signal(TL-)
T o o l p o s t 24V G N D
N o . 2 to ol(T2)
T o o l p o s t C W signal(TL+)
T o o l p o s t +24V
N o . 1 to o l (T1)
N o . 3 to o l (T3)
N o . 4 (T4)
X z ero(P C X )
CONNECTION
Z z e ro (P C Z)
T o o l p o s t lo c k in -p osition signal T C P
N o . 5 to o l (T5)
N o . 6 to o l (T6)
N o . 7 to o l (T7)
N o . 8 to o l (T8)
X 3 m o to r(m ale)
Z e n a blin g (ZE N )
Z n e g a tiv e term inal
X n e g a tiv e te rm inal(X D -)
Z p u ls e n e g a tiv e term inal(ZP -)
X p u ls e n e g a tiv e term inal(X P -)
X /Z d riv e +24V G N D 0V
Z d riv e u n it alarm (ZA LM )
X /Z d rive + 5V
X e n a b lin g (X E N )
Z p o s itiv e te rm inal(ZD +)
X p o s itiv e te rm inal(X D +)
Z p u ls e p o s itive term inal (ZP+)
X p u ls e p o s itiv e term inal(X P + )
X /Z d riv e +24V
X d riv e u n it alarm (X A LM )
309

2.2
Interface Table
X 1 in p u t / ou tpu t
f e m a le
S p i n d l e a n a l o g v oltage+(SV C)
S p i n d l e a n a l o g v o l t a g e ground(AGND )
C h u c k c l am p(M 10)
C o o l i n g ON (M 8)
N o t b e d e f i n e d b y s t andard2(U02)
C oo li ng O F F (M 9)
C h u c k r e l e a se(M 11)
S p i n d l e b r a k e signal(M S P)
N o t d e f i n e d b y s t a ndard 1(U 01)

S p i n d l e g e a r o u tput4(S04)
S p i n d l e CW (M 3)
I / O 2 4 V ( +24V)
S p i n d l e CC W(M 4)
T a i l s t o c k b a ck ward(M 79)
S p i n d l e stop(M 5)
T a i l s t o c k f orward(M 78)
I / O 2 4 V (+24V)
I / O 2 4 V ( +24V)
I / O 2 4 V ( +24V)
I / O 2 4 V ( +24V )
I / O 2 4 V g r o u n d (24VGN D)
I / O 2 4 g r o u n d (24VG ND)
H y d r a u l i c t a i l s t o c k p e d a l swi tch input point (T PS)
H y d r a u l i c t a i l s t o c k p e d a l sw itch input point (SHL)
C h u c k r e l e a s e i n - p o s i tion c heck (RM 11)

S p i n d l e / f e e d h o ld s ignal (M XZ 2)
C h u c k c l a m p i n - p o s i tion check(R M 10)
P r e s s u r e l o w chec k(PR ES)

T oo l po st l oc k in -p os it io n si gn al
I / O 2 4 g r o u n d (24VGN D)
F e e d h o l d s ignal(M X Z 1)
T CP
E x t e r n a l p ause(SP)
Y d e c e l e r a t i o n signal(DecY)
I / O 2 4 g r o u n d (24VG ND)
X d e c e l e r a t i o n signal(DecX)
Z /X /Y p os it iv e li m i t(LT +)
Z d e c e l e r a t i o n signal(DecZ )
E xt er na l cy cl e st ar t( S T )
Z /X /Y pnegative
os it iv e li m it(LT -)
E m e r g e n c y stop(ESP )
I / O 2 4 g r o u n d (24VG ND)
X 4 s p ind le (f e m a le)
S p i n d l e a n a l o g v o ltage (+)(SV C)
CONNECTION
U n u s ed
S p i n d l e a n a l o g v o l t a g e ground(A GND)
E n c o d e r 5 V g r o u n d (5VG ND)
D r i v e u n i t 5 V g r ound (5V GND )
S p e e d / p o s i t i o n s t a t e output c heck(API)
E n c o d e r 5 V (SE5V)
Y z ero P CY
E n c o d e r CZ p u ls e (PC -)
Y a la rm Y A LM
E n c o d e r CZ p u ls e(PC +)
Y p o s i t i v e d i rection (Ydir+)
(YD+)
Y d r i v e u n it 5V(P 5V)
U n u s ed
U n u s ed
S p e e d / p o s i t i o n s w i tc h control(A PO)
Y e n a b l i ng(YE N)
(Ydir-)
Y n e g a t i v e d i rection(YD-)
E n c o d e r B p uls e (PB -)
Y p u l s e (--)(Y P-)
E n c o d e r B p uls e (PB +)
Y p u l s e (++)(YP+)
(YP+)
E n c o d e r A p uls e (PA -)
2 4 V g r o u n d (0V)
( 24VGN D)
E n c o d e r A p uls e(PA +)
P o w e r s u p p l y 24V(+24V)
310
Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
CHAPTER THREE
CNC DEVICE CONNECTION
3.1 Communication Interface

The CNC system can connect to the external PC (RS232 interface) or another CNC system through
the serial port to realize the data exchange or transmission; it can also realize the data exchange or
transmission with an external disk through the USB interface.
Explanation
1) Serial communication interface: RS232 communication, for connecting with PC RS232 interface.
2) USB interface: for connecting with U disk
Note: The RS232 interface of 928TD system has not been led out; the interface needs to be led out with
special tools and be performed by professional technicians.
3.1.1
USB Interface
USB interface is used to connect the CNC system and U disk. The system not only sends the data
to the U disk, but also receives the data from the U disk via the USB interface. Directly insert the U disk
into the USB interface on the system panel, and the system automatically identifies and opens the
content of the U disk when the U disk creates the file and file name in the root directory according to the
system file requirements.
Note
3.2
X1, X2 Interface
The CNC system X1, X2 interfaces have 23-channel digital input and 18-channel digital output, all of
which use the photoelectric isolation.
3.2.1
X1, X2 Interface Signal Definition
Important explain:
1)
The 23-channel digital input signal and 18-channel digital output signal correspond to 23 input
pins and 18 output pins. Each pin has a pin number and two signal names , i.e. special
signal name and common signal name. Input common signal names are numbered with
UI01~UI32, output common signal names are numbered with UO01~UO32; thereinto,
UI17~UI25, UO19~UO32 are not led out (unusable; displayed in grey in DIAGNOSIS mode). If
a signal is not specified, it is displayed in white UI** or UO**, representing it can be used
311
CONNECTION
1) The system USB interface must be covered if not used. Do not expose it in the atmosphere for
long time; otherwise, the surface metal will be oxidized and interface sensitivity may be reduced.
2) Do not leave the U disk unused in the system USB interface for a long time; otherwise, the
system interface will be aged, thus damaging the U disc.
3) After using the U disc, be sure to turn off the U disc by pressing ESC key before unplugging it.
When the USB icon displayed on the screen disappears, you can pull the U disc out from the
system USB interface. Otherwise, the system hardware and U disc may be damaged.

otherwise.
2)
This system has already set control and detection pin for most of the devices. These pins are
called special signal name, for example, spindle, chuck, tailstock, tool post etc. As the table
below, set parameters correctly before using these functions. In DIAGNOSIS mode, the special
signal names are displayed in yellow, representing it cannot be used otherwise.
3)
During system parameter initialization, some commands (such as M91, M21, G31) have been
set pins i.e. the
interface parameters P500 (M210, P501, (M230), P517 (M91I), P518 (M93I),
P532 (G31I) have been defined; their signal names are displayed in green in DIAGNOSIS
mode; the machine tool builder can perform connection according to these interface
parameters, and the system will detect the corresponding signals on pins.
4)
For some other devices (see Section 4.4.9 Other Option Functions in PartOperation, like
safety door detection, triple-color indicator, etc.), there is no pin set for their functions. They can
be set to any pin by the machine tool builder with this method:Fill the sequence number of
unused commonl signal name in the interface parameter in PARAMETER mode. The newly
added signals in interface parameters are displayed in green in DIAGNOSIS mode. For
example: Inputting signal UI05 is invalid for a 4-position tool post. Set parameter P511 to 5,
then it turns to be the detection signal of safety door (SAGT). The system detects UI05 signal
(pin 14 on X2 interface) during safety door detection.
5)
Both Pin 15 on X1 interface and pin 9 on X4 interface are spindle analog voltage + signal
(SVC). Their functions are the same.
6)
Both Pin 30 on X1 interface and pin 18 on X4 interface are spindle analog voltage ground
signal (AGND). Their functions are the same.
7)
Both Pin 33 on X1 interface and pin 6 on X2 interface are tool post clamping in-position
CONNECTION
signal (TCP) . Their functions are the same.

The definitions of 23-channel digital input signal and 18-channel digital output signal are as follows:
Table 3-1
Interface
X1
interface
312
Common
signal name
Special signal
name
ESP
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
DecZ
DecX
DecY
MXZ2
MXZ1
0V (24VGND)
+24V
S01
S02
S03
S04
M11
M10
SVC
0V (24VGND)
-LT
+LT
0V (24VGND)
UI28
UI29
UI30
UI15
UI16
r1028
r1029
r1030
r1015
r1016
UO01
UO02
UO03
UO04
UO13
UO14
r2001
r2002
r2003
r2004
r2013
r2014
UI31
UI32
r1031
r1032
Pin No.
Variable
Function explanation of special

signal name
Emergency stop (emergency stop
signal)
Z axis deceleration signal
X axis deceleration signal
Y axis deceleration signal
External feed/spindle hold signal
Feed hold signal
Power supply 24V ground
Power supply 24V
Spindle gear output 1
Chuck releasing
Chuck clamping
Spindle analog voltage +
Z/X negative limit
Z/X positive limit
Poser supply 24V ground

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
RM10
RM11
0V (24VGND)
+24V
+24V
M78
M79
+24V
M21O
UI14
UI13
r1014
r1013
29
Chuck clamping in-position check

Chuck releasing in-position check
Power supply 24V
Power supply 24V
Tailstock advancing
Tailstock retracting
Power supply 24V
P500 set as customized command
output
P501 set as customized command
output
Spindle analog voltage ground
External cycle start
External pause
Tool post clamping in-position signal
Pressure LOW check
Hydraulic chuck foot switch input
UO15
UO16
r2015
r2016
UO17
r2017
M23O
UO18
r2018
30
31
32
33
34
35
AGND
ST
SP
TCP
PRES
SHL
UI26
UI27
UI09
UI10
UI11
r1026
r1027
r1009
r1010
r1011
36
37
38
39
40
TPS
0V (24VGND)
+24V
M5
M4
UI12
r1012
UO05
UO06
r2005
r2006
Hydraulic tailstock foot switch input

Power supply 24V
Spindle stop
Spindle CCW
41
M3
UO07
r2007
Spindle CW
42
43
MSP
M9
UO08
UO09
r2008
r2009
Spindle brake signal

Cooling OFF
44
M8
UO10
r2010
Cooling ON
Table 3-2
Interface
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Special signal
name
TL+
+24V
T1
T3
PCX
TCP
T6
T8
TL0V24VGND
T2
T4
PCZ
T5
T7
Common
signal name
UO12
Variable
name
r2012
UI01
UI03
r1001
r1003
UI09
UI06
UI08
UO11
r1009
r1006
r1008
r2011
UI02
UI04
r1002
r1004
UI05
UI07
r1005
r1007
Function explanation of special signal name

Tool post (CW) output signal
Power supply 24V
Tool post tool position signal T1
X axis zero signal
Tool post CCW output signal
Z axis zero signal
CONNECTION
X2
interface
Pin No.
313
X1Input/output, 44-pin D-type female socket
CONNECTION
X2: Input/output, 15-pin D-type male socket
3.2.2 Connection Method of Input Signal

The input signal includes UI01UI16 ,UI26UI32 and zero signal (PCX, PCZ, PCY). CNC checks
the machine states by the input signal; signal direction: machine to CNC. The input signal is valid in the
low level (24VGND).
There are two types of external input of the input signal: one uses the machine contact switch input,
by which the signal is from the machine side press key, the limit switch and relay contact; the other uses
the electronic proximity switch (transistor) input without the contact.
1)
The input signal can use the normally-open contact input of the machine contact, or use the
electronic proximity switch input without the contact (low level is output in approaching). The
314

interface connection method is as follows:
NPN connection method without contact:

+24V
Machine side
3.3K
Input signal
Connected
when the signal
is valid
24VGN
CNC side
Machine contact connection method:
+24V
3.3K
Input signal
Machine side
24VGND
CNC side
The contact of the input signal at the machine side should meet the following conditions:
Leakage current between the contacts in open circuit: below 1mA.
Voltage drop between contacts in close-circuit: below 1V (current 8.5mA, including the voltage
drop of the cable).
2) The input signal UI26, UI27 (SP, ST are special signals) use the normally-open contact of the
machine contact switch; ESP signal uses the normally-closed contact of the machine contact switch
with self-lock.
Circuit diagram
+24V
3.3K
Machine side
24VGND
CNC side
Connection example:
315
CONNECTION
Contact capacity: more than DC28V, 16mA
Button switch without lock

Button switch with lock
0V
ST
SP
ESP
CNC input interface
3)
Special signal name definition of input interface

SPExternal pause operation key signal.
STExternal cycle start key signal.
ESPEmergency stop key signal (the signal must be connected) .
SHL(chuck foot switch)Foot switch input signal of hydraulic chuck.
TPS(tailstock foot switch)Foot switch input signal of hydraulic tailstock.
PRESPressure low check, the hydraulic system pressure low check input signal
DecX, DecZ, DecYX, Z, Y axis machine reference point return deceleration signal.
PCX, PCZ, PCYX, Z, Y axis machine reference point return zero signal
LT+,LT-Z/X positive/negative limit switch signals. Connect X, Z positive/negative limit signal to the
signal.
Note: For the connection of LT+, LT- , see Section 4.1 Safety Protection in PartOperation.
CONNECTION
MXZ1:
Feed hold signal. When it is valid (i.e. switch contact ON), the feed is locked (i.e. X, Z stop).
MXZ2:
External feed/spindle hold signal. When it is valid (i.e. switch contact ON), the spindle, X, Z
are locked at the same time (i.e. spindle, X, Z stop). Note: For the control of MXZ1, MXZ2,
see Auto Operation Mode in PartOperation.

RM10Chuck clamping( outer chuck)/releasing(inner chuck) in-position detection.
RM11Chuck releasing( outer chuck)/clamping(inner chuck) in-position detection.
Note: For the control of the hydraulic chuck and tailstock, see JOG Operation Mode in
PartOperation.
T1T8Tool post tool position signal, connecting with the tool post; 416 station tool post is
selectable; when the tool number is more than 8, it must be sent to the system via an
coder.
TCPTool post clamping in-position signal, connecting with tool post.
3.2.3
Connection Method of Output Signal
The output signal (UO01UO18) is used to control the relative operations of the machine; signal
direction: CNC to machine. The signal can drive the relay and the indicator at the machine side. When
the output signal is connected with 24VGND, the output function is valid; when it is disconnected with
316

24VGND, the output function is invalid. X1, X2 interfaces have 18-channel output interface, all of which
have the same structure.The output signal connection method is as the following figure.
1) output signal connection
Driving inductive load
Use ULN 2803 output to drive the inductive load, at the moment, connect the fly-wheel diode in the
vicinity of the coil to protect the output circuit and reduce the interference.
+24V
ULN2803
Output signal
Relay
24VGND
CNC side
Machine side
Driving LED:
Use LUN2803 output to drive LED with a serial resistor to limit the current (about 10mA) through
the LED.
CNC side
Machine side
+24V
ULN2803 Output
Driving filament indicator

Use ULN2803 output to drive the filament indicator, and connect an external preheat resistor to
reduce the current impact. The preheat resistor value is based on the condition that the indicator
does not light up.
+24V
CNC side
Machine side
ULN2803
output
2)
Output special signal
The output special signal are driven by ULN2803 transistor array, and the max. load instantaneous
current is 200mA. When the signal is valid, the transistor is connected and common terminal is
317
CONNECTION

+24V.
When the machine side is connected with the relay or other inductive load, the spark suppressor
which should be placed near the load (within 20cm) must be used. And the serial current-limiting
resistance must be used when the machine side is connected with the capacitance load.
The output special signal M8, M9, M3, M4, M5, M10, M11, M78, M79 can be set to the level control
mode or pulse control mode by the bit parameter, and whether M4, MSP special signals are
output is set by the parameter; For the time sequence of the signal output, refer to JOG Operation
Mode in PartOperation.
For the gear shifting execution process and signal output time sequence of output special signal
S01, S02, S03, S04, M41, M42, M43, M44, see JOG operation mode in PartOperation.
Output special signal TL+ and TL- are tool post CW/CCW signal respectively.
3.2.4 Input/Output Signal Specification

Supply voltage: +24V
Max. load instantaneous current of the output signal: 200mA
Note
1)
When the transistor of the electronic switch is connected, the output voltage should be within 1V;
when the transistor is turned off, the output voltage should be more than 23V.
2)
When the input function is valid, the input signal is connected with 24VGND; when it is invalid,
the signal is disconnected with 0V.
3)
When the output function is valid, the signal is connected with 24VGND; when it is invalid, the
CONNECTION
signal is in high-impedance state.

It is suggested that the input/output cable should use the shield cable, and the shield layer be
connected with the plug metal cover and the machine to improve the anti-interference ability.
3.3 Machine Zero Return Function and Connection

Interface signals relative to machine zero return are the X1, X2, X4 interfaces in the following table:
1) X1 interface
Pin 2
DECZ
Z deceleration signal
Pin 3
DECX
X deceleration signal
Pin 4
DECY
Y deceleration signal
Pin 5
PCX
X zero signal
Pin 13
PCZ
Z zero signal
2) X2 interface
318
3) X4 interface
Pin 24
PCY
Y zero signal
Note
1) 928TD has no Y axis function, so it is unnecessary to connect Y deceleration signal and Y
zero signal.
Explanation
z
Bit parameter P406_d7, P406_d6, P406_d5, P406_d4, P406_d3, P406_d2 set the machine
zero return mode.
Setting bit parameter to 0 means there is no deceleration signal or zero signal; setting bit
parameter to 1 means there is the deceleration signal or zero signal.
There are four zero return methods. For the parameter setting methods, see Parameter
Operation Mode in PartOperation; for the description of the zero return execution process,
see JOG Operation Mode in PartOperation.
Connection example
1) The two figurs below show two kinds of connection examples of deceleration signal: travel
switch, NPN proximity switch; it is suggested that the user should use the travel switch; the
connection example is as follows:
CONNECTION
Machine zero return direction
Travel switch
Dog installed on the machine slider
to +24V GND
to deceleration signal
Fig. 3-1
Deceleration signal connected to travel switch
319

Machine zero return direction
Metal inductive block

installed on the
machine carriage
NPN-NO proximity switch

To +24V
To deceleration signal
To 24VGND
Fig. 3-2
2)
Deceleration signal connected to NPN proximity switch
When the bit parameter P407_d7, P407_d6, P407_d5, P407_d4, P407_d3, P407_d2 are all
set to 0, the machine zero return direction is positive, and the deceleration signal low level is
valid. The figures below are the connection example of the deceleration signal and zero signal
respectively; the one-turn signal of servo motor is taken as the zero signal when the system is
connected to the servo motor.
24VGND
Machine side
Deceleration signal
DecX
DecZ
DecY
CONNECTION
CNC side
Fig. 3-3
24VGND
Normally-open contact
Connection of deceleration signal

Machine side
or
Servo
Coder motor
Zero signal
PCX
PCZ
PCY
CNC side
Normally open
contact
One-turn signal
of servo motor
Fig. 3-4 Connection of zero signal
320

3.4 Tool Change Control Function and Connection
3.4.1 Definition of Tool Change Control Signal
Interfaces relative to too change control are as follows:
Table 3-3
X2
Common
Special
interface signal name signal name
Pin 8
UI08
T08
Special signal function
Remarks
Tool post position signal T8
Common input interface UI08
Pin 15
UI07
T07
Common l input interface UI07
Pin 7
UI06
T06
Pin 14
UI05
T05
Pin 12
UI04
T04
Pin 4
UI03
Pin 11
UI02
T02
Common Common input interface

UI03
Pin 3
UI01
T01
TZD
Tool post worktable brake
TFD
Applicable
to
SWD120,AK31,SBWD-80 tool post
Appicable to AK31,SBWD-80 tool
post
Can be used as common output
interface UO12
Can be used as commonl output
interface UO11
Applicable to AK31,SBWD-80 tool
post
post
post
Pin 1
UO12
Pin 9
UO11
Pin 6
T03
TL+
TLTFDC
TXT
TGR
UI09
TCP
Tool post (CCW) output

signal
Pre-indexing
in-position
signal
Tool position strobe signal
Tool post overheat check
Tool
post
in-position signal
clamping
Note: For the explanation of AK31, SBWD-80 tool post, refer to the user manuals of Yantai AK31 series
tool post and Changzhou SBWD-80 series tool post .
3.4.2
Signal Connection
The connection method of common input/output (UI01UI09,UO11UO12) interface accords to

the X1, X2 interface connection principle above. When the tool number signal is connected to the
machine external, and the tool number is in position, the corresponding tool number singal is connected
to 24VGND.
3.4.3
Function Description
The tool change mode of this system is set by P318. The tool change mode and the control time
sequence are as follows:
321
CONNECTION
Tool
post
worktable
pre-indexing output
Tool post (CW) output signal

3.4.3.1
Tool Change Mode 0
P318=0: tool change mode 0which is applicable to the line-up tool post.
3.4.3.2
Tool Change Mode 1
P318=1: tool post type 1, tool change mode 1, which is applicable to the common 4-satation electric
rotating tool post, tool changing (CW) and tool clamping (CCW). (if P318=5, 6, 7, 8, the
system also changes the tool by tool change mode 1).
Execution steps are as follows:
1The system calculates the new tool nose coordinates according to tool offset number, and
displays them;
2) If the current tool is the target tool, and the detected tool number signal is correct, the tool
change output control is not performed; otherwise, the system goes to next step.
3) The system outputs the tool post (CW) signal TL+ and checks the tool number signal of the
target tool, and then turns off TL+ output after it checks the signal; if the tool number signal is not
detected within the period time set by P325 (tool change time limit), it turns off TL+ output and
issues Check tool number signal overtime
4) The system outputs tool post (CCW) signal TL- after delaying the time set by data parameter
P321 (t1);
5) Different processings are performed based on whether P408_d6 has the tool post clamping
in-position signal TCP:
The system delays the time set by P324 (tool post (CCW) clamping time) if the tool post
clamping in-positioni signal TCP( P408_d6= 0) is not checked; the next step is executed after
the time is up.
CONNECTION
The system checks TCP within the time set by P324 if the tool post clamping in-position
signal TCP (P408_d6=1) needs to be checked; the system turns off TL- output and issues
Tool post clamping overtime if it has not received TCP; the system delays the time set by
P322 (t2) if it receives the TCP signal, and then proceeds to the next step.
6)
The system turns off the tool post (CCW) output signal (TL-), and the tool change is completed.
7)
Finally the sytem confirms the signal, i.e. checks whether the current tool number input signal is
consistent with the current tool number; if so, the tool change is completed; if not, it issues an
alarm.
TCP clamping signal check required

322
TCP clamping signal check not required
3.4.3.3
Tool Change Mode 2
P318=2: tool post type 2, tool change mode 2, which is applicable to the common
4-station
electric rotating tool post, tool changing (CW) and tool clamping (CCW).
The execution steps are as follows:
1) The system calculates the new tool nose coordinates according to tool offset number, and
displays them;
2) If the current tool number is the target tool number, the following tool change operation is not
performed (e.g. if the current tool is T11, and T11 is executed again, the tool change operation is
not performed), the tool change is completed.
3) The system outputs the tool post (CW) signal TL+ and checks the tool number signal of the
target tool, and then turns off TL+ output after it detects the signal; if the tool number signal is not
detected within the period of time set by P325 (tool change time limit), it turns off TL+ output and
4) The system outputs tool post (CCW) signal TL- after delaying the time set by data parameter
P321 (t1);
The system delays the time set by P324 (tool post (CCW) clamping time) if the tool post
clamping in-positioni signal TCP( P408_d6= 0) is not checked; the next step is executed
after the time is up.
Tool post clamping overtime if it does not receive TCP; the system delays the time set
by P322 (t2) if it receives the TCP signal, and then proceeds to the next step.
6)
The system turns off the tool post (CCW) output signal (TL-), and the tool change is completed.
TCP clamping signal check required
3.4.3.4
TCP clamping signal check not required
Tool Change Mode 3
P318=3: tool post type 3, tool change mode 3, which is applicable to Taiwan Hengyang
323
CONNECTION
signal TCP (P408_d6=1) needs to be checked; the system turns off TL- output and issues

CLT-63~CLT300 turning machine tool tower series, the system nearby executes the tool change
CW/CCW.
In tool change mode 3, max. tool quantity (P319) and the lines occupied by (P320) are set by the
corresponding tool post type.
Used signal definitions are as follows:
Table 3-4
Tool post
signal
CNC signal
Signal explanation
SensorA
T1
Tool post tool number singal T1
SensorB
T2
SensorC
T3
SensorD
SensorE
T4
TXT (P529)

Input tool inductive signal (tool number strobe signal)
SensorF
TCP
Sol A1
TZD (P507)
Tool post releasing control signal(tool post worktable brake output)
Sol A2
TFD (P508)
Sol B
Sol C
TL+
TL-
Tool post clamping control signal (tool post worktable pre-indexing

output)
Tool post CW output signal
Tool post CCW output signal
The tool change signals are explained as follows:

1) Sensor ABCD are only for tool number check. They are not used as the starting signals of any
operations;
2) Sensor E:
It senses once each time the tool position is changed, and it is the starting signal of
the tool post clamping;
CONNECTION
3) Sensor F: Releaseing/clamping confirmation signal. High level for clamping, low level for
releasing;
Releasing means the tool post is released and the the tool post can start to rotate;
Clamping means the oil pressure motor stops rotating;
4) Sol A1Sol A2: Two-head electromagnetic valve. When Sol A1 is turned on and Sol A2 is turned
off, the tool post is released; when Sol A1 is turned off and Sol A2 is turned on,
the tool post is clamped;
5) Sol BSol C:
Two-head electromagnetic valve. It controls the CW/CCW rotation of the oil

pressure motor, and it returns to the middle position after the clamping is
confirmed, then the motor stops rotating.
Tool change sequence as follows:

1The system calculates the new tool nose coordinates according to tool offset number, and
displays them;
2) If the current tool number is the target tool number, the following tool change operation is not
performed;
324

3)
Sol A1 is ON, SolA2 is OFF, and the tool post is released;
4) When the serson F is invalid, the tool post is released. If the system cannot detect that the
sensor F is invalid within the time set by P325, it issues Tool post releasing overtime;
5) Control the tool post to rotate (CW/CCW) to execute the tool change nearby by judging the tool
change direction according to the current tool number and the target tool number;
6) After the SensorE falling edge which has checked the tool post rotating to the tool signal before
the target tool number appears, the system executes the next step;
7) After the SensorE drising edge which has checks the tool post rotating to the tool signal before
the target tool number appear, SolA1 is turned off, SolA2 is turned on, the tool post is clamped
(at the moment, Sol B still keeps ON, and the motor normally rotates); when the system has not
detected the tool number signal before the target tool number or the tool number signal of the
target tool within the time set by P325 tool change time limit, the system alarms: Check tool
signal overtime;
8) When the system checks the SensorF is valid, Sol B is turned off, the motor stops rotating, and
the tool change is completed; the system alarms Tool post clamping overtime when it has
not checked SensorF is valid in the t time set by P324.
Example
Example: the 8-station turret executes the tool change from No.1 to No.4 tool.
1) Sol A1 is turned on, Sol A2 is turned off, and the tool post is released;
2) The system waits the Sensor F is invalid, judges the nearby tool change direction, Sol B is
turned on and motor rotates;
3) The system starts to check the tool signal (Note: SensorE generates the valid signal when it is in
the No. 1, No. 2, No.3 tool, but the clamping operation is not performed if the 4th tool is not
the tool post is rotate to No. 4 tool; Once SolA1 is valid, SolA1 is turned off and SolA2 is turned
on immediately and the tool post is clamlped (at the moment, So1 B still keeps ON and the
motor normally rotates).
4) When the system has checked Sensor F is valid, So1 B is turned off, the motor stops rotating
and the tool chang is performed.
3.4.3.5
Tool Change Mode 4
P318=4: tool post type 4, tool change mode 4. It is applied to the tool post type which executes the
nearby tool change (CW/CCW).
Table 3-5
CNC signal
Signal explanation
T1~T8
Tool post tool positon signal
TCP
Tool clamping in-position signal
TFD (P508)
Tool post clamping control signal (tool post worktable pre-indexing)
TL+
Tool post rotation (CW) outputl signal

325
CONNECTION
reached); when it checks No. 3 tool signal, it sets SensorE preparatory operation to make that

TL-
Tool post rotation (CCW) outputl signal
Execution steps are as follows:

1) The system calculates the new tool nose coordinates according to tool offset number, and
displays them;
2) If the current tool number is the target tool number, and the tool number signal detected is also
correct, the following tool change operation is not performed; otherwise, the next step is
executed.
3) The system outputs corresponding tool post rotation output signal (TL+ or TL-) and then starts to
check the tool number signal of the targe tool, by judging the tool change direction according to
the current tool number and targe tool number. if the tool number signal is not detected within the
period of time set by P325 (tool change time limit), it turns off the tool post rotation signal and
4) After detecting the tool in-position signal, the system outputs the tool post clamping control
signal (TFD) to casue the tool post to enter the clamping control state, with the tool post rotation
signal remaining ON.
Delay the time set by P324 (tool post (CCW) clamping time) if the tool post clamping
in-positioni signal TCP ( P408_d6= 0) is not checked; the next step is executed after the time
is up.
signal TCP (P408_d6=1) needs to be checked; the system turns off tool post rotation signal
CONNECTION
and issues Tool post clamping overtime if it does not receive TCP; the system delays the
time set by P322 (t2) if it receives the TCP signal, and then proceeds to the next step.
6)
The system turns off the tool post rotation output signal (TL+ or TL-) and tool post clampoing
control signal (TFD);
7) Finally the system confirms the signal, i.e. checks whether the current tool number input signal is
consistent with the current tool number; if so, the too change is completed; if not, the CNC issues
an alarm.
3.4.4
Tool Signal Check and Parameter Setting
The tool signal check is controlled by P408_d7. When P408_d7=0, the tool signal check is the
default mode; when P408_d7=1, the tool signal check is the table checking mode. Note: line-up tool
(P318=0) is not influenced by P408_d7.
3.4.4.1
Default mode (P408_d7=0)
In the default mode, P319 must be equal to P320. Otherwise, the system prompts P319 is not
326

equal to P320 in tool change.
The definition of tool number signal in the default mode is as follows:
The number of ltool number signal lines defined by P320 separately corresponds the tool numbers
defined by P319, each signal line corresponds to one tool number, and the valid level of the tool signal is
the low level. When a tool number signal is valid, the other tool number singals are invalid.
Example: When P319=4 and P320=4, the tool signals are as follows:
No.1 tool
No.2 tool
No.3 tool
No.4 tool
T04
T03
T02
T01
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
Note: 1 in the table stands for the high level, 0 for the low level
Parameter setting is as follows:
3.4.4.2
Parameter
Parameter
setting value
P318
P319
P320
1
4
4
P408_d7
Remarks
Tool change mode 1
4-station tool post
4 tool number signals
Bit parameter is set to the
default mode
Table Checking Mode
In the table checking mode, P319 can be unequal to P320. The tool number signal is defined by
P541~P556.
P541~P556 correspond to tool signal codes of No. 1~16 tool, and the tool code in the parameter is
expressed by the decimal. The encoding method is as follows: all used tool signals constitute binary
codes (TP320T1) from the high to the low, and then the binary code corresponding to each tool
number is converted to the decimal number to fill in the position corresponding to P541~P556. The
binary code of the tool signal can also be seen in DIAGNOSIS mode.
Example: Genyuan CLT-63~CLT300 turning machine turret serial 8-station tool post uses 4 tool
number signals, and the corresponding tool codes are as follows:
327
CONNECTION
Tool number signal definition in table checking mode is as follows:
Tool Number
Corresponding
Tool code(T04T01)
Decimal
No. 1 tool
0010
P541
No. 2 tool
1000
P542
No. 3 tool
0001
P543
No. 4 tool
0100
P544
No. 5 tool
0111
P545
No. 6 tool
1101
13
P546
No. 7 tool
1011
11
P547
No. 8 tool
1110
14
P548
parameter
Parameter setting is as follows:

Parameter
setting value
Remarks
P318
Tool change mode 3
P319
8-station tool post
P320
4 lines
P408_d7
Bit parameter is set to table

checking mode
P541 tool number 1 check signal
Tool post tool number signal T1
13

11
14

Parameter
CONNECTION
3.5
X3 Motor Interface
The system can be matched with the drive units of the reaction stepper motor, the compound
stepper motor and AC servo motor via the motor drive unit interface X3.
3.5.1 Signal Definition
328
Pin
X3 motor (DB15 male )
Special
signal name
Special signal name

explanation
X drive unit alarm
Drive unit CNC
CNC Drive unit
Signal direction
Xalm
+24V
XP-
X/Z drive power supply

+24V
X pulse negative terminal
ZP-
Z pulse negative terminal
CNC Drive unit
Xdir+
X positive terminal
CNC Drive unit
Zdir+
Z positive terminal
CNC Drive unit
Xen
X axis enabled
CNC Drive unit
+5V
Zalm
X/Z drive power supply

+5V
Z drive unit alarm
Drive unit CNC
10
0V
11
Xpu+
X pulse positive terminal
CNC Drive unit
12
Zpu+
Z pulse positive terminal
CNC Drive unit
13
Xdir-
X negative terminal
CNC Drive unit
14
Zdir-
Z negative terminal
CNC Drive unit
15
Zen
Z axis enabled
CNC Drive unit
Drive power ground
3.5.2 Technical Specifications

Max. pulse output frequency: 500kHZ
Pulse width:2s
3.5.3.1
Drive Unit Alarm Signal Xalm, Zalm

P405_d4, P405_d3 set the drive unit alarm level is LOW or HIGH. The drive unit must use the
following two methods to provide the signals:

+24V
Alarm signal
3.3k
or
TLP181
0V
Drive unit side
0V
CNC side
329
CONNECTION
3.5.3 Equivalent Circuit

3.5.3.2
Enable Signal Xen, Zen
When the CNC is working normally, the enable signal output is valid (the enable signal is connected
with 0V). The schematic circuit diagram is shown as follows:
+24V
TLP181
TLP181
0V
Drive unit side
CNC side
3.5.3.3
Pulse Signal and Direction Signal
Xpu+, Xpu-, Zpu+, Zpu- are pulse signals, Xdir+, Xdir-, Zdir+, Zdir- are direction signals. The
signals in the two groups are differential output, and it is suggeste that the external should use
26LS32 to receive. The schematic circuit diagram is as follows:
26LS31
300
26LS32
CONNECTION
CNC side
3.5.4
Connection between CNC System and Drive Unit of Compound Stepper Motor
Connection diagram between CNC and GSK DY3:
330
Drive unit side

X axis connection diagram
15
DY3
Xpu+
Xpu-
11
3
5
Xdir+
Xdir-
13
8
7
1
10
CP+
CPDir+
Dir-
+5V
Xen
EN+
EN-
Xalm
OV
RDY1
RDY2
L
N
1
9
2
AC220V
PE
U
V
W
P
D
10
3
11
6
14
R
T
Z axis connection diagram

15
DY3
12
14
8
15
9
10
Zdir+
Zdir-
CP+
CPDir+
Dir-
+5V
Zen
Zalm
EN+
ENRDY1
OV
RDY2
1
9
2
10
3
11
6
14
L
N
PE
U
V
W
P
D
R
T
CONNECTION
4
6
Zpu+
Zpu-
AC220V
331

Connection diagram between CNC and GSK DY3:
GSK928TD(X)
11
Xpu +
Xpu-
Xdir+
13
8
Xdir+5V
DY3 drive unit

Signal interface
X pulse +
X pulse X direction +
X direction +5V
CP +
CP-
Dir+
10
Dir-
EN+
Xen
X enabling
11
EN-
Xalm
X alarm
RDY1
10
0V
14
RDY2
Metal shell
Metal shell
GSK928TD(Z)
12
Zpu +
Zpu-
Zdir+
14
8
Zdir-
Z pulse +
Z pulseZ direction +
Z direction +5V
CP +
CP-
Dir+
10
Dir-
EN+
Zen
Z enabling
11
EN-
Zalm
Z alarm
DRY1
10
0V
15
+5V
DY3 drive unit

Signal interface
CONNECTION
Metal shell
14
DRY2
Metal shell
When other type of stepper drive unit is connected with the CNC system, the corresponding control
switching value can be used. See the user manual of the corresponding drive device for the connection
method.
Note
When the stepper motor is used, the user should adjust the bit parameter P405(d 7d 0), X-motion
parameter(P100P116) according to the actual conditions. See Parameter Operation Mode in this
manual for details.
The shield cable must be used to connect the stepper drive unit and CNC system. Otherwise the
stepper motor may step out due to the external interference.
The CNC system, stepper drive unit and stepper motor must be earthed reliably to prevent the
motor stepping out because of the external interference.
332

3.5.5 Connection between CNC and Drive Unit of Reaction Stepper Motor
Connection diagram between CNC and GSK DF3:
X connection diagram:
15
DF3
11
3
5
13
8
7
1
10
Xpu+
CP
/CP
XpuXdir+
Xdir+5V
Xen
Xalm
1
2
3
DIR
/DIR
/FREE
Alm
OV
AC220V
PE
U
V
W
P
D
4
8
5
FREE
COM
L
N
R
T
Z axis connection diagram

15
DF3
14
8
15
9
10
ZpuZdir+
Zdir+5V
Zen
Zalm
OV
CP
/CP
DIR
/DIR
FREE
/FREE
Alm
COM
1
2
3
4
8
5
7
9
L
N
PE
U
V
W
P
D
R
T
CONNECTION
12
4
6
Zpu+
AC220V
333

Connection diagram between CNC and GSK DF3:
GSK928TD (X)
11
Xpu +
Xpu-
Xdir+
13
Xdir-
+5V
Xen
Xalm
10
0V
DF3 drive unit

Signal interface
X pulse +
X pulse X pulse +
X pulse +5V
X enabling
X alarm
CP
/CP
DIR
/DIR
FREE
/FREE
Alm
COM
Metal shell
Metal shell
GSK928TD (Z)
12
Zpu +
Zpu-
Zdir+
14
Zdir-
+5V
15
Zen
Zalm
10
DF3 drive unit

Signal interface
Z pulse +
Z pulse Z direction+
Z direction +5V
Z enabling
Z alarm
0V
CONNECTION
Metal shell
CP
/CP
DIR
/DIR
FREE
/FREE
Alm
COM
Metal shell
Note
When the stepper motor is used, the user should adjust the bit parameter P405(d 7d 0), X-motion
manual for details.
The shield cable must be used to connect the stepper drive unit and CNC system. Otherwise the
stepper motor may step out due to the external interference.
The CNC system, stepper drive unit and stepper motor must be earthed reliably to prevent the
motor stepping out because of the external interference.
334

3.5.6 Connection between CNC and AC Servo Drive Unit
Connection diagram between CNC and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit:
X axis connection diagram
15
GSKDA98
11
3
5
13
7
2
1
Xpu+
Xpu-
PULS
18
6
Xdir+
/PULS
SIGN
Xdir-
/SIGN
Xen
+24V
SON
COM+
Xalm
AlM
COM
10
OV
COM
RSTP
DG
DG
FSTP
R
S
T
19
7
21
8
15
3
5
AC220V
PE
U
V
W
P
D
r
t
10
4
17
22

X2
Zero
PCX
Z axis connectin diagram

Less than 15m
15
shielded cable
12
4
6
14
15
2
9
10
GSKDA98
Zpu+
PULS
ZpuZdir+
Zdir-
/PULS
SIGN
18
6
19
/SIGN
SON
COM+
7
21
Zen
+24V
Zalm
AlM
COM
OV
COM
RSTP
DG
DG
FSTP
8
15
3
5
R
S
T
PE
U
V
W
P
D
r
t
AC220V
10
4
17
22

X2
13
PCZ
Zero
335
CONNECTION

Connection diagram between CNC and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit
GSK928TD(X)
11
Xpu +
Xpu-
Xdir+
13
Xdir-
Xen
+24V
Xalm
10
0V
DA98 drive unit

Signal interface
X pulse+
X pulseX direction+
X directionX enabling
+24V
X alarm
Metal shell
5
X0
X2 tool post socket
18
PULS
/PULS
19
SIGN
/SIGN
21
SON
COM+
15
Alm
COM
COM
Zero
10
RSTP
DG
17
DG
22
FSTP
Metal shell
GSK928TD(Z)
CONNECTION
12
Zpu +
Zpu-
Zdir+
14
Zdir-
15
Zen
+24V
Zalm
10
0V
DA98 drive unit

Signal interface
Z pulse +
Z pulse Z direction+
Z direction Z enabling
+24V
Z alarm
Metal shell
13
Z0
X2 tool post socket
18
PULS
/PULS
19
SIGN
/SIGN
21
SON
COM+
15
Alm
COM
COM
Zero
10
RSTP
DG
17
DG
22
FSTP
Metal shell
Note
When the servo motor is used, the user should adjust the bit parameter P405(d 7d 0), X-motion
manual for details.
The shield cable must be used to connect the servo driver unit and CNC system. Otherwise the
motor may step out due to the external interference.
336

The CNC system, servo drive unit and servo motor must be earthed reliably to prevent the motor
stepping out because of the external interference.
3.5.7 Connection Diagram between CNC and Panasonic Drive Unit

Connection diagram between CNC and Panasonic MINAS V serial drive unit:
X connection diagram (only for reference)
Less than 15m
shielded cable
1 5
MIN AS V
11
3
5
13
7
2
1
10
Xp u+
P ULS 1
Xp u-
P ULS Z
Xd ir+
SIG N1
Xd ir-
SI GN2
Xe n
+24 V
S RV- ON
COM +
Xa lm
OV
AI M
CCW L
CWL
IN H
CO M-
FG
FG
3
4
5
6
29
7
37
2
1
33
41
25
50

X2
OZ-
P CX
OZ+
24
2 3 C WL
Z connection diagram (only for reference)

15
CONNECTION
MINAS V
12
Zpu+
PULS1
PULS2
Zpu-
Zdir+
14
Zdir-
15
2
Zen
+24V
Zalm
AlM
10
OV
CCWL
SIGN1
SIGN2
SRV-ON
COM+
CWL
INH
COM-
FG
FG
X2
13
PCZ
OZOZ+
3
4
5
6
29
7
37
2
1
33
41
25
50
24
23CWL
337

3.5.8 Connection Diagram between CNC and Yaskawa Drive Unit
X connection diagram (for reference only)
Less than 15m shielded

1 5 cable

Xpu+
PULS+
Xpu-
PULS-
Xdir+
SIGN+
13
Xdir-
SIGN-
7
2
Xen
+24V
Xalm
AlM+
OV
P-OT
N-OT
ALM-
11
3
10
11
12
40
47
31
42
43
32
41
P-CON
PCX
/S-ON
+24V
Metal
shell
X2
*PCO
PCO
Metal
shell
20
19
Z connection diagram (for reference only)

Less
1than
5 15m
shielded

cable
CONNECTION

12
4
Zpu+
PULS+
Zpu-
PULS-
Zdir+
14
Zdir-
SIGN-
15
2
Zen
+24V
S-ON
+24V
Zalm
ALM+
10
OV
shell

Metal
X2
338
SIGN+
13
PCZ
7
8
11
12
40
47
31
P-OT
42
N-OT
ALM-
32
P-CON
41
*PCO
PCO
43
Metal
shell
20
19

3.6 X4 Spindle Interface
The CNC system controls the connection between the voltage(SVC) output signal and the spindle
converter by the spindle X4 converter, which realizes the stepless change-speed within limits.
3.6.1 Signal Definitions
Unused
Unused
Unused
X4 spindle (DB26 female)
Special
signal name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PA+
PAPB+
PBPC+
PCSE5V
0V (5VGND)
SVC
+24V
0V (24VGND)
12
Ypu+
13
14
15
16
YpuYdir+
YdirP5V
17
0V (5VGND)
18
19
AGND
Yen
20
APO
21
22
Unused
Unused
23
Yalm
24
PCY
25
API
26
Unused
Pin function
Encoder A pulse +
Encoder A pulse Encoder B pulse +
Encoder B pulse Encoder C pulse + (PZ+)
Encoder C pulse - (PZ-)
Encoder 5V
Encoder 5V earthing
Spindle analog voltage+
24V
24V earthing
Y pulse + (Y function not
supported)
Y pulse (not supported)
Y + direction (not supported)
Y- direction (not supported)
Y drive unit 5V (not supported)
Y drive unit 5V earthing (not
supported)
Spindle analog voltage ground
Y enabling (not supported)
Speed/position switch control
(not supported)
Unused
Unused
Y axis drive unit alarm (not
supported)
Y axis zero point (not
supported)
Speed/position state check (not
supported)
Unused
3.6.2 Converter Technical Specification

System output analog voltage is 0 V10 V.
The connection cable between the system and the converter should be the shield cable, and the
shield layer is connected with X4 socket metal shell.
339
CONNECTION
Pin
name

3.6.3 Encoder Technical Specifications
The system can connect an external spindle encoder via the spindle interface X4, which is used
for the thread machining, and tapping.
Encoders with different lines can be selected: set by parameter P209.
Voltage +5V.
3.6.4 Connection Diagram of Converter Analog Voltage Interface

Analog spindle interface SVC can output 010V, and the circuit diagram is as follows:
LM358
10
SVC
18
AGND
0V
Converter
CNC side
Control voltage
input interface
+
_
Machine side
The connection cable between the system and the converter should be the shield cable.
3.6.5 Encoder Interface Principle

Schematic circuit is as follows:
CONNECTION
3.6.6 Encode Interface Connection Diagram
340

The connection cable between the system and the spindle encoder must be the shield cable, and the
shield layer must be connected the socket shell.
When the spindle encoder output signal is not the difference output mode, PA-,PB-,PC- cannot be
connected, and thus the anti-interference ability of the encoder output signal reduces. It is suggested
that the system should use the spindle encoder with the difference output mode.
3.7 X5 MPG Interface

The CNC system can be connected to an external MPGvia the MPG interface X5. MPG can control
the movement of the coordinate axis. When the MPG connection line is less than 1m, the single-terminal
connection can be used; when it is longer than 1.5m, it is advised to use the differential connection to
improve the anti-interference ability.
3.7.1
Signal Definition
Pin
1+5V
2MA+
3MA-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
60V
7MB+
8MB-
X5 MPG (DB9 female)
Special signal
name
+5V
MA+
MAEmpty
Empty
0V
MB+
MBEmpty
Pin function
MPG 5V
MPG A pulse+
MPG A pulse -
MPG 5V ground
MPG B pulse +
MPG B pulse -
CONNECTION
3.7.2 MPG Interface Principle

The schematic circuit is as follows:
3.7.3 MPG Interface Connection Diagram

MPG
Less than 15m

shielded cable
CNC side
X5
When the axis movement is controlled

by MPG, the moving direction of MPG
cannot be changed quickly. Otherwise
the moving distance does not coincide
with the MPG dial;
The shield cable should be used to
connect the system and MPG;
When the MPG output signal is not in
the difference output modeMA- can
be disconnected with MB-;
341
CHAPTER FOUR
USE AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
4.1 Ambient Condition

System storage, transportation and working environmental condition are as follows:
Item
Working climate condition
Ambient temperature
Relative humidity
045
90%RH(no dewing)
Storage, transportation climate

condition
-4070
95%(40)
4.2 Earthing
The correct earthing in the electricity device is important and its aims are as follows:
1)
Protect the operator from being injured because of the abnormal conditions;
2)
Protect the electric devices from interference caused by the machine and other electric devices
nearby. (the interference may cause abnormality of the control device).
3)
The machine and system must be grounded firmly, and the neutral wiring in the electric wire net
must not be used as the earthing line. Otherwise, it may cause injury to the operator or damage
to the device.
4.3 Power Supply Requirements
CONNECTION
The system can normally run in the following AC input power supply:
Voltage fluctuation: AC0.851.1220V
Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz 2%
The requirements for power supply of machine tool is described in machine tool installation manual.
4.4
Protection
The protection grade is not less than IP20
4.5
Use after Long-time Unuse

After the CNC system is not used for a long time, the user must firstly remove the dust, and dry up it,
and then check the wiring and the earthing of the CNC system device, finially keep it power-on for a
period of time to ensure that the system runs without any failure.
342
Appendix
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
343
Appendix
Appendix 1
CNC System Electrical Symbol Explanations
The following examples shown some electrical symbols of electrical components.

Name
Symbol
Relay
Graph
Name
Symbol
Stroke switch
Motor
Hall proximity
switch
Semiconductor
diode
Indicator
Capacitor
Resistor
Normally-open
contact
Push-button
switch with lock
Normally-closed
contact
Push-button
switch without lock
LED
Graph
Shield layer
Protective earthing
APPENDIX
Exchange.
Wiring terminal
345
APPENDIX
346
Four-station tool post

control schematic diagram
Tool post motor

interface
Tool post motor
Tool post signal

panel
Appendix 2
Tool post power

supply interface
System signal
interface
Tool post signal panel

interface
CNC System Tool Post Controller Circuit Method Layout
Appendix
Appendix 3
Interface Schematic Circuit
Interface schematic circuit 1 (input)

IO24V
VDD5V
O116
IO24V
VDD5V
ST
R116
SP
R117
O117
ID26
ID25
T1
R100
O100
ID0
DecZ
R118
O118
ID27
T2
R101
O101
ID1
DecX
R119
O119
ID28
T3
R102
O102
ID2
DecY
R120
O120
ID29
T4
R103
O103
ID3
-LT
R121
O121
O122
ID30
T5
R104
O104
ID4
+LT
R122
P181
T6
R105
O105
ID5
ESP
ID31
O123
R123
PGNMI
P181
T7
R106
O106
ID6
T8
R107
O107
ID7
TCP
R108
O108
ID8
PRES
R109
O109
ID9
SHL
R110
O110
ID10
TPS
R111
O111
ID11
RM11
R112
O112
ID12
RM10
R113
O113
ID13
MXZ2
R114
MXZ1
R115
O114
O115
ID14
ID15
X2
1
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
TL+
TLIO24V
24VGND
T1
T2
T3
T4
PCX
PCZ
TCP
T5
T6
T7
T8
TOOL
X1
16
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
31
ST
32
SP
33
TCP
34
PRES
35
SHL
36
TPS
37
24VGND
38
IO24V
39
M5
40
M4
41
M3
42
MSP
43
M9
44
M8
APPENDIX
24VGND
ESP
-LT
DecZ
+LT
DecX
24VGND
DecY
RM10
MXZ2
RM11
MXZ1
24VGND
24VGND
IO24V
IO24V
IO24V
S01
M78
S02
M79
S03
IO24V
S04
UO1
M11
UO2
M10
AGND
SVC
347
Interface schematic circuit 2 (output)

U202
IO24V
ULN2803
18
17
16
15
14
13
OD8
O208
OD9
O209
OD10
OUT11
R217
12
TL+
OUT10
R216 10K
11
TL-
10
IO24V
10K
R237
2K2
OUT10
O211
OUT11
OD12
R236
2K2
O213
U200
OUT13
ULN2803
OUT4
R200 10K
18
M5
OUT14
R201 10K
17
M78
OUT5
R202 10K
16
M4
OUT15
R203 10K
15
M79
OUT6
R204 10K
14
M3
OUT7
R205 10K
13
MSP
OUT8
R206 10K
12
M9
OUT9
R207 10K
11
M8
10 IO24V
OD14
O214
OD15
O215
OD16
O216
OD17
O217
O200
R227
2K2
O201
OUT16
OUT17
OUT0
OUT1
OD2
ULN2803
18
M10
R209 10K
17
UO2
OUT12
R210 10K
16
M11
OUT16
R211 10K
15
UO1
OUT3
R212 10K
14
S04
OUT2
R213 10K
13
S03
OUT1
R214 10K
12
S02
OUT0
R215 10K
11
S01
10
APPENDIX
R228
R235
2K2
2K2
IOGND
348
OUT15
OD1
U201
OUT17
OUT14
OD0
IOGND
R208 10K
OUT12
OD13
IOGND
OUT13
OUT9
O210
OD11
O212
R223
2K2
J1
OUT8
O202
OD3
O203
OD4
O204
OD5
O205
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OD6
O206
IO24V
OUT2
OUT6
ID0
5VGND
ID2
5VGND
ID4
5VGND
ID6
5VGND
ID8
5VGND
ID10
5VGND
ID12
5VGND
ID14
5VGND
OD0
5VGND
OD2
5VGND
OD4
5VGND
OD6
5VGND
OD8
5VGND
OD10
5VGND
OD12
5VGND
OD14
5VGND
ID16
5VGND
ID18
5VGND
ID20
5VGND
ID22
5VGND
ID24
5VGND
ID26
5VGND
ID28
5VGND
ID30
5VGND
OD16
5VGND
OD18
5VGND
OD20
5VGND
OD22
5VGND
OD24
5VGND
OD26
5VGND
OD28
5VGND
OD30
5VGND
A1
C1
A2
C2
A3
C3
A4
C4
A5
C5
A6
C6
A7
C7
A8
C8
A9
C9
A10
C10
A11
C11
A12
C12
A13
C13
A14
C14
A15
C15
A16
C16
A17
C17
A18
C18
A19
C19
A20
C20
A21
C21
A22
C22
A23
C23
A24
C24
A25
C25
A26
C26
A27
C27
A28
C28
A29
C29
A30
C30
A31
C31
A32
C32
A1
C1
A2
C2
A3
C3
A4
C4
A5
C5
A6
C6
A7
C7
A8
C8
A9
C9
A10
C10
A11
C11
A12
C12
A13
C13
A14
C14
A15
C15
A16
C16
A17
C17
A18
C18
A19
C19
A20
C20
A21
C21
A22
C22
A23
C23
A24
C24
A25
C25
A26
C26
A27
C27
A28
C28
A29
C29
A30
C30
A31
C31
A32
C32
JE
OD7
O207
5VGND
OUT7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B1
ID1
B2
ID3
B3
ID5
B4
ID7
B5
ID9
B6
ID11
B7
ID13
B8
ID15
B9
OD1
B10
OD3
B11
OD5
B12
OD7
B13
OD9
B14
OD11
B15
OD13
B16
OD15
B17
ID17
B18
ID19
B19
ID21
B20
ID23
B21
ID25
B22
ID27
B23
ID29
B24
ID31
B25
OD17
B26
OD19
B27
OD21
B28
OD23
B29
OD25
B30
OD27
B31
OD29
B32
OD31
Appendix
Interface schematic circuit 3
PG5V
PIO5V
R300
C303
X5
5VGND
MA+
R319
5VGND
PIO5V
R400
PA+
R415
5VGND
PIO5V
R401
PB+
R416
5VGND
5VGND
PIO5V
R301
MB+
R320
5VGND
PIO5V
R402
PC+
R417
PIO5V
R302
MA-
R304
5VGND
PIO5V
R403
PA-
R406
5VGND
PIO5V
R303
MB-
R305
5VGND
PIO5V
R404
PB-
R407
5VGND
PIO5V
R405
PC-
R408
5VGND
PA+
PAPB+
PB-
R409
R410
R411
R412
SEA+
SEASEB+
SEB-
C401
C402
C403
C404
PC+
PC-
R413
R414
SEZ+
SEZ-
C405
C406
MA+
MB+
MAMB-
R306
R307
R308
R309
PGA+
PGB+
PGAPGB-
C304
C305 5VGND
C306
C307
PGA
13
PGB
VCC
GND
OUTD
OUTC
OUTB
OUTA
12
4
9
10
7
6
15
14
1
2
EN
EN
INDIND+
INCINC+
INBINB+
INAINA+
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
PG
X3
U300
PIO5V 16
5VGND 8
C300
11
PG5V
5VGND
MA+
MB+
MAMB-
5VGND
PIO5V
5VGND
PIO5V
PGAPGA+
5VGND
PIO5V
PGBPGB+
1
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
Xalm
Zalm
IO24V
24VGND
Xpu+
XpuZpu+
ZpuXdir+
XdirZdir+
ZdirXen
Zen
P5V
5VGND
MOTO
U500
ZP
1
ZD 15
XP
7
XD
9
PIO5V 16
4
C500 12
5VGND 8
1A
4A
2A
3A
VCC
G1
G2
GND
1Y
1Z
4Y
4Z
2Y
2Z
3Y
3Z
2
3
14
13
6
5
10
11
R500
R501
R502
R503
R504
R505
R506
R507
Zpu+
ZpuZdir+
ZdirXpu+
XpuXdir+
Xdir-
X4
IO24V
PA+
24VGND
PAYpu+
PB+
YpuPBYdir+
PC+
YdirPCP5V
SE5V
5VGND
5VGND
AGND
SVC
U501
AD
YP
AP
YD
1
15
7
9
16
PIO5V 4
C501 12
5VGND 8
1A
4A
2A
3A
VCC
G1
G2
GND
1Y
1Z
4Y
4Z
2Y
2Z
3Y
3Z
2
3
14
13
6
5
10
11
R512
R513
R514
R515
R508
R509
R510
R511
Ypu+
YpuYdir+
Ydir-
10
1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
7
17
8
18
9
19
YEN
20
APO
21
Y02
22
Y03
23
YALM
24
PCY
25
API
26
Y-AXIS
IO24V
XSON
O500
Xen
D500
1N4148
24VGND
ZSON
VDD5V
X_ALM
R516
O504
Xalm
X_ORG
R517
O505
PCX
Y_ALM
R518
O506
YALM
Y_ORG
R519
O507
PCY
Z_ALM
R520
O508
Zalm
Z_ORG
R521
O509
PCZ
YI_1
R522
O510
API
YI_2
R523
O511
D501
O501
Zen
1N4148
24VGND
YSON
D502
O502
YEN
1N4148
24VGND
ASON
O503
APO
D503
1N4148
XO1
D504
Y02
1N4148
24VGND
YO1
APPENDIX
24VGND
O512
D505
O513
Y03
1N4148
5VGND
24VGND
349
350
X4
U V W PE
CNC external control connection
COM
REV
FWD

0
10V
0V
PE
X2
X5
NoteContent described in the broken

frame can be connected as
required.
X1
USB
Appendix 4
APPENDIX
X3
CNC
External Control Connection Diagram
Appendix
GSK928TD CNC System Appearance Installation Dimension
Appendix 5
APPENDIX
351

GSK928TD-L CNC System Appearance Installation Dimension
User opening
installation dimension
Appendix 6
APPENDIX
352
Supplementary Explanation
for GSK928TD and GSK928TD-L (V3.21 software version)
(Modification and addition based on edition 1 of USER MANUAL)
1.
1.1
Modified Functions and Commands

Newly-added Interface Parameter P538, P539, P540Z/X/Y Move Limit
Interface parameter P538, P539, P540Z/X/Y move limit: (range: 0-32, password level: device
administrator)
The setting of this parameter is the same as that of other interface parameters. When this
parameter is set to be valid, its corresponding axis can move only when the signal is in the low level;
otherwise, its corresponding feed axis is in the unmovable state.
In JOG or AUTO operation mode, if the system detects that the signal is OFF (i.e. 1), it issues
P538 Z axis move limit, and the axis cannot move.
1.2
Newly-added Interface Parameter P351 Alarm of Lubrication Check before
Machining
Interface parameter P531 Alarm of Lubrication Check before Machining: (range: 0-32, password level:
device administrator)
In AUTO operation mode, if the system detects the signal is ON (i.e. 0) before executing the first
command, it issues Lubrication alarm detected, and the machining
1.3
cannot be performed.
G76 Command Modification

The previous G76 command only has the function of the tool path cutting-in from the left, while the
new G76 command has four cut-in modes, which are specified by H_d3d2 in programming.
When H is:
Hxxxxx00xx: Cuts in from the left, (the same as the previous G76; Z offsets in the end point
direction);
Hxxxxx01xx: Cuts in from the rightZ offsets in the direction opposite to the end point
353
User Manual
Hxxxxx10xx: Cuts in from left to right alternately

Hxxxxx11xx: Cuts in from the middle (Z does not offset).
1.4 Diagnosis Operation Mode

The function of pressing R key to detect and diagnose the PA, PB and count signals of the
encoder is newly added. This function is used for auxiliary diagnosis when the encoder breaks down.
When the spindle is rotating, if PA, PB signal 0/1 appears alternately, and the counter counts recurrently,
it means the PA and PB signals are normal.
1.5
AUTO Operation Mode

In AUTO operation mode, the key word search function is newly added in the block selection
execution page. E.g. press the RIGHT direction key to enter the search state, then input T11 and press
ENTER, then press direction key UP and DOWN to search T11, finally press ENTER to confirm that the
execution starts from this block.
2.
2.1
Newly-added M Command: M50M59, M84

Customized Commands Expanded to M50-M74 from M60-M74.
2.2 Newly-added Function of Calling M50-M72 before Machining

This system can output signals at four key points, i.e. switch from other pages to AUTO page, switch
from AUTO page to other pages, machining start and machining end, for the external monitor.
The method is to solidify the corresponding M command in the No. 254 program, then modify
parameter P344-P347, with the number corresponding to the M command; for example, when P334 is
modified to 51, the M51 is called.
Example
If P334 (call before machining) is set to 50, the system first executes M50 before executing the first
machining program each time.
If P345 (call after machining) is set to 51, the systems executes M51 before executing end
command M30/M02/M20. If the program is exited halfway, M51 is not executed.
If P346 (entering automatic call) is set to 52 , when there is no alarm occurring, the system will call
and execute M52 each time the control is switched to AUTO page from other pages.
354
If P347 (exiting automatic call) is set to 53, when there is no alarm occurring, the system will call and
execute M53 each time the control is switched to the other pages from the AUTO page.
Note
1)
If the parameter is set with no corresponding customized command solidified in No. 254
program, this function is skipped.
2)
After this function is used, the machining efficiency may be affected because of the additional
call.
2.3 M84 Input Signal Check within a Specified Time

Command format. Example
M84
I8.0
If input U108 pin is the low level, the next is executed; otherwise, the system
keeps waiting.
M84
I8.1
If the input U108 pin is the high level, the next is executed; otherwise, the
system keeps waiting.
M84
I8.0
D3
The system constantly checks the signal within D3, if U108=0, the next is
executed; otherwise, the system keeps checking the signal. If the time is up and
the signal has not been checked, the system issues E*** M84 check I8.0 signal
overtime and terminates the program.
3.
Newly-added G Commands and Functions
3.1 G38 Rigid Taping, Threading

Command format
G38
ZW_
PE_
H_
Z taping
G38
YV_
PE_
H_
Y tapingonly for single-axis feed
Word
Thereinto: ZWYVCommand-specified position which the taping is performed to;
Z/Y is the absolute coordinate of Z axis/X axis respectively, and W/V is the relative coordinate
of Z axis/Y axis respectively; the user can employ any one of relative coordinate and absolute
coordinate; the relative coordinate is the displacement relative to the current position.
355
User Manual
P: Metric thread lead;

E: Inch thread lead;
H: H_d0=0 indicates M03 taping; H_d0=1 indicates M04 taping.
Word range
Y, Z, V, W: -9999.999mm9999.999mm
P: 0.001mm500.000mm
E: (0.06025400.000) teeth/inch
H: 0000000011111111
Explanation
G38
Z taping cycle execution process:
If the spindle is rotating, the system executes M05 to exactly stop the spindle.
After entering G38 mode, Z axis always rotates along with the spindle.
After starting the spindle, the speed increases gradually, and Z axis moves towards to the
target position.
After Z axis reaches to the target position, the spindle speed decreases gradually till it stops.
Then the Z axis retraction is completed by the subsequent command.
Then the system executes the subsequent command, and the spindle rotates in the reverse
direction and the speed increases gradually, and Z axis moves in the reverse direction with
the spindle.
After Z axis reaches the target position, the spindle speed decreases gradually till it stops
Repeat the above steps until the subsequent command ends, then exit G38 command.
Note
1) For this command, the spindle has a period of deceleration time after it is turned off. At this
moment, Z axis/X axis still rotates with the spindle till the spindle completely stops. Therefore,
the hole bottom of the thread in the actual machining is deeper than the desired one, and the
length depends on the spindle speed and speed change amount during taping.
2) After executing G38 and the subsequent command, the position of the axes is not completely
certain.
3) The subsequent command of G38 can only be an independent Z(W) word or independent S,
M00 command; the next command of the subsequent command can also be the subsequent
356
command; if the next command following the subsequent command is other command, the
system exits G38 mode.
4) The system forbids executing G38 command in Dry Run.
Example
Fig. 4-15
Taping
Example: G38 taping, threading; thread lead 1.5mm.

N0000
G00
N0010
S300
N0020
G01
X0
Z20
Rapidly positions the start point of the workpiece

Spindle CW rotation, sets the speed in taping
Z2
F1000
Z approaches the workpiece, and a distance of 2mm is reserved

at the front end
N0030
G38
N0040
S500
Sets the speed at which Z axis retracts
N0050
Z2
Z axis retracts
N0060
S300
N0070
Z-30
Performs taping again to remove burr
N0080
S500
N0090
Z2
Z axis retracts
N0100
M02
End of program
3.2
Z-30
P1.5
H0
Z axis feeds for taping.
G21, G20 Metric, Inch Input
Command format
G20
Specifies the least input increment is the inch input.
G21
Specifies the least input increment is the metric input.
G20/G21 command can only check the input unit of the current system and provide alarms rather than
switching the input unit. If E285/E286 alarm occurs, please modify P413_d3.
357

3.3
User Manual
Detailed Explanation of Metric/Inch Switch
3.3.1
Metric/Inch Switch Parameter
Relative parameter
Interface language__bit parameter P413password level3machine operator
d3__ Least input increment
0: Metric
// The system input increment is the metric input, and the system initialization setting is
0.
1: Inch
// The input increment of the system is the inch input.
Function explanation
If you need to operate the system using the inch, set parameter P413_d3 to 1, then the system
automatically completes the conversion between metric and inch data.
1) After the system is switched to inch mode, there is in displaying on the upper left of the screen,
indicating the current mode is inch. There is no such display for the metric mode.
2) System reference conversion formula: 1 inch = 25.4 mm; 1 foot = 12 inches
3) The system performs the below conversion at the moment of the metric conversion:
The system parameters relative to the coordinate position are converted to the inch system, and
the unit is inch; e.g. program reference point, soft limit, zero coordinate, backlash, pitch error.
The system parameters relative to the traverse speed are converted to the inch system, and the
unit is inch/min; e.g. max. traverse rate;
The current coordinates and speed F are converted to the inch system;
The tool offset and tool nose radius compensation in tool offset mode are converted into the inch
system;
If the Y axis is the rotation axis, the position coordinate of Y axis is not switched (When P27 is not
0, the system identifies Y axis as the rotation axis.)
None of the system parameters relative to the rotation axis is converted.
4) In manual traverse or command feed, the actual traverse speed of the rotation axis is Fx10. In F20,
the actual traverse speed is 200 degrees/min.
5) It is suggested that G20 be added in the first line of the program in the inch system, and G21 be
added in the first line of the program in the metric system. If the program is different from the current
system state, alarm E285 occurs. To execute the program, you need to modify the relative
parameter. If there in no G20/G21 in the program, the current mode is taken as the default.
6) Alarm messageE285/E286: Inch/Metric program, please modify bit d3 of P413. This alarm
message indicates the least input increment in the program is inconsistent with that set by the
system, and thus you need to modify parameter P413_d3.
358
7) System metric/inch comparison
Metric unit and range
Inch unit and range
Coordinate position
0-9999.999
0-999.9999 inch
Traverse speed
0-99999.999 mm/min
0-9999.9999 inch /min
F in G99
0-99999.999 mm/rev
0-999.9999 inch /rev
S in G96
0-9999
0-9999
Pitch
error
mm
m/min
foot /min
1 means 0.001 mm
1 is equivalent to 0.0001 inch
mm/tooth
inch /tooth
compensation
(without decimal)
P in thread
commands such as
G92, G33
Position of rotation
Unitdegree
Unitdegree
axis
Speed of rotation axis
F1 indicates 1 degree/min
F1 indicates 10 degrees/min
Note
1) A position precision loss of 0.002mm may be generated in each metric/inch conversion. It is
suggested that the conversion is performed when the coordinate position of the machine is the
integer multiple of 2.54mm. When the system is in the inch mode, it is unavailable to switch the
system sofware version.
2) In JOG mode, the step width of the rotation axis is 10 times as large as the displayed value.
3) If the parameters, tool offset data and program files sent to the PC or USB in the inch state need
to be sent back to the system, the system should also receive them in the inch state. I.e. The
data should be sent and received in the same mode state.
4) After the data are converted to the inch system, the coordinate and speed can be input with four
decimals.
Program example
The comparative program example of metric/inch system: supposing Y axis is the rotation axis.
/Metric;
/Inch
%051
G21
N0000 G0 X100 Z100
N0010 T22 M3 S1500 M8
N0020 G0 X45 Z3
N0030 G01 Z-5 100
N0040 G1 Z1 F300
N0050 G01 Y90 F200
N0060 G1 Z-5 Y180 F100
%052
G20
N0000 G0 X3.937 Z3.937
N0010 T22 M3 S1500 M8
N0020 G0 X1.7717 Z0.1181
N0030 G01 Z-0.1969 F3.9370
N0040 G1 Z0.0394 F11.8110
N0050 G01 Y90 F20
N0060 G1 Z-0.1969 Y180 F3.9370
359

N0070 G1 Z1 F300
N0080 G0 Y0
N0090 G1 Z-5 F100
N0100 G1 Z1 F300
N0110 G0 X100 Z100
N0120 M30
User Manual
N0070 G1 Z0.0394 F11.8110

N0080 G0 Y0
N0090 G1 Z-0.1969 F3.9370
N0100 G1 Z0.0394 F11.8110
N0110 G0 X3.937 Z3.937
N0120 M30
360

GSK928TD Lathe CNC System User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GSK928TD Lathe CNC System User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GSK928TD Lathe CNC System User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety and Precautions

Safety and Precautions

Inspection and acceptance

It is not allowed to use damaged or defective products.

Transport and storage

Guard the products against moisture during transit and storage;

Protect the system from sunlight and raindrops

shell of the system is not waterproof.

Prevent dust, corrosive air, liquid, conductors and inflammable

Keep the system away from inflammable and explosive

Install the system firmly in case of vibration.

Only qualified persons can connect the system or check the

GSK928TD Turning CNC System User Manual

The voltage and the polarity of connecting plugs must

The connection must be proper and firm.

Make sure that the parameters of the system are correct

Only qualified operators can operate the system.

The operator can not leave the system to work alone.

Prevent the system from environmental interference.

Unqualified persons cannot repair the system.

After an alarm occurs, do not restart the system until the

Safety and Precautions

Safety and precautions for programming

G00 rapid traverse

Use of this manual

GSK928TD Turning CNC System User Manual

Precautions and warnings for operation

1 Before machining a part

6 Manual reference point return

Safety and Precautions

GSK928TD Turning CNC System User Manual

This user manual shall be kept by the end user.

introduces the operation methods, technical specifications and

introduces the instruction codes and program formats of the CNC

introduces the installation and connection of the CNC system.

introduces the supplementary explanations for the installation and

2.1 928TD Technical Specifications 5

GSK928TD Turning CNC System User Manual

GSK928TD Turning CNC System User Manual

RS232 AND USB SYSTEM COMMUNICATION 149

5.1 RS232 Communication 149

PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL 155

1.1 Coordinate Axis and Its Direction 155

PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 160

MSTF COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS 164

3.1 M Auxiliary Function (Command List)164

G COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS 180

4.1 G00 Rapid Positioning G00 180

GENERAL PROGRAMMING RULES AND EXAMPLES 249

5.1 General Programming Rules 249

6.1 Emergency Stop Alarm 261

GSK928TD Turning CNC System User Manual

STATEMENT PROGRAMMING (not for GSK928TD) 276

7.1 Variable 276

CUSTOMIZED COMMAND PROGRAMMING 301

8.1 Customized Command301

INTERFACE OVERVIEW 307

Rear Cover Interface Layout 307

INTERFACE TABLE 309